Home

Xerox 721P85530 Printer User Manual

1. Table 2 2 Sample PDL commands Command _ Parameter keyword followed by parameter options and Identifier keyword additional parameter keywords VFU1 VFU ASSIGN 1 1 TOF 1 BOF 55 VFU2 VFU 1 4 59 TOF 4 BOF 127 Tis ABLE CONSTANT C LIPS giz CRITERIA CONSTANT 14 5 EQ T1 LINENUM 6 3 T2 ABLE CONSTANT 1 2 CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 1 NE T2 1 INE 3 POS 59 CONSTANT FIRST QUARTER CME4 CME INE 1 60 POSITION 5 FONT 2 PDE2 PDE PMODE PORTRAIT BEGIN 1 1 37 FONTS PO8TYA P08SCA CODTAB CODE DEFAULT EBCDIC ASSIGN X 4A X B4 VOLUME ABEL NONE HOST IBMOS CODE CODTAB BLOCK ENGTH 1320 RECORD STRUCTURE FB LENGTH 132 LINE VFU VFU1 DATA 1 10 O0VERPRINT PRINT DISP ACCT USER BIN DEPT MEDCAR OUTPUT FORMS XER111 FORMAT PDE2 MODIFY CME4 ROUTE RTEXT ENGINEERING 2 56 109 RFORM XERCOV RDELETE TEST C1 AND C2 IDEN PREFIX SDJDE SKIP 10 O0FFSET 1 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 2 9 PRINT DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE PDL Job source library JSL structure Command levels To simplify JSL coding PDL commands are grouped into command levels The use and syntax of command levels along with the required END command are defined in the followin
2. Mapping files A font mapping associates one font to another font A collection of font mappings may be stored in a mapping file Font files are files having the FNT extension and are stored on disk The SEFFNT command is used to enable or disable the short edge feed feature SEFFNT creates customized mapping files of type LIB or triggers the system to invoke short edge feed processing It must be used in conjunction with a PDE The SEFFNT command format is as follows label SEFFNT SEFMAP font font font font NONE MAP file name Table 4 34 lists the parameter definitions and the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 34 SEFMAP and MAP parameters and parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s label Specifies the name of the mapping file that is to be created If the label does not exist the SEFFNT command either creates an internal table or uses an existing mapping file if MAP is specified If the label option is omitted SEFMAP puts all mapping within JDL rather than creating a file on the system disk SEFMAP Sets up the font mapping In each specified font pair the second font is the SEF mapping for the first font Multiple level mappings are not allowed font Font pair in which fonts is the SEF mapping for font fonts font Font pair in which font and font is the SEF mapping font for NONE Disables font mapping and short edge f
3. Points to note 7 27 Example 7 28 RPAGE command 7 29 SIDE 7 30 TEST 7 31 WHEN 7 31 Points to note 7 32 RSTACK command 7 35 RSTACK delimiter modes 7 35 Delimiter display 7 36 Delimiter on accounting page 7 36 Status display 7 36 Online RSTACK usage 7 36 ACCTINFO 7 37 DELIMITER 7 38 HRPTNA 7 38 PRINT 7 39 TEST 7 39 Points to note 7 40 Example 7 40 RSUSPEND and RRESUME commands 7 41 BEGIN 7 42 TEST 7 42 Points to note 7 43 Example 7 44 TABLE command 7 45 CONSTANT 7 45 MASK 7 46 Examples 7 47 Example 1 7 47 Example 2 7 47 Example 3 7 47 Example 4 7 48 8 Specifying dynamic job descriptor entries DJDEs 8 1 Benefits of using DJDEs 8 2 Page and record oriented DJDEs 8 3 Page oriented 8 3 Record oriented 8 6 IDEN command 8 7 OFFSET 8 7 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE TABLE OF CONTENTS OPRINFO 8 8 PREFIX 8 8 SKIP 8 9 Points to note 8 9 DJDE record specification 8 10 Application of DJDEs 8 12 DJDE operator information pages 8 14 Job parameter modification restrictions 8 14 Duplex DJDE page printing 8 16 Effect of multiple logical pages 8 17 COPIES processing 8 17 Online DJDE restrictions 8 18 DJDE processing optimization 8 18 DJDE parameter definitions 8 19 ALTER 8 19 ASSIGN 8 20 BSEQ 8 21 BSKIP 8 22 BSIDE 8 22 Points to
4. Criteria C1 and C2 are then specified at the job level HDRP JOB BANNER TEST C1 HCOUNT 2 TCOUNT 0 TRLP JOB BANNER TEST C2 HCOUNT 0 TCOUNT 3 BOTH JOB BANNER TEST Cl OR C2 HCOUNT 2 TCOUNT 3 Refer to Test expressions section for additional information XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 7 3 USING LOGICAL PROCESSING CHANGE Syntax Options This parameter defines test specifications for a logical processing function with change mode criteria CRITERIA CHANGE option s Table 7 3 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 3 CHANGE parameter option s and definition s Option s offset Definition s The offset in bytes relative to zero from the start of the user s portion of the record to the control field within the record or from the start of the physical tape block to the control field within the block length The length in bytes of the control field Its range is 1 to 255 NE Indicates not equal to LAST Indicates that the control field of the current record or block is being compared to the control field of the previous last encountered record or block If a control field of the current record or block is less than the specified length the comparison is not done and the test fails For online and HIP jobs where trailing blanks are truncated by th
5. Outboardside For best results when designing preprinted forms allow approximately 1 inch or 2 0 mm space on all sides of any boxes or above and below any lines onto which variable data is to be printed as illustrated in figure 3 6 Figure 3 6 Maintaining margins in preprinted boxes to allow for LPS registration and skew variations Preprinted lines Preprinted form data Variable data Maintain at least 1 or 2 mm on all sides around variable data Note Enlarged for the purpose of illustration not to scale 3 24 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL Fonts A font is a character set which has a unique type style type size and orientation Both fixed and proportionally spaced fonts are available for use on an LPS Each font character occupies an area called a character cell All character cells in a fixed font are the same width Character cells in a proportional font vary in width Refer to figure 3 7 Figure 3 7 Character spacing Character cell Fixed spacing Proportional spacing Because the length of a line printed with a proportional font is relatively unpredictable fixed fonts are used for variable data on a report to avoid overprinting of forms by variable data Proportional fonts are normally used for forms data such as titles and headings A business letter is an example of the use of proportional fonts for variable data An example of the differen
6. Sample JSL for a test run The same report name will be used each time and may be run as frequently as desired MESSAGE BTEXT RNA TestOl1 LDT 0 The 4635 Auditor features has great flexibiity and allows you much freedom of use The following guidelines offer a quick path for best results Referto the Xerox 4635 Operations Referencefor additional information regarding the use of Audit Log Maximizing with minimal effort Note the following e Maximizing with minimal effort1 Waste management and operational information can be very useful and is easy to obtain The simplest way is to modify the JSL to name the report with the BTEXT RNA Report Name parameter Nothing else needs to be specified However when these jobs are run the number of pages per report should be large This results in just one or a few reports per job which allows the audit report to highlight 6 52 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS waste management data If a job consists of many reports all those reports must be reviewed for waste management Use the Summary Waste Management and Operation Detail options in the Audit Log Display or Print window to obtain a summary report with each waste management event and all logged operations Reconciliation sequence error and duplicate error auditing must be performed with job stream BTEXT For simplest operation place all BTEXT into the job stream i
7. The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options This parameter associates stocks with the identified stockset Syntax 5 ASSIGN stock descriptor stock descriptor stock descriptor2 Function Associates stocks with the identified stockset where Options stock descriptor stock name stock name stock reference Default No default Table 6 82 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 83 ASSIGN parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s stock descriptor stock descriptor stock descriptor 6 110 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS INIFEED This parameter specifies which stock to use in the absence of any FEED parameter If not specified the INIFEED parameter defaults to the first stock name specified in the ASSIGN parameter Syntax 5 INIFEED option s Options Table 6 83 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 84 INIFEED parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s stock name stock reference The default is the first stock name SYSPAGE This parameter specifies which stock to use for system generated pages the DJDE OPRINO PLABEL exception and accounting pages Syntax ac STOCKSET SYSPAGE option s Options Table 6 84 lists the parameter option
8. The printing of the input data records in the following sample data is suspended from record JOB to EXEC by the preceding RSUSPEND command Printing resumes after the EXEC data record RRESUME command above JOB FOROO1A0 OPTION CATAL ASSIGN SYSRLB 3340 TI INCLUDE IMPCBBM EX EC FCOBOL EMP Records not to be printed Data to be printed 7 44 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE USING LOGICAL PROCESSING TABLE command CONSTANT The TABLE command is used to build a table of constants for use by the logical processing commands Each constant included in a TABLE command is examined by the system to see if it is equal in value to the input data field specified in the CONSTANT parameter of the CRITERIA command The TABLE command must precede its reference in a CRITERIA command The MASK parameter of the TABLE command permits character positions of a string to be ignored or tested for type attributes In an unmasked comparison using only the CONSTANT parameter ofthe TABLE command characters in the corresponding positions of the constant string and the input data string are tested for absolute equality one character at a time In a masked comparison using the MASK parameter before the comparison is done for each character position that position in the constant string is checked for a mask character as specified by the user If one is found the correspon
9. Syntax Options FORMS This parameter specifies an entirely new page descriptor entry PDE to be used for formatting control It takes effect on the next page boundary FORMAT option s Table 8 28 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 32 FORMAT parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s pde id Refers to a separately cataloged file in the PDE library on disk Parameters of the selected PDE such as BEGIN FONTS and PMODE may also be modified on an individual basis Further information is contained in the Page descriptors PDE command section in the chapter Print format commands Syntax Options This parameter specifies the form to be merged on the printed pages It takes effect on the next page boundary The form specified is invoked beginning with the first page of the specified starting copy number Multiple FORMS parameters may be used to associate different forms with different copy plies FORMS option s Table 8 29 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 33 FORMS parameter option s and definition s Option s form id form id initj copies Definition s This option has the following components form id Specifies a file name which exists on disk This file is created by compiling an FSL source file with the FDL system task form id may be the keyword NONE which means that no form is to be added to the
10. TYPE Syntax Options For online jobs this parameter defines the test expression for detection of a banner page for either change mode or constant mode criteria BANNER TEST option s Table 7 11 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 11 TEST parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s test exp The format and syntax of atest exp are defined in the Test expression definition section If a test exp is satisfied the page containing the record tested is considered a banner page There is no default Syntax Options This parameter specifies the use of selected data pages as banner pages when reports do not contain this information BANNER TYPE option s Table 7 12 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 12 TYPE parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s DATA For online jobs use when reports do not contain user specified banner pages This parameter allows the user to treat selected data page s as banner pages for report separation This type of banner page is printed with a form if specified In duplex mode this type of banner page is printed as a duplex page with data on the back If multiple PDE begins are specified and TYPE DATA only the first header page of the report is repositioned to the first logical page of a new physical sheet BANNER Should be coded when reports contain user specified ban
11. The CRITERIA tables may specify either change mode or constant mode functions there are no restrictions on their usage or combination There are two special cases when the record or block is too short to include the field being tested and when the line being tested contains no record that is it has been skipped If the test specifies a constant mode function the CRITERIA fails Note If the test specifies a change mode function the CRITERIA fails because no change has occurred but the value for LAST option of the CHANGE parameter is unchanged for comparison with the next record See additional information under the Criteria parameter functions section A compiler error occurs if you attempt an AND test on two different criteria which appear on two non overlapping line ranges For example a logic problem occurs with ROFFSET where line 3 contains Criteria 1 and Line 2 contains Criteria 2 that is Criteria 1 and Criteria 2 are not equal to LAST Points to note Note the following when using the CRITERIA command When change mode CRITERIA commands are evaluated a string from the current line is compared with a string saved from the corresponding part of a previous line e ifthe comparison is not equal the string from the current line becomes the saved comparison string for subsequent lines and the criteria is considered true e If two records are overprinted on the same line but with different data in the
12. XJ 15 ABLE MASK CONSTANT HE DE PAGE C1 CRITERIA CONSTANT 1 11 EQ T1 LINENUM 1 10 2 ABLE CONSTANT TRAILER PAGE C2 CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 12 EQ T2 LINENUM 1 10 3 ABLE CONSTANT EOJ C3 CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 3 EQ T3 INENUM 1 20 4 ABLE CONSTANT JOB C4 CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 6 EQ T4 INENUM 1 20 54 ABLE CONSTANT 10 C5 CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 10 EQ T5 LINENUM 50 10 AJ pe JOBS WITH NO BANNER PAGES DFLT JOB E JOBS WITH HEADER PAGES ONLY HDRP JOB BANNER TEST C1 HCOUNT 2 TCOUNT 0 JE 7 jur JOBS WITH TRAILER PAGES ONLY TRLP JOB BANNER TEST C2 HCOUNT 0 TCOUNT 3 Ve xy JOBS WITH BOTH HEADER AND TRAILER PAGES BOTH JOB BANNER EST C1 OR C2 HCOUNT 2 TCOUNT 3 px OTHER JOBS fe EOJ JOB BANNER EST C3 TCOUNT 1 JOB JOB BANNER EST C4 HCOUNT 1 POWER JOB BANNER EST C5 HCOUNT 2 X 4 56 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Report separation DJDE processing Online optimization Printing is controlled through parameters from the user defined JDE file which may be dynamically modified by dynamic job descriptor entries DJDEs are user created and are processed by the LPS as part of the print data from the host machine The chapter Specifying dynamic j
13. XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE C 5 CHARACTER CODE ASSIGNMENT Standard ASCII character set Figure C 6 presents the standard ASCII character set Figure C 6 Standard ASCII character set o j gt z 4 9 uz z o j o o gt SLI8 LNVOISINDIS 1SV31 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE C 6 CHARACTER CODE ASSIGNMENT Standard EBCDIC character set Figure C 7 presents the standard EBCDIC character set Figure C 7 Standard EBCDIC character set o m z X u z N o z S118 LNVOIAINDIS 1SV31 C 7 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE CHARACTER CODE ASSIGNMENT Xerox EBCDIC to extended ASCII hexadecimal translation values E 9 p 8 z o 5 d 9 a o a Figure C 8 presents the Xerox EBCDIC to extended ASCII hexadecimal translation values Figure C 8 Xerox EBCDIC to extended ASCII hexadecimal translation values XEROX EBCDIC TO EXTENDED ASCII HEXADECIMAL TRANSLATION VALUES VALUES ON PERIMETER ARE EBCDIC VALUES WITHIN BLOCKED RECTANGLE ARE ASCII EXAMPLE EBCDIC VALUE OF AB IS EQUIVALENT TO AN ASCII VALUE OF 7D o o o RI A 2al s 3jo o a o vI jojn S N 3 a o O eo a 9 3 m o a a o o A n o XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE D Offline specifi
14. Hierarchy of replacement For a job to be printed on an LPS it is necessary to create a file of PDL commands to define the format of the input media processing requirements and the format of the printed output The source or uncompiled file of PDL commands is referred to as a job source library JSL file All JSL files must be compiled before they can be referenced to print a job The object or compiled file of a job source library file is referred to as a job descriptor library JDL This compilation process is depicted in figure 2 1 Figure 2 1 PDL compilation PDL compiler Each command has a set of parameters that can be used to define the characteristics of a print job input special processing output PDL commands used in creating a JSL may be entered at Host using a host based editing facility to create 80 byte EBCDIC records e 1 5 system controller Refer to the Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS Operations Reference XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 2 1 PRINT DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE PDL PDL command structure Command line length The primary element of a JSL is a job A job which is one printing task is referred to as a job descriptor entry JDE In PDL the terms job and JDE are used interchangeably It usually defines one input format one set of processing instructions and one set of output instructions Each job has a user defined name that you invoke to run the job T
15. Honeywell 200 2000 BCD code set Figure C 2 presents the Honeywell 200 2000 BCD code set Figure C 2 Honeywell 200 2000 BCD code set z 9 2 Notes 0 15 is the official blank character 0 77 is the padding character tCorresponds to BCD code set used by Honeywell 200 2000 users and defined by PDL command CODE H2BCD 2 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE CHARACTER CODE ASSIGNMENT Honeywell 6000 BCD code set Figure C 3 presents the Honeywell 6000 BCD code set Figure C 3 Honeywell 6000 BCD code set Most Significant Bits 2 E PS 5 o c 2 Usual BCD Character Printer Character tCorresponds to BCD code set used by Honeywell 600 6000 series SSF tapes and defined by PDLcommand CODE BCD or CODE 6 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE CHARACTER CODE ASSIGNMENT Fieldata translation 3 uc 2 a L Figure C 4 presents the Fieldata translation Figure C 4 Honeywell 6000 BCD code set Most Significant Bits C4 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE CHARACTER CODE ASSIGNMENT UNIVAC ASCII character set Figure C 5 presents the UNIVAC ASCII character set Figure C 5 UNIVAC ASCII character set epe Te TII 040 blank 100 140 101 102 141 gt gt GS J K L M N P Q R 5 T U V w X Y 2
16. Option s Definition s type Available type parameters are BIN binary DEC decimal e packed with no sign e PKSG packed with sign The default is BIN XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 3 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS LENGTH This parameter specifies the longest physical block being processed Syntax BLOCK LENGTH option s Options Table 4 6 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 6 LENGTH parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s value Specifies the length in bytes of the longest physical block an integer in the range 12 to 24 576 The default is 1330 The maximum block size that may be processed up to 24 576 bytes is dependent upon the available task memory and the processing features being invoked Refer to Points to note BLOCK command later in this chapter for further details For offline processing the tape label contents may override a coded LENGTH parameter but this length is still limited by the above maximum value The default is 1330 LMULT This parameter specifies a multiplication factor being applied to the contents of the block length field to determine the true block length Syntax BLOCK LMULT option s Options Table 4 7 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 7 LMULT parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s value Multiplied by the value in th
17. SKIP option s Table 8 7 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 7 SKIP parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s value Specifies the number of bytes beginning at 0 from the beginning of the user portion of the record to the beginning of the DJDE parameters It may be a negative number The default is 1 Note the following when using the IDEN command When OPRINFO YES is selected the length of the DJDE record that prints on the sheet is whatever amount will fit on the width of the paper With portrait orientation using OPRINFO YES may cause data or page exceeds page size errors if the DJDE record is too long XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 9 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES DJDE record specification DJDE records are created by the user as part of the data stream The system looks for them only if a DJDE prefix has been specified by an IDEN command within the JDL used to process the job DJDE information is contained in one or more records each of which may be up to the maximum record length specified for the job input data For each DJDE record the prefix the identification field must begin in the same location in the record DJDEs are terminated by an END parameter in the last DJDE record All specified DJDE information is applied at the next record or page boundary after the END parameter is encountered There may be mu
18. This parameter specifies whether collated or uncollated mode is to be used It takes effect at the next page boundary but must occur prior to the first data record of the report In duplex processing COLLATE NO is ignored Syntax COLLATE option s Options Table 8 19 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 23 COLLATE parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s YES Specifies that report copies are to be printed in collated mode NO Specifies that report copies are to be printed in uncollated mode 8 34 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES COPIES Syntax Options This parameter specifies the number of copies of a report to produce at the next page boundary In duplex processing if COPIES appears before the back side of a duplex page a blank back sheet is output and the print data continues on the next front page If number is set to zero this copy count remains in effect until a new copy count or end of report is encountered DJDEs encountered while number is zero is in effect are processed normally The number of copies specified in the DJDE overrides the number of copies in the OUTPUT command You may encounter problems when the copy count at the start of the report is 1 either by virtue of the JDE or the last DJDE encountered at the start of report and the copy count is later increased There is no
19. Use BSEQ to either reset the sequence number at the start of a report RESET not reset the sequence number NORESET or recognize the presence of bar codes without specifying sequence numbers NOSEQ The DocuPrint 180 LPS makes the determination to perform RESET NORESET NOSEQ processing at the start of every report The start of report for BSEQ processing includes any DJDE packets specified prior to any data in the report Any BSEQ DJDEs specified thereafter are ignored including any JDE JDL DJDEs XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 23 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES BATCH BEGIN Syntax Options This parameter is supported for online batch mode jobs only It permits normal processing of online banner pages for batch mode jobs by delimiting the batch mode graphic data It must be used precisely to mark the beginning and ending of online batch mode data The first graphic or IMAGE DJDE must be preceded immediately by a BATCH START DJDE and the last graphic must be followed immediately by a BATCH END DUDE This parameter when specified must be the only parameter in the DJDE packet BATCH option s Table 8 12 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 15 BATCH parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s START Marks the beginning of online batch mode data END Marks the end of online batch mode data Syntax Options
20. font font means that the fact that font is mapped font and fonts is mapped to fonts does not imply that font is mapped to fonts fontm fontn means that the fact that font is mapped font and font is mapped to font does not imply that font is mapped to font 4 30 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Examples Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Example 4 Example 5 Example 6 Following are a few examples of how to use the command FNTMAP SEFFNT SEFMAP L0112B P0612A SYS1 SYSTEM VOLUME CODE ASCII FNTMAP LIB is created on system disk wn EFFNT SEFMAP L0114B P0614A PDE1 PDE FONT L0114B PMODE LANDSCAP BEGIN 50 50 Gl JOB1 JOB OUTPUT FORMAT PDE1 Job 1 uses the SEFFNT command in example 2 because there is no override specified JOB2 JOB OUTPUT FORMAT FMT1 SEFFNT MAP FNTMAP Job 2 uses the FNTMAP LIB file created in example 1 JOB3 JOB OUTPUT FORMAT FMT6 SEFFNT SEFMAP NONE There is no font mapping because SEF is disabled by the SEFMAP NONE parameter JOB4 JOB SEFFNT 101 812 Job 4 overrides the system level SEFFNT mapping with a job level definition XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 31 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS TCODE command The TCODE command defines a se
21. INDEX 4 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE INDEX JSL columns 3 9 creating 3 10 to 3 16 editor 3 10 identifier naming 3 10 requirements 3 9 specifying 3 9 structure 2 10 to 2 15 VFU 3 10 K keyword constant 2 6 L Laser Printing System see LPS LENGTH parameters 4 4 levels Command 2 10 to 2 11 ID catalog 2 12 END 2 13 to 2 15 JDE 2 13 JDL 2 12 JOB 2 13 system 2 12 LINE command ac CME 6 20 parameters 6 31 to 6 41 references 3 11 LINENUM parameters 7 5 list parameter options 2 5 LMULT parameters 4 4 log page 1 6 logical pages multiple 6 87 processing commands 7 1 to 7 2 formatting 7 2 TEST parameters 7 2 LPS components channel attached 4 56 hardware 1 2 operating system software OSS 1 3 to 1 4 processing 3 2 software 1 2 to 1 4 types 1 2 to 1 4 LTHFLD parameter 4 5 magnetic tapes formatting D 5 to D 6 Interpress data D 4 to D 12 usage requirements D 7 to D 8 MAP parameter 8 41 MARGIN parameter DJDE command 8 42 LINE command 6 34 marker pages 6 8 to 6 9 masked comparisons using default type 7 11 non default type 7 12 memory font 3 26 graphic 3 26 MESSAGE command 6 42 to 6 44 mixing applications 5 4 modes combining 7 8 delimiter 7 35 non delimiter 7 35 non stop 6 3 MODIFY parameter DJDE command 8 43 OUTPUT command 6 59 text files E 3 multiple logical pages DJDE command 8 17 PDE command 6 87 multivolume proces
22. Page reconciliation amount This is the total value of the page up to 11 digits plus a decimal point may be specified Commas are not allowed This option is required in order to print an audit report reconciliation on amount Note This parameter is dependent upon the SEQ parameter TXTzxx x Identifying text It may be up to 64 characters If present prints as detail information for each page expected or delivered as reported on the audit report Note This parameter is dependent upon the SEQ parameter NONE Specifies no BTEXT The default is NONE Considerations Page detail parameters SEQ PRA TXT are used in a BTEXT command for every page for which detailed auditing is desired These parameters are meaningless without bar code text printed on the page or bar code reader 6 48 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS BTEXT parameter rules Note the following rules when using the BTEXT parameter All parameters have the form Keyword value Each value must be specified as shown in the BTEXT command syntax A value may be a keyword as shown in the BTEXT command syntax or text described as follows Alphanumeric text including spaces Case sensitivity is retained nnn Numeric text including one optional decimal point sss Numeric text no decimal points yy mm dd Numeric text describing year month and day Each pair of ch
23. SEGMENT Specifies the reprinting of the entire segment that was being printed at the time of the jam ASK Specifies that the operator be requested through the user interface to select PAGE or SEGMENT recovery DEVICE DEVICE Places recovery mode selection responsibility with a support third party finishing device through connection with the DocuPrint 180 LPS bypass transport option XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 65 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES STIMING This parameter is provided for possible compatibility with other Xerox software supporting third party finishing devices and is ignored by the Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS The STIMING DJDE although ignored by the DocuPrint 180 LPS specifies that the printer accommodate timing constraints needed by finishing equipment interfaced with the Programmable Bypass Transport Syntax STIMING option s Options Table 8 55 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 59 STIMING parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s INTERVAL sec INTERNAL specifies the minimum allowable time between end of segment signals by way of the hardware interface at the bypass transport for consecutive segments If additional time is required it is inserted after the last sheet is delivered and before the end of segment signal is emitted DELAY sec DELAY specifies the minimum allowable time between end of s
24. To adjust font or image size according to given proportions Manipulation of a display to bring upper or lower portions of a document page into view when no space is available for the entire document at once GLOSSARY 18 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY scroll bar SCSI secondary storage security SEF sequential set simplex printing software sort source source file source language source program space Part of a window that allows you to view information extending beyond the window display small computer system interface Accepted standard for connecting peripheral devices to computers Form of storage external to a system such as magnetic tapes or floppy disks 1 Procedure for limiting access to the system resources programs or files to authorized personnel 2 Protecting programs and files from unintentional or undesired modification short edge feed The movement of paper through the printer in the direction of the paper width the shorter side of a sheet of paper For the DocuPrint 180 LPS short edge feed allows larger sizes of paper up to 11 by 17 inches 279 by 432 mm to be printed In numeric sequence usually in ascending order As applied to a file organization describes files in which records are written one after another and cannot be randomly accessed For example the first 99 records in a sequential file access file have to be read before the 1
25. VFUL VEU ASSIGN 1 1 TOF 1 BOF 66 VFU9 VFU ASSIGN 1 9 TOF 9 BOF 66 SYSTEM LEVEL COMMANDS CODED HERE VOLUME HOST IBMOS BLOCK ENGTH 1330 RECORD ENGTH 133 LINE VFU VFU9 DATA 1 132 OUTPU FORMS CPPR1 DUPLEX NO COPIES 2 CATALOG LEVEL COMMANDS CODED HERE IF NEEDED CAT1 CATALOG LINE VEU VFU1 OUTPU FORMS FORM2 JOB LEVEL COMMANDS CODED HERE JOBCPP JOB JOB2 JOB INCLUDE CAT1 JOB3 JOB INCLUDE CAT OUTPUT DUPLEX YES END XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 2 11 PRINT DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE PDL ID level System or JDL level The ID level has commands that require identifiers so that they can be referenced by other commands in lower command levels For example the ID level contains one or more VFU commands as shown in table 2 2 As with the other command levels any PDL command can be specified at the ID level The ID level must be preceded by JDL coding which names the JSL For example XSML JDL VFU1 VFU ASSIGN 1 1 TOF 1 BOF 66 In this example XSML JDL is the name of the complete JDL and the VFU command is in the ID level Catalog level A system or JDL command set establishes installation dependent requirements and default values for job descriptor entries At the system level JDL may be used interchangeably with SYSTEM At the system level commands are specified which apply to all job descriptor entries JDEs
26. XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 59 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES SF1FUNCTION This parameter specifies to the finisher whether YES or not NO to begin a particular operation on the current sheet SF1FUNCTION invokes the C6 signal of the electronic interface between the LPS and a third party finishing device Refer to your vendor s third party device documentation for detailed information Syntax SF1FUNCTION option s Options Table 8 48 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 52 SF1FUNCTION parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s YES Specifies to the finisher to begin a particular operation on the current sheet NO Specifies to the finisher not to begin a particular operation on the current sheet SF2FUNCTION This parameter specifies to the finisher whether YES or not NO to begin a particular operation on the current sheet SF1FUNCTION invokes the C7 signal of the electronic interface between the LPS and a third party finishing device Refer to your vendor s third party device documentation for detailed information Syntax SF2FUNCTION option s Options Table 8 49 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 53 SF2FUNCTION parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s YES Specifies to the finisher to begin a particular operation on the current sheet NO Specifies to the fi
27. ee T Specifies that the referenced graphic is page interleaved and follows the current page data in the input stream Specifies that the same graphic is to be held and imaged without further callouts at the same position and with the same scale factor on all subsequent pages until changed by a DJDE CANCEL or ALTER e nid Specifies the reference scale factor Refer to the Scaling section in your DocuPrint 180 LPS Operations Reference for more information 8 46 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES The parameters T H and n d are not order dependent They may be coded as needed without extra position holding commas If the UN parameter is used to define position the UNITS parameter must precede this command in the OUTPUT command Example IMAGE IMG1 3 2 END INVERT This parameter specifies that the following pages are to be inverted When specified in a DJDE data stream page oriented this feature allows the DocuPrint 180 to invert the image on a physical page by 180 degrees Syntax INVERT option s Options 8 32 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 36 INVERT parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s FRONT Specifies page inversion on front sides BACK Specifies page inversion on back sides BOTH Specifies page inversion on both front and back sides NONE Specifi
28. Figure 4 2 shows sample values for RECORD command parameters Figure 4 2 Sample RECORD command RECORD PCC LENGTH x 00qx 81 1 PRINT DATA l l l 1 LTHFLD i nee 22 I rcc OFFSET RECORD _ PREAMBLE DATA leran Figure 4 3 shows record format types XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 25 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Figure 4 3 Record format types Fixed Length Record Format One yte optional vertical format control character Block Block Block eo e _ Fixed Unblocked Length Records np We Records Block Block Blocked Record Record 2 Record 3 Gop Record Record 2 Record 3 Records All records within a file are of the same length Fixed length blocks may be truncated but only at the end of a record Truncated blocks must be an even multiple of the record length plus the block preamble and postamble if any Record Length includes all bytes M Length One byte optional vertical format control character FORMAT BIN Sa ee 2 bytes length in binary a Lis bytes zeros Options for record length field format Variable Length DEC re 4 bytes length in decimal characters Block Block Block Unblocked nmm Block Block p Blocked a ee The block preamble may c
29. LTHFLD 4 5 OFFSET 4 5 POSTAMBLE 4 6 PREAMBLE 4 6 ZERO 4 7 Points to note 4 7 Online versus offline JDLs 4 8 Example 4 8 CODE command 4 9 ASSIGN 4 9 DEFAULT 4 10 Point to note 4 10 Examples 4 11 PCC command 4 12 ADVTAPE 4 12 ASSIGN 4 13 DEFAULT 4 16 INITIAL 4 17 MASK 4 17 Points to note 4 18 Example 4 18 viii XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE TABLE OF CONTENTS RECORD command 4 19 ADJUST 4 19 CONSTANT 4 20 FORMAT 4 20 LENGTH 4 21 LMULT 4 21 LTHFLD 4 22 OFFSET 4 22 POSTAMBLE 4 23 PREAMBLE 4 23 STRUCTURE 4 24 Points to note 4 24 Example 4 25 SEFFNT command 4 27 Mapping files 4 28 label SEFFNT SEFMAP 4 29 MAP 4 29 Points to note 4 30 Examples 4 31 TCODE command 4 32 DEFAULT 4 33 TASSIGN 4 34 TRESET 4 35 Points to note 4 36 Examples 4 37 VOLUME command 4 38 BMULT 4 39 CODE 4 39 EOV 4 41 HOST 4 41 LCODE 4 44 LPACK 4 45 MAXLAB 4 45 MINLAB 4 46 OPTIMIZE 4 47 OSCHN 4 48 OSHDP 4 48 OSTLP 4 49 PLABEL 4 49 RMULT 4 50 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE TABLE OF CONTENTS RSAT 4 50 TCODE 4 51 UNPACK 4 52 Points to note 4 52 Examples 4 53 Input sources 4 54 Online printing systems 4 54 Channel attached LPS 4 54 Online 3211
30. ORIGINAL PHYSICAL SIDE ORIGINAL PHYSICAL SIDE NEW PHYSICAL S nz First BEGIN Position Logical page A Logical page A Logical page R RPAGE RECORD Second BEGIN Position Logical page 8 Logica page C RPAGE RECORD Third BEGIN Position Logical page C WHEN BOTTOM WHEN NOW ORIGINAL PHYSICAL SIDE NEW PHYSICAL SIDE ORIGINAL PHYSICAL SIDE NEW PHYSICAL SIDE RPAGE RECORD Logica page A Logical page C Logical page A second part Logical page B p Logical Logical page B first part ogical page C RPAGE RECORD 7 34 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE USING LOGICAL PROCESSING RSTACK command RSTACK delimiter modes The stacked reports feature enables the online and offline user to define a series of reports in a single file This is accomplished by specifying an end of report condition in the coded logical processing commands RSTACK online and offline and BANNER online use only End of report is that point in processing a report when all of the pages of a copy of a report have been formatted to disk and processing has begun on the next report Reports are stacked in a file if more than one report is included in a single file and separated from each other logically but not physically with tapemarks operating system labels and so forth In processing stacked reports the system checks each record for the logical end of report specif
31. Options This parameter specifies that for each report a subfield of the first record satisfying the banner selection criteria is to be displayed as the REPORT NAME on the LPS system controller in response to the JOBS command or STATUS function key For jobs with HCOUNT 0 that is trailers only the report name is associated with the report that precedes the trailer banner page BANNER HRPTNA option s Table 7 9 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 9 HRPTNA parameter option s and definition s offset length This option has the following components e offset Specified in bytes relative to zero from the start of the user s portion of the record to the subfield within the record length The number of bytes in the subfield 1 to 16 NONE Specifies that no report name is to be selected The default is NONE Syntax Options This parameter specifies the total number of consecutive trailer banner pages which must be detected to satisfy the test expression BANNER TCOUNT option s Table 7 10 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 10 TCOUNT parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s value Specifies the total number of consecutive trailer banner pages which must be detected to satisfy the test expression The default is O XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 7 15 USING LOGICAL PROCESSING TEST
32. XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE EDITOR QUICK REFERENCE Modifying entire lines Insert a set of characters following other characters by entering F x y x is the word preceding the text to be added y is the text to be added or F k x y kis the occurrence of string x in each line specified in the MODIFY command that is affected by the F command k defaults to 1 when not specified while 0 indicates that all occurrences of the first set of characters or string x in the specified lines are affected Add a space between F and k in the command To change entire lines or records or your JSL coding you may perform any of the following activities Move lines in a file by entering MOVE n m p i nis the starting line number mis the ending line number pis the new starting line number iis the increment of line numbering you want For example MOVE 80 11 51 1 results in the following Old New 00080 00051 00090 00052 00100 00053 00110 00054 Remove lines from a file by entering REMOVE n or just enter the line number nis the line to be removed Duplicate lines in a file by entering DUPLICATE n m p i nis the starting line number mis the ending line number pis the new starting line number iis the increment of line numbering you want Replace lines with new lines by entering REPLACE n m i XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE E 5 EDITOR QUICK REFERENCE Saving your sourc
33. light amplification by stimulated emission of radiation light emitting diode long edge feed long edge feed lines per inch Laser Printing System magnetic tape unit refers to the 9 track magnetic tape drive also referred to as magnetic tape drive optical character recognition operator communications subsystem online interface operating system XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY 27 GLOSSARY OSDS OSEXEC OSS PC PCC PC UI PDL PE ppm PQA PROM PSC pt PWBA GIC RAM ROS SAFES SAN sci SCSI SDLC SEF operating system diagnostic software operating system executive operating system software personal computer printer carriage control personal computer user interface print description language phase encoded pages per minute print quality adjustment programmable read only memory printer subsystem controller point printed wiring board assembly 1 4 inch cartridge random access memory raster output scanner stand alone field engineering software software analysis number START command index small computer system interface synchronous data link control short edge feed GLOSSARY 28 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY SFS SIF SNA spi SST sysgen TL DL TOF tpi TPJ TXC UCS UCSB Ul VM vpos VS WAN XCSC XDGI XDSS XICS
34. 58 P0612A FMT7 60 90 6 12 12 8 5 by 11 50 50 PO7TYA FMT8 60 75 6 10 12 8 5 by 11 50 50 P0812A FMT9 80 200 10 0 20 0 7 11 by 8 5 25 25 L0912A FMT10 132 132 12 5 17 6 6 8 5 by 11 22 51 P1012A FMT 11 132 150 12 5 20 0 6 8 5 by 11 22 50 P1112A FMT12 66 172 8 1 13 6 9 14 by 8 5 18 66 L0112B FMT13 104 100 8 1 13 6 9 8 5 by 14 57 58 P0612A FMT1A 66 132 8 3 12 5 9 11 69 by 8 27 18 57 R112BL FMT2A 66 150 8 3 14 3 9 11 69 by 8 27 18 60 R212BL FMT3A 88 132 11 1 12 5 7 11 69 by 8 27 18 57 R312BL FMT4A 88 150 11 1 114 3 7 11 69 by 8 27 18 60 R412BL FMT5A 48 100 6 10 12 11 69 by 8 27 22 85 R512BL FMT6A 80 100 8 1 13 6 9 8 27 by 11 69 91 46 R612BP FMT7A 60 90 6 12 12 8 27 by 11 69 85 39 R7TIBP FMT8A 60 75 6 10 12 8 27 by 11 69 85 39 R812BP FMT9A 80 200 10 0 20 0 7 11 69 by 8 27 14 85 R912BL FMT10A 132 132 12 5 17 6 6 8 27 by 11 69 57 39 RA12BP FMT11A 132 150 12 5 20 0 6 8 27 by 11 69 57 39 RB12BP First dimension given is the horizontal dimension Thus 11 by 8 5 is landscape orientation while 8 5 by 11 is portrait orientation Dimensions are given in inches A4 European international formats XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 99 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Multiple logical pages on a physical page Multiple BEGINs define multiple logical pages a user defined page image bordered by top of form and bottom of form left and ri
35. ASSIGN Syntax Options This parameter specifies an assignment of a VFU channel number to a page line number or set of line numbers It is possible to have multiple ASSIGN parameters within a DJDE They take effect at the next record following a DJDE END parameter DJDE assignments affect only those channel assignments specified Other assignments remain the same The ASSIGN parameters are the same as for the VFU command ASSIGN parameter described in the chapter Print format commands ASSIGN option s Table 8 11 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 11 ASSIGN parameter option s and definition s Option s channo lineno lineno Definition s This option has the following components channo The number of the channel being assigned It is an integer in the range 0 to 15 The user may end the VFU command with a semicolon and start another VFU command without an id field to continue specification for the same channel or a different channel e lineno The number of the output print line being assigned to a particular channel It is an integer in the range TOF to BOF There are no default assignments for any channel including channels 1 9 and 12 8 20 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES BSEQ Syntax Options Note DocuPrint 180 LPS does not support the barcode option This syntax wil
36. BMULT 4 39 CODE 4 40 to 4 41 EOV 4 41 HOST 4 41 to 4 43 INTERPRESS 4 44 LABEL 4 45 LCODE 4 46 LPACK 4 47 MAXLAB 4 47 MINLAB 4 48 OPTIMIZE 4 49 OSCHN 4 50 OSHDP 4 50 OSTLP 4 51 PLABEL 4 51 RMULT 4 52 RSAT 4 52 TCODE 4 53 UNPACK 4 54 WAIT messages 6 6 work file modifying E 4 to E 5 X Xerographic Mode Persistence XMP 6 74 Xerographic Mode Switching XMS 6 74 XMP parameter 6 74 XMS parameter 6 74 XSHIFT parameter DJDE command 8 60 OUTPUT command 6 73 2 ZERO parameter 4 7 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE INDEX 9 INDEX INDEX 10 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE
37. DAR SUM WMGT SUM OPLOG SUM BOTH DET WMGT DET OPLOG DET BOTH The normal audit report option DAR parameters are a combination of a summary detail option and an exception data reporting option For example SUM WMGT specifies a summary report with waste management data shown chronologically This summary detail option cosists of SUMmary displays the audit report headings the total of sheets delivered to each destination including scrap expected sheets if specified and reconciles reports amount if specified e DETail displays the audit report headings detail information about each sheet expected and delivered the total of sheets delivered to each destination including scrap expected sheets if specified and reconciles reports amount if specified The exception data reporting options consist of e WMGT Specifies waste management data shown chronologically e OPLOG Specifies system events operator commands and responses that may relate to the production of the report shown chronologically Examples would be a job abort ESS boot etc BOTH Specifies both WMGT and OPLOG Note These options are specified as compound keywords for example SUM WMGT They are never specified alone SUM is illegal RRA nnn Report reconciliation amount the total monetary value of the report expected Maximum of 11 digits plus a decimal point may be specified Commas are not allowed This option is required in ord
38. Dry ink can accept an electrical charge Printing on both sides front and back of a page See also simplex printing Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code Coded character set consisting of 8 bit coded characters It can accommodate 256 characters Use of graphic objects usually lines or boxes that bleed off the edge of the physical page See also physical page Integrated production of documents on demand using digitally stored documents computerized composition and electronic printing systems XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY 7 GLOSSARY elite embedded blanks Ethernet extended metrics FCB FDL field file file protection firmware FIS fixed font fixed pitch fixed spacing floating accent Smallest size standard typewriter type 12 characters per horizontal inch See also pica Blank spaces within a command line Xerox local area network LAN that allows data to be transmitted by cable from one device to another enabling it to share the network Measurements used in Interpress to alter the size of fonts allowing more precision with character escapement Used for rendered characters forms control buffer Buffer for controlling the vertical format of printed output forms description language LPS resident source language used for designing electronic forms See also FSL form 1 Part of a record that serves a similar function in all records o
39. Option s NONE Definition s Specifies that no text message is output to the operator during job printing The default is NONE SC Specifies a text message of up to 80 characters maximum of 400 characters per report passnum Specifies the pass copy ply to which the text applies Multiple sc messages one per passnum may be specified in a JSL The message is output to the operator prior to the beginning of printing the specified report ply If no pass number is specified the text is output once at the beginning of printing the entire report WAIT Specifies that after the text is displayed printing is suspended until the operator has responded with a CONTINUE parameter END Specifies that the text is displayed after the last copy of the report is printed 6 44 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS BTEXT i Syntax Options This parameter supports the PC UI report audit logging feature which creates an audit log on the UI hard disk The audit log is initiated and terminated by including enabling data in the job stream The PDL DJDE command BTEXT is implemented primarily to support barcode audit logging which is not implemented in the DocuPrint 180 LPS BTEXT report definition parameters are however useful without the installation of a barcode reader Page definition parameters on the other hand are meaningless without barcode text or a
40. PREAMBLE Syntax Options This parameter specifies the length in bytes of the extraneous data at the end of each tape block that is it is an offset from the end of a block backwards to the end of the last logical record BLOCK POSTAMBLE option s Table 4 10 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 10 POSTAMBLE parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s value An integer in the range of 0 the default to block length The default is 0 Syntax Options This parameter specifies the length of the operating system portion of the block that is the byte offset from the first byte of a tape block to the first byte of the first logical record BLOCK PREAMBLE option s Table 4 11 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 11 PREAMBLE parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s value An integer in the range of 0 the default to block length The default is O 4 6 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS ZERO Syntax Options Points to note This parameter specifies the end of block indicator BLOCK ZERO option s Table 4 12 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 12 ZERO parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s YES Specifies that the end of a tape block is indicated by a value of 0 in the record length fiel
41. Random mode A graphic is handled by the software in one of the following four modes Batch e Block e Move e Random The user selects the mode depending upon how the graphic is made available for report processing as well as user performance requirements and disk resources Move mode In random mode a graphic is obtained from a named disk file This occurs if the file already exists at the start of report processing or is read from the report s input data stream before the first record of the report text is processed In the latter case each graphic is written to the disk as a permanent IMG file In random mode the output software reads the various graphics for a page from their individual files into graphics memory In move mode a graphic is obtained from a named disk file just as in random mode but the graphic is copied into the print file and used as in block mode This feature may be invoked by the GRAPHICS command of the OUTPUT command Refer to the chapter Print format commands section Specifying output parameters Note Under some circumstances move mode graphics are overridden and treated as random mode In particular if for any page there is exactly one graphic and that graphic is on a disk drive other than the print file s disk drive random mode is invoked 9 2 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE USING GRAPHICS Block mode Batch mode In block mode a graphic is obtained from
42. SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES Table 8 19 BTEXT parameter option s and definition s Option s RNA xxx Definition s Report name maximum of 16 characters This keyword is required in the first BTEXT of each report to be audited It may only occur once per report For clarity in relating the audit reports to SFS reports this should be the same value used for job accounting This parameter must be present to audit a job or report CJN sss Customer job number maximum of 6 digits For clarity in relating the audit report to SFS reports this should be the same value used for job accounting DPT xxx Department name maximum of 31 characters For clarity in relating the audit reports to SFS reports this should be the same value used for job accounting LDT W BW SM M Q 0 365 yy mm da Log stale date indicator Once this date has passed the audit log may be deleted or overwritten without warning to the operator This option has the followihg components Asterisk Operator is not notified of re runs but the report is renamed with a unique version as if the operator had been notified and accepted the re run Reports re run with this indicator stay in the Audit Log directory until deleted by the operator using a PC UI window provided e U Unique Specifies that report is to be run only once ever Operator intervention at PC Ul is required to re run the report or delet
43. System to recognize and process your JSLs These rules are described later in this section Figure 2 2 Example of PDL command components COMMAND STATEMENT VFU005 VFU ASSIGN 1 5 TOF 5 BOF 66 Identifier Parameter Parameter Additional parameter keyword option keywords and their options Command keyword required In this example the identifier parameter keyword and parameter options are all part of the VFU command which is represented by VFU the required command keyword All of these components may be collectively referred to as a command statement Identifier If the command is to be referenced by another command an identifier must precede the command keyword The PDL command below has a command identifier VFU1 a command keyword VFU and three command parameters ASSIGN TOF BOF VFU1 VFU ASSIGN 1 1 TOF 1 BOF 55 END A command identifier is a label that may consist of one to six alphanumeric characters A Z and 0 9 It must be followed by a colon The identifier VFU1 in the command above could be coded with any number of blanks following the VFU1 characters but can have no blanks within the identifier name LINE VFU VFU1 of tables 2 1 and 2 2 A command that requires an identifier must always be defined prior to any reference to it LJ Note The VFU1 identifier is referenced in the LINE command Command keyword A command keyword is required For example CME is the comman
44. There are relatively few absolute rules and virtually infinite combinations you can use to create applications through the use of Print Description Language PDL This chapter presents the following topics to use as a tool in guiding you through JSL creation e What your JSL specifies for LPS processing e Decisions to make before creating your JSL Review of PDL components and syntax Helpful hints e Steps in creating a JSL e Compiling your JSL Printing the job e Short explanations of some application related issues Paper types Page orientations Registration shift and skew Fonts Compatibility with the 4050 4090 4650 4850 4890 9700F 4135 4635 and DocuPrint 96 laser printing systems Keep in mind that many of the contents of this chapter are samples and suggestions of what can be done with PDL to create your desired applications that there is a multitude of other possibilities and options available and that detailed information on each topic is provided in the other chapters of this manual and in the Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS Forms Creation Guide XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 3 1 CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL What your JSL specified for LPS processing If your document requires forms you code programs in form source language FSL You then code jobs in job source language JSL Your JSL files may call FRM files If your document uses color the PDL applications y
45. This parameter specifies whether transparencies are used for the print job Transparencies cannot be handled by the high capacity feeder stacker Due to this restriction transparency jobs must feed from the processor feed trays trays 1 or 2 also known as MAIN and AUX feed and stack to the sample tray OUTPUT TRANS option s Table 6 67 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 68 TRANS parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s YES Indicates that transparencies will be used in the job NO Indicates that transparencies will not be used in the job The default is NO Syntax Options This parameter specifies the position of a graphic when referenced by the IMAGE parameter of the OUTPUT command or an IMAGE ALTER or GRAPHIC DJDE parameter OUTPUT UNITS option s Table 6 68 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 69 UNITS parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s size in dots Defines the dot size of a unit The size defines the number of dots in one unit and is specified as a decimal number with up to two digits to the right of the decimal point When used to compute the position of a graphic the result is rounded to the nearest dot There is no default XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 83 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS XSHIFT Syntax Options Example This parameter speci
46. XJCF status file services sequence insert file system network architecture spots per inch system software tape System generation text line display list top of form tracks per inch test pattern job total xerographic convergence Universal Character Set Universal Character Set Buffer user interface virtual memory vertical positioning virtual storage wide area network Xerox Customer Support Center Xerox DCF and GDDM Interface Xerox Documentation and Software Services Xerox Integrated Composition System Xerox Job Control Facility XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY 29 GLOSSARY XMP xerographic mode persistence XMS xerographic mode switching XPAF XPF Xerox Printer Access Facility XPMF VMS Xerox Print Management Facility VMS Version XPPI Xerox Pen Plotter Interface XPS Xerox Publishing System GLOSSARY 30 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE Index Numerals BEGIN parameter DJDE 8 21 3211 4245 mode 4 56 PDE 6 88 4850 4890 HighLight Color LPS RRESUME 7 43 applications 3 28 to 3 30 RSUSPEND 7 43 forms 3 29 to 3 30 BFORM parameter 4050 4090 4650 9700F LPS DJDE 8 22 creating applications 3 30 OUTPUT 6 47 running jobs 3 30 BLOCK command examples 4 8 A parameters ADJUST 4 2 ABNORMAL command 6 2 to 6 9 CONSTANT 4 3 ABORT parameters 6 3 FORMAT 4 3 ac CME command 6 17 to 6 23 LENGTH 4 4 accounting LMULT 4 4 data 6 10
47. define job tape characteristics such as host format block record structure tape translation code packed data formats and several other parameters Tape codes The printing system processes input tapes produced by those standard hosts listed in the Host system JDLs on the system software tape section in appendix D Offline specifications of this manual A specific input tape is selected by the HOST parameter of the VOLUME command The format of each tape is described in the Xerox LPS Tape Formats Manual Tape codes recognized by the printing system are EBCDIC ASCII and several versions of BCD If these codes are not sufficient for a particular tape the user may create a new code translation table or modify customize an existing code translation table Tables showing the correspondence between standard recording codes and printed characters are contained in appendix C Character code assignment tables Within a JDL tape codes are selected by the CODE parameter of the VOLUME command XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 65 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Packed data formats Record formats Six bit characters may be written onto a 9 track tape in a 4 by 3 packed or compressed format That is four 6 bit data bytes are compressed into three 8 bit data bytes Two methods of packing these bits together exist One method is used by Honeywell 6000 users T4X3 while Honeywell 2000 users employ a slightly di
48. e BTEXT commands are treated as text strings by the PDL DJDE compiler and forwarded to the PC UI to process Therefore itis possible that JSLs containing BTEXT will compile successfully even though errors exist in the BTEXT command string It is up to the PC UI to process the BTEXT commands and flag any errors found The same goes for BTEXT DJDEs Printing does not stop and Auditing will not take place if any BTEXT errors are found e If BTEXT is specified and you are not running in PC UI mode INPUT issues a warning message and allow the operator to continue or abort If the operator chooses to continue the BTEXT commands are ignored Otherwise the job will be aborted e Although the BTEXT parameters can all be specified under one command it is recommended that you group the report parameters and the page detail parameters into separate BTEXT commands Example 1 Sample minimal data to audit a report with monetary and sheet reconciliation SDJDEBTEXT RNA CK0409 RRA 74698 32 NSE 4985 SDJDE BTEXT SEQ 1 PRA 153 65 TXT 901 R Adams END 8 32 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES Example 2 Example 3 Example 4 DJDE to print a report with sheet reconciliation only SDJDE BTEXT RNA Personnel Reviews CJN HR052 NSE 7249 SDJDE BTEXT SEQ 1 TXT 326769 Harold R Adams END Sample DJDE to au
49. exists on disk This file is created by compiling a forms description language source file which is called an FSL file with the FDL system task refer to the Xerox LPS Forms Creation Guide A form id may be the keyword NONE init If the copies parameter is not defined the last or only form specified will apply to all copies beginning with copy number init If the form is not the last one specified copies defaults to 1 If neither init nor copies are specified the form applies to all copies of the report Note that init copies is only valid offline copies Specifies the number of plies passes to which a specified form applies NONE Specifies that no form is to be added to the associated report page of variable data init parameter specifies the beginning ply pass number to which a specified form applies This defaults to the first or next copy The default is NONE 6 58 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS COLLATE This parameter specifies whether pages are to be collated or uncollated Syntax OUTPUT COLLATE option s Options Table 6 38 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 39 COLLATE parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s YES Specifies that the output pages are collated The default is YES NO Specifies that the output is not collated If DUPLEX YES then COLLATE NO is ignored Note that if NTO1 YES P
50. if you define a record length larger than the default block length 1330 bytes you must also define a block length that is big enough to hold the record If a larger block length is not specified the default length value is used and the System produces a warning message on the system controller display The default is 133 offline and 150 online LMULT This parameter specifies a multiplication factor applied to the contents of the record length field to determine the true record length Syntax RECORD LMULT option s Options Table 4 27 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 27 LMULT parameter option s and definition s Option s value Definition s Specifies the multiplication factor The value specified is multiplied by the value in the length field to compute the number of bytes in the record A value is an integer in the range 1 the default to 15 The default is 1 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 21 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS LTHFLD This parameter specifies the length of the field containing the record length Syntax RECORD LTHFLD option s Options Table 4 28 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 28 LTHFLD parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s size Specifies in bytes the record length field length It must be an integer in the range 0 to 5 If the size is set equal to zero recor
51. operator of special conditions The MESSAGE command displays user defined text to the operator The following MESSAGE command informs the operator that blue paper is required for copy 2 of a 4 copy report Printing is suspended at the appropriate points so that the operator can load the paper OUTPUT COPIES 4 MESSAGE ITEXT COPY 2 WILL NEED BLUE PAPER OTEX LOAD BLUE PAPER 2 WAIT OTEXT LOAD WHITE PAPER 3 WAIT ll Table 6 33 summarizes the MESSAGE command parameters Table 6 33 Summary of MESSAGE command parameters Parameter ITEXT Specifies Message to the operator during input processing Y Y Y Offline Online DJDE OTEXT Message to the operator during job printing Y Y Y BTEXT Specifies audit log data to the UI Y Y Y i The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options Note All MESSAGE command parameters must be specified in a single command If multiple message commands are specified the parameters in the final command will be applied Note DocuPrint 180 LPS does not support the barcode option Barcode commands which are encountered by the DocuPrint 180 LPS controller will be gracefully ignored no syntax errors will be noted no messages or operator information pages will be generated 6 42 XEROX DOCUPR
52. received for temporary storage of formatted pages for printing Pages are retained until they are delivered to the output tray Informal expression referring to almost anything printed by a computer peripheral device 1 To perform a systematic sequence of operations such as add edit delete 2 To produce a specific result by manipulating data Complete set of instructions in language compatible with the device to be used A program directs a system to perform each operation at the right time in the proper sequence Person involved in designing writing and testing computer programs Message or symbol displayed on a system console requiring the operator to take action Font containing characters that vary in width See also fixed font Text in which each alphanumeric character is given a weighted amount of space Such output has print like appearance Proportional spacing allows more space for wide characters and less space for narrow characters Characters that vary in width Formal set of conventions governing the format of data and the control of information exchange between two communication devices XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY 17 GLOSSARY purge queue RAM raster data rasterization read write head record recovery remote access replace report resolution ROM save scale scroll To delete data from a system List of documents waiting to be process
53. you can invoke sheet finisher function number 1 through the DFA channel C6 OUTPUT SF1FUNCTION option s Table 6 60 lists the SF1FUNCTION parameter option s and definition s Table 6 61 SF1FUNCTION parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s YES Specifies to the finisher to begin a particular finishing function on the current sheet NO Specifies to the finisher not to begin a particular finishing function on the current sheet The default is NO Syntax Options This parameter provides control over third party finishing devices that conform to the DFA standard Using this command you can invoke sheet finisher function number 2 through the DFA channel C7 OUTPUT SF2FUNCTION option s Table 6 61 lists the SF2FUNCTION parameter option s and definition s Table 6 62 SF2FUNCTION parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s YES Specifies to the finisher to begin a particular finishing function on the current sheet NO Specifies to the finisher not to begin a particular finishing function on the current sheet The default is NO XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 77 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS SHIFT Syntax Options Image shift is the shifting of the image data system page relative to the physical page This shifting is in the scan counting direction vertical for landscape and horizontal for portrait The
54. 4 42 summarizes the VOLUME command parameters Table 4 42 Summary of BLOCK command parameters Parameter Specifies Offline Online DJDE BMULT Multiplication factor to determine true block length Y N N CODE Input data translation Y Y N EOV End of volume processing Y N N HOST Source of input data for processing Y Y N LABEL Type of tape label processing Y N N LCODE Input tape label translation Y N N LPACK Label packing specification for undefined labels Y N N MAXLAB Maximum label length for undefined labels Y N N MINLAB Minimum label length for undefined labels Y N N OPTIMIZE Throughput enhancement for online N Y N OSCHN OS Writer end of report channel Y N N OSHDP OS Writer header banner page count Y N N PLABEL Printing of labels to sample tray Y N N RMULT Multiplication factor to determine true record length Y N N RSAT Handling of disk saturation on multivolume job Y N N TCODE Masked comparison type assignments Y Y N UNPACK Input data unpacking method Y N N The following sections describe the syntax of the VOLUME command parameters and explanations of the parameter options 4 38 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS BMULT Syntax Options CODE This parameter specifies a multiplication factor you can use to determine true block length VOLUME BMULT option s Table 4 43 lists the parameter option s and definition
55. 4090 4650 Laser Printing Systems Creating DocuPrint 180 LPS applications on a 4050 4090 4650 or 9700F LPS As with any application you can create DocuPrint 180 JSLs on your 4050 4090 4650 or 9700F LPS and then compile them on your DocuPrint 180 LPS for printing Running 4050 4090 4650 and 9700F jobs on your DocuPrint 180 LPS The Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS offers full backward compatibility with the Xerox 4050 4090 4650 and 9700F laser printing systems In other words all standard JDLs produced on these printers will run successfully on the DocuPrint 180 LPS However it is advisable to recompile them 3 30 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 Specifying input parameters Input data is processed and temporarily written to disk for subsequent printing under control of user selected PDL commands The input processor decodes and formats input data from an offline magnetic tape a host attached channel interface or a remote communication The general functions of input processing are described below The basic PDL commands available to control input processing are BLOCK CODE PCC RECORD SEFFNT TCODE and VOLUME which are defined in this chapter The chapter Using logical processing commands defines commands enabling you to specify logical functions that may be performed on either a record block or page basis Table 4 1 summarizes the input PDL commands Table 4 1 Summary of commands associated with
56. 4245 mode 4 54 Online specific commands 4 55 Creating a JDE or JDL 4 55 DJDE processing 4 57 Online optimization 4 57 Copy sensitive copy modification entries CME 4 57 Report separation 4 57 Universal character set buffers UCSBs 4 58 UCSB processing 4 58 Forms control buffer FCB 4 59 Vertical format control processing 4 59 Online record length 4 60 Points to note 4 60 Online recovery 4 61 Online dump 4 62 Starting and ending dump sessions 4 62 Dump format 4 62 Points to note 4 62 Downloading files from the host to the LPS 4 63 Valid download file types 4 64 DJDE FILE command 4 64 Offline mode 4 65 Host computer tape formats 4 65 Tape codes 4 65 Packed data formats 4 66 Record formats 4 66 Record structure 4 66 Multivolume processing 4 67 5 Defining clusters 5 1 Cluster features 5 1 Cluster processing overview 5 1 What clusters do for the programmer and operator 5 2 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE TABLE OF CONTENTS Where clusters are stored 5 2 How applications use clusters 5 3 Simple and OTEXT applications 5 3 Stockset applications 5 4 Mixing applications 5 4 Defining clusters and stocksets with PDL and DJDE 5 5 PDL commands 5 5 DJDEs 5 5 Points to note 5 6 Steps for creating clusters 5 7 Keeping stockset changes to a minimum 5 9 Using clusters with order
57. 4850 4890 LPS Any ink specifications you have made in the JSL are printed in the default black ink on the DocuPrint 180 however they print in the desired inks on your 4850 4890 Logos are not supported on a 4890 or DocuPrint 180 LPS Refer to your Xerox 4850 4890 HighLight Color LPS PDL DJDE Reference The only exception to this is the RFEED command which is supported on the Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS but not on your 4850 4850 4890 HighLight Color LPS forms The DocuPrint 180 LPS makes a distinction between color and monochrome forms It is important to note that forms do not have to contain color unique forms source library FSL commands in order to be classified as color forms These forms may be generated by either compiling the FSL using the 4850 4890 LPS forms description language FDL compiler converting the monochrome form to color with the File Conversion Utility FCU resident on the 4850 4890 LPS or downloading color forms created from host or third party vendor software packages In addition the DocuPrint 180 LPS makes a distinction between color and monochrome logos Due to differences in file formats the DocuPrint 180 LPS restricts you from specifying a color form that references a monochrome logo The opposite is also true That is a monochrome form may not reference a color logo Unlike logos any form may reference either color or monochrome images The DocuPrint 180 LPS FDL compiler cannot compile an FSL contain
58. 66 END EN PREFIX MTI printer carriage control byte EST SKIP 7 OFFSET 1 OPRINFO YES Using the JDE DJDE to reassign the top of page channel assignment generally channel 1 when the DJDE is a data record may incorrectly position the first page after the page transition occurs Page oriented DJDEs like the JDE DJDE are implemented when the LPS detects the switch from one physical page to the next 8 12 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES The normal page transition is caused by a skip from the bottom of a page to the top of the next generally channel 1 The LPS knows a page transition has occurred only because the channel 1 assignment is on a line number less than the present line number of the current page and therefore a page transition must have been created Unfortunately positioning to the old channel 1 line number has already occurred The new JDE parameters are implemented after the page transition There are several possible solutions to this problem You may add an ASSIGN DJDE to the DJDE packet to change the applicable channel such as channel 1 to the new line number Since the ASSIGN DJDE is a line oriented DJDE it is implemented on the next line and thus affects the next channel skip You may insert a record after the DJDE packet to cause the page transition and then allow a second skip to channel 1 to po
59. Command components 2 2 Identifier 2 3 Command keyword 2 3 Parameter 2 4 Comments 2 4 Syntax rules 2 5 Right part constants 2 6 Value constants 2 6 String constants 2 6 Job source library JSL structure 2 10 Command levels 2 10 ID level 2 12 System or JDL level 2 12 Catalog level 2 12 Job or JDE level 2 13 Examples JOB command 2 13 END command 2 13 Creating separate files for grouping PDL commands 2 16 Hierarchy of replacement 2 16 Hierarchy within a job descriptor library JDL 2 16 Non JDL hierarchy START command 2 17 START command 2 17 Hierarchy of replacement in an errored job descriptor library JDL 2 20 3 Creating a job source library JSL 3 1 What your JSL specified for LPS processing 3 2 Decisions to make before creating your JSL 3 3 Input data 3 3 Output specifications 3 4 Type of application to create 3 4 Special features 3 5 Interactions between JSLs catalogs and jobs 3 5 vi XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE TABLE OF CONTENTS Review of PDL components and syntax 3 6 Command levels 3 6 Command components 3 6 Command identifiers 3 6 Command keywords 3 7 Command parameters 3 7 Comments 3 7 PDL syntax 3 8 Hints and tips 3 9 Steps in creating a JSL 3 10 Using the Editor 3 10 Name the JDL identifier 3 10 Specifying VFUs 3 10 Setting up input parameters 3 11 Specifying LINE c
60. DJDE is applied Note CODE changes to data may occur and will take effect on the page boundary following the DJDE record If a translation code change is involved in a selected JDE the parameter portion of any subsequent DJDE must be in the new code The prefix used by the IDEN must however retain the original hexadecimal value Thus if the CODE changes from EBCDIC to ASCII the prefix must remain in EBCDIC even though the parameter portion changes to ASCII XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 15 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES Duplex DJDE page printing When certain DJDEs listed below are invoked between an odd numbered page front side and an even numbered page back side the following printing sequence occurs The odd numbered page is printed as usual but with a blank back side What would have been printed on the back side the even numbered page is printed on the front of the next sheet This occurs for the following DJDEs COPIES BFORM OTEXT RTEXT JDE JDL DUPLEX NO FEED 8 16 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES Effect of multiple logical pages COPIES processing If multiple BEGINs are being used to define multiple logical pages on one physical page as described in the Multiple logical pages on physical page section in the chapter Print format commands the following points should be considered
61. Definition s TOF Specifies the control program to perform the first spacing skipping or printing action from the top of form The default is TOF The DEFAULT parameter must precede any ASSIGN parameter Any preceding ASSIGN parameter is not incorporated into the PCC table BOF Specifies the control program to perform the first spacing skipping or printing action from the bottom of form MASK This parameter specifies Syntax ac PCC MASK option s Options Table 4 21 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 21 Parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s value Specifies an 8 bit value to be ANDed with the printer carriage control byte being processed ANDing occurs after translation if any refer to Points to note PCC command item 4 The result of this process is to mask off bits from the carriage control byte code which are not relevant to the operation being specified The default is X FF XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 17 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Points to note Example Note the following when using the PCC command Multiple user defined PCC tables are allowed but only one may be used without a command identifier The corresponding PCCTYPE parameter on the LINE command references each table through a command identifier The keyword USER can be used to reference any user defined PCC table for which no command identifier is
62. Definition s CURRENT Specifies whether printing stops or resumes on the current or next record for offline jobs For RSUSPEND if CURRENT is coded the record satisfying test exp does not print For RRESUME if CURRENT is coded the record is printed NEXT If NEXT is coded the record satisfying test exp is not printed and printing begins with the next record If NEXT is coded the record satisfying test exp is printed and printing is suppressed beginning with the next record The default is NEXT TEST This parameter defines test expressions for the beginning of print suppression RSUSPEND Syntax RSUSPEND TEST option s Options Table 7 30 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 30 TEST parameter option s and definition s Option s test exp Definition s The format and syntax of atest exp are defined in the Test expression definition section If the test exp is satisfied the record is used to suspend printing Defines test expression for the resumption of printing RRESUME following print suppression If the test exp is satisfied the record is used to resume printing following print suppression There is no default 7 42 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE USING LOGICAL PROCESSING Points to note Note the following when using the RSUSPEND and RRESUME commands RSUSPEND Make sure that if an RSUSPEND command is coded an RRESUME command must also be pr
63. Descriptor Entry see PDE command PAGES parameter 6 6 paper requirements defining 3 13 PAPERSIZE parameter 6 64 parameter commands 2 4 ITEXT 8 40 options 2 5 rules 8 23 PASSES parameter 7 26 PCC command parameters ADVTAPE 4 12 ASSIGN 4 13 to 4 15 DEFAULT 4 16 INITIAL 4 17 MASK 4 17 PCCTYPE parameter 6 37 PDE command 6 85 PDL capabilities 1 1 command structure components 2 2 to 2 3 line length 2 2 commands grouping 2 16 compiler 1 6 features and functions 1 1 filename definitions 3 16 options 3 16 parameter options 3 17 instructions 1 6 processor 1 6 related programs and tasks 1 5 to 1 6 syntax 3 6 to 3 8 PMODE parameter DJDE command 8 47 PDE command 6 89 POSITION parameter 6 21 POSTAMBLE 4 6 PREAMBLE 4 6 PREFIX parameter 8 7 preparing print jobs 1 7 Print Description Language see PDL command Printer Carriage Control see PCC command printing duplex 7 20 format commands 6 1 simplex 7 20 programs coded instructions 1 2 file control 1 5 programmer 1 7 PURGE parameter 6 65 R random mode graphics 9 9 RAUX command 7 20 to 7 21 duplex printing 7 20 simplex printing 7 20 test 7 20 raw data see unformatted data RDELETE command 7 22 INDEX 6 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE INDEX RECORD command parameters ADJUST 4 19 CONSTANT 4 20 FORMAT 4 20 LENGTH 4 21 LMULT 4 21 LTHFLD 4 22 OFFSET 4 22 POSTAMBLE 4 23 PREAMBLE 4 23 STRU
64. FORMAT COMMANDS Table 6 36 BTEXT parameter option s and definition s Option s DDE Y N Definition s Duplicate detection enablement Y es indicates the audit report will flag duplicate sheets delivered This option must be set to N o if multiple copies of a report or pages within the report are printed For out of order deliveries the job must be run in NOSEQ or BAR ALI mode so that the IOT will not catch and purge the mis sequenced pages DAR SUM WNGT SUM OPLOG SUM BOTH DET WMGT DET OPLOG DET BOTH The normal audit report option DAR parameters are a combination of a summary detail option and an exception data reporting option For example SUM WMGT specifies a summary report with waste management data shown chronologically This summary detail option cosists of SUMmary displays the audit report headings the total of sheets delivered to each destination including scrap expected sheets if specified and reconciles reports amount if specified e DETail displays the audit report headings detail information about each sheet expected and delivered the total of sheets delivered to each destination including scrap expected sheets if specified and reconciles reports amount if specified The exception data reporting options consist of e WMGT Specifies waste management data shown chronologically OPLOG Specifies system events operator commands and responses that may re
65. HEADER segment consists of six fields shown in table 4 61 Table 4 61 Header segment fields Segment Definition HOST English translation of the host command in COMMAND hexadecimal END One byte of status in hexadecimal transmitted to the STATUS host SEQ Incremental count in decimal of the host commands received during a dump session The maximum number generated is 999 999 LENGTH Length in decimal of the data transmitted DATE Date and time when the host command was received TIME by the dump processor The time includes tics of seconds where one tic is approximately one millisecond The DATA segment consists of the input data in hexadecimal transmitted to or from the host with EBCDIC translation based upon the CODE command Input data that cannot be translated is left as blanks Each line of data is preceded by a byte count in hexadecimal Note the following DJDEs banner and other logical processing functions are not honored when running in the dump mode so an operator ENDJOB command must be entered to end the dump session 4 62 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS e command from the host is not dumped since it is intercepted and processed by the OLI hardware and is transparent to the LPS software Hardware errors are reported in the system error log but are not dumped due to Host OLI or driver interface constraints e
66. HOST RSX11 FLX you must specify the DATA command For HOST DUMP two tape marks at the end of the tape are required to dump the data tape using DUMP JSL 4 42 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS If a selected HOST type is inconsistent with a selected LABEL type the PDL issues an error message and automatically substitutes a valid label Do not code the LABEL parameter of the VOLUME command in cases where it is not appropriate for a particular HOST type Refer to the Offline specifications appendix for more information on offline formats If an online job JDE is called out in an offline JDL that changed the system default values the job may print incorrectly If this happens separate and run online and offline jobs independent from each other XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 43 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS LCODE This parameter specifies the code translation table to use in interpreting the tape label Syntax VOLUME LCODE option s Options Table 4 47 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 47 LCODE parameter option s and definition s Option s keyword Definition s Specifies a specific standard system defined code translation table The available options are e ASCII e BCD e EBCDIC H2BCD e HeBCD BMBCD e PEBCDIC e e USER USER refers to the single unlabeled CODE command allowed within the JDE or
67. LTHFLD 4 5 installation reports 6 12 to 6 14 OFFSET 4 5 usage overall 6 10 to 6 11 POSTAMBLE 4 6 ACCT command parameters PREAMBLE 4 6 specifying ZERO 4 7 JSL 3 11 points to note 4 7 to 4 8 print format 6 10 to 6 16 BOF parameter ACCTINFO parameter 7 37 DJDE command 8 22 to 8 23 ADJUST parameter 4 2 VFU command 6 100 Advanced Image Subsystem AIS 1 2 Bottom Of Form see BOF ALTER parameters 8 19 BSELECT command 7 18 to 7 19 applications buffer page 1 6 4850 4890 running 3 28 to 3 29 4050 4090 4650 9700F C creating 3 30 running job 3 30 C parameter 8 24 mixing 5 4 capabilities 1 1 stockset 5 4 card image files 8 65 to 8 66 types 3 4 change mode criteria 7 4 ASCII constants 2 7 channel attached LPS 4 56 ASSIGN parameters character CODE 4 9 see also fonts DJDE 8 20 constants 2 7 STOCKSET 6 96 dispatching 1 2 VFU 6 100 spacing 3 25 to 3 26 strings 6 18 B types 7 10 characteristics defining 6 31 banner page detection 4 59 checkpoint data 6 8 BANNER command 7 13 to 7 17 clusters BATCH parameter 8 20 checking 5 4 BDELETE command 7 18 to 7 19 creating 5 7 to 5 8 defining 5 5 to 5 9 XEROX DOCUPRINT 96 LPS PDL REFERENCE INDEX 1 INDEX features 5 1 processing overview 5 1 specifying 5 3 to 5 4 storing MAIN 5 2 AUX 5 2 AUTO 5 2 usage 5 3 CMEs cataloged 6 18 specific commands online 4 59 specifying 6 17 using 3 13 CODE command ASSIGN parameter 4 9 DEFAULT parameter 4
68. OPR is equivalent to FEED MAIN The default is OPR 6 64 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS FORMAT Syntax Options This parameter specifies a page descriptor entry PDE to be used in formatting the printed output such as location of starting print line for each logical page on the physical page font usage and page orientation OUTPUT FORMAT option s Table 6 47 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 48 FORMAT parameter option s and definition s Option s pde id Definition s References a PDE that must have been defined previously in a JDL or may make reference to a PDE file separately cataloged in the PDE directory on disk Standard pde ids are defined in the section PDE command in this chapter such as FMT1 and FMT2 These standard pde ids are part of the LPS and may be used unless a specialized PDE must be defined An active PDE may subsequently be replaced entirely or modified in part through DJDEs refer to the chapter Specifying dynamic job descriptor entries DJDEs Details on the PDE parameter are discussed in the Page descriptors section of this chapter Creating and compiling PDE files with the PDL processor is discussed in the Compiling the JSL section in the chapter Creating a job source library JSL The default is FMT1 Note To ensure reliability enter the entire parameter FORMAT Do no
69. OSS software installation upgrade and modification DocuPrint 180 LPS Operations This reference contains the following information Reference e Command syntax for operator and system administrator procedures e LPS defaults e 1 5 resources e Command summaries e Communication and graphics on the LPS Command files DocuPrint 180 LPS Forms Creation This reference contains the following information Guide e Basic concepts for creating forms Coding and compiling for LPS Forms Description Language e Sample form setup command sets Tips for successful forms creation DocuPrint 180 LPS Operator Command This reference provides a quick reference of commonly used Summary Card commands DocuPrint 180 LPS Message Guide This reference contains the following information e OSS and other messages Meaning and recovery procedures DocuPrint 180 LPS Installation This reference contains the following information Planning Gulde e LPS basic components and options Tasks that must be accomplished before installation Preinstallation requirements Installation process Postinstallation activities DocuPrint 180 LPS PC Ul Reference This reference contains the following information e UI procedures Hierarchy of PC UI windows xxii XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE INTRODUCTION DocuPrint 180 LPS Product Reference Tape Formats Manual DocuPrint 180 LPS Standard Font Library Font User Guide Help
70. Options are PRINT IGNORE MERGE PRINT2 If IGNORE is coded all overprint lines are ignored PRINT specifies that all overprint lines are to be printed as they would be on an impact printer that is the second line is printed over the top of the first with no regard to the previous data including character spacing which may vary between the two lines of data PRINT2 specifies that up to two consecutive lines are printed per line one line and one overprint Other overprints for the line are ignored MERGE is the same as PRINT except when used with FONTINDEX or CME processing refer to the Points to note section and example 2 of the Examples section disp Options are DISP NODISP These are Xerox 1200 Computer Printing System parameters which are preserved here for compatibility purposes Neither is functional The number of overprint lines is always printed on the accounting page Example LINE OVERPRINT MERGE NODISP VFU V1 DATA 1 132 PCCTYPE ANSI PCC 0 NOTRAN 6 34 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS PCC Syntax Options This parameter specifies the position and possible translation of the printer carriage control field LINE PCC option s Table 6 29 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 29 PCC parameter option s and definition s Option s offset
71. PDL REFERENCE 3 11 CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL Specifying use of DJDEs Most PDL commands can also appear in the form of DJDEs which allow page by page or record by record modifications to your applications In order to use DJDEs an IDEN command must be specified in the JSL to advise the system where to look for them in the input data stream For example IDEN PREFIX C9700 SKIP 7 OFFSET 1 Refer to the appendix PDL DJDE command summary for information on which PDL commands have DJDE counterparts Adding logical processing specifications Specifying formats Logical processing commands are invoked when the system locates satisfactory test criteria These test criteria are set up for record or block fields and if met allow special processing to take place for such things as banner pages block selection or deletion page selection from auxiliary paper trays and page offsetting An example of logical processing tests and criteria is provided in this catalog level command set Catalog level commands ECCS CATALOG 1 TABLE CONSTANT PAGE 1 2 TABLE CONSTANT INPUT RECORDS 3 TABLE CONSTANT JOB Cl CRITERIA CONSTANT 122 11 EQ T1 LINENUM 1 10 C2 CRITERIA CONSTANT 14 13 0 2 C3 CRITERIA CONSTANT 14 3 EQ T3 There are many standard formats available for you to sele
72. PDL commands and DJDE summary Appendix B PDL command and DJDE syntax quick reference Appendix C Character code assignment tables Appendix D Offline specifications Appendix E Editor command quick reference xxiv XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE INTRODUCTION PDL syntax conventions used in this manual Table 1 lists the syntax conventions and their usage Table 2 Syntax conventions Syntax convention inkref or dots Explanation Variable names or values are represented in italics Choices are separated by vertical bars a b c Required choices are enclosed in braces a b c Optional choices are enclosed in brackets b Default options are underlined Ellipsis indicates repetition of an element for example form id form id XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE xxvi XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PDL features and functions 1 Overview This chapter provides an overview of PDL related information you will need in order to effectively utilize the PDL capabilities Print Description Language PDL is used to describe printing jobs to a Xerox laser printing system LPS PDL accomplishes this by e Describing the input type format characteristics e Describing the processing functions logical processing e Describing the output type format font selection accounting options Diverse application
73. Page interleaved In this format a report s data stream begins with a set of one or more graphics prior to the first record of text These graphics are copied one at a time to named IMG disk files When the report has finished printing the IMG files created are automatically deleted unless the user has explicitly specified otherwise The rules for formatting a document interleaved graphic report tape file are Thetape format may be any legal fixed or variable length block or record format which is otherwise supported by the LPS that is RECORD STRUCTURE F FB V or VB It may not be an undefined block or record format that is RECORD STRUCTURE U or UB Packed data formats are not supported e Use of block and record constants in an appropriately structured file type F FB V or VB containing interleaved graphics is supported However the actual delimiter searching is suspended while an IMG file is being read For record delimiters this means that delimiter searching is suspended from the first record of graphic data until the entire graphic has been read Extraneous bytes at the end of the last record are ignored Record delimiter processing resumes with the next record For block delimiters this means that the first byte of a graphic must be the first data byte of a block and that the first byte of data following the graphic must also be the first byte of a block Extraneous data in the last block following th
74. SEP Specifies that each front cover does not have any data printed on it also no report data is printed on the back of a SEP cover BACK Specifies that a cover page is to be picked at the end of each copy No report data is printed on back covers BOTH Specifies that both front and back cover pages are to be picked and the front of each copy is the first page of the copy The FEED MAIN operator command refer to the Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS Operations Reference should be used in conjunction with this parameter to prevent the AUX tray from being automatically selected when the MAIN tray becomes empty This can be used in combination with the FEED parameter on the OUTPUT command and the FEED DJDE parameter refer to the chapter Specifying dynamic job descriptor entries DJDEs If RTEXT is specified alone with FRONT SEP or BOTH SEP RTEXT pages are printed on the covers and front covers are picked only on copies for which there is RTEXT Refer to ROUTE commands for further details on RTEXT Refer to the Job parameter modification restrictions section in the chapter Specifying dynamic job descriptor entries DJDEs for more information on COVER specified in a selected JDE 6 60 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS CYCLEFORMS This parameter specifies a set of forms to be associated with report pages in a cyclical fashion Refer to the examples at the end of
75. SEPARATORS This parameter specifies that the printer software save an internal copy of the first data page of the report and use it to generate segment separator sheets Syntax EXPORT SEPARATORS option s Options Table 6 19 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 19 SEPARATOR parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s FIRST LAST LAST D BOTH BOTH D NONE This option has the following components FIRST Specifies that a printer generated separator sheet be the first sheet of the second and subsequent segments Note The first segment begins with the first data page so an additional sheet is not generated e LAST Specifies that at least one copy of the saved data page should be generated on a separate sheet of paper as a hard copy segment separator and counted as the final sheet in the segment Note In an online environment a true banner trailer page if encountered will be used to image any LAST separators of the final segment in place of the saved data page BOTH Specifies both FIRST and LAST as above e Specifies that no segment separator sheets be generated D Specifies that the system prints the separator sheet on the back of any LAST sheets If the report is simplex the system still processes the last page of the segment as a duplex page The parentheses are required when using the D parameter option The default is NONE Example SE
76. SPECIFICATIONS Table D 1 JDL source files on OSS tape continued JDL JDEs provided for XEROX ANSI labeled tapes Unlabeled tapes Xerox ANSI labeled tapes JDEs to print unknown tapes Printing tapes without attempting to deblock the tape properly After an LPS software system is created by the user the source for these JDLs is resident in the JSL directory Use the Editor PRINT parameter or the PDL compiler to obtain a printout of the JDL s desired D 4 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE E Editor quick reference This appendix summarizes the basic Editor commands and steps for creating and modifying JSLs For detailed information on using the Editor refer to your Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS Operations Reference Note that you may enter the Editor commands by keying in only the first three letters for example CLEAR can be entered as CLE and INSERT can be entered as INS Creating a new file on system disk Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 When you have prepared your JSL and are ready to enter it onto System disk you must use the Editor To use the Editor for coding your JSL follow these steps Gain access to the file by entering the Editor Enter LOG 3 password Begin the editing session by entering EDIT Clear the work file of all data enter CLEAR Verify the new file name you have selected and protect existing files by entering GET file id The file id consi
77. T PD PDI CM CM STOCKS PREFIX C9700 SKIP 7 OFFSET 1 EGIN 0 18 IN 0 66 IN NT LO112B LO1BOA MODE LANDSCAPE N 1 03 1 6 30 1 ONTS P1012A PMODE PORTRAIT LINE 9 POS 1 FONT 1 LINE 3 POS 59 CONSTANT FIRST QUARTER ASSIGN WHITE CVR ASSIGN YELLOW BLL ASSIGN GREEN SUM INIFEED SYSPAGE SUM OTEXT ALL FORMS DUPLEX ONLY 1 WAIT ITEXT COPY 2 WILL NEED BLUE PAPER 5 5 E t UJ Ug U Pl Fl Gl H Job level commands JOB1 JD OUTPUT DUPLEX YES XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 3 15 CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL Compiling the JSL SHIFT YES FORM SMPLE MODIFY CME1 FORMAT PDE1 COPIES 10 BFORM SMLBK OFFSET FIRST PURGE NO JOB2 JDE LINE VFU VFU2UP OUTPUT FORMAT PDE2 FORMS SPL2 COPIES 7 END Compiling converts the information from a job source file JSL into an object file JDL This is the command to enter at the LPS PC User Interface to compile the JSL PDL filename JDL oarameters The file id is the source file that contains the PDL command The file id can be the file name alone or more typically the file name and the file directory or extension in the form file name file
78. TCODE and VOLUME Input processing characteristics vary depending on the data source For example if your JSL is for an online application the BLOCK command is not applicable Also parameters within a command may apply to offline only online only or both For example with the VOLUME command the parameters CODE and HOST can apply to both online and offline EOV applies only to offline applications and OPTIMIZE applies only to online applications The following is a sample of typical offline commands System level commands VOLUME HOST IBMOS LABEL STANDARD CODE EBCDIC PLABEL YES BLOCK LENGTH 2660 REAMBLE 4 LTHFLD 2 ORMAT BIN ENGTH 136 REAMBLE 4 RUCTURE VB THFLD 2 OFFSET 0 ORMAT BIN RECORD E QD U E Specifying LINE command parameters The LINE command references VFUs from the ID level and allows you to instruct the system on which parts of the data in each record are to be printed For this reason it typically follows the RECORD command For example LINE DATA 1 132 PCCTYPE ANSI PCC 0 NOTRAN VFU VFU1 Specifying ACCT command parameters The ACCT command often follows the LINE command and as with the other commands mentioned above the ACCT command can be coded into any command level Here it accompanies the other system level commands ACCT USER TRAY XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS
79. TEST to be successful If OR is coded then either CRITERIA command is satisfied for a data record the TEST is successful The second and third CRITERIA commands are optional but if either is specified the other must also be present If cri id and cri ido are both present and the keyword AND is coded the test is true only if criteria in both cri id and cri id2 are satisfied If the keyword OR is coded the test is true if the criteria in either 0 or cri id are true If the test is satisfied the logical processing function is performed For example the following CRITERIA command describes a test for a subfield equal to a specific constant table cri id CRITERIA CONSTANT offset length EQ tab id The CONSTANT parameter specifies that the content of a record is to be compared to the values in a table command with identifier tab id refer to the TABLE command section later in this chapter The subfield to be compared is located offset bytes from the start of the record or block with length in bytes When the subfield in the record or block matches a constant in the table the CRITERIA command is true and the processing called for in the parameter is initially completed or acted upon The particular logical processing function is performed when the test expression is true as specified by the parameter Specifying one CRITERIA command To complete the description of the entire test for a logical function the TEST pa
80. Table 8 38 JDE parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s jde id Specifies the JDE to be used within the selected JDL at the next page boundary 8 48 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES JDL The jdl id specifies the name of the JDL to be invoked at the next page boundary The jdl id must exist on disk the JDL directory If only JDL is specified not JDE in the DJDE the JDE to be used is the one named in the START command In a DJDE packet containing a JDL parameter other record or page oriented DJDE parameters override parameters specified by the JDL DJDE Syntax JDL option s Options Table 8 35 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 39 JDL parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s jdl id The jdl id specifies the name of the JDL to be invoked at the next page boundary MAP This parameter references a previously created font mapping file file name from a label SEFFNT command Syntax MAP option s Options Table 8 36 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 40 MAP parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s file name References a previously created font mapping file file name from a label SEFFNT command XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 49 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES MAR
81. The LINENUM specification 10 6 means that lines 10 through 15 on each page are being examined for the RDELETE test Any line not in that range is not examined XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 7 9 USING LOGICAL PROCESSING String comparison concepts String comparisons This section focuses on string comparisons character types and masked comparisons using default and non default type assignments Character types String comparisons for logical processing are specified using the CRITERIA and TABLE commands These comparisons test for one of the following conditions e Absolute equality tested for by either a change mode CRITERIA command or by a constant mode CRITERIA command which references a TABLE command that does not have a MASK parameter coded refer to processing sequence 1 in figure 7 1 Equality under a mask tested for when the referenced TABLE command has a MASK parameter coded refer to processing sequence 2 in figure 7 1 Comparing strings for equality under a mask means that the user has specified for each character position of the input data string that the test performed is one of the following Compare the character in that position for absolute equality Ignore the character in that position consider the character whatever it is to compare as equal Compare the character in that position for type for example alphabetic numeric or some specially defined type An
82. VOLUME EOV PAUSE EOF NOPAUSE NOEOF NOPAUSE NOEOF VOLUME HOST host type IBMOS VOLUME LABEL abel type STANDARD VOLUME LCODE keyword EBCDIC VOLUME LPACK YES NO NO VOLUME MAXLAB value 81 VOLUME MINLAB 80 80 VOLUME OPTIMIZE keyword keywora keyworo keywora NONE NONE VOLUME OSCHN value 9 VOLUME OSHDP value 0 VOLUME OSTLP value 0 VOLUME PLABEL YES NO NO VOLUME RMULT value 1 VOLUME RSAT SPLIT REMOUNT REMOUNT VOLUME TCODE tcode type tcode id EBCDIC VOLUME UNPACK T4X3 TAX3H2 UNIVAC NONE NONE XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE B 7 PDL COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE B 8 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE C Character code assignment This appendix illustrates the following character code assignments IBM BCD code set IBM BCD code set Honeywell 200 2000 BCD code set Honeywell 6000 BCD code set Fieldata translation UNIVAC ASCII character set Standard ASCII character set Standard EBCDIC character set Xerox EBCDIC to extended ASCII hexadecimal translation values Figure C 1 presents the IBM BCD code set Figure C 1 IBM BCD code set ea S 9 c 2 a Most Significant Bits Note 0 20 is the official blank character tCorresponds to BCD code set used by IBM users and defined by PDL command CODE IBMBCD XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE CHARACTER CODE ASSIGNMENT
83. and definition s Option s Definition s FIX NOFIX DEFAULT The default is DEFAULT Considerations DESTINATION This parameter specifies the output destination of paper Syntax OUTPUT DESTINATION option s Options Table 6 43 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 44 Destination parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s BIN Specifies that the currently selected bin is used The default is BIN TRAY Sends output to the sample tray Transparencies should always be sent to the sample tray NOTE Use caution when selecting the TRAY option because of the sample tray s limited capacity EXPORT Specifies that sheets be sent to the bypass transport The EXPORT option takes effect only if the current operator commands SELECT E or SELECT AUTO are specified SELECT AUTO places output destination under data stream control SELECT E causes output to be sent to the bypass transport option 6 62 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS DUPLEX This parameter specifies whether printing is to occur in duplex print on both sides of a sheet or simplex print on a single side Syntax OUTPUT DUPLEX option s Options Table 6 44 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 45 DUPLEX parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s YES Selects duplex printing NO Specifies simplex printing The default is NO FACEUP This parameter
84. application on a page or report basis Interactions between JSLs catalogs and jobs You will also want to consider the interactions similarities and differences between various JSLs catalogs and jobs What characteristics are used globally if any for all of the applications at your site For example do all jobs use the same host format paper size page orientation block or record length test criteria DJDEs error responses accounting requirements fonts or forms What names will you call the JSL and catalogs or individual jobs within the JSL Use names that will be meaningful to you and others who may use the application XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 3 5 CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL Review of PDL components and syntax Before beginning the formatting of your JSL a quick review of PDL components may be helpful These are discussed in more detail in the Print description language components and processes chapter Command levels There are four command levels e ID level which has commands with identifiers which must be coded in the library before they can be referenced by other commands in the other levels e System or JDL which establish installation dependent requirements and default values for job descriptor entries JDEs These are best used for specifications that apply to the majority of your applications e Catalog which consists of groups of commands e Job or J
85. are substituted for lowercase At the start of the next report UCSB IGNORE comes back into effect and the translate table is rebuilt based on the CODE command in the JDE file When a UCSB is transmitted from the host it is saved on a PFILR SYS file When system generation is executed the system looks for the UCSB saved in the file If the system does not find the UCSB it reinitializes the file to define all characters as printable If UCSB PROCESS and the UCSB suppresses special characters used in DJDE syntax for example DJDE syntax errors result UCSB IGNORE should be specified if a CODE other than EBCDIC is specified If UCSB PROCESS a UCSB load causes the CODE default to revert to EBCDIC until end of report or until a selected JDE JDL is processed 4 58 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Forms control buffer FCB The 3211 4245 forms control buffer FCB defines channel positions and forms length Online users may restrict the forms control buffer information by accepting or suppressing the normal processing of host transmitted FCB input This can be accomplished by the FCB IGNORE parameter of the LINE command Vertical format control processing The interaction of the vertical format controls in the JSL and the FCB sent from the host is as follows When a START command is entered the VFU table and its associated BOF in the JDE come into effect If no VFU is s
86. as the length of one side of a rectangle A tool used in offset printing typesetting and laser printing to convert a continuous tone such as photographic image to dots which allows the image to be rendered accurately in these printing processes Machine output in permanent form such as printed reports listings and so on Output in a permanent form usually on paper or paper tape rather than in temporary form as on a display Contains readable printed copy of machine for example computer output Nonoptimal adjustment of particular FIS fonts in terms of point size and orientation XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY 9 GLOSSARY hardware HCF HCS hexadecimal hierarchy high level language host host interface icon image area information processing initialize input input output Physical components such as mechanical magnetic and electronic elements of a system as opposed to programs procedures rules and associated documentation Hardware is operated by software and firmware high capacity feeder Feeder tray capable of holding 2500 sheets of 20 pound 75 gsm paper The high capacity feeder trays are the primary paper supply for the DP180 LPS They are located in the bottom half of the feeder stacker modules high capacity stacker Stacker bin capable of holding 2500 sheets of 20 pound 75 gsm paper In the LPS the high capacity stacker bins are located in the top
87. barcode reader Note DocuPrint 180 LPS does not support the barcode option Barcode commands which are encountered by the DocuPrint 180 LPS controller will be gracefully ignored no syntax errors will be noted no messages or operator information pages will be generated MESSAGE BTEXT option s Table 6 39 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 36 BTEXT parameter option s and definition s Option s RNA xxx Definition s Report name maximum of 16 characters This keyword is required in the first BTEXT of each report to be audited It may only occur once per report For clarity in relating the audit reports to SFS reports this should be the same value used for job accounting This parameter must be present to audit a job or report CJN sss Customer job number maximum of 6 digits For clarity in relating the audit report to SFS reports this should be the same value used for job accounting DPT xxx Department name maximum of 31 characters For clarity in relating the audit reports to SFS reports this should be the same value used for job accounting XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 45 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Table 6 36 BTEXT parameter option s and definition s Option s LDT U W BW SM M Q 0 365 yy mm da Definition s Log stale date indicator Once this date has passed the audit log may be deleted or overwritten without warni
88. boundary if FONTINDEX has been invoked in a JDE or DJDE These DJDEs also may appear at report boundaries to change all pages in a report or report ply Table 8 2 lists the record oriented DJDEs Table 8 2 Record oriented DJDEs DJDE ASSIGN Function Assigns a VFU channel to a page line number or set of line number BOF Specifies the bottom of form line number C text Allows comment text in the DJDE record DATA Specifies the location and length of printable data within an input record END Specifies the end of DJDE information FILE Enables files to load to the system disks while a print job is in progress OVERPRINT Provides instructions to the system when overprint lines print lines whose carriage control specifies printing with no line spacing since the last printed line TOF Specifies the top of form line number Table 8 3 lists graphic DJDEs that are record oriented Table 8 3 Record oriented DJDEs DJDE ALTER Function Specifies the new imaging parameters for graphics BATCH Permits normal processing on online banner pages for batch mode jobs CANCEL Cancels automatic reimaging hold of IMAGE or GRAPHICS parameters GRAPHIC Specifies that the DJDE is a graphic sentinel IMAGE In batch mode defines the new imaging parameters for the graphic SAVE Specifies IMG files updated the current re
89. by default ASCII BCD EBCDIC PEBCDIC H2BCD H6BCD IBMCD By coding any one of the keywords you are furnished with a set of character to type assignments tcode id Specifies an identified label of a TCODE parameter that defines a set of type assignments XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 51 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS UNPACK Points to note Syntax Options This parameter specifies the unpacking method of the input data when required VOLUME UNPACK option s Table 4 59 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 59 UNPACK parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s NONE Does not perform the unpacking operation The default is NONE T4X3 or Specifies unpacking routines in which 6 bit T4X3H2 characters are extracted and restored as 8 bit bytes T4X3 is used primarily for Honeywell 6000 tapes while T4X3H2 is used for Honeywell 2000 tapes UNIVAC Specifies an unpacking routine used for UNIVAC tapes although you can specify any of these routines independent of the HOST type Note the following when using the VOLUME command The character code assignment tables in appendix C summarize the label specifications that are valid for each host type If a selected HOST type is inconsistent with a selected LABEL type an error message is output by PDL and a valid label is automatically substituted The LABEL parameter o
90. by the LPS online interface and by the 3211 4245 Therefore the only appropriate PCCTYPES for an online JSL file are IBM3211 or IBM4245 Figure 4 4 shows a sample online JDL file that includes the PCCTYPE parameter Because the carriage control command is sent prior to rather than as part of the data record offset to fields such as DJDE prefix and font index are typically one byte less for online than offline where the carriage control byte is part of the data record For the same reason the online DATA parameter of the LINE command has a default offset of zero rather than one XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 55 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Figure 4 4 Sample online JDL file ONLINE JDL VEUL VEU ASSIGN 1 4 ASSIGN 2 10 ASSIGN 3 16 ASSIGN 4 22 ASSIGN 5 28 ASSIGN 6 34 ASSIGN 7 40 ASSIGN 8 46 ASSIGN 9 66 ASSIGN 10 52 ASSIGN 11 58 ASSIGN 12 64 TOF 1 BOF 66 VOLUME HOST IBMONL OPTIMIZE NCC NDC NPR LINE PCCTYPE IBM3211 VFU VFU1 UCSB IGNORE FCB IGNORE ACCT USER BIN TRAY IDEN PREFIX DJDE SKIP 7 OFFSET 2 OPRINFO YES TABLES AND CRITERIA
91. by the hardware firmware combination In the first step referred to as fill the video format is stored into a 64 megabit memory called a page buffer The entire page is processed and stored into this memory resulting in a bitmapped image In the second step referred to as dump the page buffer contents are sent one scan line at a time to the laser Two page buffers enable one page s video to be filled into one buffer at the same time that the previous page s video is being dumped from the other page buffer XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE OVERVIEW LPS software components The LPS operating system software OSS housed in the system controller runs both background and foreground processing The major programs or tasks run by the system controller are shown in their hierarchical relationships in the list below The OSS tasks are Operating system executive OSEXEC task File control program FCP Operator communication subsystem OCS Diagnostic tasks System utilities Editor task Font editor task Input processing task File transfer XFR Report processing RPT Memory control program MCP Terminal ancillary control program TACP Ancillary IOT monitor program AIM Dynamic job descriptor DJD task Output processing task Print description language PDL processor Forms description language FDL processor Host interface processor HIP task XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERE
92. color housing and enter CONTINUE O e Abort the report and enter CONTINUE If the operator elects to abort the report there are two possible methods Enter ABORT O Enter CANCEL ENTRY entry string where entry string is the number or numbers of the reports in the queue to be cancelled e Abortthe entire job that contains the report by entering ABORT job id and CONTINUE Refer to the Xerox 4850 4890 HighLight Color LPS Command Reference for information on these commands The default is STOP ABORT Printing of the report is aborted CONTINUE Uses the currently loaded primary regardless of the ISUBSTITUTE parameter or the FDL INKS command NOSUBSTITUTION parameter Considerations Ink mismatch errors are not handled by the ERROR parameter Ink mismatch is a special type of error that requires specific operations and is processed independently of ERROR parameter specifications Refer to the Coding for efficient queue management section in the Highlight color printing chapter for information on the relationship between queue management and the IMISMATCH parameter 6 4 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS ISUBSTITUTE Syntax Options Example Considerations This parameter specifies whether operator initiated ink substitution is allowed ABNORMAL ISUBSTITUTE option s Table 6 5 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 5 ISUBSTITUTE parameter option s and defini
93. command or parameter has an equivalent DJDE and if so specifies whether the DJDE is page or record oriented XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE A 1 PDL COMMAND AND DJDE SUMMARY Table A 2 PDL commands and DJDEs DJDE orienta Command Parameter Default LPS Offline Online tion ABNORMAL ERROR STOP All Y Y IMISMATCH STOP 4850 4890 Y Y ISUBSTITUTE ANY 4850 4890 Y Y OTEXT NOWAIT All Y Y SECURITY NO All Y Y ACCT DEPT jdl name All Y Y Page USER BIN All Y Y BANNER HCOUNT 0 All N Y HJOBNO NONE All N Y HRPTNA NONE All Y Y TCOUNT 0 All N Y TEST All N Y TYPE BANNER All N Y BDELETE TEST All Y N BLOCK ADJUST 0 All Y N CONSTANT All Y N FORMAT BIN All Y N LENGTH 1330 All Y N LMULT 1 All Y N LTHFLD 0 All Y N OFFSET 0 All Y N POSTAMBLE 0 All Y N PREAMBLE 0 All Y ZERO NO All Y BSELECT TEST All Y N acCATALOG All Y Y ac CME CONSTANT All Y Y FONTS All Y Y INK 4850 4890 Y Y LINE All Y Y POSITION All Y Y ac CODE ASSIGN All Y Y DEFAULT EBCDIC All Y Y CHANGE All Y Y CONSTANT All Y Y LINENUM ALL LINES All Y Y END All EXPORT SEPARATORS 4850 4890 4135 4635 Y Y SNUMBER 4850 4890 4135 4635 Y Y Page SPLIT 4850 4890 41
94. command parameters Table 4 16 Summary of PCC command parameters Parameter Specifies Offline Online DJDE ADVTAPE Printer action for two successive channel skips Y N N ASSIGN User carriage control code exceptions Y N N DEFAULT Standard printer carriage control table Y N N INITIAL Initial reference point for first carriage control Y N N MASK Mask of bits from carriage control byte Y N N The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options ADVTAPE This parameter specifies if an advance to a new page is to occur when two successive channel skip parameters are issued with no intervening print For example on most printers the actions PSK1 print and skip to channel 1 followed by SK1N skip to channel 1 do not print would cause a blank page to be output However ona 1403 printer these actions would not cause a blank page to be output Syntax ac PCC ADVTAPE option s Options Table 4 17 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 17 ADVTAPE parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s YES Specifies that multiple skips are honored The default is YES NO Specifies that multiple skips result in only one skip action being taken Note that SK1P skip to channel 1 and print followed by a second SK1P results in a page transition since printing occurred on the first page even if blanks were pri
95. condition is met including the logical end of report as specified in the RSTACK command 6 28 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Examples Resetting the segment number You may set a new segment number after the current one is terminated This is accomplished when the system encounters a series of two DJDEs SPLIT OFF followed by SPLIT min max In an online environment banner pages are routed to the current job output destination For example if a job is being sent to a third party finishing device the banner page will be sent there also The system does not redirect banner pages to the sample tray or output bin unless you specify that they be routed to a tray other than the job destination Refer to the BANNER command section of the chapter Using logical processing commands for more information on specifying banner pages The following are sample EXPORT commands EXPORT SPLIT 2 7 SNUMBER 1 75 SEPARATORS NONE EXPORT SPLIT 2 7 SNUMBER 1 75 SEPARATORS FIRST SRECOVER SEGMENT XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 29 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS LINE command The LINE command provides parameters which allow the user to define the characteristics of the user portion of the input data record and how it is to be printed Table 6 23 summarizes the LINE command parameters Table 6 23 Summary
96. data communications controlled by start and stop elements at the beginning and end of each character Thus time intervals between transmitted characters may be unequal in length Captures the sheet delivery information for every page in an audited report certain details about each sheet the planned and actual report control totals and waste management XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY 1 GLOSSARY auxiliary menu B4 background job backup file band batch processing baud binary binary digit bit binary synchronous transmission bit Menu that contains options not displayed in a window The symbol for an auxiliary menu is a box containing three horizontal lines Paper size measuring 250 by 353 mm Low priority job usually batched that is executed automatically as System resources become available File copied to a storage medium for safekeeping in case the original is damaged or lost Rectangular area in printer memory into which an image sent to the printer from a computer is divided Allows for repetitive operations to be performed sequentially on batched data without much involvement of the computer operator Measurement of data rate in bits per second This term is used to describe information flow between two devices Unit of data transmitting and receiving speed is roughly equal to a single bit per second Common baud rates are 110 300 1200 2400 4800 and 9600 Numb
97. def Defines the cluster to use for the page either a cluster name or a cluster reference There is no default 7 22 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE USING LOGICAL PROCESSING Points to note Note the following when using the RFEED command e Satisfaction of the RFEED criteria will cause the current page to feed from the cluster defined in the RFEED command e Jfacriteria is met the cluster name will remain in effect until the next RFEED criteria is met or a new report is processed e RFEED is not available as a DJDE Ina multiple RFEED criteria command the order in which the criteria are specified makes a difference in the job application Once a criterion is satisfied the system ignores criteria checking for the rest of the page The criteria checking resumes when a page transition occurs Consider this example PAPERSTK STOCKSET ASSIGN RED red ref ASSIGN BLUE blue ref ASSIGN GREEN green ref 1 ABLE CONSTANT ABC 2 ABLE CONSTAN DEF 34 ABLE CONSTANT GHI C1 CRITERIA CONSTANT 4 3 EQ T1 C2 CRITERIA CONSTANT 4 3 EQ T2 C3 CRITERIA CONSTANT 15 3 EQ T3 RFEED TES Cl RED C2 BLUE C3 GREEN In this example the input task checks C1 C2 and then C3 If C2 and C3 satisfy the specified crit
98. defines mask characters used within string constants specified by CONSTANT parameter and indicates which character positions have special type testing and what that testing is ac TABLE MASK option s Table 7 32 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 32 MASK parameter option s and definition s Option s ignore char charspeci 1 charspeci_ Definition s This option has the following components There is no default ignore char Specifies a character to appear in those positions within a string constant which are not to be compared charspeci i index number specifies a character s to appear in those positions within a string constant where a test for type i characters is to be performed A charspec is of the form char or char char char Mask characters should be defined using the same string type as in the string specified in the CONSTANT parameter 7 46 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE USING LOGICAL PROCESSING Examples Example 1 This section shows examples of using the TABLE command Example 2 The following are sample TABLE commands The identifiers T1 T2 and T3 are each referenced by a CRITERIA command 1 TABLE CONSTANT S 2 TABLE CONSTANT JOB EXEC 3 TABLE CONSTANT 120 Example 3 The following example illustrates the use
99. device requirements the paper sizes required by your applications the complexity of each page the number of pages in each application and so forth But a general understanding of the relationship between paper size and pitch mode and the advantages of specifying pitch modes will help you optimize your printing activities The DocuPrint 180 LPS operates in multiple pitch modes 3 4 5 6 7 and 8 Table 6 10 shows the pitch mode minimum and maximum boundary values in inches along with their associated print speeds shown in pages per minute which can be specified with the TMODE parameter of the OUTPUT command Table 6 73 Pitch mode minimum and maximum boundary values and pages per minute throughput PITCH IN 15 31 lt x 17 00 CM 38 9 to 43 18 Pages per minute ppm MM DOTS XDOTS 389 to 431 8 4595 to 5100 9190 to 10200 77 12 12 x 15 31 30 8 to 38 9 308 to 389 3639 to 4594 7271 to 9189 103 10 19 x 12 12 25 9 to 30 8 259 to 308 3060 to 3638 6119 to 7276 128 9 01 x 10 19 22 9 to 25 9 229 to 259 2705 to 3059 5410 to 6118 154 7 40 x 9 01 18 8 to 22 9 188 to 229 2221 to 2704 4442 to 5409 180 7 00 x lt 7 40 17 8 1018 8 178 188 2100 2220 4205 4441 206 In 7 pitch mode the system can process paper from 8 inches by 10 inches to 9 01 in
100. file replacement or deletion transaction to occur if the file to be replaced or deleted is secured and the operator s logon level is not 5 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 73 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES Card image file processing The FILE parameter is checked for valid parameters and an appropriate amount of disk space is made available for the file e Ifthe destination file type is not acceptable for a card image file the preceding DJDE packet is printed on an OPRINFO page together with the message FILE PROCESSING ERROR ILLEGAL DESTINATION FILE TYPE Input then proceeds to read and discard the extent of the file e fthe file name is improperly specified the preceding DJDE packet is printed on an OPRINFO page together with the message FILE PROCESSING ERROR INVALID DESTINATION FILE NAME Input then proceeds to process the data as variable text data e f more card image records are read than are predicted by the parameter specifying the maximum number of card images the extra records are read and discarded and the preceding DJDE packet is printed on an OPRINFO page together with the message FILE xxx yyy OVERFLOW EXCESS CARD IMAGES LOST e ifthe file cannot be created due to insufficient space on the disk the preceding DJDE packet is printed on an OPRINFO page together with the
101. first as these two parameters are order dependent The Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS does not process 2 color graphics Examples OUTPUT RAPHICS BATCH ESOLUTION 300 uo OUTPUT GRAPHICS MOVE ESOLUTION 300 URGE NO LES XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 67 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS IMAGE Syntax Options Considerations Examples This parameter specifies for batch mode processing only the initial graphic imaging parameters to be used OUTPUT IMAGE option s Table 6 50 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 51 IMAGE parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s vpos Specifies the vertical position of the top edge of the graphic as an offset relative to 0 0 on the current physical page the position that would be specified by a PDE BEGIN of 0 0 This parameter is specified as a decimal number with up to three digits to the right of the decimal point and may be in the following units e DOTS e centimeters CM e inches IN e user defined unit UN If no units are specified inches are assumed An xdot is 1 600 unit of measurement hpos Specifies the horizontal position of the left edge of the graphic as an offset relative to 0 0 on the current physical page The form of the specification is the same as for vpos n d Specifies the reference scale factor Each parameter n and d must be an integer in the range of 1 t
102. font index value exceeds the logical record size the first font in the font list is used except when HOST UNIVAC is specified If HOST UNIVAC is specified the byte located at the specified font index offset is processed The font index byte must be located at the beginning of the record if Univac Fieldata and ASCII records are intermixed within the file Print line data When changing the print line data to a value greater than the default value 150 the LENGTH parameter of the RECORD command must also be changed accordingly Refer to the RECORD command section of the chapter Specifying input parameters PCCTYPE The PCCTYPE IBM321 1 IBM4245 is not intended be used when processing offline jobs Checks that the LPS online interface performs such as for bad or NO OP parameters are not done in the offline mode There is no check for bad or NO OP parameters and they are treated as undefined carriage control parameters in the offline mode and default to the carriage control parameter of print and space 1 line XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 39 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Examples This section shows examples of using the LINE command Example 1 LINE DATA 1 132 PCC 0 NOTRAN PCCTYPE IBM1403 FONTINDEX 133 The LINE command above defines the characteristics of the following record structure shown in figure 6 4 Figure 6 4 Sample data record structure 1403 Record PCC Font Lengt
103. font mapping is found range checking is based on the new orientation The range checking determines only if the BEGIN values are within the bounds of the page no check is made to determine whether the line will run off the edge of the page Input will use the first font in the PDE list the list that has been substituted for the new font mappings for the following system pages OPRINFO pages DJDE Label The following system pages use predefined forms and thus are not reformatted in order to print them in the same orientation as their associated jobs that is no font mappings or rotations of forms performed Graphic samples Graphic summary pages Accounting pages Short edge feed duplex printing differs from long edge feed LEF applications in that SEF uses a head to toe orientation for printing portrait pages while LEF uses head to head orientation Refer to the INVERT parameter of the OUTPUT command for alternate methods of rotating the page orientation For landscape printing however SEF uses a head to head orientation whereas LEF landscape uses head to toe orientation If you want to use 11 by 17 inch paper or any size that requires short edge feed SEF be aware that form source libraries FSLs forms in FRM files logos in LGO files and images in IMG files are not automatically scaled or rotated Refer to your DocuPrint 180 LPS Operations Reference for detailed information on scaling
104. font specification applies to input variable data as well as static CME data If a line number LINE and character position POSITION but no insertion text CONSTANT are specified the font change specified applies to input variable data at the position specified 6 18 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS LINE Syntax Options Considerations This parameter specifies the line range of the CME ac CME LINE option s Table 6 16 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 16 LINE parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s n n m n This option has the following components e n The initial line number of the copy modification rectangle m The number of lines to repeat the information If not specified the information applies only to the starting line A dash character indicates that information is to apply to all lines on a page beginning with the line indicated by n There is no default The line numbers specified in the LINE parameter must always be in ascending order In other words you cannot specify one line number then list another one of lower value in the same command For example the following command is incorrect and will not be processed CME1 LINE 2 3 POS 15 CONSTANT 6 HELLO FONTINDEX 3 LINE 1 POS 15 As you can see the first line parameter specifies
105. for you to enter another line of text Save the text file you have created on system disk by entering SAVE file id Remember that file id consists of file name file type Terminate the editing session To end the editing session without printing the work file simply enter END To end the editing session and print the work file enter PCE PCE represents PRINT CLEAR and END This provides a print version of your source clear the workfile and end the editing session in one command Obtaining files already stored on system disk Displaying the text of a file Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 To transfer the source code to a work file follow these steps Gain access to the file by entering LOGON 3 password Begin the editing session by entering EDIT Clear the work file of all data by entering CLEAR Retrieve the file you want by entering GET file name file type If you wish to see the lines of source code in the work file you can use any of the following options Display the entire work file by entering E 2 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE EDITOR QUICK REFERENCE Modifying the text in a file DISPLAY Display a particular portion of the work file by entering DISPLAY n y nis the starting line number to be displayed yis the ending line number to be displayed Display a single line or record of the work file by entering DISPLAY n nis the desired line Display a part
106. from page to page Text of changing nature such as various names and addresses combined with a form letter to make a complete document Page area selected by a forms designer for printing System issued message indicating that an error has been encountered even though the program has not failed Characteristic of type determined by how light or dark it appears Part of a command symbol symbol symbol that represents a category for which the possible options are requested In a command calling out a general category rather than a specific item within that category The purpose of wildcarding is to generate the options within the given category In the PC Ul the graphic display object that allows you to select options and enter information To record data in memory or an external storage medium Data protection feature implemented on magnetic media for example floppy disk 9 track tape to prevent stored data from being modified written over or erased XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY 23 GLOSSARY x axis xdot xerographic engine x height y axis ACT AFP ANSI ASCII BCD BOF BOT bpi bps BSC CD CDC CD IG CM CME cpi Horizontal axis on a forms grid Unit of measurement representing a fraction of an inch It may also be referred to as a picture element pixel or spot for example 1 600 spots per inch spi Component of a printer tha
107. from the system menu It does not allow files to be transferred while normal printing activity is taking place The DJDE FILE command transfers files while normal printing activity is taking place however the file to be transferred may need to be preconditioned to prevent trailing blank truncation by the host spooler A third method of file transfer using the LPS and host file transfer interface may be used to transfer user files and also allows an online user to obtain the status of the reports submitted for printing on the LPS A remote connection between the host and LPS is used for file transfer XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 63 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Valid download file types Files may be downloaded in two formats card image files and LPS labeled files Certain destination file types are not accepted for either LPS labeled or card image files These are file types OSD SAF SYS Y and TSK In addition card image format files are restricted to destination file types CMD FSL JSL MSC PCH TMP and TPF DJDE FILE command This DJDE provides a capability of loading card image or LPS labeled files to the LPS disk while a printing job is in progress The print job can be invoked solely for the purpose of downloading files in other situations the files can be interleaved with variable text data so that they are available when referenced by input or output processing In either case a DJDE pack
108. identified within a job descriptor library JSL Each SYSTEM command results in the creation of a JDL when compiled The SYSTEM command has the form jdl name SYSTEM JDL jdl name is a 1 to 6 character alphanumeric identifier specifying the name of the JDL to be created It must contain at least one alphabetic character For example SAMPL SYSTEM This command identifies the start of a SYSTEM command and the beginning of a JDL The jdl name SAMPL corresponds to the name of the JDL to be used when printing a job When DFAULT is coded for the jdl name the specification of a JDL parameter option in the START command is not necessary The catalog level allows the coding of commands common to several JDEs A catalog can then be referenced in an INCLUDE command in each JDE A catalog command level is identified by the CATALOG command and ends with the appearance of another CATALOG command or a JOB command CATALOG commands may contain the same commands which appear in the JOB command The CATALOG command has the form cat name CATALOG cat name is a 1 to 6 character alphanumeric identifier of which at least one character must be alphabetic The cat name is referenced by JDEs after the CATALOG command set has been defined For example POWER CATALOG In this command POWER is the catalog level identifier to be used in the INCLUDE parameter of a JOB command 2 12 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRI
109. in the current STOCKSET FEED cluster reference should always be used MAIN AUX Provide compatibility to existing applications OPR FEED OPR is equivalent to FEED MAIN Note that the terms cluster name and stock name are synonymous The default is OPR 8 38 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES FILE Syntax Options Considerations This parameter provides a capability of loading files to the LPS disks while a print job is in progress The print job may be invoked solely for the purpose of downloading permanent files Although intended primarily for use with online systems this parameter is not restricted to online use FILE option s Table 8 25 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 29 FILE parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s file name This option has the following components file type f s n file name This is a 1 to 6 character name used to identify the disk file e jfile type This is a 3 character file type symbol wv This is one of the following file input format parameters format L LPS labeled tape format default a 75 This is one of the following file storage parameters D delete after report printed permanent default e n This is the maximum number of card images default 120 For LPS labeled file
110. input processing Command _ Function BLOCK Input data block characteristics CODE Input code translation table PCC Defines printer carriage control code table RECORD Input data record characteristics SEFFNT Defines font mapping for short edge feed jobs TCODE Marked comparison type assignments VOLUME Input medium characteristics XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 1 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS BLOCK command Table 4 2 summarizes the BLOCK command parameters Table 4 2 Summary of BLOCK command parameters Parameter Specifies Offline Online DJDE ADJUST Block length adjustment value Y N N CONSTANT Block termination code Y N N FORMAT Length field recording mode Y N N LENGTH Maximum block size Y N N LMULT Multiplication factor to determine block length Y N N LTHFLD Length of field containing the block length Y N N OFFSET Location of the block length field Y N N POSTAMBLE Length of extraneous data at end of block Y N N PREAMBLE Length of operating system portion of block Y N N ZERO End of block criteria test Y N N The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options ADJUST This parameter specifies a block adjustment value which is added to or subtracted from the contents of the block length field to determine the true block length Syntax BLOCK ADJUST option s O
111. job descriptor DJD task compiles the dynamic job descriptor entries DJDE in the input data stream The DJDEs give the LPS instructions for printing based on IDEN command parameter specifications in the input data stream The output processing task uses the page logs written by the input task to load fonts graphics and variable data in the Advanced Image Subsystem AIS It coordinates the activity of the AIS with the printer In addition output manages delivery of the printed pages to the correct bins performs page recovery if necessary and performs accounting functions Print description language PDL processor The PDL compiler compiles an ASCII job source language JSL file into object code and saves it as a job descriptor library JDL file It also creates ancillary files like PDE CME STK LIB etc Forms description language FDL processor The FDL compiler compiles an ASCII form source language FSL file into executable object code and saves it as an FRM form file XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE OVERVIEW Preparing for a print job Before a print job runs the system administrator programmer operator and LPS work together System administrator loads fonts logos and signatures to the printer from tape floppy or the host Referto the DocuPrint 180 LPS Operations Reference for detailed information System administrator determines the fonts forms and graphics system parameters n
112. low level language Technology that uses a laser to transfer character forms to a page by direct or indirect means Static charge present on the photoconductor before contact with dry ink particles 1 Vertical distance between lines also called line space measured from a baseline of one line to the baseline of the next 2 Extra spacing between lines of type 3 In typography spacing between lines and paragraphs light emitting diode Solid substance that glows when a current is passed through it Often used for indicator lights on disk drives or modems as well as for displays on other electronic equipment long edge feed The movement of paper through the printer in the direction of the paper length the longer side of a sheet of paper Sheet the standard size of legal briefs 8 5 by 14 inches Paper sized 8 5 by 11 inches 216 by 279 mm In data storage a collection of related files or programs One horizontal flow of characters Control character that unless set to be interpreted as a line end causes the printing system to begin printing in the current character position of the next line Internal data structures providing a record in memory of lines to be drawn on a page Printout or display of the statements in a program usually used as a convenience in examining or editing programs GLOSSARY 12 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY literal load location log logical page
113. message NO SPACE ON DISK FOR FILE xxx yyy Input then proceeds to read and discard the extent of the file When a card image file record is read the PCC byte is ignored Block and record delimiters if any are used to determine record length Records with a length greater than 80 bytes are truncated to 80 bytes records with a length less than 80 bytes are padded with ASCII blanks to 80 bytes Character translation may be performed depending on the JDE in effect Sequence numbers are not inserted into the records prior to storing so the file must be retrieved by MERGE prior to editing in order to insert valid sequence numbers Any DJDE record serves to terminate card image record processing for the file being downloaded e Ifa DJDE record is encountered and one or more card image records have been written in the file the file is truncated to an appropriate size and closed If OPRINFOZYES the message FILE xxx yyy CREATED is listed on an OPRINFO page e Ifa DJDE record is encountered before any card image records have been filed the preceding DJDE packet is printed on an OPRINFO page together with the message FILE xxx yyy ERROR NO CARD IMAGE DATA and the null file is deleted 8 74 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES LPS labeled file processing File processing mode is concluded and print mode is resumed with the DJDE rec
114. modify the command characteristics of the existing job descriptor entry JDE DJDEs can take effect on a report to report page to page and record to record basis Enables you to replace certain parts of a report with predefined static data on selected copies or to specify font changes within the variable data Page description and report data from host resident software is sent to the LPS in a form that it understands therefore no additional formatting commands are required Many such host resident software packages communicate with the LPS in page description languages Formatted data is sent to the LPS from a host based document composition software package for example XPPI XDGI or PC based software through the front end processor These systems are often used for electronic publishing and can produce very sophisticated printed documents Data from these sources come in a form that the Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS can already understand there is no need for the operator to create forms definition files or the like as it is with the unformatted data described above XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 1 11 OVERVIEW 1 12 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE Purpose of PDL 2 Print Description Language PDL This chapter discusses the following PDL topics used to create and control print jobs Purpose of PDL e PDL command structure e JSL structure Creating separate command files
115. more than 500 reports the job cannot be run twice without exceeding the rerun count limit of 999 unless the operator first deletes all logs for the first job If the job has more than 1000 reports it is impossible to audit all reports The 1001th and successive reports will not log but will give an error indicating that the rerun count is exceeded Avoid jobs that have many short reports As noted above it is easier to examine a few reports rather than many small ones The Audit provides filtering tools for both situations but the storage display and printing of larger reports is far more efficient for larger than small reports If such jobs exist analyze them to see if they can be consolidated into fewer reports If small reports are necessary for other reasons the job may not be a good condidate for auditing Do not use LDT 0 in your JSL unless the job has only one report More than one report results in the earlier reports being overlaid by later reports As a result only one report will be audited the last one and it may contain unpredictable data from earlier reports in the job A JSL may contain a BTEXT statement and the job stream may contain BTEXT If both JSL and job stream contain BTEXT understand the following rules Ifthe job stream BTEXT precedes the first data record it replaces any JSL BTEXT No combining is done For example if the JSL has RNA and DPT parameters and the job stream has just an RNA parameter o
116. multiple values for a BTEXT parameter within the same packet sent to the PC UI only the last value is used For example if there are multiple DPT parameters specified in a DJDE packet which also contain the RNA parameter the last DPT parameter is used e Whena DJDE BTEXT is used it must precede all data from the page to ensure it will be forwarded to the PC UI before the page is processed The system controller ESS software does not check for this It is up to the user to code the application correctly Multiple DJDE BTEXT commands on a page must appear in the same DJDE packet because only one page oriented DJDE packet can take effect per page 6 50 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS The BTEXT report parameter s must precede the first BTEXT page detail parameter The ESS software does not check for this It is up to the user to code the application correctly Reports with multiple copies are not expected to be audited in the normal course of operations as in the case of check printing this implies multiple copies of checks To accommodate PDL record length constraints BTEXT commands that do not fit in one PDL record can span multiple records by grouping parameters under separate BTEXT commands Example MESSAGE BTEXT RNA CK0409 CJN HR0525 BTEXT RRA 153249 37 NSE 2490 BTEXT LDT 03 07 94 RSQ Y Note however that BTEXT parameters cannot span PDL
117. nested comment is preceded by a slash and an asterisk and succeeded by an asterisk and a slash An acceptable nested comment format is as follows comment nested comment 2 4 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE PDL Syntax rules When entering your JSL records on the system controller keyboard make sure to follow these rules Use commas or blanks to separate the individual left and right part parameters of a command Use parentheses to enclose multiple right parts List parameter options in the sequence shown in this manual To specify a particular option but not the options preceding it use commas or blanks as place holders for the options you do not specify For example the OUTPUT command BFORM parameter has three options BFORM form id init copies To specify the form name form id and number of copies but not the initial copy init on which the backside form BFORM is printed enter BFORM SMLFRM 2 The second comma after SMLFRM tells the system that 2 specifies the number of copies on which the form is printed Use blanks anywhere in the JSL except in keywords and constants e Abbreviate command and parameter keywords to the first three letters for example POSITION or POS OUTPUT or OUT The only exception is FOR which the system interprets as the parameter FORMAT instead of FORM Therefore make sure to use
118. note 8 23 BATCH 8 24 BEGIN 8 24 BFORM 8 25 BOF 8 26 BTEXT 8 26 Parameter rules 8 29 Points to note 8 30 C 8 33 CANCEL 8 34 COLLATE 8 34 COPIES 8 35 DATA 8 36 DESTINATION 8 36 DUPLEX 8 37 END 8 37 FEED 8 38 FILE 8 39 FONTINDEX 8 40 FONTS 8 40 Points to note 8 41 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE xvii TABLE OF CONTENTS FORMAT 8 42 FORMS 8 42 Points to note 8 43 GRAPHICS 8 44 IMAGE 8 46 INVERT 8 47 ITEXT 8 48 JDE 8 48 JDL 8 49 MAP 8 49 MARGIN 8 50 MODIFY 8 51 NUMBER 8 52 OTEXT 8 53 OVERPRINT 8 54 PMODE 8 55 RFORM 8 55 RTEXT 8 56 SAVE 8 57 SEFMAP 8 58 SEPARATORS 8 59 SF1FUNCTION 8 60 SF2FUNCTION 8 60 SHIFT 8 61 SIDE 8 62 SNUMBER 8 63 SPLIT 8 64 SRECOVER 8 65 STIMING 8 66 STOCKS 8 66 TMODE 8 67 TOF 8 67 TRANS 8 68 XSHIFT 8 68 Points to note 8 69 Examples 8 70 Example 1 8 70 Example 2 8 71 xviii XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE TABLE OF CONTENTS DJDE FILE parameter 8 72 Points to note 8 73 File effectiveness 8 73 File replacement and deletion 8 73 Card image file processing 8 74 LPS labeled file processing 8 75 Delimited records for LPS labeled files 8 76 9 Using graphics 9 1 Graphics considerations 9 1 Input for graphics 9 2 Processing modes 9 2 Rando
119. of the MASK parameter to determine whether a particular field in a data record contains one of several different 6 character serial number formats Possible formats are xx999x x999x9 and 99x999 For this example x represents any alphabetic character and 9 represents any numeric character If the input code type is EBCDIC the VOLUME command includes TCODE EBCDIC The TABLE command to find the format x999x9 within the input data stream would look like 1 TABLE MASK 2 Q CONSTANT 0 5 Q The characters used in the MASK parameter occupy numbered positions beginning with 0 separated by commas These position numbers in the MASK parameter are used as type numbers Therefore the mask character to type associations listed in table 7 33 are made for the above TABLE command Table 7 33 Mask character to type associations for the TABLE command Character Type Meaning None Make no comparison 96 1 Standard default any numeric 0 9 2 Standard default any alphabetic A Z a z The data string characters in the positions corresponding to those occupied by the CONSTANT parameter are tested for type 2 in the example alphabetic A Z or a z Characters corresponding positionally with a are tested for type 1 numeric 0 9 If the string specified in the CONSTANT parameter included a the corresponding data character from the input stream is considered equal without any comparison bei
120. of the next record occurs immediately NONE Does not invoke the optimization parameter XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 47 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS OSCHN This parameter specifies the channel the system uses to signal the end of a report generated by an IBM OS Writer Syntax VOLUME OSCHN option s Options Table 4 52 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 52 OSCHN parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s value Specifies the vertical format unit VFU channel the System uses to signal the end of a report When a skip determined by the printer carriage control PCC field within a logical record to the specified channel occurs the IBM OS Writer banner page is considered found The default is 9 OSHDP This parameter specifies the number of header banner pages generated by an IBM OS Writer Syntax VOLUME OSHDP option s Options Table 4 53 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 53 OSHDP parameter option s and definition s Option s value Definition s Specifies the number of header pages which precede the report The default is 0 4 48 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS OSTLP Syntax Options PLABEL This parameter specifies the number of trailer banner pages generated by an IBM OS Writer VOLUME OSTLP option s Table 4 54 l
121. of the parameter options Syntax Options This parameter specifies a page offset for reports ROFFSET PASSES option s Table 7 18 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 18 PASSES parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s FIRST Specifies that the satisfied criteria causes an offset only on the first pass of a collated print run ALL Specifies that the satisfied criteria causes an offset on all passes of a collated print run The default is ALL 7 26 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE USING LOGICAL PROCESSING TEST Syntax Options Points to note This parameter defines test expression for offsetting pages to the stacker tray ROFFSET TEST option s Table 7 19 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 19 TEST parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s test exp The format and syntax of atest exp are defined in the Test expression definition section If a test exp is satisfied the record causes an offset in the stacker tray If a test exp is satisfied in duplex mode the logical page on which the record occurs is the first logical page of a new sheet There is no default Note the following when using the ROFFSET command The ROFFSET feature prints the record satisfying the test expression according to the normal job parameters If ROFFSET is specified for an un
122. option s and definition s Table 6 87 ASSIGN parameter option s and definition s Option s channo lineno Definition s This option has the following components e channo The number of the channel being assigned It is an integer in the range 0 to 15 The user may end the VFU command with a semicolon and start another VFU command without an id field to continue specification for the same channel or a different channel lineno The number of the output print line being assigned to a particular channel It is an integer in the range TOF to BOF There are no default assignments for any channel including channels 1 9 and 12 BOF This parameter specifies the bottom of form line number Syntax ac VFU BOF option s Options Table 6 87 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 88 BOF parameter option s and definition s Option s value Definition s Specifies the number of lines from the top of the output page to the last print line on the page bottom of form The bottom of form specification is independent of channel assignments Bottom of form should be greater than or equal to the largest line number assigned to a channel The maximum value for BOF is 255 The default is 66 VFU command 6 114 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS TOF Syntax Options Points to note This parameter specifies the top o
123. paper Process of releasing data from main memory and storing it temporarily until a peripheral device is ready to acceptit for example storing text before sending it to a printer Unit of measurement representing a fraction of an inch for example 300 spots per inch spi May also be referred to as a picture element pixel or dot Detailed written instructions in a program step A statement is written according to specific rules called syntax Information usually found on preprinted forms or overlays User defined name in the JSL that specifies a certain type of paper for printing a job See also cluster Collection of stocks to be used on a print job See also stock cluster Retention of information Primary storage refers to internal storage where data and program instructions pertinent to current operations jobs are held Auxiliary storage refers to external media such as disks or tapes for use at a later time Connected sequence of alphanumeric characters treated as one unit of data by a program Character used in a computer language to specify a particular function Efficient encoding of data suitable for high speed block oriented data transmission by using equal time elements Rules governing the structure of expressions in a programming language System response to a mistake in a command entry 1 In data processing a collection of parts and procedures organized to accomplish a set of specific functions
124. papersize in your JSL you must use the same method in your forms source library FSL PAPERSIZE B4 and PAPERSIZE 10 12 14 33 produce identical results in that they indicate long edge feed as opposed to short edge feed format Refer to the SEFFNT section in the chapter Specifying input parameters for detailed information on short and long edge feed B5 paper size is an option that requires that a retrofit kit be installed Include performance considerations when switching paper sizes across pitch modes Refer to Using pitch and the TMODE parameter effectively section in this chapter OUTPUT PAPERSIZE USLETTER FEED MAIN DUPLEX NO NUMBER 1 1 80 FORMAT SMPPOE XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 75 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS PURGE RESOLUTION Syntax Options This parameter specifies whether or not the system should delete graphic disk files at the end of report This is only true for document interleaved OUTPUT PURGE option s Table 6 58 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 59 PURGE parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s NO Specifies that graphic disk files should not be deleted YES Specifies that all IMG graphics files created or replaced by document interleaved graphic processing for this report should be deleted at the end of the report printing The default is Y
125. printed If the report is being printed in duplex mode report delimiters are printed on a single sided duplex output page The parameter BOTH in duplex is treated as BIN The default is NONE TEST This parameter defines test expression for end of report conditions for either change mode or constant criteria Syntax RSTACK TEST option s Options 7 28 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 28 TEST parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s test exp Defines test expression for end of report conditions for either change mode or constant criteria The format and syntax of a test exp are defined in the Test expression definition section If a test exp is satisfied the record specifies an end of report condition There is no default XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 7 39 USING LOGICAL PROCESSING Points to note Example Note the following when using the RSTACK command If the TEST expression on the RSTACK command consists solely of a change mode CRITERIA command DELIMITER NO must be coded An RSTACK command containing a TEST expression specifying a constant mode CRITERIA command and DELIMITER NO can be used to detect a heading of a report as a report boundary A record which is an RSTACK delimiter that is it satisfies the TEST expression cannot be deleted from or not selected for printing by the RSELECT or RDELETE logical processing If
126. printing it messages the OCS task that the job has completed printing The OCS task displays the following message to the operator JOB XXX HAS COMPLETED PRINTING XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE OVERVIEW Input data types Unformatted data The LPS can work effectively in many different environments and it has the capability to handle input from a wide variety of sources Whether you are using the LPS in an offline capacity connected directly to a host computer or remotely over phone lines input data for printing is sent to the printer in one of two forms e Unformatted Formatted Unformatted data that is raw data from a computer file is selected formatted and combined with form data boxes lines headings totals and so forth and graphics files to produce a printed report e The raw data can be sent to the LPS offline from magnetic tape online from a channel attached host The forms definition commands used to select records and format the printed output can be entered directly from the PC UI or from a host or PC based forms definition software package If you are using the LPS to create reports or other documents from unformatted data several elements are required to complete the job Variable data Variable data is the part of the report that changes from page to page In the example of an inventory report the variable data would be the part numbers descrip
127. programming a block of instruction data or both that can be located in main or auxiliary storage 2 In word processing a defined section of a document Direction in which data is printed on a report See also landscape page orientation portrait page orientation Part of a command other than the keyword See also keyword operator command On systems with XPAF a job that is sent directly from a host to a Xerox printer using XPAF without undergoing XPAF processing Unique word or set of characters that an operator or user must supply to log on to a system In programming to modify a portion of the program at the machine language level as opposed to modifying at the source program level PC user interface The PC hardware and Xerox supplied software which allows the operator to control the LPS by means of a mouse windows and icons See also object mode TEM print description language Language used to describe printing jobs to an LPS PDL describes the input type format characteristics performs the processing functions logical processing and describes the output type format font selection accounting options Sheet of paper on which printing is done See also edgemarking 1 Horizontal character spacing 10 pitch 10 characters per inch spacing is called pica and 12 pitch 12 characters per inch spacing is called elite 2 The number of page images placed on the xerographic belt during one revolution The D
128. received indexing is turned off even if FCB IGNORE Use of the PPI byte to shift the starting print position may cause problems in recognition of both DJDEs and banner pages XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 59 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Online record length Points to note The default record length supported by the Xerox laser printing systems is 150 bytes the same default as the 3211 4245 printer However the you can choose to use larger record lengths with the following restrictions For print record lengths from 151 bytes to 214 bytes do not use the print position indexing feature that is normally available on the IBM 3211 4245 This feature is invoked only with FCBs if FCB IGNORE is invoked this restriction is not significant For print record lengths from 215 bytes to 2140 bytes the user must not use the OPTIMIZE parameter of the VOLUME command which provides for online buffering for improved performance To select a record length longer than 150 bytes the user must specify the new value as the LENGTH parameter on the RECORD command and must also modify the DATA parameter of the LINE command to print the extended character or record length Note the following If the data record transmitted from the host exceeds the RECORD LENGTH specified the record is truncated to the specified record length and no warning is provided This action is consistent with the IBM 3211 4245 printer The on
129. records Every BTEXT parameter must start and end in the same PDL record To accommodate short record lengths in the datastream the information to be communicated in a BTEXT command can be placed into two or more consecutive DJDE records within a DJDE packet Example DJDE BTEXT RNA CK0409 CJN HR0525 DJDE RRA 153249 37 NSE 2490 END The maximum length of all BTEXT strings within a DJDE packet or in the JSL MESSAGE command is determined by the following 508 N Where N is the number of BTEXT commands in the JSL MESSAGE command or DJDE packet Due to the string length limitations it is imperative that BTEXT strings not be padded with unnecessary blank characters Example 1 DJDE BTEXT RNA CK0409 CJN HR0525 DJDE BTEXT RRA 153249 37 NSE 2490 END In Example 1 the maximum length allowed for the BTEXT string is 508 2 506 is 2 as there are two BTEXT commands Example 2 MESSAGE BTEXT RNA CK0409 CJN HR0525 BTEXT RRA 153249 37 NSE 2490 BTEXT LDT 03 07 94 RSQ Y In Example 2 the maximum length allowed for the BTEXT string is 508 3 2505 N is 3 as there are three BTEXT commands The maximum length of each DJDE BTEXT string is 255 Values for required BTEXT parameters not supplied in a DJDE or JSL will be supplied defaults by the PC UI if defaults exist for the parameter XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS
130. reports on the data tape XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 2 19 PRINT DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE PDL Example 5 i START ONLINE FORM GBAR This command processes online data according to the DFLT JDE in the online JDL file using the GBAR form Final modification can be made to job descriptor parameters through DJDE parameters in the job input data stream These DJDE parameters are discussed in the Specifying dynamic job descriptor entries DJDEs chapter Note FORM option is only valid online Hierarchy of replacement in an errored job descriptor library JDL The following discussion illustrates the effect of errors when the PDL processor is evaluating a JDL source file If an error occurs during compilation it is mandatory to fix the error and recompile Example The VOLUME command CODE parameter in the catalog level below contains a syntax error VOLUME CODE EBDIC If you use the incorrect JDL the code default ASCII specified in the system command level is applied to the job level job descriptor entry JOB1 SAM2 SYSTEM VOLUME CODE ASCII AA CATALOG VOLUME CODE EBDIC OUTPUT COPIES 100 JOB1 JOB INCLUDE AA OUTPUT COPIES 50 END 2 20 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 3 Creating a job source library JSL There are many commands available to include in your job source libraries JSLs and many ways of organizing them
131. section in the DocuPrint 180 LPS Forms Creation Guide for further information CME string constant Whether a font switch is applied to a CME string constant depends upon the order in which FONT and CONSTANT are specified in the CME If FONT is specified before CONSTANT the font switch applies to the string constant If FONT is specified after CONSTANT the font switch occurs at the line position immediately after the string constant Where a CME string constant is printed on a line depends upon where the POSITION and CONSTANT parameters are specified in the CME If POSITION is specified before CONSTANT the string constant is printed at the specified position If POSITION is specified after CONSTANT the string constant is printed at the current position position 1 if no other POSITION or CONSTANT parameter has been specified and a subsequent CONSTANT or FONT parameter will take effect at the specified POSITION RSX11host type When the host type is RSX11 CMEs are often applied twice per line because of the way the carriage return line feed is processed When mixing font switches and string constants the string constants may appear twice and be overprinted with two different fonts The recommended approach for RSX11 host types is to specify the string constant font before the string constant itself such as FONT 1 CONSTANT string FONT 2 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 21 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Ex
132. sequence 3 in figure 7 1 Refer to the Character type assignments section in the chapter Specifying input parameters for detailed information on the TCODE command TCODE parameter of the VOLUME command Allows you to select a set of standard default type assignments MASK and CONSTANT parameters of one or more occurrences of the TABLE command Together these parameters define exactly how the comparisons for that TABLE command are made using the set of type assignments specified by the TCODE parameter of the VOLUME command Masked comparisons using non default type assignments Performing masked comparisons using either a nonstandard character set or a standard set for which the default type assignments are not suitable requires coding the following TCODE command This command is used either to modify a set of standard default type assignments or to define a completely new set refer to processing sequence 3 in figure 7 1 Refer to the Character type assignments section in chapter Specifying input parameters for detailed information on the TCODE command TCODE parameter of the VOLUME command This parameter is used to specify the set of assignments defined by the TCODE command as the one used for masked comparison The MASK and CONSTANT parameters of one or more occurrences of the TABLE command The use of these parameters is the same as for comparisons using unmodified defaults XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERE
133. sheets whose management as a set or segment has been specified by PDL or DJDE command The EXPORT statement enables specification in PDL of the new Segment Management capabilities including the following Division of reports into segments Generation of separator sheets Use of segment numbers on separator sheets Use of segment recovery in place of page recovery Although the EXPORT command is primarily intended to be used with the bypass transport option it functions with any allowable destination If the OUTPUT command DESTINATION parameter specifies BIN segments are offset relative to each other when delivered and offsetting resulting from other commands is not processed Table 6 18 summarizes the EXPORT command parameters Table 6 18 Summary of EXPORT command parameters Parameter Specifies Offline Online DJDE SEPARATORS Retain an internal copy of the first data page and use it to Y Y Y generate segment separator sheets SNUMBER Print the segment number on generated segment separator Y Y Y sheets SPLIT The conditions for ending segments and turning segment Y Y Y management on SRECOVER Recovery mode Y Y Y STIMING This command is listed for compatibility only It is not supported Y Y Y on the DocuPrint 180 LPS The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 23 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS
134. show the effects of RPAGE command SIDE and WHEN parameters respectively 7 32 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE Figure 7 6 SIDE NUFRONT original sheet new sheet back side back side original physical side CASE 1 ORIGINAL PHYSICAL SIDE IS FRONT original sheet new sheet tront side back side front side back side original physical side CASE 2 ORIGINAL PHYSICAL SIDE IS BACK SIDE NUBACK original sheet new sheet back side back side CASE 1 ORIGINAL PHYSICAL SIDE IS FRONT original sheet new sheet tront side back side front side back side original physica side 1 1 CASE 2 ORIGINAL PHYSICAL SIDE IS BACK USING LOGICAL PROCESSING Effects of RPAGE command SIDE parameter SIDE BACK original sheet new sheet back side tront side back side CASE 1 ORIGINAL PHYSICAL SIDE IS FRONT origina sheet new sheet front side CASE 2 ORIGINAL PHYSICAL SIDE IS BACK SIDE NEXT original sheet new sheet front side back side front side back side original physical side CASE 1 ORIGINAL PHYSICAL SIDE IS FRONT original sheet new sheet front side back side back side original physical side CASE 2 ORIGINAL PHYSICAL SIDE IS BACK indicates action caused by execution of WHEN option XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 7 33 USING LOGICAL PROCESSING Figure 7 7 RPAGE command parameters no RPAGE option WHEN TOP
135. side shift value in inches BEGIN Scan line in inches as specified in the PDE hpos in portrait vpos in landscape ALI Anticipated scan alignment estimated inches equivalent 3 scans 01 in If m is computed as less than or equal to zero MARGIN should be specified as zero or ignored altogether Failure to do so results in printing blank even numbered pages back sides Note that varying the margin does not alter the appearance of the printed page because of the absolute positioning information embedded in the data The following are sample VOLUME commands for several different IBMONL LABEL NONE EL ANSI BMULT 6 RMULT 6 EL SPR CODE H2BCD host types VOLUME HOST UNIVAC LAB CODE ASCII LCODE ASCII VOLUME HOST IBMOS VOLUME HOS CODE EBCDIC VOLUME HOST B6700 LAB PLABEL YES VOLUME HOST H2000 LAB UNPACK T4X3H2 VOLUME HOS OCTDUMP CODE H6BCD UNPACK T4X3 EL STANDARD UNPACK T4X3 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 53 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Input sources Online printing systems Data to be processed by the printing system may originate from several sources These sources are magnetic tape offline processing a host computer online processing in 3211 and 4245 XPAF or XPMF VMS modes or communication through the Ethernet For information on XPAF refer to Print
136. skip to channel 1 and print parameter which usually begins a job of that carriage control type User defined PCCs may set alignment at either TOF or BOF Page overflow occurs when spacing to the next line causes the bottom of form line number to be exceeded Page transition occurs and line spacing is continued from the top of form line number Honeywell 2000 carriage control and Xerox carriage control are exceptions to this processing refer to the LPS Tape Formats Manual You must specify an identifier of the type ac when defining the VFU table and reference it in the VFU parameter of the LINE command The VFU command must precede the LINE command A command identifier of the type ac may consist of one to six alphanumeric characters A Z and 0 9 One of the characters must be alpha Table 6 85 summarizes the VFU command parameters Table 6 86 Summary of VFU command parameters Parameter Specifies Offline Online DJDE ASSIGN Assign line numbers to output channels Y Y Y BOF Bottom of form line number assignment Y Y Y TOF Top of form line number assignment Y Y Y The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 113 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS ASSIGN This parameter specifies the output line to channel assignments Syntax ac VFU ASSIGN option s Options Table 6 86 lists the parameter
137. specifies faceup delivery of pages Syntax OUTPUT FACEUP option s Options Table 6 45 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 46 FACEUP parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s YES Specifies that the sheets are delivered to the tray faceup Specify FACEUP YES for labels Delivering the sheets faceup prevents delamination when stacking NO Specifies sheets are delivered facedown to the stacker tray The default is NO Refer to the Points to note section for additional information XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 63 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS FEED Syntax Options This parameter controls the stock on which the page is printed OUTPUT FEED option s Table 6 46 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 47 FEED parameter option s and definition s Option s stock reference Definition s Specifies the stock assigned to a stock name by the STOCKSET command in effect at the time the page is printed FEED stock reference allows users to change stocks associated with a job without altering the stock references in the data application itself stock name Bypasses the reference feature but still requires that the stock name is specified as present in the current STOCKSET FEED stock reference should always be used MAIN AUX OPR These options provide compatibility to existing applications FEED
138. stock changes by modifying the cluster name in the STOCKSET command and recompiling it This way you avoid modifying the data stream or the application The cluster reference in JDL files and PDE files thus remains valid XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 5 7 DEFINING CLUSTERS Step 4 Use the FEED DJDE in the JSL file to specify the cluster to be used For example data for cover letter DJDE FEED BILPAG END data for bill DJDE FEED SUMMRY END data for summary sheet and in the JSL OUTPUT STOCKS BILLS FEED COVER Note The specified cluster must be identified in the active stockset If clusters are used in the print job the OUTPUT command requires the STOCKS parameter the FEED parameter is optional The INIFEED parameter of the STOCKSET command takes effect when no FEED parameter is coded If the STOCKSET command has no INIFEED parameter the first cluster specified in the STOCKSET command is used The following example produces the same results as the previous example BILLS STOCKSET ASSIGN CV102 COVER ASSIGN BL231 BILPAG ASSIGN SM233 SUMMRY INIFEED COVER OUTPUT STOCKS BILLS Note The STOCKS DJDE makes the STOCKSET command INIFEED parameter take effect thereby canceling the previous FEED parameter The STOCKSET command has an optional SYSPAGE parameter It feeds the system p
139. system It may consist of a display keyboard and certain switches or other controls Supplies such as paper and dry ink that are depleted used up during the course of normal printer operation Refers to Interpress job integrity under any of the following conditions excessive graphics forms or font use problems Program that supports the operating system by monitoring the flow of jobs tasks processing and so on within the system for example a data communication program Point on the x and y axis that determines a grid position To duplicate data in a new location or on an additional storage medium for example to copy files from disk to tape XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY 5 GLOSSARY copy sensitive cpi CPU data database data communications data file data processing data rate data storage data transmission debug decompose default Term used to indicate jobs in which multiple copies of a report will contain different data as with paychecks and banking statements characters per inch Designates the number of characters per inch for a particular typeface See also pitch central processing unit Interprets and executes instructions performs all operations and calculations and controls input and output units and auxiliary attachments 1 In general facts numbers letters symbols and so on which can be processed or produced by a computer 2 In data p
140. that might be used to control a group of smaller computers terminals or other devices See also host White space on each side of printed text 1 Selection of bits from a storage unit by using an instruction that eliminates the other bits in the unit 2 In accessing files a file name mask is used to reference one or more files with similar file id identifier syntax 3 In Interpress a mask serves as a template indicating the shape and position of an object on a page megabyte Unit of one million bytes XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY 13 GLOSSARY media medium memory menu message metacode MHz mode modem module mouse mouse pad mouse tray network Vehicles or devices by which information is stored or transmitted Classifications include source input and output Object or material on which data is stored for example magnetic tape or floppy disk Space in a device where information is kept or the ability of a device to keep information until needed List of available functions commands and options Unit of information transmitted by one facility to another in a form that the receiving facility can understand and act upon The standard message format consists of a header containing identifying and control information followed by the actual message content followed by a trailer indicating that the message is completed Same as native mode The metho
141. the record satisfies the RSTACK test criteria but is not a delimiter it can be deleted from or not selected for printing but still causes report separation Following is an example of using the RSTACK command 125 TABLE CONSTANT XEROX CRITERIA CONSTANT 1 5 EQ T1 RSTACK ES 10 I Cl DELIMITER YES ACCTINFO 14 19 HRPTNA 20 r Reports are separated by a record with the characters XEROX in bytes 1 to 5 relative to 0 Two reports are created as illustrated in the following figure The delimiter record is not printed with the report Refer to figure 7 8 for a sample RSTACK command usage Figure 7 8 Sample RSTACK command usage Character Position m2 Ist Record ACCOUNTING REPORT 1 Ist Report ACCOUNTING REPORT 2 2nd Report 7 40 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE USING LOGICAL PROCESSING RSUSPEND and RRESUME commands The print suppression logical processing function permits the user to delete from printing groups of records that are distinguishable at the start and end but whose intermediate records may not be unique or distinguishable Print suppression or resumption is invoked by the use of two separate commands RSUSPEND and RRESUME The tests for each command are independent and must be described separately Each of the commands can specify the full range of tests as described previously for the other logical pr
142. the constant string The default must be zero or it must be defined in the job descriptor entry The LENGTH on 4 by 3 packed format tape is the number of 6 bit bytes or characters in the record LINE command DATA parameter and RECORD command LENGTH parameter When the DATA parameter of the LINE command is changed to a value greater than the default value the LENGTH parameter of the RECORD command must also be changed accordingly Refer to the LINE command section of the chapter Specifying output parameters for additional information 4 24 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Example For online processing print position indexing must not be used if LENGTH greater than 150 is specified e Online versus offline JDLs An offline JDL statement set that modifies the system default values specifically in the BLOCK or RECORD commands may experience incorrect results if running an online job JDE In other words if an online job JDE is called out in an offline JDL that has changed the system default values of the BLOCK and RECORD command parameters the job may not print correctly It is best then to separate and run online and offline jobs JDEs independently from each other The RECORD command for the sample input record illustrated below would be coded as follows RECORD LENGTH 133 OFFSET 2 LTHFLD 2 PREAMBLE 4 ADJUST 4 FORMAT BIN
143. type Table 3 1 lists the filename option s and definition s Table 3 1 PDL filename option s and definition s Option s Definition s file name Specifies the 1 to 6 character name of the JSL file to be input to the PDL task If no file name is specified source input for PDL is read from tape and a JDL file is created on disk for each SYSTEM or JDL system command encountered file name JSL The file id which allows you to optionally include the file extension or file type to the file name in the PDL command If the file extension is used it must be as shown as JSL Any deviation aborts the command 3 16 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL Parameters may be any combination of the parameters listed in table 3 2 Table 3 2 PDL filename parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s NOPRINT Specifies that only source records that contain errors the diagnostics that apply to those lines and the PDL summary reports are printed during compilation If there are no errors there is no printout The default is to print all of the above plus the PDL source records NOSOURCE Specifies that no source files JSLs be created when the input is from tape This option has no effect when input is not from tape REPLACE Specifies that an existing JDL file may be replaced by a new output file of the same name T
144. values in job processing they can be thought of as a basic job descriptor entry JDE PDL commands need coding for only those parameters that must be changed to process your unique print jobs This coding process may be further specified by placing commands common to more than one job in the catalog command level When these coding features are properly implemented it is possible for the same command to be used in more than one job or JDE command level within a library The PDL processor evaluates user coded commands and applies the highest order error free definition to the job for printing This process termed the hierarchy of replacement is discussed in the subsequent paragraphs and illustrated in figure 2 6 Hierarchy within a job descriptor library JDL Figure 2 4 shows a coded JDL that contains four jobs or JDEs A command to specify the recording code CODE parameter of the VOLUME command of the input data appears in three places According to the system command level or JDL command set the default recording code of the input data is ASCII VOLUME CODE ASCIl e According to the catalog command level the recording code of the input data is EBCDIC VOLUME CODE EBCDIC e According to the job or JDE command levels for jobs one and three the recording code of the input data is Printable EBCDIC PEBCDIC The PDL command VOLUME CODE PEBCDIC overrides both catalog and system or JDL command level definitions For j
145. version 3 software but the form which is 600 spots per inch spi does not print on your 4050 4090 4635 or DocuPrint 180 which accepts only 300 spi 6 104 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Examples Example 1 This section shows examples of using the PDE command Example 2 PDE1 PDE PMODE LANDSCAPE BEGIN 861 7 FONTS L0112B LO1BOB PDE2 PDE PMODE PORTRAIT BEGIN 1 3 37 FONTS PO8TYA 6 8 P080AA 6 8 LI JDE OUTPUT FORMAT PDE1 PI JDE OUTPUT FORMAT PDE2 Two PDEs are defined and referenced in separate JDEs PDE1 specifies a landscape page and two landscape fonts PDE2 defines a portrait page and 2 portrait fonts with override line spacing Example 3 2UP PDE BEGIN 5 IN 5 IN BEGIN 6 5 IN 5 IN PMODE PORTRAIT FONTS P1012B Example of multiple BEGINs Two logical pages are defined on one physical page PDE99 PDE PMODE PORTRAIT BEGIN 10 0 FONTS PO7ITA P080AA END Example of a PDE that may be compiled by PDL separately from a JDL After compilation a PDE object file is created in the PDE directory which then may be referenced from within a JDL or by a DJDE The name of the object file in the PDE directory is PDE99 the same as its identifier on the source command XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 105
146. which follow offset Indicates the byte offset in the data record where the font index number is to be found init val Can be one of the following ONE or ZERO ONE specifies that an index value of 1 is associated with the first font in the font list When the bit opt parameter is used the init val ONE parameter must also be used ZERO specifies that an index value of 0 is associated with the first font in the font list an index value of 1 is associated with the second font in the font list and so forth The default is ONE bit opt A numeral having a value in the range of 1 through 7 which specifies the number of low order bits within the font index byte which in turn specifies an index value into the font list of the current PDE The default value is 4 If init val is ONE or is not specified the value of the font index byte in the data record is a number in the range 1 to n where nis the number of fonts specified in the PDE parameter 1 to 128 If ZERO is specified the font index is a number in the range 0 to n where n is the number of fonts specified in the PDE parameter minus one 0 to 127 The font index value must be present in every record If the FONTINDEX in the data record is greater than the number of fonts specified the first font in the list is used NONE Specifies that there is no font index The default is NONE 6 32 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS
147. with two trailer pages and one header page A character string of 120 asterisks beginning in print position one of line 66 occurs on header and trailer pages Tl TABLE CONSTANT 120 Cl CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 120 EQ T1 LINENUM 66 1 BANNER TEST C1 HCOUNT 1 TCOUNT 2 HJOBNO 121 6 If a job stream has two trailer pages with the character string DATE mm dd yy appearing on line 10 or 11 and beginning in print position 20 the BANNER criteria could be coded as follows T2 TABLE CONSTANT DATE MASK C2 CRITERIA CONSTANT 19 13 EQ T2 LINENUM 10 2 BANNER TEST C2 HCOUNT 0 TCOUNT 2 The MASK parameter specifies a masking character The CONSTANT parameter specifies both the constant data being compared and the character positions which contain variable data which are not being compared In this example positions 1 through 5 DATE as well as positions 8 and 11 the s of the specified character string contain fixed data Positions 6 7 9 10 12 and 13 which are identified by the mask character contain variable data and are not compared Header page count has been set to zero because criteria defining header pages have not been specified XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 7 17 USING LOGICAL PROCESSING BSELECT and BDELETE commands Interspersed blocks within one offline report or file may be either
148. 00th record is accessible In setting a separation boundary through the Bin Full Criteria task set refers to multiple copies of the same report Printing on one side of the page See also duplex printing Programs including operating systems procedures utilities and applications programs written for a system Software can be supplied by the hardware manufacturer or other firms but does not include programs written by the user To rearrange data records according to a particular item field which they all contain using a predetermined ordering scheme Terminal node at which data enters a network For example a computer transmitting data through telecommunication lines to several other computers or receiving terminals File containing source language statements or commands Language high level or low level used by a programmer A source language must be converted by a compiler to machine language for the instructions to be executed Program written in source language Blank area between words recognized as a character by word and data processing systems XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY 19 GLOSSARY special processing spooling spot statement static data stock stockset storage string symbol synchronous syntax syntax error system system controller Commands allowing the user to process special reports such as printing certain records or printing on special
149. 10 coded instructions see programs coding features 2 16 process 2 16 COLLATE parameter DJDE 8 25 OUTPUT 6 48 columns creating JSL 3 9 combining modes 7 8 commands END 2 13 IDEN parameter 1 6 JOB 2 13 keyword 2 3 levels catalog 2 12 to 2 13 JDE 2 12 JDL 2 12 JSL 2 12 to 2 13 PDL 3 6 communication operator subsystem 1 5 comparing strings 7 10 compiling files 3 2 JSL 3 16 to 3 17 PDL 1 6 components command comments 2 2 to 2 4 identifier 2 3 keyword 2 3 parameter 2 4 hardware AIS 1 2 LPS hardware 1 2 PDL identifier 3 6 keyword 3 7 parameters 3 7 physical 1 2 software 1 3 CONSTANT mode criteria 7 7 parameters ac CME 6 18 BLOCK 4 3 TABLE 7 46 constants right part 2 6 string ASCII 2 7 character 2 7 EBCDIC 2 7 to 2 8 H2 and H6 2 8 hexadecimal 2 7 keyword 2 6 octal 2 8 variable name 2 6 CONTINUE parameter 6 3 COPIES parameter DJDE definitions 8 26 OUTPUT command 6 48 COPIES processing 8 17 Copy Modification Entries see CMEs COVER parameter options 6 49 creating application types 3 4 files 2 16 job source library columns 3 9 editor 3 10 identifier naming 3 10 requirements 3 9 specifying 3 9 VFU 3 10 CRITERIA commands 7 3 to 7 9 identifiers 7 3 CYCLEFORMS parameter 6 50 D data form 1 10 print line 6 32 processing CME 1 11 DJDE 1 11 JDE 1 10 to 1 11 raw 1 10 unformatted 1 10 variable 1 6 DATA parameters DJDE command
150. 2 Assembly of components united by some form of regulated interaction to form an organized whole 3 Operations or procedures through which a business activity is accomplished Part of the LPS that provides interfacing capability data handling formatting buffering and operator control for the system Also referred to as the ESS GLOSSARY 20 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY system disk system file System generation system page system software tab tape tape density tape drive task telecommunications teleprocessing TEM Magnetic disk storage medium usually of large capacity that is not removable as opposed to floppy disk or disk packs Master software program that keeps all components working together Process whereby the system is made ready to operate Typically involves selecting the operative parameters and activating the relevant software Maximum area in which text and graphics can be imaged on a printing system Software programs that support and or control system functions by governing hardware operation and input output processes interpreting source programs and breaking them down into machine language distributing tasks among various processors and so on To move the cursor on a display or printer to a prespecified column on the display or paper most often by using the TAB key on a keyboard Recording media for data or computer programs Tape c
151. 2048 RECORD LENGTH 136 STRUCTURE VB LTHFLD 2 ADJUST 0 FORMAT BIN PREAMBLE 3 LINE DATA 1 132 PCCTYPE I1BM1403 PCC 0 NOTRAN System OVERPRINT PRINT NODISP VFU VFU001 level ACCT USER BIN TRAY yp CATALOG COMMAND SET FOR POWER VERSIONS CATPOW CATALOG VOLUME HOST POWER CODE EBCDIC BLOCK LENGTH 2048 PREAMBLE 6 LTHFLD 2 FORMAT BIN OFFSET 4 RECORD LENGTH 135 STRUCTURE VB PREAMBLE 2 LTHFLD 2 FORMAT BIN OFFSET 0 ADJUST 3 CATALOG COMMAND SET FOR GRASP CATGRP CATALOG Catalog VOLUME HOST GRASP CODE EBCDIC level BLOCK LENGTH 4096 PREAMBLE O ZERO YES RECORD LENGTH 135 STRUCTURE VB PREAMBLE 1 LTHFLD 1 FORMAT BIN OFFSET 0 ADJUST 2 THE FOLLOWING JDES ARE FOR IBM POWER GRASP VS TAPES POWER VERSION 4 0 TAPES 1 JOB VOLUME HOST POWERVS CODE PEBCDIC 2 9J0B INCLUDE CATPOW VOLUME HOST POWER RECORD LTHFLD 1 PREAMBLE 1 ADJUST 2 3 JOB INCLUDE CATPOW Job VOLUME HOST POWERVS CODE PEBCDIC level 4 JOB INCLUDE CATGRP VOLUME HOST POWER END In figure 2 5 note that online systems do not define the BLOCK command 2 14 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT DESCRIPTION LANG
152. 29 bytes X 5F 1 1 I l l 1 poem LTHFLD I I 1 1 lt a BSELECT offset 1 BSELECT length a 1 BLOCK PREAMBLE 4 8 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS CODE command A CODE command is referenced by the CODE or LCODE parameters of the VOLUME command whenever a user defined code translation table is required An identifier label ac is optional for the first CODE command within a JDE Thereafter each additional CODE command within the JDE must be labeled Therefore when multiple CODE commands are available within a JDE or JDL only one can be unlabeled The syntax is ac CODE Table 4 13 summarizes the use of the CODE command parameters Table 4 13 Summary of BLOCK command parameters Parameter Specifies Offline Online DJDE ASSIGN User defined code assignments Y Y N DEFAULT Standard character translation table Y Y N The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options ASSIGN This parameter defines user code assignment exceptions or the entire user character translation table Syntax CODE ASSIGN option s Options Table 4 14 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 14 ASSIGN parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s input output This option has the following components outpu
153. 35 4635 Y Y Page SRECOVER PAGE 4850 4890 4135 4635 Y Y Page STIMING 4850 4890 4135 4635 Y Y Page A 2 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PDL COMMAND AND DJDE SUMMARY Table 2 commands and DJDEs continued DJDE orienta Command Parameter Default LPS Offline Online tion FILE All N Y Record IDEN OFFSET 0 All Y Y OPRINFO NO All Y Y PREFIX All Y Y SKIP 1 All Y Y ac IDR ICATALOG DFAULT 4850 4890 Y Y Page ILIST 4850 4890 Y Y Page PALETTE DFAULT 4850 4890 Y Y Page JDE INCLUDE All Y Y Page JDL All Y Y Page ac JOB INCLUDE All Y Y LINE DATA 1 132 All Y Y Record online 0 150 All Y Y Record FCB PROCESS All N Y FONTINDEX NONE All Y Y Page INKINDEX NONE 4850 4890 Y Y Page MARGIN 1 POS All Y Y Page OVERPRINT PRINT NODISP All Y Y Record PCC All Y N PCCTYPE offline ANSI All Y Y onlinezIBM321 1 UCSB PROCESS All N Y VFU NONE All Y Y MESSAGE ITEXT NONE All Y Y Page OTEXT NONE All Y Y Page XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE A 3 PDL COMMAND AND DJDE SUMMARY Table 2 PDL commands and DJDEs continued DJDE orienta Command Parameter Default LPS Offline Online tion OUTPUT BFORM NONE All Y Y Page init defaults to first or next copy COLLATE YES All Y Y Page COPIES 1 All Y Y Page COVER NONE All Y Y CYCLEFORMS NONE All Y Y D
154. 5 4 Table 5 4 STOCKSET parameter s and option s Parameter s FEED Option s stock reference stock name MAIN AUX OPR STOCKS stockset name XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 5 5 DEFINING CLUSTERS Points to note Note the following when defining clusters and stocksets with PDL and DJDE commands Assign each cluster a unique logical name which begins with a letter and consists of 1 to 6 alphanumeric characters Make certain that the cluster name is not a keyword parameter or option used by the LPS Group the clusters used by each application into a stockset Stocksets convert cluster references to cluster names Cluster references are recommended but are not required The cluster name appears first in quotes followed by its cluster reference The cluster is identified to the operator by cluster name Try to define stocksets with a maximum of one cluster for each feeder tray on the LPS since the printer often cycles down when a report calls a stockset with more clusters than the number of feeder trays on the system You may define stocksets within JDLs or catalog stocksets separately in an STK file Like PDE files STK files are accessible to all JDL files If you define the stockset in an STK file you must recompile only the STK file to effect a stock change If you define the stockset in the JSL files which use it you must recompile all the JSL files to effect a st
155. 8 27 LINE command 6 32 DEFAULT parameter 4 10 INDEX 2 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE INDEX defining characteristics 6 31 clusters 5 5 to 5 9 paper requirements 3 13 system responses 6 3 deleting specialized records 7 24 delimiter accounting page 7 36 display 7 36 modes 7 35 parameters 7 38 DENSITY parameter 6 51 DEPT parameter 6 15 DESTINATION parameter DJDE command 8 27 JSL command 3 14 OUTPUT command 6 51 disk access separate 9 9 creating system E 1 to E 6 stored files E 2 display status 7 36 DJDEs application 8 11 to 8 12 file effectiveness 8 64 parameter 8 63 to 8 67 replacement 8 64 graphics options 9 8 online restrictions 8 18 operator information 8 13 page oriented 8 2 to 8 4 parameter definitions 8 19 to 8 62 processing optimization 8 18 specific commands online 4 59 record oriented 8 5 record specification 8 9 to 8 10 using 8 2 document and page interleaves 9 6 document interleaved file transfers 9 7 downloading 4850 4890 LPS applications 3 29 dump online 4 64 DUPLEX parameter DJDE command 8 28 OUTPUT command 6 52 duplex printing DJDE 8 16 RAUX command 7 20 Dynamic Job Descriptor task see DJD Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries see DJDEs E EBCDIC constants 2 7 to 2 8 editing sessions terminating E 6 editor task 1 5 End of report 7 13 END command DJDE parameter 8 28 JSL creating 3 14 entry lines modifying E 5 to E 6 ERR
156. 8 30 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES is processed The ESS software does not check for this It is up to the user to code the application correctly Multiple DJDE BTEXT commands on a page must appear in the same DJDE packet because only one page oriented DJDE packet can take effect per page The BTEXT report parameter s must precede the first BTEXT page detail parameter The ESS software does not check for this It is up to the user to code the application correctly Multiple values for BTEXT parameter s are accepted within the same DJDE packet but only the last value in the data stream is used Report parameters can only be specified at the beginning of the report If they are specified again at some later point in the report they are ignored Reports with multiple copies are not expected to be audited in the normal course of operations as in the case of check printing this implies multiple copies of checks To accommodate PDL record length constraints BTEXT commands that do not fit in one PDL record can span multiple records by grouping parameters under separate BTEXT commands Example MESSAGE BTEXT RNA CK0409 CJN HR0525 BTEXT RRA 153249 37 NSE 2490 BTEXT LDT 03 07 94 RSQ Y Note however that BTEXT parameters cannot span PDL records Every BTEXT parameter must start and end in the same PDL record To accommodate
157. 8 61 TMODE parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s width width This option has the following components unity width The process direction measurement that determines the default pitch mode e width unit Can be IN CM DOTS or XDOTS The default is IN Width values can range from the 7 inch equivalent to the 17 inch equivalent Syntax Options This parameter specifies the top of form line number It takes effect at the next record following a DJDE END The value parameter is defined the same as in the VFU command as defined in the chapter Print format commands TOF option s Table 8 58 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 62 TOF parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s value Specifies the number of lines from the top of the output page to the first print line on the page top of form The top of form specification is independent of channel assignments It should be greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to the smallest line number assigned to a channel The default is 1 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 67 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES TRANS This parameter specifies whether or not transparencies are used in the print job Syntax TRANS option s Options Table 8 59 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 63 TRANS para
158. AILER PAGES ONLY TRLP JOB BANNER TEST C2 HCOUNT 0 TCOUNT 3 He JOBS WITH BOTH HEADER AND TRAILER PAGES BOTH JOB BANNER TEST C1 OR C2 HCOUNT 2 TCOUNT 3 ee OTHER JOBS EOJ JOB BANNER EST C3 TCOUNT 1 JOB JOB BANNER EST C4 HCOUNT 1 POWER JOB BANNER EST C5 HCOUNT 2 END JDL coding ID level X System level if 2 level d Xf XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 2 15 PRINT DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE PDL Creating separate files for grouping PDL commands Hierarchy of replacement If you have multiple commands of the same type such as CMEs and PDEs you may want to create separate files for them to group like specifications together and to make your JSLs shorter and more efficient You can create these types of command files by simply listing them as you would in a JSL and complete the list with an END command before specifying a JSL s JDL coding identifier instead of after it Files containing groups of PDE and CME commands may be created as system or editor files Because you use the editor to create and modify your JSLs it may be more efficient for you to create these command files in the editor Refer to your DocuPrint 180 LPS Operations Reference for detailed information on using system and editor command files The system default values shown in appendix A are the more commonly used
159. Besure torevert the DJDEs back to FEED regular stock SIMPLEX YES or DUPLEX YES after printing the tab stock Ensure that PFEED does not specify the tray that contains the tab stock Use the OSTK command before running a tab job Specifying a tab as a form To define a form that is to be used as a tab in a form call out it is recommended that you code your applications with the following specifications JSL must specify PAPERSIZE USLETTER or 8 5 11 FSL must specify PAPERSIZE IS 9 BY 11 or 8 5 by 11 with 1 2 inch tab tray must be dedicated for tabs The JSL must specify which cluster name reference contain the tab stock Be sure to select an alternate tray as the PFEED source DJDE JDE JDL switch that defines the following PAPERSIZE 9 11 or 8 5 by 11 with 1 2 inch tab FEED tab cluster DUPLEX YES or DUPLEX NO FORM XXXXXX Width specified for ordered stock must be zero Specify TABS in the ordered stock statement so that dynamic width checking will be disabled A corresponding DJDE JDE JDL switch to print regular paper stock Note that the ordered stock statement specified ina DJDE JDE JDL and a regular stock DUDE JDE JDL must be exactly alike You may define the ordered stock statement at the job or the system level If you define it at the job level you must ensure that the ordered stock command defined from one JDE JDL to the other a
160. CME Allows certain parts of report output to be replaced on copies with predefined static data or to specify font changes within variable data EXPORT Directs printing of segments and segment recovery LINE Controls margin overprinting carriage control and so forth MESSAGE Sends message to operator during input or output processing OUTPUT Controls printing mode forms paper size and type offsetting and output destination PDE Defines page format page orientation fonts ROUTE Sends message and form for a routing page STOCKSET Defines a set of stocks used in a report VFU Defines vertical format control XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 1 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS ABNORMAL command The ABNORMAL command allows you to restrict certain operator functions and define system responses to error conditions Table 6 2 summarizes ABNORMAL command parameter functions Table 6 2 summarizes the ABNORMAL command parameters Table 6 2 Summary of BLOCK command parameters Parameter Specifies Offline Online DJDE ERROR System response to abnormal conditions detected Y Y N while processing or compiling DJDEs IMISMATCH The action to take when a specified ink requiresa Y Y N primary that is not currently loaded ISUBSTITUTE Specifies whether operator initiated ink substitution Y Y N is allowed OTEXT Optional WAIT message following recovery Y Y PAGES Specifies the maximum number of successiv
161. CODE EBCDIC PLABEL NO BLOCK ENGTH 3990 RECORD ENGTH 133 STRUCTURE FB LINE DATA 1 132 PCCTYPE XEROX PCC 0 NOTRAN VFU V1 TABLE CONSTANT 132 CRITERIA CONSTANT 2 132 EQ T1 INENUM 1 5 CME INE 9 POS 1 FONT 1 JDE OUTPU DUPLEX YES FORMS BARS MODIFY CME1 JDE OUTPU FORMS NONE DUPLEX NO COPIES 2 JDE BANNER TEST Cl HCOUNT 1 TCOUNT 0 If you are not sure which specifications to select try running a job using the system defaults and then adjust the JSL to meet your requirements You can modify an existing JSL in the same manner Keep the hierarchy of replacement described in chapter 2 Print description language PDL components and processes in mind It is much easier to specify generic or global characteristics at the system level for example than to call the same specifications out over and over again for each job or catalog XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 3 9 CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL Steps in creating a JSL e You do not need to use all command levels in a JSL Many JSLs have only ID system and job level commands Keepin mind that the specifications to select in your JSL can be changed easily By using the IDEN command discussed in chapter 9 Using graphics you can allow DJDEs to override PDL commands on a pag
162. COPIES 10 BFORM SMLBK OFFSET FIRST PURGE NO JOB2 JDE LINE VFU VFU2UP OUTPUT FORMAT PDE4 FORMS SPL2 COPIES 7 The SEFFNT command specifies font mapping The EXPORT command specifies how reports will be segmented The DESTINATION parameter of the OUTPUT command specifies where printed output is delivered When you are finished constructing your JSL you must let the system know you are finished by entering the END command plus a semicolon END 3 14 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL Finished JSL The following shows the JSL constructed in this section in its entirety XRXSPL JDL ID level commands VEUL VFU2UP VFU3 VFU ASSIGN 1 11 ASSIGN 12 66 TOF 11 BOF 66 VEU ASSIGN 1 11 77 ASSIGN 12 66 132 TOF 11 BOF 132 VFU ASSIGN 1 1 TOF 1 BOF 132 System level commands VOLUME HOST IBMOS LIN LOCK ECORD LABEL STANDARD CODE EBCDIC LABEL YES ENGTH 2660 REAMBLE 4 LTHFLD 2 RMAT BIN E H 136 REAMBLE 4 RUCTURE VB LTHFLD 2 OFFSET 0 FORMAT BIN nur Hj Uu E HO gt EH DATA 1 132 PCCTYPE ANSI PCC 0 NOTRAN VFU VFU1 ACCT USER TRAY IDEN PDE1 PDE2 CM CM cbr NR SSML MESSAGE
163. CRITERIA CONSTANT 4 4 EQ T1 BDELETE TEST CI XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 7 19 USING LOGICAL PROCESSING RAUX command TEST Feeding a single sheet of paper from the auxiliary tray may be controlled from within the input data stream If a data record satisfying the RAUX test criteria is found the page on which the record is found is printed on a sheet of paper picked from the auxiliary tray For simplex printing the next page is printed on a sheet of paper selected from the main tray unless it also contains a record satisfying the RAUX test criterion For duplex printing the need to pick a sheet from the auxiliary tray as the result of detecting the specified RAUX criterion on either the front or back side of a page is ascertained on a page pair basis before the first side is printed The FEED MAIN operator command refer to chapters 5 and 6 of this manual should be used with this parameter to prevent the auxiliary tray from being automatically selected when the main tray is emptied This parameter can also be used in combination with the PDL parameter FEED of the OUTPUT command refer to the chapter Print format commands and the FEED DJDE command refer to the chapter Specifying dynamic job descriptor entries DJDEs The following section describes the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options Points to note Syntax Options This par
164. CTURE 4 24 formats 4 68 structure 4 68 recovery automatic 6 8 registration shift and skew landscape 3 23 portrait 3 24 margins maintaining 3 24 REP parameter 6 7 replacement hierarchy 2 16 to 2 20 reports batch mode 9 6 processing 9 6 online 9 6 separation 7 13 Report task RPT 1 6 repositioning logical page 7 29 RESOLUTIONs parameters 6 65 statements 6 65 restricting operator functions 6 2 restrictions graphics 9 10 RFEED command 7 22 RFORM parameters DJDE command 8 47 ROUTE command 6 93 Right part constants 2 6 ROFFSET command 7 26 ROUTE command 6 92 to 6 95 RPAGE command 7 29 RRESUME commands 7 42 to 7 45 RSELECT command 7 24 RSTACK commands 7 35 to 7 41 delimiter modes 7 35 online usage 7 36 to 7 37 RSUSPEND commands 7 42 to 7 45 RTEXT command files cataloged 6 92 parameters DJDE command 8 48 ROUTE command 6 94 to 6 95 S SAVE parameter 8 49 SECURITY parameter 6 7 SEFFNT parameters MAP 4 29 SEFMAP 4 29 SEFMAP parameter 8 50 segment management 6 24 SEPARATORS parameter DJDE command 8 51 EXPORT command 6 25 separate disk access 9 9 SF1FUNCTION parameter DJDE command 8 52 OUTPUT command 6 66 SF2FUNCTION parameter DJDE command 8 52 OUTPUT command 6 66 shift and skew registration landscape 3 23 portrait 3 24 margins maintaining 3 24 SHIFT parameter DJDE command 8 53 OUTPUT command 6 67 side parameter DJDE command 8 54 RPAGE command 7 30 si
165. CUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 7 13 USING LOGICAL PROCESSING HCOUNT This parameter specifies the total number of consecutive header banner pages which must be detected to satisfy the test expression Syntax BANNER HCOUNT option s Options Table 7 7 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 7 HCOUNT parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s value Specifies the total number of consecutive header banner pages which must be detected to satisfy the test expression The default is 0 HJOBNO This parameter specifies that for each report a subfield of the first record satisfying the banner selection criteria is to be displayed as CUST JOB on the LPS system controller in response to the JOBS command or STATUS function key Syntax BANNER HJOBNO option s Options Table 7 8 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 8 parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s offset length This option has the following components e offset Specified in bytes relative to zero from the start of the user s portion of the record to the subfield within the record length The number of bytes in the subfield 0 to 6 NONE Specifies that no HOST job number is to be selected The default is NONE 7 14 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE USING LOGICAL PROCESSING HRPTNA TCOUNT Syntax
166. Commands processed when input is stopped for example when paper trays become empty are not dumped Print records longer than the specified RECORD LENGTH value are truncated without warning If records longer than 150 bytes are to be sent the RECORD LENGTH parameter in the online dump JDE JDL should be modified to the longer length Entering the operator SAMPLE command with parameters is not allowed while the system is online whether or not a job is running Exceptions to this are pressing the SAMPLE key or entering the operator SAMPLE command with no parameters e Operator HIP START command is accepted but HIP is unable to submit a print job while the system is online Downloading files from the host to the LPS Files may need to be downloaded from the host for various reasons In a production printing environment file storage space may be limited by the requirement of a large print file At some installations files such as form files which undergo periodic revision may be compiled and kept on the host computer and transmitted to the printer when required by a job System patch tapes may be required Other LPS font and logo tapes may need to be downloaded Three methods of downloading files are available e HOSTCOPY utility e DJDE FILE command e LPS and host file transfer The HOSTCOPY utility requires the system to be placed offline and idle then rebooted from disk to enter the operator HOSTCOPY command
167. DE which define how individual print jobs are processed A job descriptor library JDL command must precede all of the levels It provides the name of the JDL which is the compiled or object form of the JSL ID system and catalog level commands can be referenced by commands following them For this reason these commands must be numbered or named Command components These are the components of a PDL command e Command identifier e Command keyword e One or more parameters e Comments if desired Command identifiers Command identifiers if required are usually coded at the system level so that they can be referenced by commands at other levels in the JSL The following is an example of a VFU being identified at the System level VFU1 VFU ASSIGN 1 1 ASSIGN 2 5 TOF 1 BOF 66 VFU vfu id as a parameter of the LINE command can call out the SYSTEM level VFU identifier 1 at the CATALOG or JOB levels for example here in catalog B CATAB CATALOG LINE VFU VFUI 3 6 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL Command keywords Command keywords identify the command for which various parameters may be selected For example the command keyword OUTPUT may be followed by any number of its parameters such as the following OUTPUT GRAPHICS YES DUPLEX NO FORMAT PDFLT FORM BAR Command parameters Each command keyword is followed by one
168. DE FORMAT parameter PDEs must be precompiled to be accessed by a DJDE Standard PDE specifications are provided on the operating system software OSS system tapes as described in table 6 74 A PDE created as a separate disk file may be used as if it were part of the JDL that references it This is done by creating a JSL file containing only PDE commands and using the PDL processor to compile it For each PDE command PDL creates a control file on disk cataloged in the PDE directory The PDE command identifier is used as the file name When the PDE is referenced the system searches the PDE directory for the named PDE and if found loads it into memory for use in processing the report Refer to the Compiling the JSL section in the chapter Creating a job source library JSL for further information on this feature 6 98 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Table 6 75 Standard LPS print format Approx No of No of point Page size and BEGIN Default font PDE id lines columns Ipi cpi size orientation values id FMT1 66 132 8 1 13 6 9 11 by 8 5 18 66 L0112B FMT2 66 150 8 1 15 9 11 by 8 5 18 50 L0212A FMT3 88 132 10 7 13 6 7 11 by 8 5 14 66 L0312A FMT4 88 150 10 7 15 7 11 by 8 5 14 50 L0412A FMT5 49 100 6 10 12 11 by 8 5 17 50 L0512A FMT6 80 100 8 1 13 6 9 8 5 by 11 57
169. DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES SEPARATORS Syntax Options This parameter specifies that the printer software save an internal copy of the next data page in the report and use it to generate segment separator sheets If separators are already in effect when this DJDE is encountered it replaces the prior specification and subsequent separators are generated using the new specification SEPARATORS option s Table 8 47 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 51 SEPARATORS parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s FIRST Specifies that subsequent segments should have a copy of the saved data page inserted as the first sheet of the segment on a separate sheet of paper as a hardcopy segment separator LAST D Specifies that at least one copy of the saved data page should be generated on a separate sheet of paper as a hardcopy segment separator and counted as the final sheet in the segment Note In an on line environment a true banner trailer page if encountered will be used to image any LAST separators of the final segment in place of the saved data page BOTH D Specifies both FIRST and LAST as above NONE Specifies that no segment separator sheets are generated However the system continually updates segment numbering even if no separator sheets are printed If SEPARATORS or SNUMBER are specified again in a DJDE the updated number is used
170. DL a file is created under the TST file directory such as ROUTE1 TST This file may then be accessed by name with the ROUTE command RTEXT rtext id from within a JDL or with a DJDE For this example the RTEXT parameter would be RTEXT ROUTE1 RFORM if needed must be specified along with the reference to the RTEXT file RFORM is never cataloged with RTEXT This allows the user to select different RFORMs in different JDEs with the same RTEXT information The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options 6 106 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS RFORM Syntax Options This parameter specifies a form to be printed with all RTEXT pages If RTEXT data is not specified RFORM is not honored However RTEXT can be specified as one blank character or space to print an RFORM on the routing page without any accompanying text ROUTE RFORM option s Table 6 79 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 80 RFORM parameter option s and definition s Option s form id Definition s This is the name of a file cataloged in the FRM directory It is created by compiling a file of forms source commands called a JSL with the FDL compiler Refer to the DocuPrint 180 LPS Forms Creation Guide The RFORM parameter is not allowed in a ROUTE command which is being defined as a cataloged file but is specified in the
171. DL overrides COLLATE NO with COLLATE YES and notes this action with a warning in the JSL Refer to the Points to note section in this chapter for additional information COPIES This parameter specifies the number of report copies to be printed Syntax OUTPUT COPIES option s Options Table 6 39 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 40 COPIES parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s number An integer value with range 1 the default to 32767 For the copies DJDE parameter a value of 0 may be specified for the DJDE COPIES parameter in which case no copies are printed The copies parameter on the START command allows an operator to override this parameter when initiating a print job The default is 1 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 59 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS COVER Syntax Options Considerations This parameter specifies that cover pages are to be picked from the AUX cluster These cover pages may be placed at the front or back of each copy of a report OUTPUT COVER option s Table 6 40 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 41 COVER parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s NONE Specifies that no cover pages are to be picked The default is NONE FRONT Specifies that a cover page is to be picked from the aux Cluster at the front of each copy and is the first page of the copy
172. Definition s length The byte offset from the first byte of the record to the first byte of the user s portion of the record The length must be an integer in the range 0 the default to record length The default is 0 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 23 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS STRUCTURE This parameter specifies the general record structure of the input data Syntax RECORD STRUCTURE option s Options Table 4 32 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 32 STRUCTURE parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s structure May be any of the following PE FB fixed length blocked e fixed length e V variable length e variable length blocked U undefined length UB undefined length blocked For offline processing the tape label contents may override this parameter The default is FB Points to note Note the following when using the RECORD command LENGTH May be overridden by ANSI IBM OS Standard or Honeywell 2000 COBOL labels that specify record length LTHFLD OFFSET FORMAT and PREAMBLE The values for these may be overridden if STRUCTURE is changed as the result of ANSI IBM OS Standard or Honeywell 2000 COBOL label processing CONSTANT and STRUCTURE CONSTANT may be enabled as the result of STRUCTURE being changed to U in label processing However no definition is assumed for
173. DocuPrint 180 LPS will compile process and print these jobs ignoring the ink specified and using the default black ink The following PDL commands parameters and DJDEs allow ink specifications PDL commands and parameters include the following e ABNORMAL command MISMATCH parameter ISUBSTITUTE parameter e command This command consists of the INK parameter e command ICATALOG parameter LIST parameter PALETTE parameter command This command consists of the INKINDEX parameter OUTPUT command BFORM parameter CYCLEFORMS parameter FORMS parameter DFAULT parameter IDR parameter IMAGE parameter RESULT parameter NUMBER parameter XMP parameter e VOLUME command 3 28 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL DJDE commands DJDE commands include the following e ALTER e BFORM e FORMS GRAPHIC ICATALOG DFAULT IDR e e IMAGE INKINDEX e RESULT e NUMBER e PALETTE e XMP For detailed information on the syntax and use of these PDL commands and DJDEs refer to your Xerox 4850 4890 HighLight Color LPS PDL DJDE Reference Downloading 4850 4890 LPS applications to your DocuPrint 180 LPS You can also download color JDLs to your Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS When compiled on your Xerox 4850 4890 these JDLs can then be run on either your DocuPrint 180 or
174. E under this condition unpredictable results may SPLIT OFF Segment management processing is turned off when the LPS encounters a SPLIT OFF dynamic job descriptor entry DJDE In addition all segment management parameters are affected in the following ways SRECOVER defaults to PAGE recovery SEPARATORS are forced to NONE Segment numbering restarts to PART 001 if segment management processing is turned back on You must use the DJDE SPLIT min max to reinstate segment management processing after it has been disabled by the DJDE SPLIT OFF SPLIT NOW If segment processing is not in effect that is it either was not specified in the JDL or the DJDE SPLIT OFF was invoked the system ignores the DJDE SPLIT NOW Ending a segment A segment may be ended under any of these conditions The maximum allowable value is reached This value is taken from the specified value in the SPLIT command The end of report condition is met including the logical end of report as specified in the RSTACK command end of data condition is met SEPARATORS is specified in a DJDE The system encounters a SPLIT NOW dynamic job descriptor entry The system encounters a SPLIT OFF dynamic job descriptor entry Using a new separator page You may use a new separator page under these conditions A SEPARATORS dynamic job descriptor entry DJDE is specified end of report
175. E Logical page repositioning All of the above commands except BANNER are available for offline processing BANNER RAUX RPAGE ROFFSET and RSTACK are available for online 7 2 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE USING LOGICAL PROCESSING CRITERIA command The basic element used to describe a test for a logical function is the CRITERIA command Each CRITERIA command describes a field in either a record or block and the specific test to be performed The CRITERIA command requires an identifier that can be specified in any of the logical processing commands as a TEST parameter The definition of the TEST parameters for logical processing commands is described in the Test expressions section Specific TEST parameters are described in the individual logical processing command sections A CRITERIA command may use any or all of its three parameters to specify the conditions which must be met in order for a given operation to be completed A JSL may contain any number of CRITERIA commands which you can specify for a particular print job by calling out the appropriate CRITERIA identifier For example the following criteria are specified at the system level 1 ABLE MASK CONSTANT HE DE PAGE Cl CRITERIA CONSTANT 1 11 EQ T1 INENUM 1 10 2 ABLE CONSTANT TRAILER PAGE C2 CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 12 EQ T2 INENUM 1 10
176. EED first stock name All Y Y SYSPAGE All Y Y ac SYSTEM All Y Y ac TABLE CONSTANT All Y Y MASK All Y Y ac T CODE DEFAULT All Y Y TASSIGN All Y Y TRESET All Y Y ac VFU ASSIGN All Y Y Record BOF 66 All Y Y Record TOF 1 All Y Y Record VOLUME BMULT 1 All Y N CODE EBCDIC All Y Y EOV NOPAUSE NOEOF All Y N HOST IBMOS All Y Y LABEL STANDARD All Y N LCODE EBCDIC All Y N LPACK NO All Y N MAXLAB 81 All Y N MINLAB 80 All Y N OPTIMIZE NONE All N Y OSCHN 9 All Y N OSHDP 0 All Y N OSTLP 0 All Y N PLABEL NO All Y N RMULT 1 All Y N RSAT REMOUNT All Y N TCODE EBCDIC All Y Y UNPACK NONE All Y N A 6 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE Conventions B PDL command quick reference Symbols used in the command syntax are listed in table A 1 Table B 1 Symbols used in command syntax Symbol Meaning ac Command identifier Consists of 1 to 6 alohanumeric characters A through Z and 0 through 9 One of the characters must be alpha ad Command identifier Same as ac except restriction of having one alpha character is removed This identifier applies only to SYSTEM or JDL and JOB or JDE command sets id Reference to a command identified by an ac command identifier SC String constant A hexadecimal octal ASCII EBCDIC or character constant value A decimal constant italic
177. ENCE TABLE OF CONTENTS DENSITY 6 62 DESTINATION 6 62 DUPLEX 6 63 FACEUP 6 63 FEED 6 64 FORMAT 6 65 FORMS 6 66 GRAPHICS 6 67 IMAGE 6 68 INVERT 6 69 MODIFY 6 70 NTO1 6 71 NUMBER 6 72 OFFSET 6 73 OSTK 6 74 PAPERSIZE 6 75 PURGE 6 76 RESOLUTION 6 76 SF1FUNCTION 6 77 SF2FUNCTION 6 77 SHIFT 6 78 SIZING 6 79 STOCKS 6 80 SYSPPR 6 81 TMODE 6 82 TRANS 6 83 UNITS 6 83 XSHIFT 6 84 XMP 6 85 Points to note OUTPUT command 6 86 Examples 6 96 Example 1 6 96 Example 2 6 96 Example 3 6 96 Example 4 6 96 Example 5 6 97 PDE command 6 98 Multiple logical pages on a physical page 6 100 BEGIN 6 101 FONTS 6 102 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE xiii TABLE OF CONTENTS PMODE 6 103 Points to note 6 104 Examples 6 105 Example 1 6 105 Example 2 6 105 Example 3 6 105 ROUTE command 6 106 Cataloged RTEXT files 6 106 RFORM 6 107 RTEXT 6 108 Example 6 109 STOCKSET command 6 110 ASSIGN 6 110 INIFEED 6 111 SYSPAGE 6 111 Points to note 6 112 Example 6 112 VFU 6 113 ASSIGN 6 114 BOF 6 114 TOF 6 115 Points to note 6 115 Example 6 116 7 Using logical processing 7 1 Logical processing commands 7 1 Logical processing command format 7 2 Logical processing commands with TES
178. ENSITY DEFAULT All Y Y DESTINATION NO All Y Y DUPLEX NO All Y Y Page FACEUP NO All Y Y FEED OPR All Y Y Page FORMAT FMT1 All Y Y Page FORMS NONE All Y Y Page init defaults to first or next copy FOR defaults to FORMAT if FORMS not fully keyed GRAPHICS NO All Y Y Record IDFAULT first ink in ILIST 4850 4890 Y Y Page parameter IDR DFIDR IDR 4850 4890 Y Y Page IMAGE inches top left corner All Y Y scaled at 1 1 INVERT NONE 4635 Y Y Page IRESULT sysgened default 4850 4890 Y Y Page MODIFY NONE All Y Y Page NTO1 NO All Y Y NUMBER NO All Y Y Page OFFSET ALL All Y Y OSTK RES 4135 4635 Y Y MOD and POS Y Y default 1 SIZE 5 inch sysgened default PAPERSIZE YES All Y Y PURGE sysgened default All Y Y RESOLUTION NO All Y Y SF1FUNCTION NO 4850 4890 4135 4635 Y Y Page SF2FUNCTION NO 4850 4890 4135 4635 Y Y Page SHIFT All Y Y Page SIZING NO All Y Y STAPLE All Y Y STOCKS All Y Y Record SYSPPR depends on papersize 4135 4635 Y Y TMODE default value is inches 4135 4635 Y Y Page TRANS 4135 4635 Y Y Page UNITS All Y Y XMP DEFAULT 4850 4890 Y Y Page XSHIFT NONE 4635 Y Y Page A 4 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PDL COMMAND AND DJDE SUMMARY Table 2 PDL commands and DJDEs continued DJDE orienta Command Parameter Default LPS Offline Online tion ac PCC ADVTAPE YE
179. ERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS DEFAULT Syntax Options This parameter specifies an initial set of character type assignments for use with masked comparisons Default assignments for any standard character set may be specified by coding the appropriate keyword TCODE DEFAULT option s Table 4 38 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 38 DEFAULT parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s tcode type Available tcode type keyword parameters are e ASCII e BCD e EBCDIC e PEBCDIC e H2BCD e H6BCD BMBCD e value Initial typecodes are set to allow the following all numeric characters 0 9 are type 1 characters and all uppercase and lowercase alphabetic characters A Z a z are type 2 characters All other characters if any are untyped characters There is no default The full set of assignments for any nonstandard user defined character set may be specified by coding a value with an integer number ranging in value from 0 through 7 If a 0 is specified all the characters are untyped if a 1 is specified all the characters are type 1 if a7 is specified all the characters are type 7 The initial set of type assignments may be modified by specifying the TASSIGN and TRESET parameters XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 33 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS TASSIGN This parameter associates one or more specified characte
180. ES A DJDE SAVE specification may be used to override the purging of specific files Syntax Options This parameter defines the output coordinate system 300 or 600 spots per inch 300 specifies that output including fonts forms images and logos be printed at 300 spots per inch spi 600 refers to all fonts forms images and logos in FN6 FR6 LG6 and IM6 directories The Resolution statement is only included for compatibility The DocuPrint 180 LPS accepts 300 spi fonts forms images and logos and converts them to 600 spi using the majority interpolation scheme for printing The DocuPrint 180 cannot accept 600 spi fonts forms images and logos On systems printing at 600 spi references in the JSL to 1IN 2 54 cm or 300 dots are converted to a pixel count of 600 spi in the JDL the system converts all measurements to XDOTS OUTPUT RESOLUTION option s Table 6 59 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 60 RESOLUTION parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s 300 Specifies 300 spots per inch 600 Specifies 600 spots per inch The default is sysgen parameter 300 spi on the Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS 6 76 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS SF1FUNCTION SF2FUNCTION Syntax Options This parameter provides control over third party finishing devices that conform to the DFA standard Using this command
181. ETERS DEFAULT This parameter allows selection of a set of printer carriage control codes A table may be selected and then specific control codes may be modified with the ASSIGN parameters Syntax ac PCC DEFAULT option s Options Table 4 19 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 19 DEFAULT parameter option s and definition s Option s ccin Definition s Specifies the required action when a code has not been specifically assigned The assignment codes for various actions are described in the ccln option description of the ASSIGN parameter The system default PCC tables are defined in LPS standard EBCDIC pcctype Parameters and the tables that can be modified are ANSI B2500 B2700 B3500 B3700 B4700 B6700 H2000 H6000 IBM1401 IBM1403 US70 XEROX NONE The default is a table of PSP1 codes print and space 1 Considerations DEFAULT parameter must precede any ASSIGN parameter Any preceding ASSIGN parameter is not incorporated into the PCC table 4 16 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS INITIAL This parameter specifies the initial reference point TOF or BOF from which a report performs its first carriage control function Syntax ac PCC INITIAL option s Options Table 4 20 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 20 INITIAL parameter option s and definition s Option s
182. FEED cluster name specified If so the input task tests on the operator s specified cluster name Ordered stock OSTK All applications that are printed on the tab have pages formatted for tab printing If there is a PDE switch in the job stream that causes the BEGIN value to be shifted off the page BEGIN 18 8 6 the cluster criteria must already be met before processing the new BEGIN This allows the input task to bypass BEGIN value checking for tab stocks PDL ensures the minimum value for MOD is 1 and the maximum is 254 decimal It also ensures the value of POS is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to MOD Printing on a tab The DocuPrint 180 prints on tabs in both simplex and duplex modes When printing on 9 inch stock or 8 5 inch stock with 1 2 inch tabs the full imaging area of 9 inch is enabled It is limited however by the amount of image shift enabled When running a tab stock job you must not include the width of the tab when specifying the PAPERSIZE command However the width of the tab must be factored in when reporting the paper size to the system with the SET TRAY SIZE command on the Tray size screen or on the printer monitor command DJDE FEED Cluster name cluster reference is required to switch to tab stock or whatever it would need to switch the current cluster to a tab stock cluster This may include RAUX RFEED COVER FRONT operator keyin etc INPUT processes
183. For example DJDE STOCKS BILLS1 END Sesdataxi REPORT BOUNDARY data DJDE STOCKS BILLS1 END data DJDE STOCKS BILLS2 END data The data following the report boundary is printed using the JDE or JDL of the START command If it does not specify OUTPUT STOCKS BILLS1 the stockset changes Note If the stockset changes but the second stockset consists of the same clusters as the first stockset no cycle down occurs since for printing purposes the stockset has not changed Ordered stocks consist of any repeating sequence of paper stock types stacked in a tray These clusters function in the same way other clusters function XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 5 9 DEFINING CLUSTERS 5 10 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE Print format commands Print format commands serve many different functions the most common of which specify the physical characteristics of a print job define the placement of data on the page and identify system responses to error conditions Table 6 1 summarizes these PDL commands The function syntax and usage of the parameters available with these commands are described in individual sections of this chapter Table 6 1 Summary of print format commands Command Function ABNORMAL Specifies operations security and page offset on jam recovery ACCT Defines user and system accounting requirements
184. GIN Syntax Options This parameter specifies the left printing margin within each logical page It takes effect at the logical page following a DJDE END parameter The parameters are the same as in the LINE command defined in the chapter Print format commands MARGIN option s Table 8 37 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 41 MARGIN parameter option s and definition s Option s value value value type Definition s This option has the following components value The form nnn mm a positive decimal number with up to 2 digits to the right of the decimal point which is the distance from the left margin value type Indicates whether a value is specified in inches IN centimeters CM or character positions POS A value must be specified as an integer nnn if a value type is character positions The default is 1 POS Refer to the Points to note for the VOLUME command in the chapter Specifying input parameters for additional information 8 50 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES MODIFY This parameter specifies the copy modification entry CME to be used in report processing It takes effect at the next logical physical page boundary A cme id refers to a file which is separately cataloged in the directory Refer to the section in the chapter Print format com
185. GLOSSARY communication line communication link communications compatibility compiler computer computer language computer system concatenate console consumable supplies continuous printing control program coordinate copy Telecommunication line connecting devices at one location with devices at other locations in order to transmit and receive information Physical means such as data link connecting one location to another to transmit and receive information Ability of two devices to transmit information to each other Characteristic of computer equipment permitting one device to use the same information or programs as another device without conversion or code modification Software that translates instructions written in high level language into machine language for execution by a system Functional unit capable of performing substantial computations including numerous arithmetic or logic operations without human intervention during a run Computer oriented language consisting solely of computer instructions See also machine language Central processing unit CPU with main storage input output channels and devices control units and external storage devices connected to it To connect or link in a series as when files are grouped together for faster processing See also job concatenation mode Functional unit containing devices used by an operator to communicate with an operating
186. HEN BOTTOM NOW TOP RRESUME RRESUME BEGIN CURRENT NEXT NEXT RRESUME TEST test exp RSELECT RSELECT TEST test exp RSTACK RSTACK ACCTINFO offset length RSTACK DELIMITER YES NO NO RSTACK HRPTNA offset length NONE NONE RSTACK PRINT BIN BOTH TRAY NONE NONE RSTACK TEST test exp RSUSPEND RSUSPEND BEGIN CURRENT NEXT NEXT RSUSPEND TEST test exp ac SEFFNT SEFMAP font fonts font font SEFFNT SEFMAP font fonts font font NONE MAP file name XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PDL COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE Table B 2 PDL command quick reference continued Command Syntax Default acSTOCKSET ASSIGN stock descriptor Else ac STOCKSET IN I FEED stock name stock reference ac STOCKSET SYSPAGE stock name stock reference MAIN AUX ac SYSTEM ac TABLE ac TABLE CONSTANT sc scal MASK ignore chart charspeci charspecis ac TCODE DEFAULT tcode type TASSIGN typespec inputspec inputspec 4 TRESET typespec inputspec inputspec j ALL ac VFU VFU ASSIGN channo lineno channo lineno lineno L VFU BOF value 66 VFU TOF value 1 VOLUME VOLUME BMULT value 1 VOLUME CODE keyword id NONE EBCDIC
187. ICL2900 the PCCTYPE is forced to NONE The INITIAL parameter refer to the PCC command section in this chapter for any selected PCCTYPE except ANSI or HOST RSX11 USER and id is TOF For ANSI or HOST RSX11 the INITIAL parameter is BOF For USER or id the INITIAL parameter is set by the user in the PCC command The ADVTAPE parameter refer to PCC parameter in this chapter for any selected PCCTYPE except IBM1403 IBM3211 USER and id is YES For IBM1403 and IBM3211 IBM4245 ADVTAPE is set to NO For USER or id the ADVTAPE is set by the user in the PCC parameter Refer to the LPS Tape Formats Manual for more information on PCCTYPE tables The default is ANSI offline The default is IBM3211 IBM4245 online 6 36 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS UCSB This parameter specifies UCSB options Syntax LINE UCSB option s Options Table 6 31 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 31 UCSB parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s IGNORE Suppresses the host transmitted universal character set buffer UCSB If IGNORE is coded the CODE parameter of the VOLUME command defines the character translation For online systems only PROCESS Accepts UCSB for PROCESS use of a FOLDED or UNFOLDED translate table is controlled from the host system For UNFOLD characters not defined as printable in the UCSB are converted to blanks T
188. INT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS ITEXT Syntax Options Considerations This parameter specifies a text message to be output to the operator during input processing MESSAGE ITEXT option s Table 6 34 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 34 ITEXT parameter option s and definition s Option s NONE Definition s Specifies that no text message is output to the operator during input processing The default is NONE SC Specifies a text message of up to 80 characters passnum Specifies the pass copy ply to which the message text applies The message is output to the operator just before processing of the indicated pass copy ply is begun If no pass number is specified the indicated message is output at the beginning of the first pass WAIT Specifies that after the text is displayed printing is suspended until the operator has responded with a CONTINUE parameter Hexadecimal strings used in a MESSAGE command are interpreted as standard EBCDIC and are translated to extended ASCII XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 43 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS OTEXT Syntax Options This parameter specifies a text message to be output to the operator during job printing MESSAGE OTEXT option s Table 6 35 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 35 OTEXT parameter option s and definition s
189. Input Processing Time 00 00 07 Output Processing Time 00 00 13 REPORT COMPLETION CODES 0 0 Pages to Bin 1 Pages to Tray 1 Paper Path Holes 0 Lines Printed 66 Online Idle 0 Blocks Read 0 Blocks Skipped 0 RECORDS READ 79 DJDE RECORDS READ 1 Maximum Copy Count 1 OVERPRINTS 0 COLLATE YES MULTI SIMPLEX DUPLEX SIMPLEX JDE JDL USED 1 M0036 ACCTINFO INITIAL FONT LIST LOOTPB INITIAL FORM LIST HCF129 INITIAL CME LIST NONE XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Figure 6 3 Customer usage accounting report DATE 10 27 97 EPARTMENT JDL NODI EPARTMENT JDL OPERATIONS EPARTMENT JDL TASKSS JDL US ER ACCOUNTING REPORT PRINTING SUMMARY PAGES 21 LINES 2200 PAGES TO TRAY 0 PROCESSING SUMMARY JOBS 2 FILES 2 REPORTS 2 RINTING SUMMARY PAGES 105 LINES 1700 PAGES TO TRAY 0 PROCESSING SUMMARY JOBS 1 FILES 7 REPORTS 7 PRINTING SUMMARY PAGES 3 LINES 100 PAGES TO TRAY 0 PROCESSING SUMMARY JOBS 3 FILES 3 REPORTS 3 PAGI TIME INPUT 0 Es OUTP
190. JDL You must specify the variable identifier id to correspond to the identifier label assigned to the defining CODE command The default is EBCDIC Specifies a variable identifier you use in the CODE command to refer to a specific user defined code translation table The identifier id is required when multiple CODE commands are contained within the JDL NONE Specifies that data is not to be translated by input processing For example you select NONE for XPPI jobs that contain meta codes 4 44 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS LPACK This parameter specifies whether undefined labels LABELZUNDEF are packed or unpacked Syntax VOLUME LPACK option s Options Table 4 48 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 48 LPACK parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s NO Indicates that no unpacking operation is to be performed If YES is specified the UNPACK parameters specify the required unpacking method for both the labels and the input data The labels do not have to be packed even though the data may required unpacking The default is NO YES Indicates that the labels are packed MAXLAB This parameter specifies the longest physical block to treat as a label for undefined labels LABEL UNDEF Syntax VOLUME MAXLAB option s Options Table 4 49 lists the parameter option s and definition s Consideratio
191. L REFERENCE XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE Table of Contents Related publications iii Notice iii Introduction xxi About the reference set xxi DocuPrint 180 Laser Printing System document set xxi About this manual xxiv PDL syntax conventions used in this manual XXV 1 Overview 1 1 PDL features and functions 1 1 LPS component types 1 2 Hardware 1 2 Software 1 2 LPS hardware components 1 2 Advanced Image Subsystem AIS 1 2 LPS software components 1 3 PDL related programs and tasks 1 5 Operating system executive task OSEXEC 1 5 File control program FCP 1 5 Operator communication subsystem OCS 1 5 Editor task 1 5 Font editor task 1 5 Input processing task 1 5 Report task RPT 1 6 Dynamic job descriptor DJD task 1 6 Output processing task 1 6 Print description language PDL processor 1 6 Forms description language FDL processor 1 6 Preparing for a print job 1 7 Job flow process 1 8 OCS processing 1 8 Input processing 1 8 Output processing 1 9 Input data types 1 10 Unformatted data 1 10 Formatted data 1 11 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 Print Description Language PDL 2 1 Purpose of PDL 24 PDL command structure 2 2 Command line length 2 2
192. LOSSARY 6 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY descender desktop device digitize disk drive display DJDE DMR document dot download dry ink duplex printing EBCDIC edgemarking electronic publishing Portion of alphabetic character that extends below the baseline See also ascender x height Basic display screen of the PC UI Any piece of hardware other than the central processing unit CPU To express or represent data in digital binary form so that it can be processed electronically Device that can read or write magnetic media Viewing device monitor that visually communicates system warnings status and error messages and reflects operator interaction with the system on a display Dynamic Job Descriptor Entry Command within an input data stream used to modify the printing environment dynamically Command parameter that designates a Digital Equipment Corporation host system 1 Data medium and the data recorded on it usually permanent which can be read by you or a computer 2 Collection of information pertaining to a specific subject or related subjects Unit of measurement representing a fraction of an inch for example 300 dots per inch dpi It may also be referred to as a picture element pixel or spot To copy files using communication lines from the host onto LPS System disks Minute dry particles of resin and carbon black used to create images
193. MARGIN This parameter specifies the left margin on a physical page Syntax LINE MARGIN option s Options Table 6 27 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 27 MARGIN parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s value This option has the following components value value type The form nnn mm a positive decimal number with up to 2 digits to the right of the decimal point which is the distance from the left margin e value type Indicates whether a value is specified in inches IN centimeters CM or character positions POS A value must be specified as an integer nnn if a value type is character positions The default is 1 POS Refer to the Points to note for the VOLUME command in the chapter Specifying input parameters for additional information XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 33 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS OVERPRINT This parameter specifies the manner in which overprint lines are handled Overprint lines are print lines whose carriage control specifies printing with no line spacing since the last printed line Syntax LINE OVERPRINT option s Options 6 28 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 28 OVERPRINT parameter option s and definition s Option s over opt disp Definition s This option has the following components The default is PRINT NODISP over opt
194. MS NONE FORMAT PDE 1 RESOLUTION 300 Example 3 OUTPUT COPIES 3 DUPLEX YES SHIFT YES OFFSET FIRST NUMBER 1 66 132 COVER FRONT SEP FORMS GBAR Pages printed with this OUTPUT command are in duplex mode with a margin shift of 75 dots Three copies of the report are made the first of which is offset the second and third copies are stacked on top of the first Each page is numbered at the end of line 66 The form GBAR appears on each data page of the report OUTPUT COPIES 2 OFFSET z ALL Example 4 The commands in figure 6 6 illustrate use of the offsetting features of the OUTPUT command The parameter ALL offsets all copies of all reports FIRST offsets just the first copy of each report and NONE inhibits offsetting Figure 6 6 Output command offsetting features OUTPUT COPIES 2 OUTPUT COPIES 2 OFFSET FIRST OFFSET z NONE OUTPUT CYCLEFORMS FORMI1 NONE FORM3 or OUTPUT CYCLEFORMS FORMI1 FORM3 If there are ten pages in the report either of the above commands would cause FORM to be applied to pages 1 4 7 and 10 no forms to be applied to pages 2 5 and 8 and FORMS to be applied to pages 3 6 and 9 6 96 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Example 5 The commands in figure 6 7 illustrate the use of cycleforms with multiple copies Note that ever
195. NCE 7 11 USING LOGICAL PROCESSING Figure 7 1 String comparison parameters NE CONSTANT offset length EQ table id FROM LOGICAL PROCESSING COMMAND ac CRITERIA CHANGE offset length NE LAST LINENUM init count CONSTANT offset length CONSTANT 86 30 FROM LOGICAL Q ac table id MASK ignore char PROCESSING COMMAND CRITERIA 1 LINENUM init count charspec2 charspec7 DEFAULT VOLUME TCODE tcode id TCODE TASSIGN TRESET Processing Sequence Purpose String Comparisons with no Mask D Siring Comparisons with Mask 3 Optional User defined Set of Type assignments for Mask Comparisons 7 12 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE USING LOGICAL PROCESSING BANNER command The stacked reports feature enables the online and offline user to define a series of reports in a single file This is accomplished by specifying an end of report condition in the coded logical processing commands RSTACK online and offline and BANNER online use only End of report is that point in processing a report when all of the pages of a copy of a report have been formatted to disk and processing has begun on the next report Reports are stacked in a file if more than one report is included in a single file and separated from each other logically but not physically with tapemarks operating system la
196. NCE OVERVIEW Figure 1 1 shows the relationships between these operating system software tasks which load or invoke LPS operations Figure 1 1 Major LPS processing tasks Operating System Executive OSEXEC File Control Program Operator Communication Subsystem OSC Utilities Editor FDL Processor Input DJD RPT Diagnostics Font Editor PDL Processor Output Y Host Interface Processor HIP Note DocuPrintServer formerly XPSM and XPAF are supported by HIP but XNS Enet are not supported 1 4 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE OVERVIEW PDL related programs and tasks This section lists the programs and tasks most important to PDL Operating system executive task OSEXEC File control program FCP The operating system executive OSEXEC task is always running It interfaces with the LPS hardware and logs hardware errors In addition it queues devices manages resources establishes priority for software tasks and schedules processing The file control program FCP manages disk resources It manages and allocates all disk space creates all disk files and accesses disk files Operator communication subsystem OCS Editor task The operator communication subsystem OCS task acts as an interface bet
197. NT sc CME FONTS value CME LINE n n m n 1 CME POSITION n 4850 command INK inkindex 0 only ac CODE ac CODE ASSIGN input output input output output ac CODE DEFAULT code type EBCDIC B 2 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PDL COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE Table B 2 PDL command quick reference continued Command Syntax Default ac CRITERIA ac CRITERIA CHANGE offset length NE LAST CONSTANT offset length EQ NE tab id ac CRITERIA LINENUM int count ALL LINES END END EXPORT SEPARATORS FIRST LAST D BOTH D NONE NONE SNUMBER num cnum findex SPLIT NOW min max OFF SRECOVER PAGE SEGMENT ASK DEVICE PAGE STIMING INTERVAL sec DELAY sec INTERVAL sec DELAY sec IDEN OFFSET value 0 OPRINFO YES NO NO PREFIX sc SKIP value 1 ac IDR 4850 IDR ICATALOG ink catalog name DFAULT M On IDR ILIST f ink name ink name ink name IDR PALETTE palette name DFAULT JDE INCLUDE catalog id catalog id JDL JDL jal id ac JOB INCLUDE catalog id catalog id gt LINE LINE DATA pao length offline 1 134 online 0 150 LINE FCB IGNORE PROCESS PROCESS LINE FONTINDEX offset offset init vall bit opf NONE NONE LINE INKINDEX offset offset init
198. NT DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE PDL For example to reference the catalog named POWER in a job the job level command would be JOB1 JDE INCLUDE POWER Job or JDE level The job or JDE level allows the grouping of individual jobs together PDL commands coded within the job command level override the System commands PDL commands from a catalog command level can be incorporated as shown in the command syntax below For each job values not specified in any of the command sets are taken from the PDL defaults as defined in appendix A The JOB or JDE command has the following form jdl name JOB JDE INCLUDE cat name cat name3 jde name is a 1 to 6 character alphanumeric identifier It specifies the name of the JDE being defined cat name or cat name n is a 1 to 6 character alphanumeric identifier of a previously defined catalog name Examples JOB command JOB2 JDE JOB3 JOB INCLUDE POWER JOB4 JDE LINE VFU VFU2 OUTPUT FORMS AY2F A JOB command continues until another JOB JDE command or END command is encountered The catalog identifier in a JOB or JDE command as with JOB3 above JOB2 is used along with the identifier on the SYSTEM command set to initiate a print job When DFLT is coded for the jde name the specification of a JDE parameter option on the START command is not necessary END command A JDL terminates with the END command If one JDL is to follow anothe
199. OR parameter 6 3 EXPORT command 6 24 to 6 30 F FACEUP parameter 6 52 FCB parameter LINE command 6 32 online printing system 4 56 FDL compiler 1 6 processing 1 6 features and functions PDL 1 1 FEED parameter DJDE command 8 29 EXPORT command 6 53 fieldata translation C 4 file control program see FCP files compiling 3 2 creating 2 16 document interleaved 9 9 downloading 4 65 parameters 8 30 FONTINDEX parameter DJDE 8 31 LINE command 6 33 fonts memory 3 26 parameter ac CME command 6 19 DJDE parameter 8 32 PDE command 6 89 spacing 3 25 to 3 26 FORMAT parameters BLOCK command 4 3 DJDE parameter 8 33 OUTPUT command 6 54 formatted data 1 10 to 1 11 Forms Control Buffer see FCB FORMS definition command 1 10 parameter DJDE 8 34 OUTPUT command 6 55 Forms Description Language see FDL Form Source Language see FSL XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE INDEX 3 INDEX G graphics considerations 9 1 DJDE options 9 8 feature restrictions 9 10 handling modes batch 9 2 to 9 3 block 9 2 to 9 3 move 9 2 random 9 2 inputting 9 2 memory 1 2 online 9 9 parameters DJDE 8 36 to 8 37 OUTPUT command 6 56 PDL command options 9 8 performance 9 9 position 6 72 random mode 9 9 restrictions 9 10 grouping PDL commands 2 16 H H2 and H6 constants 2 8 hardware components 1 2 firmware 1 2 HCOUNT parameter 7 14 hexadecimal constants 2 7 hierarchy of
200. PARATORS BOTH D 6 24 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS SNUMBER Syntax Options Example Considerations This parameter specifies that the printer merge the current segment sequence number beginning with 001 into any separator sheets produced The format of the printed segment sequence number for all separators except a LAST separator in the last segment is PART nnn 8 characters nnn is a three digit number with leading zeros The format for the LAST separator in the last segment is PART nnn of nnn 15 characters EXPORT SNUMBER option s Table 6 20 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 20 SNUMBER parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s Inum cnum This option has the following components findex e Specifies the integer line number on which the segment sequence number string is to start Specifies the integer column number on which the segment sequence number string is to end findex Specifies the fontindex of the font to be used for printing the segment sequence number string If not specified the first font in the page s font list is used There is no default SNUMBER 1 75 Note that Inum and cnum are interpreted using the metrics of the font specified by findex the same as with page numbering Refer to the Points to note section in this chapter for additio
201. PDL REFERENCE A PDL command and DJDE summary This appendix may be used as a quick reference for information about PDL commands and command parameters The following definitions describe the conventions used in this appendix Conventions Symbols used in the command syntax are listed in table A 1 Table A 1 Symbols used in command syntax Symbol Meaning ac Command identifier Consists of 1 to 6 alohanumeric characters A through Z and 0 through 9 One of the characters must be alpha ad Command identifier Same as ac except restriction of having one alpha character is removed This identifier applies only to SYSTEM or JDL and JOB or JDE command sets id Reference to a command identified by an ac command identifier SC String constant A hexadecimal octal ASCII EBCDIC or character constant value A decimal constant S The s at the end of some PDL commands and DJDEs is optional The LPS column indicates the laser printing system to which the command or parameter applies ALL means that the command is applicable to all laser printing systems operating with version 3 software or higher The Online and Offline columns specify the input data stream modes of operation for the LPS A Y for a particular parameter means the parameter is available for that processing mode An N means the parameter is not available for that mode The DJDE orientation column indicates whether a
202. PDL REFERENCE 6 51 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Points to note Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Example 4 BTEXT commands are treated as text strings by the PDL DJDE compiler and forwarded to the PC UI to process Therefore it is possible that JSLs containing BTEXT will compile successfully even though errors exist in the BTEXT command string It is up to the PC UI to process the BTEXT commands and flag any errors found The same goes for BTEXT DJDEs e If BTEXT is specified and you are not running in PC UI mode INPUT issues a warning message and allows the operator to continue or abort If the operator chooses to continue the BTEXT commands are ignored Otherwise the job is aborted e Although the BTEXT parameters can all be specified under one command it is recommended that you group the report parameters and the page detail parameters into separate BTEXT commands Sample minimal data to audit a report with monetary and sheet reconciliation SDJDE BTEXT RNA CK0409 RRA 74698 32 NSE 4985 SDJDE BTEXT SEQ 1 PRA 153 65 TXT 901 R Adams END DJDE to print a report with sheet reconciliation only DJDE BTEXT RNA Personnel Reviews CUN HR052 NSE 249 S DJDE BTEXT SEQ 1 TXT 326769 Harold R Adams END Sample DJDE to audit a report with sheet reconciliation only and without page details SDJDE BTEXT RNA Admin 31 NSE 4230 END
203. PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS ROUTE command The ROUTE command allows the user to print identifying information text and an optional form on the page preceding a report The ROUTE command may be coded within a JDL or in a disk file of ROUTE commands Table 6 78 summarizes the ROUTE command parameters Table 6 79 Summary of ROUTE command parameters Parameter Specifies Offline Online DJDE RFORM Form to be printed with RTEXT preceding a report Y Y Y copy RTEXT Text to be printed preceding a report copy Y Y Y Cataloged RTEXT files When there are a large number of RTEXT parameters they should be precompiled and stored in a disk file instead of including them in a JDL After they are compiled they may be accessed by referring to their object file name from either a JDL or a DJDE RTEXT parameters must be precompiled to be accessed with a DJDE To catalog RTEXT parameters an identifier of the type ac must be included on the ROUTE command This identifier is used to reference the RTEXT parameters with the RTEXT rtext id parameter of the ROUTE command An example of cataloged RTEXT usage is illustrated below If the cataloged RTEXT is defined within a JSL it is also automatically applied to that JSL ROUTEI1 ROUTE RTEXT USER 1 1 33 64 RTEXT BLDG 1 1 34 64 RTEXT USER 2 2 33 04 RTEXT BLDG 2 2 34 64 After the above commands are compiled by P
204. PRINTED USLETTER and B4 are the only exceptions to this rule where the keyword and x y method will not create any incompatibilities When printing system pages if SYSPAGE cluster is not specified then INPUT will default to cluster MAIN SYSPPR defines the paper size to use for the system page Therefore if cluster MAIN contains a mix of USLETTER and USLEGAL then OUTPUT will search for the appropriate tray that contains the required paper size If SYSPPR is not defined then INPUT will use the current job s paper size SYSPPR The SYSPPR parameter will take effect for the following system pages DJDE error page OPRINFO parameter of the IDEN command Tape label page PLABEL parameter of the VOLUME command Report delimiter page PRINT parameter of the RSTACK command Accounting page ACCT command Graphic error summary page Short Edge Feed error page SYSPPR defines a paper size whereas SYSPAGE defines a cluster name reference Both parameters must agree in order to prevent errors similar to the way the FEED and PAPERSIZE parameters interrelate to each other XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 91 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Using pitch and the TMODE parameter effectively Paper sizes each have an associated pitch mode There are six processing modes available on your LPS These are called pitch modes A pitch is a term describing the n
205. RENCE USING LOGICAL PROCESSING RPAGE command The RPAGE command allows for the repositioning of the current or next logical page Refer to figures 7 5 and 7 6 for a pictorial description of the effect of the RPAGE parameters Table 7 5 summarizes RPAGE command parameters Table 7 20 summarizes the RPAGE command parameters Table 7 20 Summary of RPAGE command parameters Parameter Specifies Offline Online DJDE SIDE Side of physical page on which to reposition the Y Y Y logical page TEST Test expression for detecting an RPAGE record Y Y WHEN Portion of the current logical page to be positioned Y Y The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 7 29 USING LOGICAL PROCESSING SIDE This parameter defines the side of the physical sheet on which the repositioned logical page is to appear Syntax RPAGE SIDE option s Options Table 7 21 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 21 SIDE parameter option s and definition s Option s side opt Definition s Available side opt parameters are NUFRONT the default BACK NUBACK NEXT In duplex with no BFORM side opt produces the following results If NUFRONT is coded the specified logical page is positioned as the first logical page on a new sheet If BACK is coded the specified logical pag
206. RINT parameters are the same as for the LINE command Syntax OVERPRINT option s Options Table 8 41 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 45 OVERPRINT parameter option s and definition s Option s over opt Definition s Options are as follows PRINT Specifies that all overprint lines are printed as they would be on an impact printer with the second line printed over the top of the first line with no regard to previous data including character spacing which may vary between the two lines of data IGNORE Specifies that all overprint lines are ignored MERGE Specifies the same instructions as the PRINT option except when used with FONTINDEX or CME processing See the Points to note section which follows PRINT2 Specifies that up to two consecutive lines are printed per line one line and one overprint Other overprints for the line are ignored disp Options are DISP and NODISP These are nonfunctional parameter options which are preserved for compatibility with other Xerox laser printing systems The number of overprint lines is always printed on the accounting page 8 54 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES PMODE Syntax Options RFORM This parameter specifies the printing mode for each page LANDSCAPE indicates that printing is to be parallel to the long edge of paper PORTRAIT
207. ROUTE command in the JSL invoking the cataloged RTEXT file Refer to the Cataloged RTEXT files section in this chapter for further details NONE Specifies that no form is to be printed The default is NONE XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 107 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS RTEXT This parameter specifies text to be printed on a separate page preceding a report or copy ply Syntax ROUTE RTEXT option s Options Table 6 80 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 81 RTEXT parameter option s and definition s Option s sc sc passnum ALL ine coT fontindex Definition s This option has the following components SC Specifies the message to be printed 1 to 132 characters It is printed with the first font specified in the FONTS parameter of the PDE command refer to fontindex passnum May be either an integer number or the keyword ALL An integer number specifies the pass copy ply to which the text applies ALL Specifies that the text applies to all copies If there is more than one RTEXT parameter in a DJDE packet passnum must be in increasing numeric order The default is passnum 1 line Specifies the line number on which the first line of a block of RTEXT message is printed The default is line 1 for the first text string of the pass Otherwise the default is the next line of the page Only one RTEXT parameter may be spec
208. RT jde 91 LIS M L copies LHDREPORTS r r TDn DISC file ext I I Online START jde 9 copies LFORM form l Restrictions Note the following restrictions e The START command parameters positional and must be separated by commas You must enter a comma to replace a parameter that is not specified The options you specify in the START command override those specified in the job descriptor library XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 2 17 PRINT DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE PDL e Ifa specified font or form file fails a validity check during input the system aborts the job and displays the following messages OS8852 Invalid font file header OS8855 Invalid form file header e START with parameters does not execute when HIP print jobs are being processed You cannot specify a tape device when you have specified DISC or FORM Table 2 4 lists the START command parameter option s and definition s Table 2 4 START parameter option s and definition s Option s jde Definition s A 1 to 6 character identifier for the job descriptor entry to be used in processing the job If the jde option is not specified in the START command the user specified default DFLT of the job descriptor library is used jal 1 to 6 character identifier of the job descriptor library for the print job It must be listed in the file directory If the jd option is not specified t
209. RT command If the report mode is Multi or the system is online the delimiter is not displayed Status display The user has the option to include part of the first record of a report on the accounting page This command is selected by coding the ACCTINFO parameter which is normally used to print part of the first delimiter Online RSTACK usage The user has the parameter to display a subfield of the first record in a report in response to the JOBS command or STATUS function key This command is selected by coding the HRPTNA or HJOBNO parameter Note that HYJOBNO is not an RSTACK parameter When using RSTACK online consider the following Detection of RSTACK criteria within a not yet recognized banner page RSTACK record occurs prior to BANNER criteria line results in subsequent incorrect report separation Detection of RSTACK criteria in a recognized but incomplete banner page RSTACK record occurs after BANNER criteria line is ignored Detection of RSTACK immediately following report separation is ignored This prevents null reports If RSTACK is specified in a selected JDE or JDL that is a JDE or JDL invoked in a DJDE the following restrictions to online systems apply If RSTACK is not specified in the JDE or JDL of the START command the DELIMITERZNO parameter should be specified in the selected JDE or JDL Specification of DELIMITER YES is overridden If RSTACK is specified in the JDE or JDL
210. S All Y N ASSIGN All Y N DEFAULT DEFAULT All Y N INITIAL TOF All Y N MASK All Y N ac PDE BEGIN 18 IN 66 IN All Y Y Page FONTS L0112B All Y Y Page PMODE LANDSCAPE All Y Y Page RAUX TEST All Y Y RDELETE TEST All Y Y RECORD ADJUST 0 All Y N CONSTANT All Y N FORMAT BIN All Y N LENGTH offline 133 All Y Y online 150 LMULT 1 All Y N LTHFLD 0 All Y N OFFSET 0 All Y N POSTAMBLE 0 All Y N PREAMBLE 0 All Y N STRUCTURE FB All Y N RFEED TEST no default for clu def 4050 4090 4650 Y Y V3 8 4850 V5 0 4890 4135 4635 ROFFSET PASSES ALL All Y Y TEST All Y Y ac ROUTE RFORM NONE All Y Y Page RTEXT NONE All Y Y Page RPAGE SIDE NUFRONT NOFFSET All Y Y Page TEST TOP All Y Y WHEN All Y Y RRESUME BEGIN NEXT All Y Y TEST All Y Y RSELECT TEST All Y Y RSTACK ACCTINFO All Y Y DELIMITER NO All Y Y HRPTNA NONE All Y Y PRINT NONE All Y Y TEST All Y Y RSUSPEND BEGIN NEXT All Y Y TEST All Y Y ac SEFFNT SEFMAP 4635 Y Y Page SEFFNT MAP 4135 4635 Y Y Page SEFMAP 4135 4635 Y Y Page XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE A 5 PDL COMMAND AND DJDE SUMMARY Table 2 commands and DJDEs continued DJDE orienta Command Parameter Default LPS Offline Online tion ac STOCKSET ASSIGN All Y Y INIF
211. SHIFT parameter specifies whether the image of the form and data on a page is to be shifted and if so by what values This parameter is used to shift the image of the data in the y direction for three hole paper binding finishing and edgemarking OUTPUT SHIFT option s Table 6 62 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 63 SHIFT parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s V1 An integer value in dots for the amount of shift on the simplex page or the odd front side of the duplex page Each dot is 1 300 of an inch Range for v1 is 75 to 75 V2 A value in dots for the amount of shift on the even back side of a duplex page Range for v2 is 75 to 75 A standard size shift occurs if YES is specified v1 75 and v2 75 YES Specifies that a shift occurs A standard size shift occurs if YES is specified v1275 and v2 75 NO Specifies that no shift occurs v120 and v2 0 The default is NO If the origin of a print line falls off the page the entire line of data fails to print This is especially important for duplex portrait oriented pages where a miscalculated shift could result in the entire page failing to print When duplex shift is used the left margin must be at least 25 inches 75 dots wide When using the SHIFT parameter make sure that the data is not shifted past the margin and off the page Refer to the Points to note section of the VOLUME com
212. T parameters 7 2 CRITERIA command 7 3 CHANGE 7 4 CONSTANT 7 5 LINENUM 7 5 Test expressions 7 6 Specifying one CRITERIA command 7 6 Specifying two CRITERIA commands 7 6 Constant mode 7 7 Change mode 7 7 LINENUM parameter 7 7 Combining change and constant modes 7 8 Points to note 7 8 xiv XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE TABLE OF CONTENTS Examples 7 9 Example 1 7 9 Example 2 7 9 String comparison concepts 7 10 String comparisons 7 10 Character types 7 10 Masked comparisons using default type assignments 7 11 Masked comparisons using non default type assignments 7 11 BANNER command 7 13 HCOUNT 7 14 HJOBNO 7 14 HRPTNA 7 15 TCOUNT 7 15 TEST 7 16 TYPE 7 16 Points to note 7 17 Examples 7 17 Example 1 7 17 Example 2 7 17 BSELECT and BDELETE commands 7 18 TEST BSELECT and BDELETE commands 7 18 TEST 7 18 Points to note 7 18 Examples 7 19 Example 1 7 19 Example 2 7 19 RAUX command 7 20 TEST 7 20 Points to note 7 20 Example 7 21 RFEED command 7 22 TEST 7 22 Points to note 7 23 RSELECT and RDELETE commands 7 24 TEST 7 24 Points to note 7 24 Example 7 25 ROFFSET command 7 26 PASSES 7 26 TEST 7 27 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE TABLE OF CONTENTS
213. TERIA command describes a field in either a record or block and the specific test to be performed 7 48 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 Specifying dynamic job descriptor entries DJDEs Dynamic job descriptor entries DJDEs are parameters embedded within the input data stream and are used to modify the printing environment established by a job descriptor entry JDE the fly Dynamic job descriptor entry processing enables certain JDE parameters to be changed on a page to page or record to record basis The IDEN command coded in a JDE notifies the system that DJDE records are included in the input data stream This chapter contains information on these topics e Benefits of using DJDEs e and record oriented DJDEs JDL specifications the IDEN command e DJDE format DJDE record specification e Application of DJDEs DJDE operator information pages Job parameter modification restrictions e Duplex DJDE page printing e Effect on multiple logical pages Online DJDE restrictions DJDE processing optimization e DJDE parameter definitions PDL parameters for graphics e DJDE FILE parameters Table 8 1 lists the page and record oriented DJDEs Table 8 2 contains a detailed description of each of the DJDE parameters XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 1 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES Benefits of using DJDEs Some of the benefits derived from changin
214. TO 1 threshold It specifies the maximum number of pages a report may have in order for it to be printed NTO1 If however the threshold count is reached and an end of report condition is not met the system prints the entire report 1TON The default value of NTO1 is 50 physical sheets but n may range from 1 to 32767 When a value is greater than 100 the system generates a warning message Considerations When NTO1 YES PDL overrides COLLATE NO with COLLATE YES and notes this action with a warning in the JSL listing N to 1 printing takes longer to process than 1 to N printing because the system must process the entire report before beginning to print the job NT01 YES causes FACEUP YES to be specified XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 71 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS NUMBER This parameter specifies page numbering on the output pages of a report The page number character string is placed on the page at the specified line number based on the line spacing of the specified font If override line spacing is specified for the font it does not affect where the page number character string is to be printed Syntax OUTPUT NUMBER option s Options Table 6 54 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 55 NUMBER parameter option s and definition s Option s pnum Inum findex NO Definition s This option has the following components pnum Page number specifies t
215. TS J corresponding to a font cataloged on the system disk up to 128 fonts can be used with the font indexing capability e S Specifies an optional override line spacing value defined by either the print lines per inch LPI or the dots per print line DOTS to be associated with the font Maximum value for si is 30 LPI minimum value is 10 dots If unit LPI or DOTS is not specified LPI is assumed by default There is no default for LPI for s4 Considerations If an override line spacing value is specified lines printed using the font cause the indicated line spacing to be performed after the line using the font If different fonts are used on the same print line the line spacing value specified for the font of the largest character in the line is used to determine the position of the next print line 6 102 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS PMODE Syntax Options This parameter specifies the printing mode for each physical sheet ac PDE PMODE option s Table 6 77 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 78 PMODE parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s LANDSCAPE Indicates that printing is to be parallel to the long edge of paper The default is LANDSCAPE PORTRAIT Indicates that printing is to be parallel to the narrow edge of paper XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 103 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Po
216. This parameter specifies the location of the starting print line of a logical page for graphics The vpos parameter specifies the vertical position of the first character of the first print line on the logical page It may be specified in inches IN or centimeters CM The default is inches BEGIN option s Table 8 13 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 16 BEGIN parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s vpos Specifies a decimal number with up to three digits to the right of the decimal point for example 0 563lN and 2 35CM are all legal specifications hpos Specifies the horizontal position of the first character of the first print line on the logical page in IN or CM as for vpos All specifications are rounded to the nearest dot 1 300 of an inch for positioning of the logical page In specifying the location of the beginning of a print line on the logical page measurement is performed by viewing the page in the mode landscape or portrait in which it is to be printed There may be more than one logical page per physical page these are defined by the use of multiple BEGIN parameters If no BEGIN parameter is specified then the default is FMT1 8 24 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES BFORM Syntax Options This parameter specifies that a form be printed on the back side of a user page mus
217. UAGE PDL Sample online job descriptor library Figure 2 5 ONLINE JDL VFU1 VFU ASSIGN 1 4 ASSIGN 2 10 ASSIGN 3 16 ASSIGN 4 22 ASSIGN 5 28 ASSIGN 6 34 ASSIGN 7 40 ASSIGN 8 46 ASSIGN 9 66 ASSIGN 10 52 ASSIGN 11 58 ASSIGN 12 64 TOF 4 BOF 66 VOLUME HOST IBMONL OPTIMIZE NCC NDC NPR LINE PCCTYPE IBM3211 VFU VFU1 UCSB IGNORE FCB IGNORE ACCT USER BIN TRAY IDEN PREFIX DJDE SKIP 7 O0FFSET 2 O0PRINFO YES TABLES AND CRITERIA 1 ABLE MASK CONSTANT HE DE PAGE C1 CRITERIA CONSTANT 1 11 EQ T1 LINENUM 1 10 2 ABLE CONSTANT TRAILER PAGE C2 CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 12 EQ T2 LINENUM 1 10 3 ABLE CONSTANT EOJ C3 CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 3 EQ T3 INENUM 1 20 4 ABLE CONSTANT JOB C4 CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 6 EQ T4 INENUM 1 20 5 ABLE CONSTANT 10 C5 CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 10 EQ T5 INENUM 50 10 JOBS WITH NO BANNER PAGES DFLT JOB ye JOBS WITH HEADER PAGES ONLY HDRP JOB BANNER TEST C1 HCOUNT 2 TCOUNT 0 ag JOBS WITH TR
218. UT 0 2 SUMMARY MOUNTS 0 BLOCKS READ 220 BLOCKS SKIPPED 0 TIME SUMMARY HR MIN INPUT 0 75 OUTPUT 0 25 TAPE SUMMARY MOUNTS 1 BLOCKS READ 1100 BLOCKS SKIPPED 0 TIME INPUT ro OUTPUT 0 SUMMARY MOUNTS 0 BLOCKS READ 0 BLOCKS SKIPPED 0 SUMMARY HR MIN SUMMARY HR MIN _ E The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 13 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS DEPT This parameter defines the name under which accounting statistics should be accumulated for this report job Syntax ACCT DEPT option s Options Table 6 11 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 11 DEPT parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s SC A string constant of up to 31 characters representing a department code or name under which accounting information is maintained These 31 characters and including the character are allowed for the department code Refer to the Overall usage accounting section for further information on DEPT parameter usage The sc name should already be created in the accounting file prior to processing the job The default is the JDL name Example ACCT USER BIN DEPT MARKETING USER This parameter specifies destination of the one page accounting summary for eac
219. XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY input processing insert interface interpolation Interpress Interpress font utility IFU program Interpress master IPL JDE JDL job job concatenation mode job control job management JSL keyboard keyword Formatting control for the pages of a report To add text or graphics to a document Device by which two systems connect and communicate with each other Series of logical rules implemented in the printer to convert a 300 spi input video stream to a 600 spi output video stream Interpolation is functionally analogous to bit doubling 2x scaling except the logical rules result in superior output Xerox standard that defines digital representation of lines for printing Interpress documents can be printed on any sufficiently powerful printer equipped with Interpress print software Program used to convert FIS fonts to LPS fonts File written according to the Interpress standard initial program load For the optional open reel tape drive the internal initialization sequence whereby certain functions are loaded into random access memory RAM job descriptor entry Collection of job descriptions See also job JSL job descriptor library Collection of compiled job descriptions See also JSL 1 Set of instructions JDEs defining a unit of work for the system 2 In setting a separation boundary through the Bin Full Criteria task j
220. Xerox DocuPrint 180 Laser Printing System Print Description Language Reference THE DOCUMENT COMPANY XEROX April 1998 721P85530 Xerox Corporation 701 S Aviation Boulevard EI Segundo CA 90245 1998 by Xerox Corporation All rights reserved Copyright protection claimed includes all forms and matters of copyrightable material and information now allowed by statutory or judicial law or hereinafter granted including without limitation material generated from the software programs which are displayed on the screen such as icons screen displays looks etc Printed in the United States of America Publication number 721P85530 Xerox and all Xerox products mentioned in this publication are trademarks of Xerox Corporation Products and trademarks of other companies are also acknowledged Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions This document was created on a PC using Frame software The typeface used is Helvetica Related publications Notice The Xerox DocuPrint 180 Laser Printing System Print Description Language Reference is part of the ten manual reference set for your laser printing system The entire reference set is listed in the table below Several other related documents are also listed for your convenience For a complete list and description of available Xerox documentation refer to the Xe
221. Y Y N FEED Paper tray selection Y Y Y FORMAT Selection of page format descriptor Y Y Y FORMS Associates forms with report copies Y Y Y GRAPHICS Whether graphics are used and how Y Y N IMAGE Initial scaling and positioning for batch mode Y Y Y graphics INVERT Allows control of image orientation Y Y Y MODIFY Associates CMEs with report copies Y Y Y NTO1 On a report basis whether all copies of a particular Y report are printed first page to last 1 N or last page to first N 1 NUMBER Automatic page numbering control Y Y Y OFFSET Report offset control Y Y N OSTK Specification of ordered stock parameter Y Y N PAPERSIZE Paper size to be used for job Y Y N PURGE Default disposition of document interleaved graphics Y Y N RESOLUTION Output coordinate system in spots per inch spi Y Y N 6 56 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Table 6 37 Summary of OUTPUT command parameters Parameter Specifies Offline Online DJDE SHIFT Shifts image in the y direction Y Y Y SF1FUNCTION Controls the sheet finisher function number 1 Y Y Y SF2FUNCTION Controls the sheet finisher function number 2 Y Y N SIZING Controls matching the paper specified when the Y Y Y page is formatted with the available paper sizes in the trays STOCKS Calls out a specific STOCKSET to be used in the Y Y Y report SYSPPR Specifies the system page paper size for a job Y Y N TMODE Specifies system throug
222. a The default is NONE Example Note To ensure reliability enter the entire parameter FORMS Do not abbreviate to FOR OUTPUT FORMS FORM3 3 2 6 66 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS GRAPHICS This parameter specifies how graphics are to be processed in a job Syntax OUTPUT GRAPHICS option s Options Table 6 49 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 50 GRAPHICS parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s NO Indicates that there are no graphics in this job The default is NO YES Indicates there are graphics MOVE Indicates that all referenced graphic disk files are to be copied into the print file BATCH Means that the input stream contains no text only graphics which are to be imaged one per page NOSUB Must be specified in the JDE using the GRAPHICS parameter if no substitution for the missing graphic image is desired No substitution may be desired where graphics are specified for imaging with a reference scale factor that is greater than 4 Because the maximum effective scale factor is 8 graphic images in this case would be printed smaller than if resolution were 300 spi RESOLUTION 300 Note that this appearance error would not be indicated by the system Considerations f you are using the IMAGE parameter in conjunction with GRAPHICS make sure to list the GRAPHICS parameter
223. abilities and reduces the potential for paper jams Your application uses four paper sizes ranging from 8 by 11 inches for the first few pages to 11 by 17 inches for the last several pages Each time your printer detects a different paper size it adjusts to accommodate the new paper size thus noticeably reducing throughput time By specifying a large enough pitch mode to accommodate all the paper sizes in your application in this case 3 pitch mode the entire job runs at the maximum possible throughput speed because paper size adjustments are limited Keep in mind that you may select a lower pitch mode allowing a greater scan value for smaller size paper but that you would not want to select a pitch mode too small to accommodate a larger paper size You want to estimate how many applications you could run on a particular shift But given the size and complexity of your applications you are uncertain as to how to plan By looking at the paper sizes and thereby the pitch modes required by each application and the number of pages in each application and by associating these with the ppms provided in tables 6 10 and 6 11 you can then roughly estimate the length of time each application requires for printing XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 93 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS As you can see there are no absolutes and no set methods for accomplishing your printing goals The variables involved include individual finishing
224. ace Reel to reel tape or cartridges which are offline devices Host interface processor HIP connection which is a high speed channel for data transmission to the LPS from any of several other interfaces including XPMF VMS and XPF System disk Combination of two or more of these types Computer on which the data was created e Block and record lengths and structure e Code in which the data is encoded such as ASCII and EBCDIC How printer carriage control PCC information should be processed e Fortapes or cartridges only the label format used XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 3 3 CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL Output specifications You must also decide on some basic questions about the output Will the page orientation be landscape or portrait What fonts will you use What forms if any will you use Will Segment Management be used What paper sizes will be used Should CMEs be used How will the output be delivered such as face up or collated Will the data be printed on one side of the page simplex or on both sides duplex Will graphics be used What types of applications your site normally prints for example Forms Reports Letters Customer statements using variable data that is information that varies from customer to customer What are your site s conventions if any for naming forms JSLs files and jobs This information assists you i
225. ach digit in the constant has been altered An octal constant must be preceded immediately by the characters letter O apostrophe O and immediately followed by the apostrophe character For example BLOCK CONSTANT 0 070707077 H2 and H6 constants generate H2000 BCD and H6000 BCD codes respectively Use of H2 and H6 is identical to use of E and A prefixes described above For example BLOCK CONSTANT H2 3737377 BLOCK CONSTANT H6 3737377 Since H2000 and H6000 BCD are defined as 6 bit codes refer to appendix C no specification greater than X 3F generates a legal character If anything from X 40 to X FF is coded PDL generates an error message and replaces the bad character with a blank String constants may be preceded by an optional repeat count A repeat count is enclosed in parentheses and must be in the range of 1 to 255 For example the command ABLE CONSTANT 3 is equivalent to ABLE CONSTANT Other examples of the use of a repeat count are 1 TABLE CONSTANT 3 0 27 2 TABLE CONSTANT 4 X C1 2 8 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE PDL Table 2 2 represents a JSL which includes the components of PDL commands and shows a variety of right part constants
226. age Table 9 1 lists the OUTPUT command parameters and functions for graphics Table 9 1 OUTPUT command parameters and functions for graphics Option s Definition s GRAPHICS Specifies graphics may be used in current job IMAGE Specifies initial scaling and positioning parameters for batch mode PURGE Specifies default disposition of document interleaved graphics UNITS Specifies user selected units for positioning graphics Table 9 2 lists the DJDE definitions for graphics Table 9 2 OUTPUT command parameters and functions for graphics Option s Definition s ALTER Specifies new imaging parameters for graphics previously referenced using HOLD statement BATCH Marks beginning and end of online batch mode graphic data CANCEL Terminates option of the GRAPHICS DJDE GRAPHIC Precedes interleaved graphic in data stream IMAGE Specifies name scaling and positioning of a graphic printed SAVE Identifies document interleaved graphics not to be deleted or purged Refer to the chapter Specifying dynamic job descriptor entries DJDEs for more information on DJDEs 9 8 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE USING GRAPHICS Performance Random mode This section covers the following topics e Random mode e Online e Document interleaved file creation Online Random mode requires a separate disk access by the output processing task for eve
227. ages for example PLABEL OPRINFO rollover marker pages accounting pages from the specified cluster otherwise these pages are printed from the MAIN cluster The following example illustrates its use BILLS STOCKSET ASSIGN CV102 COVER ASSIGN BL231 BILPAG ASSIGN SM233 SUMMRY ASSIGN REDOO RED INIFEED COVER SYSPAGE RED OUTPUT STOCKS BILLS 5 8 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE DEFINING CLUSTERS Keeping stockset changes to a minimum i Using clusters with ordered stocks Each formatted page is associated with the active stockset and the active FEED option stock identified by the INIFEED parameter of the STOCKSET command the FEED parameter of the OUTPUT command or the FEED DJDE A stockset change causes the LPS output task to make additional checks when a page is to be printed These checks can result in a printer cycle down if any cluster in the new stockset presents a tray overlap or sizing problem Thus you should keep stockset changes within applications to a minimum For example DJDE STOCKS BILLS1 END DJDE STOCKS BILLS1 END data DJDE STOCKS BILLS2 END data This data stream has three STOCKSET specifications but only one stockset change Report boundaries are not treated as stockset changes unless use of the stockset specified in a JDE or JDL makes a page print on another stockset
228. al TOF and BOF values are 2 for every job every time a data record is processed a page transition occurs since the TOF and BOF have the same value If a DJDE TOF with value 1 is processed and the page transition has already occurred this DJDE TOF value is too late and does not take effect until the next page transition Short edge feed SEF If you want to use 11 x 17 inch paper or any size that requires SEF be aware that FSLs FRMs LGOs and IMGs are not automatically scaled or rotated Refer to your DocuPrint 180 LPS Operations Reference for detailed information on scaling FONTINDEX When multiple fonts of various sizes are used on a single page the line spacing of any particular line is determined by the largest font in use in the previous line The current line can also be adjusted downward by the difference in height between the first and the largest font in the current line The line spacing of the first line in a report is determined by the first font in the PDE provided the FONTINDEX parameter has not been specified When FONTINDEX is specified the line spacing of the first line of a report is determined by the font indicated by the font index value in the first line of the report If there is no font index value in the record and FONTINDEX is specified the line spacing for the first line of the report is determined by the first font in the PDE When the FONTINDEX or CME parameters are specified the line spacing of the first
229. all lines within the range regardless of whether or not variable data appears on those lines Multiple lines and columns Multiple lines may be specified and multiple columns may be specified for each line Multiple line specifications must be given in ascending top to bottom of page order Multiple column specifications for a line range must be given in ascending left to right order There also may be multiple text specifications following a column specification These are combined to form a single text string Font specifications may be specified at any point The last font specified remains in effect until another font is specified An example of a CME with these characteristics is as follows XYZ CME LINE 1 10 POS 40 FONT 2 POS 80 FONT 3 6 20 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS INE 11 20 POS 1 FONT 3 POS 40 FONT 1 POS 80 FONT 2 INE 31 50 POS 1 FONT 2 POS 40 FONT 3 POS 80 FONT 1 Form and variable data Under certain circumstances a form and its associated variable data do not align properly even though it appears that both use the same line spacing Variable data has a line spacing value that is computed as dots per line and rounding is done on that value In FDL the rounding takes place only when it is needed to resolve to a dot address and therefore might involve more than one line at a time Refer to the Rounding measurements
230. all ranging from 1 through 7 the specified characters are each associated with all of the specified types A typespec may also be specified with keywords NUMERIC in lieu of 1 or ALPHA in lieu of 2 There is no default 4 34 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS TRESET This parameter disassociates one or more characters or all characters in a set from one or more types Syntax TCODE TRESET option s Options Table 4 40 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 40 TRESET parameter option s and definition s Option s typespec inputspec ALL inputspect inputspec2 Definition s This option has the following components There is no default typespec A typespec may be coded as a single integer n within the range of 1 through 7 inputspec When an inputspec is coded with the keyword ALL all characters in the code table are disassociated from the specified types The TRESET parameter may be specified more than once in the TCODE command ALL Specifies that all characters in the code table are disassociated from the specified types XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 35 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Points to note Note the following when using the TCODE command e TheLPS accepts lowercase characters expressed literally or symbolically that is preceded by the pound sign fu
231. allowance or tolerance available for the paper size in a JDE for a graphic to be off the page No online banner page neither header nor trailer may include graphic references A JDE which is selected through the DJDE option JDE or JDL may not specify GRAPHICS NO if the current report has already processed at least one graphic In online batch mode PCC commands are ignored beginning with the BATCH START DJDE until the BATCH END DJDE Graphics processing is not copy sensitive A copy sensitive form may not reference graphics If RPAGE is used to move a logical page from one physical page to another graphic references are handled as follows Graphic references encountered after the record which satisfied the RPAGE statement are imaged on the physical page to which the logical page is moved Any other image references are applied to the physical page being formed at the time the RPAGE statement was satisfied For example if RPAGE WHEN TOP is specified it is possible for a graphic to appear on physical page n even though text which may have preceded its reference in the input data stream appears on physical page 1 Use caution when using RPAGE with page interleaved graphics A document interleaved graphic replaces an existing graphic with the same name This is true even if the existing graphic is used in a report which is being printed Forms are not supported for batch mode processing 9 10 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS
232. ameter of the CME It must be specified unless all that is required is a font change in the variable data Within a text string the character may be used as a lowercase toggle When a text string is encountered it is assumed that characters are to be inserted into the print line as they appear in the text string in uppercase normally If a 15 encountered the lowercase mode is invoked and all letters after are considered lowercase until another is encountered The sequence is used to indicate that the character is to be inserted and is not to be treated as toggling lowercase mode XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 17 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS FONTS Syntax Options Considerations This parameter specifies an index into the font list PDE command or DJDE for font switching on input data or CME data A PDE command is selected by the FORMAT parameter of the OUTPUT command ac CME FONTS option s Table 6 15 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 15 FONTS parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s value May range from 1 to n where n is the number of different fonts specified by the FONTS parameter of the PDE command A value of 1 specifies the first font in the FONTS parameter 2 the second and so forth The default for a value is the current font specified with the last FONTS parameter initially the value is 1 There is no default A
233. ameter specifies the test expression for selection of paper from the auxiliary tray RAUX TEST option s Table 7 15 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 15 TEST parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s test exp The format and syntax of a test exp are defined in the Test expression definition section If a test exp is satisfied a page is selected from the auxiliary tray There is no default Note the following when using the RAUX command e lfarecord intended to satisfy the criteria for RAUX is suspended by RSUSPEND that record is not checked for the RAUX criteria Note that the RAUX criteria does not take effect when printing is resumed offline only Record selection deletion is performed prior to RAUX processing If a record satisfying the RAUX test criteria was previously not selected for or deleted from printing the RAUX does not function offline only 7 20 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE USING LOGICAL PROCESSING Example e Since DJDE processing occurs prior to RAUX processing DJDE records are not checked for satisfying the RAUX criteria offline only Following is an example of using the RAUX command T1 TABLE CONSTANT CUSTOMER COPY Cl CRITERIA CONSTANT 20 13 EQ T1 RAUX 1 Figure 7 3 13 characters length XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXCUSTOMER COPY 20 character positions offse
234. amples Example 1 This section shows two examples of using the CME command Example 2 The following is an example of copy sensitive CMEs CME1 CME LINE 3 PO0S 59 CONSTANT FIRST QUARTER CME2 CME LINE 37 3 POS 81 CONSTANT 6 CME3 CME LINE 1 60 POS 5 FONT 2 POS 12 FONT 1 OUTPUT COPIES 3 MODIFY CME1 1 1 MODIFY CME2 2 1 MODIFY CME3 3 1 For the first copy of the report line 3 is modified by the text FIRST QUARTER For the second copy the character is inserted in lines 37 38 and 39 for 6 character positions starting in column 81 For 3 fonts are changed for lines 1 to 60 at character positions 5 and 12 These fonts must be defined in the FONTS parameter of the PDE command Copy sensitive CMEs are not supported for online processing or when is specified in the OUTPUT command CME parameters specified in standard form CME12 CME LINE 47 POSITION 1 FONT 5 CONSTANT 5 INE 48 POSITION 1 FONT 1 INE 49 POSITION 10 CONSTANT ABCD I2 CME parameters specified in short form CME12 CME L47 P1 F5 5 L48 P1 F1 L49 P10 C ABCD or CME12 CME L47P1F5 5 L48P1F1L49P10 ABCD 6 22 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS EXPORT command A segment is a set of consecutively delivered
235. an be in permanent form such as perforated paper tape Generally tape is used as a mass storage medium in magnetic form and has a far higher storage capacity than disk storage but it takes longer to write or recover data from tape than from disk The number of characters that can be stored on magnetic media such as how close together data can be recorded The Xerox LPS may use either 1600 bpi or 6250 bpi density magnetic media Input output device that controls the movement of magnetic storage tape past the read write head while data is accessed or stored 1 Any major job performed by a computer 2 One of several programs being executed by a system Voice or data communications transmitted and received through telephone lines Sending and receiving data through telecommunication lines for processing among various remote terminals and the central processing unit CPU terminal emulation mode The processing method of the PC UI which features a character display and the operator s use of the keyboard The mouse windows and icons are inactive in this mode The PC UI operates in either the TEM mode or in the object mode XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY 21 GLOSSARY terminal testing text text string throughput toggle trailer transaction processing translation transmission speed transmit truncated two up typeface type size Device equipped with a keyboard and connect
236. ansmission If interleaved graphics are being transmitted at the time of system failure the amount of data requiring retransmission depends on the number and size of the graphics Note The number of pages n is determined by the number of skip to channel 1 commands encountered since the last set of pages were written to the disk XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 61 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Online dump The online dump feature allows you to generate a hard copy of the command and data transmission taking place between the host computer and the LPS Starting and ending dump sessions Dump format The dump session is started with a START command when the LPS is online and in the idle state The online dump JDE JDL used must specify VOLUME HOST OLDUMP and CODE EBCDIC The dump session is terminated by either the operator ENDJOB command or the offline operator command Other online operator commands during a dump session perform the standard functions Points to note Each host command directs the printer to perform an operation or it provides control information used during printing of a report The operations performed are either print with carriage control carriage control only or control for example load FCB All print commands and some control commands transmit data to or from the LPS The dump format is designed such that for each of these commands there exists a HEADER and DATA segment The
237. aracters X apostrophe X to indicate to the PDL compiler that the following expression is in hexadecimal For example IDEN PREFIX X C1C2C3C4 Normally used as string constants but they may also be numeric value constants Each character including embedded blanks results in one byte A character constant must immediately be preceded and immediately followed by the apostrophe character For example IDEN PREFIX THIS IS A CHARACTER CONSTANT CONSTANT ABCDE If the apostrophe character is required in a character constant it must be defined in some other way such as consecutive or double apostrophes or the hexadecimal constant X 7D Character constants may be defined as EBCDIC and take their actual values from the standard EBCDIC table definition in appendix D Used as string constants Each character results in one byte The constants must be preceded by the characters A apostrophe A and followed by an apostrophe character For example IDEN PREFIX A ABC The ASCII string type allows hexadecimal representation of characters to be embedded in a string This is done by preceding the hexadecimal representation of the character with an character For example IDEN PREFIX A ABC 44EF is equivalent to IDEN PREFIX X 414243444546 The three character sequence required for a hexadecimal representation of a character results in one
238. aracters is separated by a dash Eight 8 characters in all are required Parameters are separated by a comma values cannot have commas embedded White space within a parameter is ignored if it immediately procedes or follows the sign White space following a value is ignored White space preceding or following a comma is ignored A comma following the last parameter is ignored Parameter keyword text is case insensitive XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 49 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Points to note Note the following when using the BTEXT parameter e f RNA report name is not specified no audit logging will be performed e Although the BTEXT command can be placed in the JSL it will usually be placed in a DJDE as most of the parameters will be unique to a job When placed in the JSL it is specified under the PDL MESSAGE command Example MESSAGE BTEXT RNA CK0409 e Unlike the PDL OUTPUT command where all parameters are treated independently from one another BTEXT parameters are treated as one entity This implies that parameters specified at the job level do not override those specified at the system level on an individual basis However as a whole the job level BTEXT does override the system level BTEXT For example if the system level contains the RNA and DPT parameters but the job level only contains the RNA parameter INPUT Processing does not use the DPT from the syst
239. aracters such as symbols The software interface used by the AIM task and the Output task to communicate with the printer allowing printing commands and fault and status information to be exchanged A method of synchronizing the sending and receiving of data communications devices Clocking allows synchronous transmission at high speeds Group of paper feeder trays usually containing the same size and type of paper stock Each cluster has a name consisting of one to six alphanumeric characters See also stock stockset copy modification entry Entry modifying the output printing characteristics of a report on a copy to copy basis 1 Set of symbols representing data or instructions to a computer 2 To write a list of instructions software to cause the product system to perform specified operations Translation of one type of character or symbol code to another To arrange or assemble into ordered sets Vertical arrangement of characters User instruction to a computer using the system controller keyboard or the PC Ul Commands are words mnemonics or characters that cause a computer to perform predefined operations Coded instruction to a computer or computer based system Set of commands that can be used for a system such as how the system can be instructed to perform a task Explanations written with program instructions They are ignored by the computer GLOSSARY 4 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE
240. associated report page of variable data init Specifies the beginning ply number to which a specified form applies This defaults to the first or next copy e copies Specifies the number of plies passes to which a specified form applies NONE Example FORMS FORMS 3 2 END 8 42 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES Points to note Note the following when using the FORMAT and FORMS commands Since there is ambiguity between the FORMAT and FORMS parameters if either is abbreviated to the first three letters the parameter defaults to FORMAT Paper size can only be changed in a job stream by using a JDE to call out the desired paper size that is through the PAPERSIZE parameter of the OUTPUT command It is important to change the image size when the paper size is smaller than the current image so that all data is printed on the page XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 43 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES GRAPHICS Syntax This parameter specifies that the DJDE is a graphic sentinel That is it immediately precedes and identifies a graphic in the report data stream This parameter when specified must be the only parameter in a DJDE packet If no textual data has been previously encountered the graphic is document interleaved and copied to an IMG type disk file If textual data has been previo
241. at references them This is done by creating a JSL file containing only CMEs and using the PDL processor to compile it For each CME PDL creates an object file on disk cataloged in the CME directory The CME identifier is used as the object file name When a CME source file is modified it must be recompiled with PDL but it is not necessary to recompile the associated JDLs When the CME is referenced by the OUTPUT command MODIFY parameter in a JDL and the CME does not exist within the JDL the System searches the directory for the file type xxxx CME It is then loaded into memory for use in processing the report The DJDE MODIFY parameter can also be used dynamically to associate a cataloged CME file with report processing CMEs must be cataloged as separate disk files if they are referenced by a DJDE MODIFY command Syntax Options Considerations This parameter specifies the character string to print ac CME CONSTANT option s Table 6 14 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 14 CONSTANT parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s SC Represents the string constant to be printed refer to the chapter Print Description Language PDL for definition of string constants The width of the copy modification rectangle is determined by the number of characters specified by sc More than one sc is allowed There is no default There is no default forthe CONSTANT par
242. at 180 ppm it would effectively slow throughput to 68 ppm This is true even if the finishing device could accept pages at up to 120 ppm If you adjusted this 7 pitch job into 6 pitch mode the job would run faster than 116 ppm Eliminating process adjustment cycles during jobs that cross pitch boundaries Each time a job crosses a pitch boundary the system performs a xerographic quality adjustment If this is done frequently within a job the adjustments may take a substantial amount of the overall print time Lowering the pitch mode so that the entire job runs at the same mode may enable you to significantly increase performance 6 92 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Estimating the time needed to run your print jobs for scheduling purposes To better understand the potential value of specifying pitch modes in your JSLs consider these hypothetical situations Your finishing device folds and binds your printed output but accepts pages at a considerably slower rate than the 180 pages per minute capability of your DocuPrint 180 laser printing system You may want to slow down the rate at which your DocuPrint 180 LPS sends printed sheets to this device by specifying a 4 pitch mode Assuming that your application calls for 8 5 by 11 inch paper you could use 5 pitch mode but by selecting 4 pitch you reduce the pages per minute ppm from 180 to 77 which better matches your finishing device s cap
243. ate characters or graphics Process of combining two or more records into a single block of data which can then be moved operated upon or stored as a single unit by the computer Number of characters or bytes contained in a block of data the block is treated as a unit within the computer Block length is usually invariable within a system and may be specified in units such as records words computer words or characters To load the initial instructions of a program into computer memory these instructions then direct the loading of the rest of the program Booting may require entry of a few commands at the keyboard or the flip of a switch to begin the process bits per second In serial communication the instantaneous bit speed with which a device or channel transmits a character binary synchronous communication 1 Communication using binary synchronous line discipline 2 Uniform procedure using a standardized set of control characters and control character sequences for synchronous transmission of binary coded data between stations Compartment of memory in which this data is stored during transfer from one device to another This is useful for accumulating data into blocks before storage or processing and for adjusting differences of speed between devices or between a device and a communicating facility Optional module that moves paper from the last stacker bin to a finishing device Fixed number of bits in data proces
244. attribute called type may be associated with any character s in a character set The possible types are identified by the integers 1 through 7 Any single character in a set for example V will either have a type type 1 type 2 type 3 and so forth or not If it has no type it is referred to as untyped It is possible for any character to be untyped have one type or have multiple types for example be type 2 and type 3 The defining of types that is the associating of type numbers with any group of characters in a character set is described in the Character type assignments TCODE command section of the Specifying input parameters chapter For every standard character set there is a set of standard default type assignments which for most applications is sufficient without modification These assignments define the numeric characters 0 9 to be type 1 characters and the uppercase and lowercase alphabetic characters A Z and a z to be type 2 characters Use of these default type assignments can be invoked by the TCODE parameter of the VOLUME command 7 10 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE USING LOGICAL PROCESSING Masked comparisons using default type assignments Performing masked comparisons using unmodified standard default type assignments requires coding the following TCODE command Used either to modify a set of standard default type assignments or to define a completely new set refer to processing
245. avoiding printer cycle downs ensure that the current trays are always in the MAIN and AUX clusters A stockset application run after a simple or OTEXT application always causes a printer cycle down allowing you to load the correct trays if necessary before continuing 5 4 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE DEFINING CLUSTERS Defining clusters and stocksets with PDL and DJDE PDL commands The PDL commands and DJDEs listed here relate to clusters For more detailed information on each command refer to the chapters Specifying output parameters and Specifying dynamic job descriptor entries DJDEs DJDEs The STOCKSET and OUTPUT commands specify cluster and stocks in your JSLs The STOCKSET and OUTPUT commands and their syntax are shown in tables 5 2 and 5 3 Table 5 2 parameter s and option s Parameter s ASSIGN Option s stock descriptor stock descriptor stock descriptor J INIFEED stock name stock reference SYSPAGE stock name stock reference MAIN AUX Table 5 3 OUTPUT parameter s and option s Parameter s FEED Option s stock reference stock name MAIN AUX OPR STOCKS stockset name The FEED and STOCKS dynamic job descriptor entries change stocks and clusters on a page by page basis The FEED and STOCKS commands and their syntax are shown in table
246. aximum block length in the JSL so that input buffers are large enough to handle the largest block However this may slow performance If the actual tape block length is smaller than the JSL block length then no error message is reported otherwise an error is displayed If a block delimiter constant is positioned and is part of a record or block the user should use caution since the record or block XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 7 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Example will be truncated As a result the data will not be formatted as specified Online versus offline JDLs An offline JDL statement set that modifies the system default values specifically in the BLOCK or RECORD commands may experience incorrect results if running an online job JDE In other words if an online job JDE is called out in an offline JDL that has changed the system default values of the BLOCK and RECORD command parameters the job may not print correctly It is best then to separate and run online and offline jobs JDEs independently from each other The BLOCK command for the example below would be coded as follows BLOCK LENGTH 351 OFFSET 2 ADJUST 0 THFLD 2 PREAMBLE 8 FORMAT BIN Figure 4 1 shows sample values for BLOCK command parameters Figure 4 1 Sample BLOCK command Maximum Block Length BLOCK BEOCK SELECTION RECORD 1 RECORD 2 RECORD 3 LEN 133 bytes 81 bytes 1
247. becoming available the preceding DJDE packet is printed on an OPRINFO page together with the message NO SPACE ON DISK FOR FILE xxx yyy Input then proceeds to read and discard the extent of the file The file s data records are read and stored into the appropriately named file until the total extent of the file is spanned PCC bytes and block and record delimiters are ignored while processing the file data e Ifthe DJDE parameter FILE signaled the start of LPS labeled data input presumes that more than one LPS labeled file may be batched together and checks for another label record when it completes processing a file If OPRINFO YES and the file transfers are successfully concluded the file name and file type of each file transferred are listed on the OPRINFO page with a brief indication of whether the file was newly created or replaced an existing file XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 75 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES Delimited records for LPS labeled files To prevent loss of data through trailing blank suppression procedures on the host spooler data records for LPS labeled files must be delimited by appending an extra non blank character at the end of each record The same non blank character must be used with all records processed in the file processing mode If the non blank character that is appended at the end of the records is not consistently present throughout the ext
248. bels and so forth In processing stacked reports the system checks each record for the logical end of report specification as defined by the TEST parameter of the RSTACK and BANNER commands When BANNER is coded the user specifies the number of consecutive banner pages which must satisfy the test criteria before end of report occurs Report separation based on banner page detection is performed with the BANNER command This includes a test expression to detect a banner page and a count of the header or trailer pages used to separate reports Table 7 6 lists the function and use of each BANNER parameter Table 7 6 summarizes the BANNER command parameters Table 7 6 Summary of BANNER command parameters Parameter Specifies Offline Online DJDE HCOUNT The total number of consecutive header banner N Y N pages HJOBNO Subfield of the first record to satisfy banner selection N Y N criteria be displayed as a CUST JOB number HRPTNA Subfield of the first record to satisfy banner selection N Y N criteria to be displayed as a REPORT NAME TCOUNT Total number of consecutive trailer banner pages N Y N needed for banner page detection TEST Test expression for banner page detection TYPE Use of selected data pages as banner pages when N reports do not contain this information The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options XEROX DO
249. blishing electronic subsystem also referred to as the system controller forms control buffer finishing configuration utility file control parameter XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY 25 GLOSSARY FDL FDR FFM FIS FMS FPS FSL FST GCR gsm HCF HCS HFDL HIP hpos IFU IGM IOM IOT IPD forms description language file directory font file management Font Interchange Standard file management subsystem formatting print service forms source library font specification table group code recording grams per square meter high capacity feeder high capacity stacker host forms description language Host Interface Processor horizontal positioning International Business Machines Corporation Interpress font utility image generator image generator module input output image output module input output terminal also referred to as printer Interpress decomposer GLOSSARY 26 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY IPFONTS IPL IPM ips JCB JCL JDE JDL JID JSL LAN laser LED LEF LF Ipi LPS MTU OCR OCS OLI 05 Interpress fonts initial program load Interpress mapping inches per second job control block job control language job descriptor entry job descriptor library job identifier job source library local area network
250. byte Two successive characters are necessary to represent one actual character when printing The two character sequence results in one byte EBCDIC constants are used for value and string constants They must be preceded by the characters E apostrophe E and followed by an apostrophe character The EBCDIC string type allows hexadecimal representation of characters to be embedded in a character string This is done by preceding the hexadecimal representation of the character with an character For example IDEN PREFIX E ABC C4EFG is equivalent to the hexadecimal IDEN PREFIX X C1C2C3C4C5C6C7 Each character represented in EBCDIC results in one byte Each three character sequence representing a character hexadecimally results in one byte XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 2 7 PRINT DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE PDL Octal H2 and H6 Note that EBCDIC is the default therefore the E is usually not required Octal constants should be used only as string constants because of the control program conversion process Each octal character results in 3 bits One word can store 3 characters Their use as value constants however is not prohibited Each 3 bit octal character is converted to an 8 bit octal character internally by prefixing two binary zeros Thus the arithmetic value of a multiple character octal constant may be difficult to determine because e
251. c pages within a report and can change these pages differently in different copies Such parameters may be placed within the report itself and take effect at the next page boundary They may also appear at report boundaries to effect changes on all pages of a report or report ply XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 3 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES Table 8 1 lists the page oriented DJDEs Table 8 1 DJDEs DJDE Function BEGIN Specifies the location of the starting print line of a logical page for graphics BFORM Specifies that a form be printed on the back side of a printed page COLLATE Specifies whether the pages of a job are to be collated placed into sets or uncollated like pages placed together COPIES Specifies the number of copies or sets of the pages to produce DEPT Specifies the accumulation of accounting statics for reports on a name basis DESTINATION Specifies the output destination of printed pages DUPLEX Specifies whether both sides of a piece of paper are printed duplex or only to top side simplex FEED Controls the stock type of paper on which the page is printed FONTINDEX Specifies a particular location in the input record where an index to the specified font is stored FONTS Specifies the fonts used in input data or variable CME data FORMAT Specifies that a new page d
252. cations The appropriate cluster usage for these three types of applications is discussed below Simple and OTEXT applications These applications do not provide for the use of different stocks If the application is online then it uses the default stock for the site If the application is offline and the operator knows from the START command which stock to load the operator loads the stock Simple applications are fed stock from the MAIN and AUX clusters MAIN and AUX are defined by the programmer to improve printer performance for the jobs run by the site ensuring that paper can be loaded during printing Note If your site runs simple OTEXT and stockset jobs then it is useful to maintain a cluster for each stock loaded using cluster and stockset definitions and changing MAIN and AUX to logicals for each cluster as required by the jobs The OTEXT parameter of the MESSAGE command is described in detail in the chapter Specifying output parameters XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 5 3 DEFINING CLUSTERS Stockset applications Mixing applications Each page has a particular stockset and a particular cluster associated with it The cluster is always verified because it determines from which trays a page may feed The stockset is verified only if the current page calls a different stockset than the previous page called Stockset changes require the cluster checks described in table 5 1 Table 5 1 Clu
253. cations This appendix provides offline specifications Input unpacking examples Figure D 1 shows several input unpacking examples Figure D 1 Input unpacking examples BCD Character A 1 5 Binary Representation 010901 000001 000101 101100 byte 1 byte 1 byte Represented on 9T Tape by 01000100 00010001 01101100 ST T4X3 1 5 A Unpacking After Unpacking by OSS 00010001 00000001 00000101 00101100 A 1 5 After Translatian to ASCI 01000001 00110001 00110101 00101010 by OSS A 5 m BCD Character 5 Binary Representation H2BCD 000101 101100 Byte 3 Represented on Track Tape by T4X3H2 Unpacking After Unpacking by OSS 00010001 00000001 00000101 00101100 A 1 5 After Translation to ASCII 01000001 00110001 00110101 00101010 by OSS i 5 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE D 1 OFFLINE SPECIFICATIONS Valid host computer and label specifications POWER POWERVS B2500 Burroughs B2700 medium B3500 Systems B3700 B4700 B6700 Burroughs large system H2000 Honeywell 200 2000 series H6000 Honeywell 600 6000 series DUMP OCTDUMP UNIVAC ANSI CR ICL2900 OLDUMP Undef Figure D 2 shows the valid host computer and label specifications Figure D 2 Valid host computer and label specifications D 2 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE OFFLINE SPECIFICATIONS Each shaded area of this table shows the label that is substituted by PDL when an in
254. ccurs More than one CME may be applied to a job CMEs may be coded as part of the JDL or created as separate files so that they may be referenced by one or more JDLs This latter feature is described more fully in the Cataloged CMEs section of this chapter An identifier of the type ac is specified when defining the CME and references it with the MODIFY parameter of the OUTPUT command The CME must precede the OUTPUT command Table 6 13 summarizes the CME command parameters Table 6 13 Summary of ac CME command parameters Parameter Specifies Offline Online DJDE CONSTANT Copy modification character string to be printed Y Y N FONT Selection of font for printing input or CME data Y Y N LINE Line range of copy modification Y Y N POSITION Initial character position of copy modification Y Y N The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options Short form CME specifications CME specifications may be given in short form to minimize the coding length In short form only the first character of a keyword need be given equal signs are omitted and commas are not inserted except where necessary to avoid ambiguity 6 16 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Cataloged CMEs CONSTANT CMEs need not be part of a user s JDL They may be created as separate disk files and used as if they were part of the JDL th
255. ce in line length is illustrated in figure 3 8 Figure 3 8 Character spacing examples Proportional spacing To Whom it may Concern To Whom it may Concern Fixed spacing Fonts are available in various families for example OCR and Titan sizes and faces medium and bold Refer to the Xerox 4000 Family Laser Printing Systems Font User Guide for more information on fonts and for samples of the font families sizes and faces available for use with your Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS In addition to typeface style and size a font can be defined by its orientation Landscape Portrait e Inverse landscape e Inverse portrait Refer to the Xerox 4000 Family Laser Printing Systems Font User Guide for specific font information the Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS Forms Creation Guide for using fonts in a form and the DocuPrint 180 LPS Operations Reference for using font editor keyword commands used to create source font files from existing licensed and non licensed font files XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 3 25 CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL Font and graphic memory Custom fonts signatures and logos may be ordered from Xerox through your Xerox sales representative The LPS can print up to 128 fonts on a single page When processing the page data the controller stores font as well as graphic information in a special memory cache within the AIS The amount of memory required to store font data depends
256. chapter Print format commands OTEXT option s Table 8 40 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 44 OTEXT parameter option s and definition s Option s NONE Definition s Specifies that no text message is output to the operator during job printing The default is NONE SC Specifies a text message of up to 80 characters maximum of 400 characters per report passnum Specifies the pass copy ply to which the text applies Multiple sc messages one per passnum may be specified in a JSL The message is output to the operator prior to the beginning of printing the specified report ply If no pass number is specified the text is output once at the beginning of printing the entire report WAIT Specifies that after the text is displayed printing is suspended until the operator has responded wit a CONTINUE parameter END Specifies that the text is displayed after the last copy of the report is printed XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 53 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES OVERPRINT This parameter specifies overprint control Overprint lines are print lines whose carriage control specifies printing with no line spacing after the last printed line It takes effect on the next record following a DJDE END parameter If FONTINDEX has been invoked in a JDE or DJDE OVERPRINT takes effect at the next logical page boundary OVERP
257. ches by 14 33 inches 203 x 254 to 229 x 364 mm in a long edge feed mode Long edge feed mode means the sheet is fed into the paper path with its long edge first In 7 pitch mode the DocuPrint 180 prints with full productivity at 180 pages per minute with seven page images per photoreceptor revolution For papers whose width ranges from 8 5 inches to 9 01 inches the DocuPrint 180 prints with slightly reduced productivity The reason for this is that for papers in this width range the normal image area extends into the inter image zone that is normally used for xerographic process controls In order to maintain the best productivity possible xerographic process controls are temporarily suspended Periodically the DocuPrint 180 will induce about 14 skipped images in order to perform a xerographic process control check and ensure that the DocuPrint 180 maintains the highest print quality It will then resume printing at full productivity For any paper size wider than 15 32 inches 389 mm in width the system automatically switches to 3 pitch mode which prints up to 77 pages per minute For very large paper 11 inches by 17 inches for example paper is short edge fed so that the 11 inch side leads through the printer 6 94 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS You may also specify pitch mode boundaries in centimeters CM DOTS and XDOTS The minimum and maximum scan values with these units of m
258. chy of forced conditions is shown in table 6 71 The first column gives the condition that will force the parameters shown in the columns to the right Table 6 72 OUTPUT command parameter hierarchy of forced conditions from highest to lowest priority Parameter Results in Results in Results in Results in specification NTO1 FACEUP COLLATE DUPLEX NTO1 YES YES specified option FACEUP YES specified option Example FACEUP YES COLLATE NO Example NTO1 YES FACEUP NO NTO1 and 1TON system defaults During system generation you may select either 1TON or NTO 1 as the system default in the DEFAULT ORDER 1 N N 1 window When the system default is 1TON NTO1 is processed only if itis invoked in the JDE or JDL The system ignores NTO1 in DJDE selected JDEs or JDLs When the system default is NTO1 the system assumes each report is NTO1 until the first data page even if 1TON is specified in the JDE or JDL This arrangement allows you to use DJDE selected JDEs and JDLs that invoke NTO 1 after a series of banner pages following examples illustrate these conditions 6 86 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Example 1 The default order is 1TON OUTPUT NTO1zNO is specified and a JDE or JDE dynamic job descriptor entry DJDE containing NTO1 YES is invoked The system does not process the DJDE E
259. cifies that all document interleaved files created by this report s processing are to be saved overriding an explicit or default specification in the JDE s OUTPUT command XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 57 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES SEFMAP This parameter specifies a mapping table different than the one defined in the PDL command on a page by page basis Syntax SEFMAP option s Options Table 8 46 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 50 SEFMAP parameter option s and definition s Option s font fonts s font font UPD REP Definition s This option has the following components font fonts Font pair in which fonts is the SEF mapping for font font Font pair in which font is the SEF mapping for font e UPD Update indicates that the specified font pairs change existing mappings or append new mappings to the current font mapping table REP Replace indicates that the specified font pairs create a new mapping table to replace the current one REP is the default With UPD or REP only memory resident font mapping tables not disk resident tables are affected NONE Disables short edge feed SEF and font mapping stops a previous SEFFNT Considerations Refer to the SEFMAP examples at the end of this section 8 58 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB
260. coded The user may end a PCC command with a semicolon and start another PCC command to continue specification of the carriage control codes Multiple PCC commands may be used within a single PCC table definition as long as there are no intervening non PCC commands Consecutive byte values need not be specified Thus the commands ASSIGN X 60 SP1 ASSIGN X 61 8P2 ASSIGN X 62 5 3 can be coded in the single command ASSIGN X 60 SP1 SP2 8P3 If under the LINE command byte translation is specified that is the LINE command PCC parameter TRAN option is specified the PCC control byte is translated into LPS standard EBCDIC before being applied This means that the byte option on the ASSIGN parameter must be specified as an EBCDIC translation of the PCC byte for example X F1 or 1 1 PCC DEFAULT IBM1403 INITIAL TOF ADVTAPE NO ASSIGN X 40 SP1P ASSIGN X F1 SK1P ASSIGN X F8 PSK8 Added to the standard IBM1403 carriage control code table are X 40 space 1 line and print X F1 skip to channel 1 and print and X F8 print and skip to channel 8 4 18 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS RECORD command Table 4 22 summarizes the use of the RECORD command parameters Table 4 22 Summary of RECORD command parameters Parameter Specifies Offline Online DJDE ADJUST Record length a
261. collated job an offset occurs on only the first copy of the offset page If a record satisfying the ROFFSET test criteria is not selected for or deleted from printing the offset indication is maintained and used on the next record printed If OFFSET FIRST or ALL and the ROFFSET criteria is satisfied on the first page of a report the normal offset from the preceding report is nullified If segments are specified the ROFFSET command is ignored XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 7 27 USING LOGICAL PROCESSING Example Following is an example of using the ROFFSET command A file has multiple reports without any delimiters separating the reports as illustrated below Each page of the report has a page number as part of the heading Each report causes renumbering of the pages starting with Page 1 With the ROFFSET command coded below an offset occurs for all passes of the reports T1 TABLE CONSTANT PAGE 1 C1 CRITERIA CONSTANT 105 8 EO T1 ROFFSET TEST C1 PASSES ALL Figure 7 5 shows a sample ROFFSET command usage Figure 7 5 Sample ROFFSET command usage T Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page T M 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 M p Report 1 Report 2 Report 3 7 28 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFE
262. cord of the report is read and processed If the first record is a DJDE BTEXT the DJDE BTEXT overrides the JDE JDL BTEXT Again no combining is done If the JSL has RNA and DPT parameters and the DJDE BTEXT has just an RNA parameter only the RNA parameter from the DJDE BTEXT is used for auditing Once received by the PC UI a set of PC UI BTEXT parameter override rules must be observed At the start of every report the PC Ul enables receiving BTEXT with new RNA parameter When this parameter is received the PC UI ignores any further report detail parameters within the same report This implies that overriding occurs with report detail parameters received after the start of the report and before the RNA parameter After the RNA parameter is received if report and page detail parameters are intermixed within the same BTEXT command for future pages only the page detail parameters are processed If there are multiple values for a BTEXT parameter within the same packet sent to the PC UI only the last value is used For example if there are multiple DPT parameters specified in a DJDE packet which also contain the RNA parameter the last DPT parameter is used e Ifa BTEXT is placed in the JSL and a DJDE BTEXT is specified as the first record in the job the DJDE BTEXT overwrites the BTEXT specified in the JSL e When a DJDE BTEXT is used it must precede all data for the page to ensure it will be forwarded to the PC UI before the page
263. cording job characteristics such as block length fonts needed and required forms The input task finds the disk addresses of the compiled JDE form font and logo files to be used in printing the variable data The input task reads the variable data The input task formats the variable data and writes it to the data buffer in the print file PRFIL1 SYS For each page in the data buffer the input task creates a page log entry in the page log buffer and writes the buffer to the PRFIL1 SYS file When the input task processes all the data or reaches page threshold uses a certain portion of the area reserved for the PRFIL1 SYS file it notifies the OCS task that the output task can begin XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE OVERVIEW Output processing Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 The steps required during Output processing are summarized below The OCS task sends a message to output indicating that output processing can start This message includes the address in the PRFIL1 SYS file of the information for the first page to be printed The output task reads the starting page log buffer and builds an entry in its own page tracking buffer The page tracking buffer contains the information output processing uses for page creation text data form and font addresses counts and flags for options such as simplex or duplex The output task c
264. criptor entry The job descriptor library H2SYS must reside in the JDL directory After the START command is initiated several messages display to inform the operator of the print jobs in progress In most instances only one more command entry is required An example of an offline interaction is shown in Figure 2 7 below Figure 2 7 Starting an offline print job 051000 READY FOR COMMANDS hh mm ss START J12 H2SYS 051010 Starting job 00003 052010 Mount input tape CONTINUE I when ready CONTINUE I OS0010 Resuming INPUT OS0020 Resuming OUTPUT 051020 Job 00003 has completed input phase 051030 Job 00003 has completed printing 051000 READY FOR COMMANDS hh mm ss Example2 START J12 H2SYS 5 This command is the same as in example 1 with the exception that five copies are requested The value of 5 entered for copies overrides the value specified in the J12 job descriptor entry Note thata comma replaces the unspecified mode option therefore the default mode multiple report takes effect Example 3 START Since no options are specified the START command defaults take effect The default for the job descriptor library is DFAULT which must exist in the JDL directory The job descriptor entry used is DFLT which must exist in the DFAULT JDL The command START DFAULT has the same effect Example 4 START J12 H2SY8 amp S 2 REPORTS 3 4 This command reprints two copies of the third and fourth
265. ct for your JSL These formats are listed in the PDE command section of chapter 7 Specifying output parameters PDEs like VFUs and IDRs require identification for example PDE1 PDE BEGIN 0 18 IN 0 66 IN ONT LO112B LO1BOA MODE LANDSCAPE EGIN 1 03 51 EGIN 6 30 51 ONTS P1012A MODE PORTRAIT PDE2 PDE U Hj UJ UJ U hj 3 12 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL Using copy modification entries Defining paper requirements Copy modification entries CMEs allow you to change report output on static data and to change fonts within variable data Sample CMES follow 1 CME LINE 9 POS 1 FONT 1 CME2 CME LINE 3 POS 59 CONSTANT FIRST QUARTER There are several ways of specifying paper stock in PDL One method is the STOCKSET command which can be referenced in lower level commands Each formatted page is then associated with the active STOCKSET command and the active FEED parameter of the OUTPUT command If no FEED parameter is specified the INIFEED parameter of the STOCKSET command takes effect Here is a sample STOCKSET command SSML STOCKSET ASSIGN WHITE CVR ASSIGN YELLOW BLL ASSIGN GREEN SUM INIFEED CVR SYSPAGE SUM The STOCKSET command calls out an INIFEED option and lets it override an OUTPUT command FEED parameter option The FEED paramet
266. cuPrint 180 LPS Operations Reference for further information on the status file display initialization and structure Accounting information is automatically accumulated by the system on a report basis and also for overall system usage The ACCT command enables the user to include a printout of the accounting summary with each report printed Table 6 3 summarizes ACCT command parameter usage The system level REPORT USER parameter provides an installation with a printout of overall system usage statistics The following sections define how accounting information may be accessed and interpreted Table 6 10 summarizes the ACCT command parameters Table 6 10 Summary of ACCT command parameters Parameter DEPT Specifies Accumulation of user accounting statistics Y Y Y Offline Online DJDE USER Output destination of accounting page with a report Y Y N Accounting data on report basis An example of an offline accounting page is illustrated in figure 6 2 Overall usage accounting The ACCT command enables you to request that an accounting page which contains a summary be output at the end of the printing for each report This summary consists of a single page of information containing job setup information and counts of processing events The system automatically accumulates accounting data in a file on disk for each report printed An installation has the parameter of having the system accumula
267. d before applying the record length adjustment Data that follows the record is ignored up through the end of the block NO Indicates that the end of a tape block is not indicated by a value of 0 in the record length field The default is NO Note the following when using the BLOCK command The LENGTH parameter may be overridden by ANSI IBM OS Standard or Honeywell 2000 COBOL labels that specify block length The values for LTHFLD OFFSET FORMAT and PREAMBLE may be overridden if RECORD STRUCTURE is changed as the result of ANSI IBM OS Standard or Honeywell 2000 COBOL label processing The length on a 4 by 3 packed format tape or Honeywell 600 is the number of 6 bit bytes or characters in the tape block The length of the block delimiter constant should not be coded as the BLOCK POSTAMBLE Both lengths are subtracted from the end of the block The search for the block delimiter constant starts after the block preamble and proceeds forward to the first appearance of the constant The maximum block size that may be processed by the input task is 24 576 bytes The input task is able to allocate at least one input buffer for offline tape jobs when the tapes are written in maximum size blocks If a block length is specified which is less than this minimum block length found on the tape input processing allocates input buffers which are sized to the minimum tape block length It is wise to specify the m
268. d keyword in table 2 1 and VFU TABLE CRITERIA CME PDE and So on are the command keywords in table 2 2 A command keyword is required for each PDL command statement All command keywords are listed in appendix A XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 2 3 PRINT DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE PDL Parameter Comments Each command keyword is followed by parameters used to select its processing parameters The parameters for a PDL command keyword consist of a left and right part separated by an equal sign Table 2 1 represents the typical components of a command statement and provides examples Table 2 1 Set of typical PDL commands Command Additional keyword Parameter Parameter parameter Identifier required keyword option keywords VFU1 VFU ASSIGN TOF 1 BOF 55 CME4 CME LINE 1 60 POSITION 5 FONT 2 Comments are statements you include in the source file to describe certain PDL commands and their functions These comments can act as reminders if you or someone else modifies the JSL at a later time Comments may appear anywhere within the JSL They must be preceded by the character sequence slash and asterisk and terminated by the character sequence asterisk and slash Examples are illustrated in figures 2 3 2 4 and 2 5 Nested comments may be set within another comment There is no practical limit to the level of nesting possible as long as each
269. d definition s Table 6 71 XMP parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s DEFAULT Specifies that the sysgened XMP is used for the report The default is DEFAULT REPORT Specifies that when the system determines that a report requires highlight color mode for any page of the report all pages remaining unprinted are printed in the highlight color mode XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 85 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Points to note OUTPUT command Note the following when using the OUTPUT command These points to note list parameters followed by the applicable action or system response DUPLEX YES job that runs in simplex mode runs in duplex mode except transparencies A recoverable dispatching or imaging error on an even numbered page results in one additional hole in the paper path and up to seven aborted pages to the sample tray A recoverable dispatching or imaging error on an odd numbered page results in one additional hole in the paper path with no aborted pages to the sample page COLLATE Once you have specified multiple copies the value of the COLLATE parameter cannot be changed again within the report NT01 FACEUP DUPLEX COLLATE The NT01 FACEUP DUPLEX and COLLATE parameters follow a specific hierarchy by which one command parameter forces changes in certain other command specifications when a YES option is selected This hierar
270. d image format L LPS labeled tape format default S This is one of the following file storage parameters D delete after report printed P permanent default n This is the maximum number of card images default 1 20 For LPS labeled files the DJDE FILE parameter may be specified as follows FILE In this case the file name and file type are obtained from the label record that precedes the file data 8 72 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES Points to note File effectiveness Note the following when using the DJDE FILE parameter e fthe file name or file type specified in the DJDE FILE parameter differ from those in the label record the file is renamed as specified in the label record This renaming feature for LPS labeled files allows five restricted types of files to be downloaded as different file types e Ifa disk file already exists with the specified file name it is replaced Refer to the File replacement and deletion section for details and restrictions e For card image data the FILE parameter may be specified as follows to indicate the end of card image data FILE C or FILE END C e The single characters C L D and P are file storage parameter keywords for the DJDE FILE parameter and cannot be specified as the file name in a FILE DJDE The DJDE DELETE parameter DJDE FILE allows the remova
271. d lengths are not contained in the records and the record length is the maximum length LENGTH for each record The default is 0 OFFSET This parameter specifies the location of the record length field Syntax RECORD OFFSET option s Options Table 4 29 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 29 OFFSET parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s value Specifies the record length field offset This offset is the byte offset from the first byte of the record to the record length field A value must be an integer in the range 0 the default to LENGTH LTHFLD 1 The default is O 4 22 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS POSTAMBLE This parameter specifies the length of any extraneous data atthe end of the record Syntax RECORD POSTAMBLE option s Options Table 4 30 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 30 POSTAMBLE parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s length Specifies the length in bytes The length must be an integer in the range 0 the default to record length The default is 0 PREAMBLE This parameter specifies the offset to the user portion of the record that is the record preamble length Syntax RECORD PREAMBLE option s Options Table 4 31 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 31 PREAMBLE parameter option s and definition s Option s
272. d of speaking to and controlling the image generator These controls are used by the character dispatcher to generate scan line information This information is sent in the form of character specifications to the image generator which uses it to compose the bit stream that modulates the laser megahertz 1 Unit of cycling speed one million cycles per second for an electromagnetic wave in particular a radio wave 2 Sending and receiving stations of a radio wave transmission must be tuned in to the same unit of megahertz Manner in which an activity or process is carried out Device that converts digital information into an analog signal suitable for sending over analog telecommunication lines Also converts an analog signal from telecommunication lines into digital information Cohesive unit within a program It is consistent in its level and identifiable in terms of loading or with other units Electronic device used with the PC UI to select options and enter data Base that provides friction and direction information to the electronic mouse Optional extension module attached to the system controller to accommodate the mouse pad and provide ample working space 1 System of geographically separate computers linked to one another over transmission lines 2 Communication lines connecting a computer to its remote terminals GLOSSARY 14 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY nonimpact printer object fi
273. d within the JDL NONE Specifies that data is not to be translated by input processing If the system reports missing fonts when running XPPI jobs with CODE NONE specified the operator can elect to continue by pressing the CON key The system then reverts back to the previous PDE which may have contained fewer specified fonts In this case a nonexistent font could have been specified for this PDE causing a rollover to occur When you run a CODE NONE job with DUPLEX YES and SHIFT YES you must specify MARGIN in m inches Input data is translated according to the CODE selected on the VOLUME command Any character that is translated into an ASCII X 20 is truncated after the last significant non ASCII X 20 character in the print record 4 40 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS EOV This parameter specifies the action the system takes when it encounters an end of volume EOV on the input data tape Syntax VOLUME EOV option s Options Table 4 45 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 45 EOV parameter option s and definition s Option s PAUSE NOPAUSE EOF NOEOF Definition s This option has the following components PAUSE Displays a message when EOV is encountered A CONTINUE response by the operator causes the tape to rewind and the normal volume change sequence to proceed NOPAUSE Issues a rewind instruction a
274. ding data character is tested only for the type indicated by the mask character Any valid character in the data character set such as ASCII and EBCDIC may be used in the MASK parameter as a mask character Any character that is not explicitly tested for absolute equality by that TABLE command may be defined by the MASK parameter as a mask character MASK parameter character definitions apply only to the TABLE command in which the definition occurs and as in unmasked comparisons it is possible to specify multiple strings in the CONSTANT parameter The following section describes the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options Syntax Options This parameter specifies the content of one or more string constant s ac TABLE CONSTANT option s Table 7 31 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 31 CONSTANT parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s 5 2 scis a string of constants composed of literal characters and masking characters as defined by the MASK parameter of this command All string constants must be of the same length in bytes The number of bytes for all constants in the table after conversion of any hexadecimal or octal constants is limited to 255 bytes There is no default XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 7 45 USING LOGICAL PROCESSING MASK Syntax Options This parameter
275. dit a report with sheet reconciliation only and without page details S DJDE BTEXT RNA Admin 31 NSE 4230 END Sample JSL for a test run The same report name will be used each time and may be run as frequently as desired MESSAGE BTEXT RNA TestOl1 LDT 0 Syntax Options This parameter allows for comment text to be included in the DJDE record The C must be followed by a space not by an equal sign and must begin at the skip position specified in the IDEN command Any text up to a semicolon comma unless semicolon or comma is enclosed in parentheses or end of record is treated as commentary C option s Table 8 17 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 21 C parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s text Specifies the comment text XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 33 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES CANCEL Cancels effective on the current page the hold automatic reimaging specified by the H parameter of an IMAGE or GRAPHIC parameter Syntax CANCEL option s Options Table 8 18 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 22 CANCEL parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s name name identifies the graphic s being held name 4 ALL Specifies that all graphics being held are to be cancelled COLLATE
276. djust value Y N N CONSTANT Record termination code Y N N FORMAT Length field recording mode Y N N LENGTH Maximum logical record length Y Y N LMULT Multiplication factor to determine record length Y N N LTHFLD Length of field containing record length Y N N OFFSET Location of record length field Y N N POSTAMBLE Length of extraneous data at end of record Y N N STRUCTURE Input record structure Y N N The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options ADJUST This parameter specifies an adjustment value added to or subtracted from the contents of the record length field to determine the true record length Syntax RECORD ADJ UST option s Options Table 4 23 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 23 ADJUST parameter option s and definition s Option s value Definition s Specifies the record adjustment length It is a constant integer added to or subtracted from the value in the length field of every record The range of a value is 127 to 127 and must be no greater than length The first character may be plus or minus The default is O XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 19 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS CONSTANT This parameter specifies a constant string used to signal the end of a record This record delimiter constant string signals the end of the record but it is not included in th
277. ds just before print suspension and after resumption should have compatible printer carriage control PCC characters No additional carriage control characters are inserted by the system during the print suppression Use of the LINENUM parameter in the CRITERIA command is not recommended when using RRESUME Since the carriage control characters are not processed during the print suppression the line number used by the system is that which existed when the suppression started This could result in the test criteria being either unexpectedly satisfied or never satisfied as a function of the line number where the print suppression started DJDE records are processed not ignored even when detected after an RSUSPEND record and before the corresponding RRESUME record XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 7 43 USING LOGICAL PROCESSING Example Following is an example of using the RSUSPEND and RRESUME commands 1 ABL P 2 ABL P C1 CZ C3 RS RR 3 sc 05 ABL RI ERIA RI ERIA RI PEN ES UME ERIA CONSTANT JOB EXEC CONSTANT EOJ CONSTANT EXEC CONSTANT 1 6 EQ T1 CONSTANT 1 4 EQ T2 CONSTANT 1 6 EQ T3 EST C1 0R C2 BEGIN CURRENT EST C3 OR C2 BEGIN NEXT
278. due to a reconciliation error the operator may display the audit log with an option in the window that is displayed This is not possible for sequence errors however Jobs that consist of many small reports are not good candidates for waste management auditing as too many reports must be manually reviewed to see the waste management information XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 53 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Other Audit Logging points to note Note the following Delete logs regularly For maximum control audit logs are never automatically deleted The following exceptions exist A rerun of a report that had no stale date specified LTD 0 The current log replaces the old log of a report where the stale date has expired The current log replaces the old log Where stale dates are not specified but rerun revisions are desired the LDT parameter provides revision numbering These logs need timely administration to delete them when they lose usefulness Use the rerun report revision numbering feature judiciously The Auditor assigns a revision number to reports if directed by the LDT parameter There is a limit however of 999 revisions per report When this limit is reached the revision is assigned 1 If revision 1 currently exists that log will be replaced A job that has a single report name perhaps specified in the JSL and many reports will create many revisions If this job has
279. e DJDE may be used for operator notification or output routing instructions in conjunction with the OPRINFO parameter In duplex processing DJDE records are printed as duplex pages with a blank page on the back and are counted on the accounting sheet If a DJDE is applied atthe transition to the back side of a duplex page and OPRINFOZYES the DJDEs are printed following the back side page A row of asterisks appears on the DJDE page following the parameters whose printing is so delayed The message MISSING END COMMAND OR MISSING PAGE BOUNDARY is automatically printed on an OPRINFO page at the end of a report if e END parameter is found the DJDE Nocomplete page boundary was found before the end of the report that is at the end of report there were some DJDEs that had not yet been applied Job parameter modification restrictions To process a DJDE the system has already been required to process data up to the recognition and interpretation of the DJDE itself This requires that the basic description of the input source must have been correct prior to the application of the DJDE Thus the description of the input source cannot be changed through DJDE either by accident or by intent The system does not allow these basic parameters to be changed through the DJDE parameter JDE as defined in table 8 4 The JDE specified by JDE DUDE is referred to as a selected JDE The parameters which cannot be cha
280. e SIDE DJDE triggers repositioning for only a single logical page and does not otherwise override the SIDE parameter of the RPAGE command It is intended to be used instead of the RPAGE command not with the RPAGE command The SIDE DJDE overrides both the RPAGE SIDE parameter and the ROFFSET parameter SIDE option s Table 8 51 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 55 SIDE parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s side opt This option has the following components offset opt side opt e offset opt It is important to ensure that the data does not pass the margin and go off the page 8 62 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES SNUMBER Syntax Options Considerations This parameter specifies that the printer merge the current segment sequence number into any subsequent segment separator sheets produced SNUMBER can be modified as a DJDE under the following conditions e Both SEPARATORS SNUMBER are previously defined in either a JDE or JDL or as DJDEs e Ifthe SEPARATORS parameter is not specified in the EXPORT command it must be specified as a DJDE along with the SNUMBER DJDE SNUMBER option s Table 8 52 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 56 SNUMBER parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s Inum This option has th
281. e With the exception of DEPT and SHIFT all page oriented DJDEs are applied at a logical page boundary e The following DJDEs when applied cause the current page position to be set to the first logical page of the front side of a new physical sheet DUPLEX COPIES JDL JDE BFORM OTEXT RTEXT FEED e following DJDEs when applied cause the current page position to be set to the first logical page of the next physical side FORMS FORMAT BEGIN PMODE FONTS If the system is approaching disk saturation the output task may have already released disk space for a report that increases its copy count from an initial count of one to a higher number To avoid this do one of the following e Setthe number of copies of the first page to 2 or higher e Include a copy sensitive CME Use the COPIES parameter in the START command XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 17 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES Online DJDE restrictions DJDE processing optimization Online DJDE restrictionslf an online job has header pages only trailers DJDEs in the first header page of a report are recognized but not applied Also if headers only are defined DJDEs invoked within the current report are applied to the first header page of the following report These conditions result from the fact that the end of report processing for the first report is
282. e Y Y simplex pages on which recovery to the page boundary is to be attempted REP Page offset and or slip sheet after recovery Y Y SECURITY Restricted use of certain operator commands Y Y The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options 6 2 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS ERROR Syntax Options Considerations IMISMATCH This parameter specifies the required system response to abnormal conditions detected in input while processing or compiling DJDEs ABNORMAL ERROR option s Table 6 3 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 3 ERROR parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s CONTINUE Displays the normal system message defining the abnormal condition and continues processing the report without applying the offending DJDE parameter and without offering the operator the parameter of continuing or aborting the job ABORT Displays the message for the abnormal condition and aborts only the report it is processing not the entire job without offering the operator the parameter of continuing or aborting the job STOP The default for this parameter and indicates that the system stop processing the report and wait for the operator to respond with a CONTINUE or ABORT command The default is STOP The CONTINUE and ABORT parameters are ref
283. e by page or record by record basis Also certain operator commands can alter the print job in such areas as the number of copies to be printed the sequencing of reports and paper feed specifications Using the Editor There are many steps in creating a JSL and many ways in which a JSL can specify your application s requirements The following sequence is simply one example of the format and content of a JSL to help you get ideas on how to set up your own applications Name the JDL identifier To refresh your memory on using the Editor to create or modify PDL files refer to the appendix Editor quick reference The first step in creating a JSL is to give the JDL a name which can be no longer than six alphanumeric characters for example XRXSPL JDL Specifying VFUs The VFU command specifies the vertical tabbing for the print job There can be more than one VFU identified All are typically specified at the ID level for example ID level commands VFU1 VFU 516 1 11 12 66 11 66 VFU2UP VFU _ ASSIGN 1 11 77 ASSIGN 12 66 132 TOF 11 BOF 132 VFU3 VFU _ ASSIGN 1 1 TOF 1 BOF 132 3 10 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL Setting up input parameters Next you may want to specify the input data characteristics for the application The basic input processing commands are BLOCK CODE PCC RECORD
284. e code file nis the starting line number mis the ending line number iis the increment of line numbering you want This command deletes all lines from n to m It initiates automatic line numbering at n for you to enter code and increments each line by your value for i Renumber lines of text by entering RENUMBER n i nis the starting line number iis the increment of line numbering you want After modifying a file you may find significant gaps in the sequence of line numbers The RENUMBER command allows you to renumber the lines by establishing your starting line number n and incrementing value i Merge one file with another by entering MERGE file id n i file id consists of filename file type and specifies the file to be merged into the one you are currently working on nis the starting line where the merged file is to start iis the line number increment you wish to use Terminating the editing session After you have finished editing your file save it by entering SAVE file id file id consists of file name file type To end the editing session without printing the work file enter END To end the editing session and print out the work file enter PCE PCE represents the commands to PRINT the work file CLEAR the work file and END the editing session E 6 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE A3 A4 abort algorithm alignment alphanumeric AIM ASCII application applicatio
285. e displayed at the beginning of the job This parameter specifies allows processing of barcode data streams with the ability to cross check the three components of the system namely the PC UI the ESS and the IOT By cross checking the DocuPrint 180 ensures that any barcode sheets printed has been accounted for by each component of the software Syntax BSKIP option s Options Table 8 13 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 13 BSKIP parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s READ Indicates that all presented sides of all sheets will be scanned for barcode information regardless of the presence information for that sheet Barcodes encountered when none are expected generate an error condition SKIP Denotes that barcode information is processed only for pages with presence information indicating that barcodes are expected In other words barcodes encountered when none are expected are ignored The default is SKIP BSIDE This syntax will cause the error message Barcode reader not found continue or Abort I will be displayed at the beginning of the job Note DocuPrint 180 LPS does not support the barcode option This parameter allows processing of barcode data streams with the ability to cross check the three components of the system namely the PC UI the ESS and the IOT By cross checking the DocuPrint 180 ensures that any barcode sheets printed has been accounted for by
286. e following components findex inum Specifies the integer line number on which the segment sequence number string is to start Specifies the integer column number on which the segment sequence number string is to end findex Specifies fontindex of the font to be used for printing the segment sequence number string If SNUMBER is specified without SEPARATORS under allowable conditions the font index refers to the font list used at the time SEPARATORS was specified Inum and cnum are interpreted using the metrics of the font specified by findex the same as with page numbering Refer to the Points to note section for additional information XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 63 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES SPLIT This parameter specifies the use of segment management When segment management is in effect an end of segment condition occurs whenever max sheets including separators are generated or an end of copy or end of report condition occurs Syntax SPLIT option s Options Table 8 53 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 57 SPLIT parameter option s and definition s NOW Option s Definition s Specifies that the current or upcoming end of page backside if duplex will mark the last data page of the segment min max Specifies the minimum and maximum numbers of sheets allowed in a segment The minimum
287. e host control fields which are less than the specified length may be padded with blanks so that a comparison can be done If you are using a value less than the length specified or if the number is the same but less than zero the values are not internally the same and thus the test is met There is no default 74 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE USING LOGICAL PROCESSING CONSTANT This parameter defines test specifications for a logical processing function with constant mode criteria in block processing Syntax CRITERIA CONSTANT option s Options Table 7 4 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 4 CONSTANT parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s offset The offset in bytes relative to zero from the start of the physical tape block to a field within the tape block being compared to a table or string constant In the case of record processing it is the offset from the start of the user s portion of the record to the field in the record being compared length The length in bytes of the test field Its range is 1 to 255 EQ NE Keywords that specify the operation of equal to or not equal to tab id The identifier of a TABLE command There is no default LINENUM This parameter specifies the range of consecutive line numbers for which the CRITERIA command is fully evaluated If not specified the default range is all lines Synta
288. e is positioned as the first logical page of the next available back If NUBACK is coded the specified logical page is positioned as the first logical page on the back of a new sheet If NEXT is coded the specified logical page is positioned as the first logical page on the next available side the back of the current sheet or the front of the next sheet The logical page is moved unless it is already properly positioned as the first logical page on the specified side In simplex or in duplex with BFORM the SIDE parameter defaults to NUFRONT and the specified page is positioned as the first logical page If the logical page is already properly positioned a blank sheet is not created offside opt Available offset opt parameters are NOFFSET the default OFFSET If OFFSET is coded the sheet on which the repositioned logical page occurs is offset in the output stacker If NOFFSET is coded no offset occurs The default is NUFRONT NOFFSET 7 30 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE USING LOGICAL PROCESSING TEST This parameter defines the test expression for detection of an RPAGE record Syntax RPAGE TEST option s Options Table 7 22 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 22 TEST parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s test exp The format and syntax of atest exp are defined in the Test expression definition section The logical page on whic
289. e last byte specified by the IMG byte count are ignored Each graphic must be preceded immediately by a GRAPHIC DJDE Improved tape to disk processing time is obtained if the graphic data portion of each record is an integer multiple of 512 bytes and begins at an even byte offset from the beginning of the block Processing of each graphic begins in this mode If a record is not a multiple of 512 bytes or does not begin at an even byte offset from the beginning of the block the mode is terminated In this format one or more graphics imaged on a physical page are included in the data file immediately following the textual data for that page These graphics if referenced are processed in block mode that is copied one at a time directly to the print file adjacent to the page s formatted textual data If not referenced a page interleaved graphic is skipped The rules for page interleaved graphics are as follows e The graphics must occur on the tape immediately following the last text to appear on the same physical page e Rules 1 through 4 for document interleaved graphics apply refer to the Document interleaved section 9 4 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE USING GRAPHICS Batch mode In this mode a report contains only graphics imaged one per page and an optional IMAGE DJDE preceding each graphic These graphics are copied to the print file and processed as block mode graphics Rules 1 and 4 for d
290. e length field refer to LENGTH parameter to compute the number of bytes in the block A value is an integer in the range of 1 the default to 15 The default is 1 4 4 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS LTHFLD This parameter specifies the length of the field containing the block length Syntax BLOCK LTHFLD option s Options Table 4 8 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 8 LTHFLD parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s value Specifies the length in bytes of the field containing the block LENGTH specified above The size is an integer in the range of 0 the default to 5 If size is set to 0 the block length field is not considered to be part of the block and the length of a block on tape is the actual block length The default is 0 OFFSET This parameter specifies the location of the block length field Syntax BLOCK OFFSET option s Options Table 4 9 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 9 OFFSET parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s value Specifies the block length field offset This offset is the number of bytes from the first byte of a block to the block length field A value is an integer in the range 0 the default to LENGTH LTHFLD 1 The default is O XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 5 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS POSTAMBLE
291. e print line Syntax RECORD CONSTANT option s Options Table 4 24 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 24 CONSTANT parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s SC Specifies a string hexadecimal octal or alpha constant as described in the chapter Creating a job source library JSL The length of the constant may be from 1 to 4 bytes There is no default FORMAT This parameter specifies the format of the record length field Syntax RECORD FORMAT option s Options Table 4 25 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 25 FORMAT parameter option s and definition s Option s type Definition s Available type parameters are BIN binary e DEC decimal e packed with no sign e PKSG packed with sign The default is BIN 4 20 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS LENGTH This parameter specifies the length of the longest logical record A value specifies the length in bytes of the longest logical record Syntax RECORD LENGTH option s Options Table 4 26 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 26 LENGTH parameter option s and definition s Option s value Definition s An integer in the range 1 to 310 for offline 133 is the default or 150 the online default For offline systems the tape label contents may override a value For online systems
292. e same method in your forms source library FSL PAPERSIZE B4 and PAPERSIZE 10 12 14 33 produce identical results in that they indicate long edge feed as opposed to short edge feed format Refer to the SEFFNT section in the chapter Specifying input parameters for detailed information on short and long edge feed XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 81 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS TMODE Syntax Options This parameter specifies paper sizes in order to improve throughput efficiency OUTPUT TMODE option s Table 6 66 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 67 TMODE parameter option s and definition s Option s width width unif Definition s This option has the following components width The process direction measurement that determines the default pitch mode e width unit Defines the unit of measurement for the default pitch mode in IN CM DOTS and XDOTS IN INCHES is the default Width values can range from the 8 inch equivalent to the 17 inch equivalent If you use inches the default refer to the table in the Points to note section for the value ranges pages per minute speeds and uses available for the various pitch modes The default depends on the specified paper size the default value is in inches 6 82 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS TRANS UNITS Syntax Options
293. e the Audit Log e W Weekly Specifies that report is to be run weekly BW Bi Weekly Specifies that report is to be run bi weekly SM Semi Monthly Specifies that report is to be run semi monthly e M Monthly Specifies that report is to be run monthly e Q Quarterly Specifies that report is to be run quarterly e 0 365 Specifies the number of days where zero days specified means the report can be run as frequently as desired and will not be checked for accidental re runs e yy mm dd yy year mm month dd day RSQ Y N Report sequence checking enablement Y es indicates the audit report will flag out of sequence sheets delivered This option must be set to N o if out of sequence sheets of a report are delivered For out of order deliveries the job must be run in NOSEQ or BAR ALI mode so that the IOT will not catch and purge the mis sequenced pages XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 27 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES Table 8 19 BTEXT parameter option s and definition s Option s DDE Y Definition s Duplicate detection enablement Y es indicates the audit report will flag duplicate sheets delivered This option must be set to N o if multiple copies of a report or pages within the report are printed For out of order deliveries the job must be run in NOSEQ or BAR ALI mode so that the IOT will not catch and purge the mis sequenced pages
294. each component of the software Syntax BSIDE option s Options Table 8 14 lists the parameter option s and definition s 8 22 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES Table 8 14 BSIDE parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s ODD Indicates that the system will assign sequence and presence information assuming that only odd sides are to be considrered The default is ODD EVEN Indicates that only even sides will be considered when assigning sequence and presence information If EVEN is coded for a simplex job the job will contain no bar code sequence or presence information BOTH Indicates that add sides of simplex sheets and both sides of duplex sheets will be considered in sequence and presence processing Points to note Note the following when using the BARCODE commana Sequence numbers can range from 0 to 65535 but 0 and 65535 are reserved for system use refer to the BAR ALI command in the DocuPrint 180 LPS Operator Guide and BARCODE NOSEQ commands in this chapter At the start of a job the sequence number is always reset to 1 It can also be reset when a user specified ABORT or an INPUT processing forced abort was initiated The READ parameter is not intended to physically enable or disable the barcode reader It only directs the course of action taken when a barcode is read when none is expected
295. easurement and the pitch mode ppm print speeds are shown in table 6 72 Purging stock The DocuPrint 180 LPS can purge tab sheets whenever the tab cycle is not in sync with the formatted data This may be caused by paper jams or running multiple jobs in succession For example if a typical application had the following scenario Two tab stock jobs to run in succession Both jobs require tray 1 Tray two contains the tab stock which has MOD 5 Job 1 starts with Tab 1 located in the upper right corner of a portrait page and Job 2 must start with Tab 5 located in the lowest right corner of the portrait page The number of tabs Job1 will use is 2 In order to run the job in succession you must code the JSL with MOD 5 and POS 1 for Job 1 and MOD 5 and POS 5 for Job2 The DocuPrint 180 will keep track of the last tab position in tray 2 at the end of Job 1 Upon starting Job 2 the DocuPrint 180 LPS will purge Tab 3 and Tab 4 because Job 2 starts with POS 5 and Job 1 used Tab 1 and Tab 2 You can improve performance by ordering application dependent tab stock By using ordered tab stock which supports only those number of tabs required for a specific job you will eliminate the system from purging unused tabs XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 95 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Examples Example 1 This section shows examples of using the OUTPUT command Example 2 OUTPUT GRAPHICS MOVE UNITS 150 CYCLEFOR
296. ecord or block Each user s record or block is examined at the specified location to determine if the constant is present the identifier tab id defines the table containing the constant If present the CRITERIA command is true if not the command is false A constant mode CRITERIA command can be coded as follows cri id CRITERIA CONSTANT offset ength EQ NE tab id LINENUM init count The tab id is the name or identifier of a value TABLE In change mode the user must specify the length and location of a control field in each record or block When the content of the control field of one record or block differs from the content of the control field of the previous record or block the CRITERIA command is true A change mode CRITERIA command can be coded as follows cri id CRITERIA CHANGE offset length NE L AST LINENUM init count LINENUM parameter The LINENUM parameter of a CRITERIA command specifies that only a subset of a report s data records are to be tested for the user defined criteria This subset is specified as a set of contiguous line numbers for a page If the carriage control specification for a given record is such that the record is placed within the set of lines specified by LINENUM the record is examined according to the CRITERIA command Otherwise it is not processed XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 7 7 USING LOGICAL PROCESSING Combining change and constant modes
297. ed random access memory Storage that allows data such as documents to be stored and retrieved directly by address location without reading through any other data Binary data usually consisting of dots arranged in scan lines according to the print order Creation of a page s bit map image for printing Input output device that reads and writes data in the form of magnetic dots on the surface of an external storage medium such as a magnetic disk Collection of data or words treated as a unit Act of overcoming a problem or error during processing Typically a specialized software recovery routine gains control and attempts to resolve the error without crashing the system Access to a central computer by terminals or devices geographically separated from that computer Process of exchanging one portion of text for another This process encompasses two functions deleting old text and inserting new In setting a separation boundary through the Bin Full Criteria task report refers to a subset of a job a job may consist of one or more reports Number of dots per unit The LPS imaging system converts a character from digitized data into a printed image composed of these tiny dots The greater the number of dots per inch that is the resolution the clearer the image that is produced read only memory Solid state memory for programs It cannot be rewritten To store programs data or text for retrieval at a later time
298. ed on the present contents of the universal character set buffer UCSB and the current FOLD or UNFOLD command in effect Processing of forms control buffers FCBs received from the host to redefine channel to line number assignments and to set margins based on the print position indexing byte 4 54 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Online specific commands This section explains how to create a JDE or JDL DJDE processing online optimization and copy sensitive copy modification entries CME Creating a JDE or JDL An online job descriptor library JDL and its job descriptor entries JDEs are created by the user according to the same rules and syntax as other entries The one PDL command that must be specified for normal online processing is VOLUME HOST IBMONL The HOST parameter of the VOLUME command performs two functions Allows the LPS to accept data from the online channel e Allows PDL to use a different set of defaults for the RECORD and LINE commands The defaults which are automatically selected when VOLUME HOST IBMONL is specified are as follows RECORD LENGTH 150 LINE PCCTYPE IBM3211 or IBM4245 DATA 0 150 If ANSI carriage control commands are used in the host application program the host operating system converts each command to a valid 3211 or 4245 command before sending it to the printer Any commands other than those listed are rejected
299. ed stocks 5 9 6 Print format commands 6 1 ABNORMAL command 6 2 ERROR 6 3 IMISMATCH 6 3 ISUBSTITUTE 6 5 OTEXT 6 6 PAGES 6 6 REP 6 7 SECURITY 6 7 Recovery 6 8 Marker page 6 8 ACCT command 6 10 Accounting data on report basis 6 10 Overall usage accounting 6 10 Installation accounting report 6 11 DEPT 6 14 USER 6 14 Points to note 6 15 Example 6 15 ac CME command 6 16 Short form CME specifications 6 16 Cataloged CMEs 6 17 CONSTANT 6 17 FONTS 6 18 LINE 6 19 POSITION 6 20 Points to note 6 20 Examples 6 22 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE xi TABLE OF CONTENTS Example 1 6 22 Example 2 6 22 EXPORT command 6 23 SEPARATORS 6 24 SNUMBER 6 25 SPLIT 6 26 SRECOVER 6 27 STIMING 6 27 Points to note 6 28 Examples 6 29 LINE command 6 30 DATA 6 31 FCB 6 31 FONTINDEX 6 32 MARGIN 6 33 OVERPRINT 6 34 PCC 6 35 PCCTYPE 6 36 UCSB 6 37 VFU 6 37 Points to note 6 38 Examples 6 40 Example 1 6 40 Example 2 6 40 Example 3 6 41 MESSAGE command 6 42 ITEXT 6 43 OTEXT 6 44 BTEXT 6 45 BTEXT parameter rules 6 49 Points to note 6 50 Points to note 6 52 Maximizing with minimal effort 6 52 Other Audit Logging points to note 6 54 OUTPUT 6 56 BFORM 6 58 COLLATE 6 59 COPIES 6 59 COVER 6 60 CYCLEFORMS 6 61 xii XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFER
300. ed to a computer or a network 1 Process of running a program for the express purpose of discovering any errors it may contain 2 For computer oriented Systems the process of verifying a system s ability to meet performance objectives in a simulated environment or validating its actual performance in a live environment In communications the content portion of a transmitted message Consecutive series of characters to be printed exactly as specified in a command In data processing systems the amount of data that can be processed transmitted printed and so on per a specified unit of time To switch alternate from one tray to another The system switches from an active feeder or stacker tray to an inactive one to allow continuous printing when the proper commands are invoked In data communications the last portion of a message that signals the end Method of data processing in which files are updated and results are generated immediately after data entry 1 In data communications the conversion of one code to another on a character by character basis 2 In programming the function of a language processor which converts a source program from one programming language to another In data communications the rate at which data is passed through communication lines usually measured in bits per inch bpi To send data from one place to another Cut off before completion as when data transfer from a host to a printe
301. ed under this default name only if this name exists in the accounting file If the name is not in the accounting file the accounting information goes to NODEPT ACCOUNT parameter use is described in the Accounting file maintenance section of your Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS Operations Reference The following example illustrates the use of the PDL command ACCT and the system level ACCOUNT parameter When the system level parameter ACCOUNT ADD OPERATIONS is entered at the PC UI the name OPERATIONS is added to the current list of names in the system accounting file The following PDL command requests the system to deliver one accounting page to the sample print tray after each report is printed Each time a print job is run with the above command in the JDE report accounting statistics are updated in the system accounting file under the name OPERATIONS ACCOUNT USER TRAY DEPT OPERATIONS Restricting LPS usage to only those departments explicitly added to the accounting file is accomplished by deleting the NODEPT entry If NODEPT is deleted jobs are aborted unless a name has been entered in the accounting file that corresponds with the department name as specified on the ACCT command The NODEPT entry must be deleted before any accounting data has been entered under this name or after the accounting file has been cleared The REPORT USER system level parameter is used to print a copy of system accumulated accounting stati
302. eding the cover body and summary late notice and disconnect pages from the stock referenced by COVER BODY SUMMARY LATE and DISCON respectively Alternatively the DJDE FEED record could refer directly to stocks by name such as FEED F1302 Note that the use of stock references is preferred over stock names 6 112 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS VFU The VFU command is used to assign output line numbers to printer carriage control channels These line to channel assignments perform the same function as the printer carriage control tape on a conventional line printer The VFU command is also used to assign line numbers to the top of form and the bottom of form Top of form indicates the number of lines from the top as defined by the PDE BEGIN values of an output page to the first print line on the page TOF defines the first line on which printing appears Bottom of form indicates the number of lines from the top of an output page to the last print line on the page BOF defines the last line on which printing appears Top and bottom of form are used for prejob page alignment and for page overflow processing For all PCCTYPEs except ANSI and user defined PCCs the prejob page alignment is to top of form in the expectation that the first carriage control parameter of the job will be print and space one line or something similar Selection of ANSI causes alignment to bottom of form to handle the
303. eed stops previous SEFFNT MAP References a previously defined font mapping file file name from a abel SEFFNT command The SEFFNT command has different effects depending on the context e Bypassing font mapping e Mapping contained in the JDL e Standalone mapping files e JDL creates a mapping file The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options 4 28 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS label SEFFNT SEFMAP When coded outside of a standard JSL either prior to a JDL command or after an END command a file containing the font mappings by the name of label LIB is created on a disk for reference within the JSL by other JSLs or through a DJDE When specified without a label preceding the SEFFNT command this SEFMAP parameter puts all font mapping definitions within the JSL rather than creating a separate mapping file When coded at the catalog level SEF mapping applies to all JOBS or JDEs that include the catalog When coded at the job level SEF mapping specifically assigns a mapping to be used with this JOB or JDE Syntax abel SEFFNT SEFMAP option s Options Table 4 35 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 35 SEFMAP parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s font font This option has the following components none A font font 2 Font pair where fo
304. eeded by the job Programmer creates the JSL and FSL source files Programmer invokes the FDL compiler to compile the FSL files into form FRM files for the print job Programmer invokes the PDL compiler to compile the source files into CME TST PDE JDL LIB and STK object files for the print job Operator resets the system parameters to match the fonts forms and graphic requirements of the job LPS completes any foreground processing and waits in IDLE status for the operator to enter the START command with the JDE and JDL for the print job XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE OVERVIEW Job flow process OCS processing The job flow process consists of OCS processing Input processing and Output processing Step 1 Step 2 Input processing The steps required during OCS processing are summarized below The START command identifies the JDE JDL created by the programmer for the job The OCS task reads the START command and notifies the OSEXEC task to load output input DJD and IPD tasks The OCS task then writes a job queue entry JQE for the job in the job queue buffer The JQE includes information from the start command for example the JDE and JDL name and the number of copies Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 The steps required during Input processing are summarized below The RPT task first initializes the job queue buffer from the start JDE JDL information by re
305. eet finisher function number 1 through the DFA channel C6 SF2FUNCTION Specifies sheet finisher function number 2 through the DFA channel C7 SIDE Specifies the repositioning of the new logical page to the first logical page of the given side of a physical sheet of paper SNUMBER Prints the segment number on generated segment separator sheets SPLIT Defines the conditions for starting and ending segments SRECOVER Specifies the recovery mode for sheets of paper in the paper path STIMING Specifies timing parameters Performs same function as the Finishing Configuration Utility FCG but is ignored by the system STOCKS Redefines the parameters of a STOCKSET command the types of stocks to use for the page TMODE Specifies process direction measurement for determining default pitch modes TRANS Specifies whether transparencies are used in the print job XSHIFT Allows shifting in the x direction for short edge binding XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 5 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES Record oriented Record oriented DJDEs take effect immediately at the next record following the last record of the set of DJDE records of which they are a part that is after an END parameter a compiled record oriented DJDE takes effect immediately The exception is the OVERPRINT DJDE which takes effect at the next logical page
306. effective cluster but there is paper in the effective cluster larger than the specified size then the following occurs e SEMIAUTO cycles down and requires operator confirmation When the message CON O displays and the larger size is confirmed the larger paper is used Further mismatches of this type are ignored until The STOCKS parameter changes or End of report and no 5 5 in effect or End of job The printer cycles down The operator must either press CONTINUE to conform the larger paper change the paper or the effective cluster before the printer will cycle up The operator can also abort the report BEST causes the following result The larger paper is automatically used e EXACT causes the report to be aborted if the printer does not cycle down XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 79 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS STOCKS Syntax Options This parameter defines the stockset and its associated stock s to be used in a report If the stockset name does not reference a STOCKSET command coded earlier in the same JDL the system assumes that the stockset exists globally as an STK file which is read at print time In this case PDL inserts a message in the JSL file listing indicating that an STK file will be used at print time Whenever a new stockset is chosen at start of report or through a DJDE JDE and JDL switch each stock is checked to determine that the stock exists and ca
307. egment signal for one segment and delivery of the initial sheet of the next segment through the bypass transport Note The sec specifies the time interval as a decimal number to a tenth of a second STOCKS This parameter defines the STOCKSET and its associated stock s to be used in a report If the stockset name does not refer to a STOCKSET command coded earlier in the same JDL it is assumed that the STOCKSET exists globally as an STK file which is read at print time In this case PDL inserts a message in the JSL file listing indicating that an STK file will be used at print time Whenever a new stockset is chosen that is at start of report or through a DJDE JDE or JDL switch each stock is checked to determine that the stock exists and can be made active This provides an automatic method of changing stocks in the LPS as required by the data stream Syntax STOCKS option s Options 8 56 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 60 STOCKS parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s stockset name Defines the STOCKSET used in a report 8 66 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES TMODE TOF Syntax Options This parameter specifies process direction measurement for determining default pitch mode TMODE option s Table 8 57 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table
308. em level and the RNA from the job level Instead INPUT Processing only uses the RNA with no DPT from the job level and sends that information to the PC UI Caution word of caution must be mentioned as to when BTEXT information is sent to the PC UI For every report INPUT Processing reads the JDE JDL specified in the START command at report set up time In addition it also performs the BTEXT JDE to JDL overrides Although BTEXT is processed atthis time the information is not immediately sent to the PC UI until after the first record of the report is read and processed If the first record is a DJDE BTEXT the DJDE BTEXT overrides the JDE JDL BTEXT Again no combining is done If the JSL has RNA and DPT parameters and the DJDE BTEXT has just an RNA parameter only the RNA parameter from the DJDE BTEXT is used for auditing Once received by the PC UI a set of PC UI BTEXT parameter override rules must be observed At the start of every report the PC Ul enables receiving BTEXT with new RNA parameter When this parameter is received the PC UI ignores any further report detail parameters within the same report This implies that overriding occurs with report detail parameters received after the start of the report and before the RNA parameter After the RNA parameter is received if report and page detail parameters are intermixed within the same BTEXT command for future pages only the page detail parameters are processed If there are
309. ements change e Cluster can have stock in different sizes e One or more trays in the cluster may be preferred Preferred trays are trays recommended by the application programmer or by the site supervisor for the operator to load the stock Trays actually loaded with the stock are the current trays Operator can override the preferred tray recommendation e Data stream can specify the cluster used to feed a page Operator can override the data stream instructions by selecting a specific cluster or tray Briefly the programmer creates applications which tell the system controller on which stock jobs are to be printed The operator loads the stock and informs the system controller which stock is in which tray The system controller then processes the job in two steps e identifying the stocks requested by the application e Selecting a feeder tray for each page by checking the cluster name and paper size associated with the page XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 5 1 DEFINING CLUSTERS What clusters do for the programmer and operator Where clusters are stored As the programmer you group any combination of trays into a cluster Group the trays together because they hold the same stock or they hold stock which differs only in size You can specify the cluster s paper stock by any combination of weight color size and so on Use clusters to include instructions within the report identifying C
310. ent of a file the preceding DJDE packet is printed on an OPRINFO page together with the message FILE xxx yyy PROCESSING ABORTED DUE TO DATA ERROR Input then deletes the partial file that was created and proceeds to process the data as variable text data The Advanced Image Subsystem AIS enables a laser printing system to image encoded digitized graphic images in addition to other text and forms LPS resident graphic software supports input from Magnetic tapes with fixed or variable record block structures that is RECORD STRUCTURE F FB V or VB only in an unpacked format which are compatible with use on the LPS e IBM online host systems equipped with the XPPI software package or equivalent 8 76 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE Graphics considerations 9 Using graphics This chapter contains information on the following topics Graphics considerations e Input for graphics e Processing modes Tape formats Online formats PDL command and DJDE options for graphics e Performance Restrictions There are several PDL parameters available for graphics handling These include four JDE OUTPUT command parameters and six DJDEs Tables 9 1 and 9 2 summarize these parameters The OUTPUT command parameters are described in the OUTPUT command section in the chapter Print format commands The graphics DJDE parameters were discussed previously in the chapter Specify
311. eport offsetting on a record section in the chapter Using logical processing commands If OFFSET FIRST or ALL and ROFFSET criteria is satisfied on page one of a report the normal offset from the preceding report is nullified No change should be made to the OFFSET parameter in a selected JDE XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 73 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS OSTK This parameter specifies ordered stocks Syntax OUTPUT OSTK option s Options Table 6 56 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 57 OSTK parameter option s and definition s Option s clu def mod pos RES NORES TABS size DOTS IN L 1 Pp Definition s This option has the following components clu def The name of the cluster containing the ordered Stock either a cluster name or a cluster reference No default The number of sheets in the ordered stock For example 5 cut tabs would have a mod value of 5 The default is 1 and the range of values is from 1 to 254 e pos The initial position relative to the mod value The default is 1 and the range of values is between 1 and mod e RES or NORES Keyword to indicate if the pos value should be reset at the start of the next report The default is RES e TABS Keyword to indicate a tab stock The default is no tabs e size Width of the tab The value can be specified in DOTS IN or CM The default is 0 5 in This paramet
312. equence errors are indicated by an asterisk to the left of the sheet count Duplicate errors are indicated by a plus sign to the left of the sheet count Both indicators appear if both errors occurred on that sheet XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 55 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS OUTPUT The OUTPUT command controls the organization and format of a report This includes control of the number of copies of a report the forms to be printed with the variable data report offsetting and the use of simplex or duplex mode Many graphics features may be invoked with this command these are explained in greater detail later in this chapter and in the Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS Operations Reference Table 6 36 summarizes the OUTPUT command parameters Table 6 37 Summary of OUTPUT command parameters Parameter Specifies Offline Online DJDE BFORM Form only on back side of a duplex page Y Y Y COLLATE Collated or uncollated report pages Y Y COPIES Number of copies of a report Y Y Y COVER Cover pages picked from the auxiliary tray Y Y N CYCLEFORMS _ Associates forms with report pages in a cyclic Y Y N fashion DENSITY IG local density functionality is listed for compatibility Y Y N purposes It is not supported on the DocuPrint 180 LPS DESTINATION Output destination of print jobs Y Y Y DUPLEX Printing on both sides of a page Y Y N FACEUP Face up delivery of pages
313. er a report split SPLIT occurs at the point of disk saturation VOLUME RSAT option s Table 4 57 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 57 RSAT parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s REMOUNT Specifies the vertical format unit VFU channel that the system uses to signal the end of a report When a skip determined by the printer carriage control PCC field within a logical record to the specified channel occurs the IBM OS Writer banner page is considered found The default is 9 The default is REMOUNT SPLIT Indicates that only one pass is made over the input data and that the reports are in sections and therefore require manual merging Input processing is faster for SPLIT since only one pass is required over the input data SPLIT is recommended for graphics processing when using page interleaved or move mode since moving a large amount of graphic data impacts data stream performance 4 50 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS TCODE Syntax Options This parameter specifies the set of type assignments to use for masked comparisons VOLUME TCODE option s Table 4 58 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 58 TCODE parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s tcode type Specifies one of the following standard character sets for which type assignments are defined
314. er of the OUTPUT command can either specify a stock assigned in the STOCKSET command or bypass this referencing and specify that a stock be called out in the current STOCKSET Use the OUTPUT command PAPERSIZE and SYSPPR parameters to specify physical and system paper size and paper stock types The OSTK and TRANS parameters allow you to specify the type of stock a job uses and the NTO1 parameter enables you to instruct the printer to print the last page of a report first XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 3 13 CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL Specifying output requirements Ending a JSL There are many specifications you can select to define the manner and look of your printed application You can also have messages displayed to operators to advise or remind them of special circumstances This is done with the MESSAGE command MESSAGE OTEXT ALL FORMS DUPLEX ONLY 1 WAIT ITEXT COPY 2 WILL NEED BLUE PAPER Similarly the ROUTE command sends printed information preceding the report to operators Most output specifications are selected from parameters of the OUTPUT command As with other commands these can be specified at any command level but are most often specified at the job level because of the many variations possible Here are some examples Job level commands JOB1 JDE OUTPUT DUPLEX YES SHIFT YES FORM SMPLE MODIFY CMEI FORMAT PDEI
315. er only applies when tabs are specified e LorP Indicates which edge of the paper the tab is located If L it is located in the scan counting direction If itis P it is located in the dot counting direction The default is P The default is 1 for mod and pos RES no tabs gt 0 5 for size P 6 74 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS PAPERSIZE Syntax Options Considerations Example This parameter specifies the paper size to be used for printing the job OUTPUT PAPERSIZE option s Table 6 57 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 58 PAPERSIZE parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s A3 16 54 by 11 69 inches 297 by 420 mm A4 8 27 by 11 69 inches 287 by 270 mm B4 10 12 by 14 33 inches 257 by 364 mm B5 7 17 by 10 12 inches 178 by 254 mm USLEGAL 8 5 by 14 inches 216 by 356 mm USLETTER 18 5 by 11 inches 216 by 279 mm y a variable paper size that is a paper size that is not one of the standard sizes If papersize is not specified the LPS uses the system default paper size specified during system generation When centimeters CM are used to specify paper size the maximum allowable value is 32 767 CM Paper size cannot be changed through DJDE on a page basis Paper sizes can be changed on a report basis however Whether you use the keyword or the x y method for specifying
316. er option s and definition s Option s Definition s pdo length This option has the following components pdo Print data offset is the number of bytes between the start of the user portion of the logical record and the first character of the record to be printed length Specifies the maximum length of printable data within each logical record For offline systems the default is 1 132 For online systems the default is 0 150 For HOST RSX11 FLX the DATA parameter must be included in the user s JSL since the default pdo value causes the first data byte to be skipped The default is 1 132 offline The default is 0 150 online DESTINATION This parameter determines the delivery destination of paper Syntax DESTINATION option s Options Table 8 22 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 26 DESTINATION parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s BIN Specifies delivery to the currently active bin TRAY Specifies delivery to the sample tray Transparencies should only be sent to the sample tray Use caution when selecting the sample tray because of its limited capacity EXPORT Specifies that sheets be sent to the bypass transport Export is honored only if SELECT AUTO is specified by the operator 8 36 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES DUPLEX Syntax Options END This parameter specifies whether printing is
317. er to print an audit report reconciliation on amount NSE sss Number of sheets expected for the report Up to five digits for a maximum value of 99999 may be specified This option is required in order to print an audit report reconciliation on number of sheets consumed The maximum value of 99999 takes into account non barcode pages in the report PRD yy mm dd Process date If specified it prints in the audit report header SEQ sss Sequence number It may be up to five digits fora maximum value of 65534 This is required in order to identify non delivered out of sequence or duplicate pages The value of this parameter must match the bar code text to be printed on the page Note This parameter is required if the PRA or TXT parameters are present 8 28 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES Table 8 19 BTEXT parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s Page reconciliation amount This is the total value of the page up to 11 digits plus a decimal point may be specified Commas are not allowed This option is required in order to print an audit report reconciliation on amount Note This parameter is dependent upon the SEQ parameter TXTzxx x Identifying text It may be up to 64 characters If present prints as detail information for each page expected or delivered as reported on the audit repor
318. eria the C2 cluster has priority over the C3 cluster due to its position in the JSL XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 7 23 USING LOGICAL PROCESSING RSELECT and RDELETE commands TEST Interspersed records within one report or file may either be deleted from or selected for printing by use of the RDELETE and RSELECT commands These commands can also selectively delete specialized records for example control records and offset records that are on the data tape but are not to be printed The following section describes the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options Points to note Syntax Options This parameter defines test expression for selection RSELET or deletion RDELETE or records for printing RFEED TEST option s Table 7 17 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 17 TEST parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s test exp The format and syntax of a test exp are defined in the Test expression definition section If a test exp is satisfied the record is selected for printing If the RDELETE test exp is satisfied the record is deleted from the printed output There is no default Note the following when using the RSELET and RDELETE commands e When defining TABLE CONSTANTS or CHANGE parameters offsets to the subfields of the records are specified in bytes relative to zero from the start o
319. ering system based on 2 that uses only the symbols 0 and 1 Binary is used in computers and related devices since information can be represented with electric pulses O off 1 Most computer calculations are binary In the binary numbering system either of the characters O or 1 The bit is the base unit of information used by computers It can take the form of a magnetized spot an electric pulse or a positive or negative charge A sequentially stored set of bits represents a character on a computer Multipliers are 1 or 0 byte 8 192 bits kilobyte KB or 1 024 bytes 8 388 608 bits Computer space equivalents are 1 5 KB about 1 single spaced typed page 30 KB about 20 typed pages 150 KB about 100 typed pages Data transmission in which synchronization of characters is controlled by timing signals generated at the sending and receiving stations Abbreviation for binary digit the smallest unit of information recognized by a computer See also binary digit GLOSSARY 2 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY bit map bit mapped blocking block length boot bps BSC buffer Bypass Transport byte carriage return channel Visual representation of graphic images in which a bit defines a picture element pixel for example if a bit is 1 the corresponding pixel is printed Display image generated bit by bit for each point or dot A software driven scanner is used to cre
320. erred to as non stop modes The STOP parameter is the stop mode Any abnormal condition detected such as syntax error in DJDE specifications missing file referred to by a DJDE RTEXT error or GRAPHIC error in either mode results in an appropriate error message being displayed In addition during the stop mode the displayed error message is followed by a DJDE error message 52006 ENTER CONTINUE I OR ABORT I If abnormal conditions are detected while processing or compiling DJDEs the DJDE parameter set containing the offending entry is set up to print on the OPRINFO page and an error message is displayed Errors detected while processing RTEXT data are not reported to the user The graphics processing errors are reported separately on the graphics exception page printed at the end of the report This parameter indicates the action to take when a specified ink requires a primary that is not currently loaded An ink mismatch occurs when a report requests an ink that requires a primary color not currently loaded It can occur within a report and may be detected after printing has started If the creator of a report did not include an ink list in the JDE for a report printing may start before the system is aware of the primary colors needed For example page 100 of a report which was XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 3 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS designated black only calls for the green primary and the in
321. es turning page inversion off XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 47 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES ITEXT This parameter specifies a text message to be output during input processing It takes effect on the next page boundary The parameters are the same as for the MESSAGE ITEXT parameter defined in the Print format commands chapter Syntax ITEXT option s Options Table 8 33 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 37 ITEXT parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s NONE Specifies that no text message is output to the operator during input processing The default is NONE SC Specifies a text message of up to 80 characters passnum Specifies the pass copy ply to which the message text applies The message is output to the operator just before processing of the indicated pass copy ply is begun If no pass number is specified the indicated message is output at the beginning of the first pass JDE The jde id specifies the JDE to be used within the selected JDL at the next page boundary In a DJDE packet containing a JDE other record or page oriented DJDE parameters included in the packet override parameters specified by this selected JDE Refer to the Job parameter modification restrictions section in this chapter Syntax JDE option s Options Table 8 34 lists the parameter option s and definition s
322. escriptor entry PDE is used for formatting control FORMS Specifies the form to be merged on the printed pages INVERT Specifies that an image is to be inverted ITEXT Specifies a text message to be displayed to operators during the input process JDE Specifies the JDE to be used within the selected JDL at the next page boundary JDL Specifies the name of the JDL to be invoked at the next page boundary MAP References a previously created font mapping file MARGIN Specifies the left printing margin within each logical page MODIFY Specifies the CME to be used on the page to override an existing CME NUMBER Specifies page numbering control OTEXT Provides a text message to be displayed to the operator during job printing PMODE Specifies the printing mode for each page either landscape or portrait 8 4 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES Table 8 1 Page oriented DJDEs continued DJDE RFORM Function Specifies whether a form is printed on all RTEXT pages RTEXT Specifies text to be printed on a separate page preceding a report SEFMAP Specifies a font mapping table different than the one specified in the JDL SEPARATORS Specifies that the next data page in a report be used to generate segment separator sheets SHIFT Specifies a shift of image on the page for binding purposes SF1FUNCTION Specifies sh
323. esent for the job A warning is issued by the PDL compiler if one command but not both is invoked for a job However the JDE is compiled as programmed The RSUSPEND command is intended to suspend records within a report RSTACK record satisfying the RSTACK test can still be found and terminates the report even if the printing of records is suspended at the time Also DJDE records are not processed even if record printing has been suspended Refer to chapter 8 Specifying dynamic job descriptor entries DJDEs for further information record satisfying the RSTACK criteria is still detected and terminates the report and record suspension even if the printing of records was suspended at the time Ifthe criteria for RSTACK and RSUSPEND are satisfied on the same record that record delimits the report and the record is suspended If a data record satisfying the test expression in the RSUSPEND is encountered printing is suspended If no record satisfying the test expression in the RRESUME command is encountered or no RRESUME command is present for the job there is no output generated for records that occur after the point of suspension Record selection or deletion is performed before suspend resume processing If a record satisfying either the suspend or resume test criteria was not selected for or deleted from printing previously it does not cause either the suspend or resume function The recor
324. esumes with the first sheet not successfully delivered The default is PAGE SEGMENT Specifies reprinting of the entire currently printing segment Since it is possible for sheets of multiple segments to be in the paper path at the same time the segment most advanced in the paper path without being successfully delivered is the starting recovery position ASK Specifies that the operator be requested through the user interface to select PAGE or SEGMENT recovery DEVICE Places recovery mode selection responsibility with a Device Finishing Architecture DFA compliant finishing device through the LPS bypass transport option If the DEVICE recovery option is specified and output is directed to a destination other than the bypass transport the PAGE recovery option prevails Example SRECOVER SEGMENT STIMING This parameter is provided for possible compatibility with other Xerox software supporting third party finishing devices This parameter is ignored by the Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS Syntax EXPORT STIMING INTERVAL sec DELAY sec XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 27 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Points to note Note the following when using the EXPORT command SNUMBER If you specify a line and column value for SNUMBER that is off the page the segment number will not print Furthermore if the system encounters a valid SNUMBER dynamic job descriptor entry DJD
325. et must immediately precede the data for a file or batch of files which is copied to the LPS disk The DJDE packet must include a FILE parameter that is used to signal the start of the file data The FILE DJDE is record oriented and is applied immediately It can be included with other record oriented or page oriented DJDE commands in a DJDE packet Refer to the 4050 4090 4650 LPS Command Reference for additional information on card image file processing Note The DJDE FILE command does not allow a file replacement or deletion transaction to occur if the file to be replaced or deleted is secured and the logon level is not 5 4 64 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Offline mode Host computer tape formats For offline operations the input medium to the printing system is magnetic tape which may be recorded in one of a variety of standard vendor formats As a programmer you define the tape input deblocking and record format parameters that reduce physical tape blocks first to logical records then to print lines Special processing commands can also be selected that facilitate report processing by providing for logical functions to be performed on the input data described later in this chapter Before selecting the PDL commands that are to describe a specific job tape certain tape structure concepts must be understood These concepts discussed in this chapter enable the PDL programmer to
326. eter 6 97 SYSPPR parameter 6 70 system administrator 1 7 default values 2 16 disk creating E 1 to E 6 stored files E 2 executive task operating 1 5 pages 6 97 software tapes JDL D 3 to D 4 T TABLE commands 7 46 to 7 49 tape formats batch mode 9 5 computer host 4 67 document interleaved 9 4 noninterleaved 9 3 page interleaved 9 4 tasks editor 1 5 operating system executive 1 5 TCODE command parameters DEFAULT 4 33 TASSIGN 4 34 TRESET 4 35 TCOUNT parameter 7 15 TEST parameter BANNER 7 16 CRITERIA 7 6 RAUX 7 20 RFEED 7 22 third party devices 6 66 TMODE parameter DJDE 8 59 OUTPUT command 6 71 TOF parameters DJDE command 8 59 VFU command 6 101 top of form TOF line 6 101 tracking information 1 6 trailer banner pages 7 15 TRANS parameter DJDE command 8 60 OUTPUT command 6 72 transparencies 6 72 two hole paper 6 73 TYPE parameter 7 16 U UCSB parameter ONLINE printing system 4 60 to 4 61 LINE command 6 38 processing 4 60 unformatted data 1 10 to 1 11 UNITS parameter 6 72 UNIVAC ASCII character set C 5 Universal Character Set Buffers UCSBs 4 60 to 4 61 user controlled offsets 7 26 USER parameter 6 15 INDEX 8 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE INDEX V valid host specifications computer D 2 to D 3 label D 2 to D 3 value constants 2 6 variable data 1 6 name constants 2 6 VFU parameter 6 99 to 6 102 VOLUME command parameters
327. f form line number ac VFU TOF option s Table 6 88 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 89 TOF parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s value Specifies the number of lines from the top of the output page to the first print line on the page top of form The top of form specification is independent of channel assignments It should be greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to the smallest line number assigned to a channel The default is 1 Note the following when using the VFU command Any channel operation encountered during printing for an unassigned channel causes a print and space 1 line operation This operation occurs even though some vendor formats normally specify the default as a space 1 line and print operation Multiple line numbers may be assigned to the same channel number This simulates the vertical tabbing feature of an impact line printer where a skip to channel parameter causes transition to the next punched hole in the specified channel of the paper tape This tape which controls the printer facilitates spacing a fixed number of lines down the print page There may be multiple punches in any vertical format channel on the impact printer s tape A skip to channel parameter in the LPS causes selection of the next line number in the ASSIGN list for that channel larger than the current line number Page transition and alignment to the fir
328. f that group such as name and address field 2 Area or setting of practical activity or application Set of records or text that can be stored and retrieved An organized named collection of records treated as a unit For offline it is the data between the two tape marks For online it is the data between banner pages To preventthe contents on a disk or tape from being erased or written over by disabling the write head of a unit Permanent programs stored in read only memory ROM Font Interchange Standard Standard that defines the digital representation of fonts and character metrics for the generation of an entire series of Interpress fonts Font containing characters with fixed spacing See also proportional font Font set in which every character cell has the same width In reference to character sets this term describes typefaces in which all character cells are of equal width Monospaced as opposed to proportional spaced Arrangement of characters on a line so that all characters occupy the same amount of horizontal space Nonspacing accent characters that can be combined with characters and printed as a composite GLOSSARY 8 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY font form format form feed FSL function keys fuse GCR graphics grid grid unit halftone screen hardcopy hard values Set of images usually characters and symbols having common characteristics suc
329. f the VOLUME command should not be coded in cases where it is not appropriate for a particular host type A JDL is supplied with the printing system software to dump the contents of a tape Six standard tape formats may be dumped with this JDL H6000 BCD EBCDIC ASCII H2000 BCD IBM BCD UNIVAC FIELDATA Check the listing of the DUMP JSL file to determine the appropriate JDE for the tape to be dumped Other tape formats may be dumped by specifying the host type DUMP or OCTDUMP and appropriate parameters such as CODE and UNPACK in a user coded JDL The MAXLAB and MINLAB on a 4 by 3 packed format tape are the number of 6 bit bytes or characters in the tape blocks that are treated as labels Input data is translated according to the CODE parameter option selected on the VOLUME command Any character which is translated into an ASCII X 20 is truncated after the last significant non ASCII X 20 character in the print record When running a CODE NONE job with DUPLEX YES and SHIFT YES MARGIN must be specified in m inches For example m V5 BEGIN ALI 01 4 52 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Examples Table 4 60 lists the components of this example and their definitions Table 4 60 Example components and definitions Component Definition m Positive decimal number of the form nnn dd up to two digits to the right of the decimal point Vo Even back
330. f the user s portion of the record to the beginning of the subfield Record selection or deletion is performed prior to RAUX and suspend or resume offline If a record satisfying either the RAUX suspend or resume test criteria was previously not selected for or deleted from printing neither the RAUX nor suspend nor resume functions 7 24 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE USING LOGICAL PROCESSING Example The following commands illustrate the use of RDELETE to process interspersed reports on a record basis refer to figure 7 4 Tl TABLE CONSTANT EFGH Cl CRITERIA CONSTANT 104 4 EQ T1 RDELETE 1 If the contents of a deletion control field located 104 bytes from the start of the user portion of the record are equal to the constant the record is not printed In the following example records 2 and 6 would not be printed Figure 7 4 Sample RDELETE command usage BLOCK 1 BLOCK 2 N Siu cg o a zii yap m 2 e 4 5 6 7 8 T Record Number 14 r r N RJC Rn 103 bytes of data EFGH Record Length Field Carriage Control Byte Tape Mark Interblock Gap XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 7 25 USING LOGICAL PROCESSING ROFFSET command PASSES The logical processing function ROFFSET provides the capability for online and offline users to initiate a page off
331. fferent method of packing T4X3H2 Whenever an unpacking method is included in the JDL the system unpacks the characters before data processing Each 6 bit character is extracted and two high order zeros are appended Normally after data is unpacked it must be translated The character code set is defined in the CODE parameter of the VOLUME command For a 4 by 3 unpacking method the data is generally encoded in BCD and one of the three standard BCD CODE parameters H2BCD H6BCD and IBMBCD can be used The Offline specifications appendix shows an example of how 6 bit characters packed in the T4X3 method also T4X3H2 are unpacked and then translated to ASCII by the system Record structure All tape records input to the printing system are either blocked or unblocked with a fixed length a variable length or an undefined format The PDL commands BLOCK and RECORD define the format ofthe input data Tape label contents may also describe blocking and record structure and in some cases override BLOCK and RECORD commands specified in the JDL source file These labels are described in this chapter and in the Xerox LPS Tape Formats Manual A record is arbitrarily divided into two portions operating system and user The operating system portion of the record contains information supplied by the host operating or spooling system The user s portion of the record contains information provided by the application or user s program run
332. field defined by the CRITERIA command the string from the last overprint record becomes the saved comparison string and the CHANGE CRITERIA is satisfied e If the LINENUM parameter is used lines within the specified range are processed normally and lines outside the range are not evaluated Thus change mode comparison strings are not saved from lines outside of a LINENUM range No print records carriage control specifies no printing but only skipping or spacing are evaluated for logical processing in the following manner e f change mode is specified no print records are evaluated e fconstant mode is specified no print records are evaluated 7 8 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE USING LOGICAL PROCESSING Examples Example 1 This section shows two examples of using the CRITERIA command Example 2 The following are examples of CRITERIA commands including the TABLE commands they reference The identifiers C1 and C2 are referenced by a logical processing TEST parameter 1 TABLE CONS C1 CRITERIA CONS AN SS8 2 TABLE CONS C2 CRITERIA CONS AN AN 4 4 1 JOB AN EQ 1 6 1 EQ 1 Lot d PERE 2 T1 TABLE CONSTANT EFGH C1 CRITERIA CONSTANT RDELETE TEST C1 104 4 NE T1 LIN ENUM 10 6
333. fies whether the image of the form and data on a page is to be shifted and if so by what values This parameter is used to shift the image of the data for two hole paper binding finishing and edgemarking XSHIFT allows shifting in the x direction for short edge binding OUTPUT XSHIFT option s Table 6 69 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 70 XSHIFT parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s NO Specifies that no shift occurs value An integer that specifies a shift amount on the front and back side The shift is in the x direction and each dot is 1 300 of an inch The allowable range is 75 to 75 INVPDE PDE PMODE PORTRAIT BEGIN 1 3 37 FONTS P0612A INVJDE JDE OUTPUT INVERT BACK SHIFT YES XSHIFT 40 FORMAT INVPDE PAPERSIZE 8 5 11 6 84 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS XMP Syntax Options Xerographic mode persistence XMP controls xerographic mode switching XMS to use for the report Depending on the option specified the effect is to maximize throughput or minimize toner usage OUTPUT XMP may be specified in V5 0 and or V4 0 JDLs The DocuPrint 180 LPS is capable of processing highlight color jobs and printing them in monochrome thus ignoring that XMP was specified OUTPUT XMP option s Table 6 70 lists the parameter option s an
334. from the cluster definitions which reference them The default CLUSTR LIB created contains definitions for the MAIN AUX and AUTO clusters These clusters can be used as they are or modified before use but they cannot be deleted e MAIN is predefined as tray 1 e AUX is predefined as tray 2 e AUTO is predefined as trays 1 2 3 The print description language OUTPUT command FEED parameter is valid with FEED MAIN and FEED AUX because the system defines the MAIN and AUX trays as clusters to support backwards compatibility Both clusters are always active regardless of whether they are specified in the active stockset Note the following 5 2 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE DEFINING CLUSTERS Do not however use FEED MAIN and FEED AUX in conjunction with stocksets You must use the FEED MAIN operator command at the start of a job if the data stream is controlling trays cluster information and so on e You cannot edit CLUSTR LIB It is automatically updated by the CLU and CLP commands which enter clusters in the database or modify cluster definitions How applications use clusters There are several ways for you to specify clusters in your applications e Some applications do not change stock types simple applications e Some applications change stock types but do not use stockset commands to do so OTEXT applications change stock types using the STOCKSET command stockset appli
335. fter this DJDE SEFMAP parameter is processed the contents of the memory font mapping table are font fontz fonts fonta XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 71 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES DJDE FILE parameter This DJDE provides a capability of loading card image or LPS labeled files to the LPS disk while a printing job is in progress The print job may be invoked solely for the purpose of downloading files in other situations the files may be interleaved with variable text data so that they are available when referenced by input or output processing In either case a DJDE packet must immediately precede the data for a file or batch of files that is to be copied to the LPS System disk The DJDE packet must include a FILE parameter used to signal the start of the file data The DJDE FILE parameter is record oriented and is therefore applied immediately It may be included with other record oriented or page oriented DJDE parameters in a DJDE packet The FILE parameter is specified as follows FILE file name file type f s 11211 Table 8 61 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 65 FILE parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s file name This is a 1 to 6 character name used to identify the disk file file type This is a 3 character file type symbol f This is one of the following file input format parameters C car
336. ful Facts About Paper This reference contains the following information Product overview Hardware and software e 1 5 connections User considerations e 1 5 comparisons This reference contains the following information Characteristics of different formats e File organization e Data formats e Carriage control conventions This reference contains the following information e Font naming conventions Listing of standard fonts Data Sheets Glossary of typography terminology This reference contains the following information e Selection and guidelines e Storage Specifications for different printers XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE xxiii INTRODUCTION About this manual The DocuPrint 180 Laser Printing System PDL Reference describes the print description language commands and dynamic job descriptor entries used to control the printing of jobs on the Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS The DocuPrint 180 Laser Printing System PDL Reference is divided into the following chapters and appendices Chapter 1 Overview Overview of laser printing system LPS components and functions print description language PDL features key terms job flow input and output processing Chapter 2 Print description language PDL Job source library overview the structure of PDL commands and JSLs job source library command levels hierarchy of replacement compilation and error processing Chapter 3 Crea
337. g sections e ID level e System level Catalog level e Job or JDL level e END command The command levels are always preceded by the JDL coding which provides the name of the compiled JDL You can place PDL commands in any command level depending on your particular application needs Table 2 3 outlines the command levels and some typical specifications that are included in these various levels Table 2 3 Command levels and their general purpose Command level General purpose ID Typically used to assign output channel numbers to printer carriage control channels through the VFU command but any command which has an identifier may be used at the ID level such as the CODE PCC and ROUTE commands System or JDL Establishes installation defaults Catalog Groups PDL commands for easy reference at the job level Job or JDE Defines how individual print jobs are processed 2 10 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE PDL Figure 2 3 illustrates a sample JSL file format and provides examples Figure 2 3 Sample JSL file format JDLSMP JDL THIS SAMPLE JSL SHOWS THE JSL COMMAND LEVELS ID LEVEL COMMANDS CODED HERE
338. g these job parameters with DJDEs are as follows The printing system does not stop between reports nor does it require operator intervention The operator starts up a job on the printing system and typically returns to it only when minor operational activity is required Forms may be changed on a page to page basis Many variations on VFU channel margin and top and bottom of form assignments may be applied to reports as they are created instead of being stored in the printing system through JDEs Thus the number of JDEs required for job processing is reduced Unusual processing requirements may be satisfied through the use of DJDEs Varying numbers of copies can be generated automatically with routing or distribution notification sent to the operator Nonprint data can be downloaded for storage on the LPS System disks through the print stream In the following sections of this chapter note that some DJDE parameters show a default value This is the default value used if the parameter is not specified in either a DJDE orthe current JDE or JDL If the parameter is not specified in a DJDE but is specified in the current JDE or JDL the JDE or JDL value remains in effect 8 2 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES Page and record oriented DJDEs Page oriented There are two types of DJDEs page oriented and record oriented Page oriented DJDEs change specifi
339. gest font in the current line The line spacing of the first line in a report is determined by the first font in the PDE provided the FONTINDEX parameter has not been specified When FONTINDEX is specified the line spacing of the first line of a report is determined by the font indicated by the font index value in the first line of the report If there is no font index value in the record and FONTINDEX is specified the line spacing for the first line of the report is determined by the first font in the PDE When the FONTINDEX or CME parameters are specified the line spacing of the first line of subsequent pages is determined by the line spacing of the font called out by the last font index of the previous page into the current PDL font list If a PDE DJDE has occurred prior to the page transition the font used for the line spacing comes from this list 6 38 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS The height of the last font used determines the initial base line of that first print line The FONTINDEX byte if selected is processed for every record DJDEs RPAGE and all criteria records A valid FONTINDEX byte should be present in all records since it controls line spacing and override line spacing at page transitions Font index bytes It is advisable to put the font index byte in the beginning of variable record to conserve tape space The byte must be present in every record If the offset to the
340. ght margins on one physical page one side of a sheet Up to 63 logical pages may be defined per physical page These logical pages may be defined in any order on the physical page and placed on the physical page in the order the BEGIN parameters appear in the PDE command The first BEGIN specified whatever its physical position on the page is considered logical page one Structure your variable data in the same order that the logical pages are defined using either spacing or skipping printer carriage controls to move from one logical page to the next Generally a skip to channel 1 parameter is the easiest way to position to the next logical page The following should be noted Eachonline banner page is positioned as the first logical page of a new physical sheet if BANNER command parameter TYPE BANNER e ROFFSET causes the logical page containing the matching criteria to be the first logical page of a new physical sheet Page numbering occurs on each logical page rather than each physical page e Commands that specify line numbers such as CRITERIA VFU CME and NUMBER refer to the line on the current logical page ranging from TOF to BOF e RTEXT is imaged on a separate physical sheet Line and column for positioning of the text refers to the first logical page specified in the PDE e RAUX criteria found any logical page on the physical page causes that sheet to be picked from the auxiliary tray e Accounting
341. graphic refer to DJDE IMAGE parameter which is currently subject to the hold parameter of its calling command ALTER maintains the hold parameter in effect but also specifies a new set of imaging parameters for the current and subsequent pages vpos hpos This option has the following components e vpos Specifies the vertical position of the top edge of the graphic relative to 0 0 on the current physical page in centimeters cm inches in specified as a decimal number with up to three digits to the right of the decimal point dots xdots or user defined units un If un is specified the user defined positioning unit must previously be defined by the UNITS parameter of the OUTPUT command of the current JDE or JDL refer to the chapter Print format commands If no units are specified inches are assumed e hpos Specifies the horizontal position of the left edge of the graphic relative to 0 0 on the current physical page The form of the specification un cm in dots or xdots is the same as for vpos Specifies the reference scale factor Each parameter n and d must be an integer in the range of 1 to 8 thereby allowing a reference scale factor in the range of 1 8 to 8 The reference scale factor is multiplied ALTER BUS 5 5 1 ALTER IMG 1 3 5 END XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 19 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES
342. h Field Print Data Index i Data record structure on tape E M OOO 11 1 byte 1 byte 132 bytes 1 byte Start of user portion of record The print data offset parameter of the DATA parameter the number of bytes between the start of the user portion of the record and the first character of the record to be printed is 1 byte A sample is shown in figure 6 5 The print length parameter the number of characters in the longest print line in the record is defined as 132 bytes The carriage control is defined as IBM1403 and the position of the carriage control character is the first byte within the user portion of the record The position of the font index an index value into a font list that indicates which font is to be selected is byte 133 relative to 0 Example 2 LINE PCCTYPE NONE DATA 1 60 VFU V1 6 40 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Example 3 Font 1 Font 2 E PCCTYPE NONE DATA 1 57 VFU V1 Figure 6 5 Sample print data offset parameter of the DATA parameter DATA 2 jo x jviz y Fontindex Byte Print Records PCC Byte A B C YZ xxr De D X Y Z Overprinting Mec yD X Y Zim apc D Xvz Gane MERGE XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 41 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS MESSAGE command Example The MESSAGE and ROUTE commands permitthe user to inform the
343. h as style width height and weight 1 Compiled forms source library FSL file 2 Printed or typed document with blank spaces for inserting information Specific arrangement of lines text and graphics stored in a computer under an identifying name Page of data that when preceded by proper commands is stored on the system disk as a permanent file It may be merged with variable data by a form start command See also FDL FSL 1 Layout of a document including margins page length line spacing typeface and so on 2 In data storage the way the surface of a disk is organized to store data 3 To prepare the surface of a disk for acceptance of data Keyboard or printer control character that causes the printer to skip the top of the next page forms source library Uncompiled collection of user created files containing FDL commands Refer to FDL form Keyboard keys that produce no character but initiate a particular machine function such as delete To affix dry ink to paper by heat or pressure or a combination of both group code recording mode Refers to the specific density of data such as 6250 bpi as itis recorded on tape which is measured in bits per inch bpi Use of lines and figures to display data as opposed to using text Imaginary pattern of evenly spaced horizontal and vertical lines on a page Smallest rectangle enclosed by horizontal and vertical lines on a grid The size of a grid unit is expressed
344. h report This page is always printed in the mode of the report Syntax ACCT USER option s Options Table 6 12 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 12 USER parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s BIN Directs an accounting page to the output bin The default is BIN TRAY Directs an accounting page to the sample tray BOTH Directs an accounting page to the output bin and the sample tray NONE Specifies that no accounting page is delivered Note When running in duplex line counts for the back sides of the last five or fewer pages of each report are not reflected in the system accumulated accounting statistics SELECT E specifies that all accounting pages are forced to tray 6 14 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Points to note Example Note the following when using the ACCT command If the report completion code on the accounting page is non zero an accounting page is delivered to the tray even if USER NONE is coded This is done to notify the user of a possible report integrity problem However if the report is duplex and the first integrity problem occurs within the last eight back sides the report completion code on the forced accounting page is zero Jobs aborted by input as a result of job recovery produce an accounting page with as much accounting information as can be salvaged The accounting page is deli
345. h this record normally prints is called the current logical page WHEN This parameter defines the portion of the current logical page to be positioned to the first logical page of a new location Syntax RPAGE WHEN option s Options 7 23 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 23 WHEN parameter option s and definition s Option s BOTTOM Definition s The logical page following the current logical page is repositioned NOW The current record is repositioned This record prints at TOF Any spacing or skipping defined to occur before printing the current record is ignored TOP The current logical page is repositioned The default is TOP XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 7 31 USING LOGICAL PROCESSING Points to note Note the following when using the RPAGE command These points apply to offline jobs only If a record intended to satisfy the criteria for RPAGE is suspended by RSUSPEND that record is not checked for the RPAGE criteria Note that the RPAGE criteria takes effect when printing is resumed Record selection deletion is performed prior to RPAGE processing If a record satisfying the RPAGE test criteria was previously not selected for or deleted from printing the RPAGE does not function Since DJDE processing occurs prior to RPAGE processing DJDE records are not checked for satisfying the RPAGE criteria Figures 7 6 and 7 7
346. half of the feeder stacker modules Numbering system with a base of 16 In this system 10 through 15 are represented by A through F respectively Relative priority assigned to arithmetic or logical operations that must be performed Language consisting of words and symbols that are close to normal English and therefore readily understandable by the user High level languages are oriented to problems or commercial procedures and are the source languages for most programs Computer accessed by users which serves as a source of high speed data processing for workstations with less computer power See also mainframe Connection between network and host computer Symbol appearing on the PC UI or printer control console that can be opened to display a window or screen options identifier Character used to identify or name data and possibly to indicate certain properties of that data Area on a physical page that may contain text or graphics Generic term encompassing both word and data processing used to describe the entire scope of operations performed by a computer 1 To prepare the magnetic surface of a blank diskette so that it can accept data 2 To set all information in a computer system to its starting values usually the first step is accomplished when a program is booted Data or text introduced into a computer based system General term encompassing the flow of data into and out of a system GLOSSARY 10
347. haracter spacing For OVERPRINT MERGE the LPS replaces characters in the previous record which are blank Character spacing values are adjusted thus proportionally spaced or different size fonts may be used and the LPS performs the character placement Characters in the previous record which are blank are replaced only when they are represented by an EBCDIC X40 or an ASCII X20 Binary character representations other than an EBCDIC X40 or an ASCII X20 which produce a blank character when printed with a particular font is not replaced except in the following case During input processing when a binary character representation is greater than the highest character in the specified font a blank EBCDIC X40 or ASCII X20 is substituted into that print position A sample of the specified font shows the highest binary character representation In this case the LPS replaces this character since it is now an EBCDIC X 40 or an ASCII X 20 blank If FONTINDEX and OVERPRINT MERGE are specified and proportional fonts are being used data lines are not properly aligned if printing in landscape mode and the data switches to a larger font in the middle of the line Multiple fonts When multiple fonts of various sizes are used on a single page the line spacing of any particular line is determined by the largest font in use in the previous line The current line can also be adjusted downward by the difference in height between the first and the lar
348. he default is PROCESS VFU This parameter specifies VFU options Syntax LINE VFU option s Options 6 32 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 32 VFU parameter option s and definition s Option s vfu id Definition s The command identifier of the VFU table which must precede this reference to it Refer to the Defining print line positions section The VFU table defines print line positions corresponding to skip to channel parameters for the job to be processed NONE Indicates that any skip to channel parameter is to be replaced by a carriage control of print and space 1 The default is NONE XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 37 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Points to note Note the following when using the LINE command FONTINDEX Although the maximum bit opt value may be 7 allowing a maximum font index value of 127 the maximum number of fonts is constrained by the size of available input and output dynamic memory font memory size and the CME or PDE FONTS parameter Also internal table structures limit the number of fonts which can be invoked on a single page to 94 fonts FONTINDEX and OVERPRINT FONTINDEX used in conjunction with overprinting is handled as follows For OVERPRINT PRINT the LPS overprints records analogously to an impact printer if the fonts are the same size If the fonts differ records are overprinted without regard to c
349. he default is used The default jal must have been created by the user with an identifier of DFAULT in the SYSTEM command SIM Control the processing mode of a job The two modes are single report S and multiple report M The default mode is multiple report Single report mode halts the system after the processing of each report to allow the operator to select the job set up parameters for the next report by entering a new START command Whenever the S mode is invoked in the START command the system processes only one report at a time and the accounting sheet will call the report REPORT 1 If the REPORTS option of the START command is invoked at the same time as the S mode the REPORT option takes precedence over the S mode option If multiple reports are listed in the REPORTS option all the reports are processed in multiple report mode except the last report which is processed in single report mode Multiple report mode allows all reports in all files to be processed continuously Processing automatically sequences from report to report file to file volume to volume until all reports have been processed copies Prints a specified number of copies of a report It is an override of the value specified in the job descriptor entry and also overrides a DJDE command if present in the input data stream REPORTS rj r9 Allows you to specify the sequence and subset of reports to be processed This option is available o
350. he host and when a new FOLD or UNFOLD command is received The selection of a folded or unfolded translate table is based on the FOLD and UNFOLD 321 1 4245 commands If FOLD has been most recently received from the host a folded translate table is built if UNFOLD is the current command an unfolded table is built Online users may restrict UCSB information by accepting or suppressing the normal processing of host transmitted UCSB data This can be accomplished by the UCSB IGNORE parameter of the LINE command If UCSB IGNORE lowercase characters print normally if they are present in the font and as blanks if they are not The translate table is rebuilt only at the start of a report The UCSB parameter can be changed from IGNORE to PROCESS in a selected JDE but the translate table is not rebuilt until a UCSB load FOLD or UNFOLD is transmitted from the host For most online reports specification of UCSB IGNORE is appropriate The LPS font capability normally negates the need for these translations which were originally defined to handle print train characteristics If however a report using lowercase characters is printed using a font without lowercase the user may e Switch to UCSB PROCESS in a selected JDE and Load a UCSB with lowercase characters defined as not printable and with FOLD specified The first step allows the UCSB to process The second step causes a folded translate table to be built so that uppercase characters
351. he starting number an integer for page numbering The beginning page number may be non positive The number is incremented at page transitions but not printed until it goes positive The maximum page number that will be printed is 2 147 483 647 inum Line number specifies an integer line number on which the page number is to be placed cnum Column number specifies an integer ending column number for the page number sequence findex Font index the list of fonts specified in the FONTS parameter of the PDE command If not specified the first font in the list is used NO Specifies that no page numbering is to be performed The default is NO Example NUMBER 1 1 L 40 1 If both BFORM and NUMBER are specified BFORM pages are numbered 6 72 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS OFFSET Syntax Options This parameter specifies offset control on a report basis OUTPUT OFFSET option s Table 6 55 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 56 OFFSET parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s ALL Results in an offset of each copy of each report The default is ALL FIRST Specifies that an offset is to occur only on the first copy of a report NONE Specifies that there is to be no offset at any time The OFFSET control of FIRST ALL or NONE may be modified by the ROFFSET command refer to the R
352. his is the default NOREPLACE Specifies not to create a new JDL file if it has the same name as an existing file REPLACE is the default TRAY Sends the compiled listing of your code and diagnostics to the sample tray BIN is the default which delivers the printout to the output tray NRWD Specifies that no rewind occurs after a tape file is processed The default is to rewind DISPLAY Displays all PDL messages The default prints the messages only on the PDL listing TDn Tape device assigned at SYSGEN time that contains the JSL Examples PDL XEROX NOSOURCE NOPRINT PDL H2SYS TRAY XEROX and H2SYS are JSL names Note that parameter keywords are not order dependent XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 3 17 CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL Printing the job Page considerations Once your JDL is compiled successfully you can have the LPS print the actual application using the START command START jde id jdl id The START command specifies the job descriptor library JDL and the job descriptor entry JDE also called the JOB for printing Refer to the Non JDL hierarchy START command section in the Print description language components and processes chapter in this manual or to your Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS Operator Guide or DocuPrint 180 LPS Operations Reference for additional information on the START command Paper sizes Now that you have gone through many of the steps and c
353. hput parameters Y Y TRANS eee whether transparencies are used forthe Y Y N jo UNITS Specifies user selected units for positioning graphics Y Y N XSHIFT Shifts image in the x direction Y Y The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 57 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS BFORM Syntax Options This parameter prints a form on the back side of a duplex data page In association with the duplex printing mode DUPLEXZYES a page containing only a form no variable data can be printed with this page may be printed on the back side of a user page This feature can be used to print static data on the back of each page in a report without the use of DJDEs or the repetitive processing of that data Different forms may be associated with different copies of a report by the use of multiple BFORM left parts on the same OUTPUT command If BFORM specifications include some but not all copies of a report those copies not included have blank back sides that is no form OUTPUT BFORM option s Table 6 37 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 38 BFORM parameter option s and definition s Option s copies form id form id init Definition s This option consists of NONE form id Specifies a one to six character file name may be numeric alpha or alohanumeric which
354. ial Feed paper either short edge first or long edge first to accommodate a wide variety of paper sizes Before discussing PDL commands in detail a general understanding of LPS components and functions is helpful The following sections provide such a general overview XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE OVERVIEW LPS component types LPS components consist of hardware and software Hardware Hardware refers to all the physical components of the LPS Examples are the tape drives the PC UI the high capacity feeder stacker and the physical subsystems of the system controller and the printer Refer to your Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS Operator Guide for detailed descriptions of the hardware components of your LPS Software LPS hardware components Software refers to all coded instructions programs which are executed by the LPS Some programs interface with LPS hardware some with LPS firmware and some with other software Examples are the LPS operating system the PDL compiler and the output task Advanced Image Subsystem AIS The hardware components consist of the Advanced Image Subsystem AIS Step 1 Step 2 The Advanced Image Subsystem AIS consists of three printed wire boards which contain character dispatcher font and graphic memory The three boards read the character and image data and convert it into video format for printing With AIS imaging a page isa two stage process performed
355. ical processing command tests the value of the specified test exp and directs the flow of processing based on the result of the test The text exp portion of the command defines a test to be performed on either one or two specified fields and their associated constants for a true or false value The fields in the record or block are compared with their associated set of constants using either an equal EQ or a not equal NE operator The basic element used to describe a test for a logical function is the CRITERIA command Refer to the CRITERIA section in this chapter for more detailed information Logical processing commands with TEST parameters The available logical processing commands with TEST parameters are listed below and are described separately in the following sections Each individual command can be specified only once per job descriptor entry If any one command is specified more than once the last occurrence is used without notification of any error Table 7 2 lists the logical processing commands with TEST parameters Table 7 2 Logical processing commands with TEST Command Definition BANNER Banner page detection BDELETE Block selection BSELECT Block selection RDELETE Record deletion RFEED Change cluster names ROFFSET Page offsetting RSELECT Record selection RSUSPEND Printing suspension RRESUME Printing resumption RSTACK End of report RAUX Auxiliary tray page selection RPAG
356. ication as defined by the TEST parameter of the RSTACK and BANNER commands When RSTACK is used for report separation end of report occurs as soon as the test criteria is satisfied However when BANNER is coded the user specifies the number of consecutive banner pages which must satisfy the test criteria before end of report occurs Report separation based on banner page detection is performed with the BANNER command This includes a test expression to detect a banner page and a count of the header or trailer pages used to separate reports The syntax and format of the BANNER command are described in the BANNER command section There are two modes of stacked reports delimiter and non delimiter In the delimiter mode the record satisfying the TEST criteria is not part of the report following the delimiter but simply serves to separate or delimit one report from another In the non delimiter mode reports are stacked one on top of each other without any special records separating the reports The two modes are specified by the DELIMITER parameter of the RSTACK command If DELIMITERZYES is coded the user may actually separate each report with multiple successive records each of which satisfies the TEST expression on the RSTACK command In this case all consecutive delimiters are treated as a delimiter packet In delimiter mode the user has the parameter to print the delimiter or the delimiter packet and to select the output destinatio
357. ictions section The modified parameter remains in effect until that parameter is encountered in another DJDE packet or until the end of report is reached At the start of the next report either of the following occurs e Ifin multireport mode or operating online the next report begins with all of the parameters specified in the original JDE invoked by the operators START command e lfinsingle report mode the system stops waits for the operator to enter a new START command and then processes the next report with all processing parameters defined in the JDE invoked by the new START command Figures 8 1 and 8 2 show the usage of a single and multiple record DJDE and IDEN command Figure 8 1 Single record DJDE and IDEN command R T E S T COP 1 5 131 TOF 717 p END M Operating system IDEN IDEN DJDE DJDE DJDE portion of the OFFSET PREFIX Option Option terminator record if any IDEN SKIP Start of the user portion of the record IDEN PREFIX RTEST SKIP 9 OFFSET 3 OPRINFO YES Figure 8 2 Single record DJDE and IDEN command M M M M M EST C MULTI RI ECORD DJDE EXAMPLE EST FORMS XE ROX1 1 3 FORMAT XPDE12 FONTINDEX 1 NUMBER 3 15 55 EST COPIES 20 COLLATE YES ASSIGN 1 5 ASSIGN 5 32 ES ES D FONTS P0612A P0812A ASSIGN 12 63 TOF 5 BOF
358. icular word or phrase within a work file wherever it exists by entering FIND x xis the word or phrase to be found and displayed Display the starting and ending line numbers of the work file if you wish to know on which lines the work file is located by entering KEYS The system provides these line numbers as in this example EDIT KEYS BEGINNING LINE NUMBER 00010 ENDING LINE NUMER 00190 EDIT Print a copy of the work file by entering PCE This command is an abbreviated form of the PRINT CLEAR and END commands Be sure to save the work file before using the PCE command by entering SAVE file id The file id consists of the file name and filetype represented as file name file type Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Use the following procedures to change lines of the source code in your program Modify a portion of the work file line Modify entire lines of the work file Save your source code file Terminate the editing session XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE E 3 EDITOR QUICK REFERENCE Modifying a portion of the work file line To modify portions of a line you must first enter MODIFY n nis the number of the line to be modified for example MODIFY 60 Then you can perform any of the following activities Substituting one set of characters for another by entering S xly or C x y x is the text to be replaced y is the text to be i
359. ified per line for a passnum col Specifies the column number at which the first character of a block of RTEXT messages is to be printed The default is column 1 fontindex Identifies the index starting with 1 of the PDE font with which the text is printed rtext id This option is used to reference a cataloged file of RTEXT parameters previously compiled by PDL NONE Specifies that no text is to be printed on a separate page The default is NONE 6 108 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Considerations Example The font index is associated only with a particular string To print an entire RTEXT page in the same font the font index must be given with each string Strings without a font index are printed with the first alphanumeric font specified in the font parameter of the PDE command If more than one font is used to print any number of RTEXT strings on a page the line and the character spacing values of the different fonts are used to place RTEXT on the page If a proportional pitch font is used the starting column number for printing the RTEXT is determined using the character spacing value for the space character in the character font If RTEXT is specified along with COVER FRONT SEP or BOTH SEP the RTEXT pages are printed on the covers Front covers are picked only on copies for which there is RTEXT If RTEXT is specified in non collate mode only the ro
360. imaging parameters for the named graphic Syntax IMAGE option s Options Table 8 31 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 35 IMAGE parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s img name vpos UN CM IN DOTS This option has the following components hpos UN CM IN DOTS img name LTILAIL ap The name of an IMG file or the name on the DJDE sentinel record such as GRAPHIC name of a page interleaved graphic immediately following the current page The name parameter may be omitted in batch mode however the comma before vpos must be coded since it is a positional parameter e Specifies the vertical position of the top edge of the graphic as an offset relative to 0 0 on the current physical page the position that would be specified by a PDE BEGIN of 0 0 This parameter is specified as a decimal number with up to three digits to the right of the decimal point and may be in DOTS centimeter CM inches IN or user defined units UN If UN is specified the user defined positioning unit must previously be defined by the UNITS parameter of the OUTPUT command of the current JDE or JDL refer to the chapter Using logical processing If no units are specified inches are assumed e hpos Specifies the horizontal position of the left edge of the graphic as an offset relative to 0 0 on the current physical page The form of the specification is the same as for vpos
361. indicates that printing is to be parallel to the narrow edge of paper If PMODE is changed through a DJDE command the BEGIN command should be respecified even if the same horizontal and vertical position has been specified in the previous BEGIN parameter PMODE option s Table 8 42 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 46 PMODE parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s LANDSCAPE Indicates that printing is to be parallel to the long edge of paper PORTRAIT Indicates that printing is to be parallel to the narrow edge of paper Syntax Options This parameter specifies a form to be printed with all RTEXT pages It takes effect on the next RTEXT page The parameters are the same as for the ROUTE command defined in the chapter Print format commands RFORM option s Table 8 43 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 47 RFORM parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s form id This is the name of a file cataloged in the FRM directory It is created by compiling a file of forms source commands called a JSL with the FDL compiler Refer to the DocuPrint 180 LPS Forms Creation Guide The RFORM parameter is not allowed in a ROUTE command which is being defined as a cataloged file but is specified in the ROUTE command in the JSL invoking the cataloged RTEXT file Refer to the Cataloged RTEXT files section in this cha
362. ing dynamic job descriptor entries DJDEs Graphics DJDEs are record oriented because they take effect immediately For example ALTER CANCEL and IMAGE may appear anywhere on the page and are applied to the page on which they occur Positioning GRAPHIC BATCH and SAVE DJDEs is discussed in table 9 2 DJDE parameter definitions These also take effect immediately Page oriented DJDEs to be applied to the next page must not precede batch mode or page interleaved graphics to be applied to the current page Note that your Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS can handle single color graphics from a Xerox 4850 or 4890 HighLight Color LPS but cannot process 2 color graphics XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 9 1 USING GRAPHICS Input for graphics Processing modes Named graphics may be input to the LPS through magnetic tape or the online channel They may be input either separately from or interleaved with textual data If input separately they are recorded as permanent disk files If interleaved with textual data they may or may not be recorded as permanent disk files Refer to the Processing modes section for a discussion of this operation A graphic is typically incorporated into a document by a DJDE record occurring with the data targeted for the same simplex or duplex page on which the graphic appears Additionally a graphic may be referenced in a form so that use of the form automatically includes the graphic
363. ing Documents with XPAF User Reference For information on XPMF VMS refer to the Xerox Print Management Facility VMS version User Guide The input related concepts for online and offline processing are presented in the following sections Channel attached LPS This section describes various features of a Xerox laser printing system that is channel attached to a host computer and explains how you can access these features The LPS may have remote dial up communication interfaces A laser printing system equipped with the online interface unit OLI may be attached to a byte multiplexer block multiplexer or selector channel of an IBM 360 or 370 system 3000 or 4300 series and 9370 models or of an IBM system 390 ES 9000 The channel attached LPS operates in one byte six byte eight byte or burst mode No programming changes to the IBM operating system software are required provided that an IBM 3211 printer and 3811 printer Control Unit is already supported on the host system A channel attached LPS can receive input from the host computer in online 3211 or 4145 mode In online 3211 mode the data stream emulates IBM 3211 line printer format with or without embedded DJDEs Online 3211 4245 mode Basic LPS input processing functions are augmented by the following functions for online 3211 or 4245 mode operations e Handling of all interactions with the online interface OLI hardware Building of translate tables bas
364. ing color unique commands However this does not imply XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 3 29 CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL Points to note that the DocuPrint 180 LPS will not print them If an FSL were precompiled by a 4850 4890 LPS FDL compiler and its file FRM downloaded to a DocuPrint 180 LPS the form will print Refer to your Xerox 4850 4890 HighLight Color LPS Forms Creation Guide for detailed information on creating and using highlight color forms Xerox 4050 4090 4650 9700F LPS Note the following e Light tints with isolated pixels of color that print the Xerox 4850 4890 may not print on the Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS Color text printed over solid black background or black text printed over solid color backgrounds on the DocuPrint 180 LPS may not be visible Be especially careful in using this format because this situation does not generate displayed or printed messages Likewise color text printed over gray backgrounds or black text printed over color shaded backgrounds on the DocuPrint 180 printer may not be clearly visible Be especially careful in using this format because this situation does not generate displayed or printed messages e 600 spots per inch spi tints and shades printed on the DocuPrint 180 are finer and more uniform than 300 spi tints and shades printed on the 4850 4890 LPS This section explains how the DocuPrint 180 LPS runs applications created for the 4050
365. ints to note Note the following when using the PDE command The maximum number of fonts that may be used in printing a given page or a given job varies depending on a number of factors For both the input and output tasks the number of fonts specified in the FONTS parameter must be at least equal to the largest number of fonts required to print any page within the job Particularly for the input task the limitations of dynamically allocated memory that is when input is unable to receive an allocation of dynamic memory the job is aborted impose additional constraints which effectively reduce the maximum number of fonts that may be used to print a page The number of fonts specified in the FONTS parameter is used to determine the size of a dynamically allocated table where information about the fonts is cached If the patch to enable the use of Merganthaler fonts is selected when the LPS is sysgened the use of dynamic memory for fonts increases significantly since a proportionally spaced font requires an additional 120 260 bytes of dynamic memory The maximum block length for an offline job can be a size such that the allocation of one input buffer or two of equal size can cause dynamic memory allocation problems when used in conjunction with a large PDE FONTS parameter and with Merganthaler fonts enabled An xdot is 1 600 unit of measurement A form specifying xdots however can be created edited and compiled on any LPS with
366. is performed e Barcode text that prints on the pages is placed in the job stream by the application to enable barcode features e Although the BTEXT command can be placed in the JSL it will usually be placed in a DJDE as most of the parameters will be unique to a job When placed in the JSL it is specified under the PDL MESSAGE command Example MESSAGE BTEXT RNA CK0409 Unlike the PDL OUTPUT command where all parameters are treated independently from one another BTEXT parameters are treated as one entity This implies that parameters specified at the job level do not override those specified at the system level on an individual basis However as a whole the job level BTEXT does override the system level BTEXT For example if the system level contains the RNA and DPT parameters but the job level only contains the RNA parameter INPUT Processing does not use the DPT from the system level and the RNA from the job level Instead INPUT Processing only uses the RNA with no DPT firom the job level and sends that information to the PC UI Caution A word of caution must be mentioned as to when BTEXT information is sent to the PC UI For every report INPUT Processing reads the JDE JDL specified in the START command at report set up time In addition it also performs the BTEXT JDE to JDL overrides Although BTEXT is processed at this time the information is not immediately sent to the PC UI until after the first re
367. ists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 54 OSTLP parameter option s and definition s Option s value Definition s Specifies the number of trailer pages which precede the report The default is O Syntax Options This parameter specifies whether the tape labels are printed VOLUME PLABEL option s Table 4 55 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 55 PLABEL parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s NO Specifies that no tape label printing results The default is NO YES Specifies that all tape labels except those encountered during a volume change are printed on an output page and delivered to the sample print tray Labels are truncated if they exceed the line width limits of the page XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 49 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS RMULT RSAT Syntax Options This parameter specifies a multiplication factor the record length uses to determine the true record length VOLUME RMULT option s Table 4 56 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 56 RMULT parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s value An integer from 1 to 15 The default is 1 Syntax Options This parameter specifies whether to make a complete pass over the multivolume set for each copy of a report that is processing REMOUNT or wheth
368. it EPI XDOTS or DOTS is not specified LPI is used as the default Points to note If an override line spacing value is specified lines printed using the font cause the indicated line spacing to be performed after the line using the font If different fonts are used on the same print line the line spacing value specified for the font of the largest character in the line is used to determine the position of the next print line Refer to the Points to note section Note the following when using the FONTINDEX and FONTS commands An xdot is 1 600 unit of measurement A form specifying xdots however can be created edited and compiled on any LPS with version 3 software but the form which is 600 spots per inch spi will not print on your 4850 4890 4050 4090 4635 DocuPrint 96 or DocuPrint 180 which accepts only 300 spi jobs Since there is ambiguity between the FONTINDEX and FONTS parameters if either is abbreviated to the first three letters the parameter defaults to FONTINDEX In DJDE processing if the input task DJD encounters more than 127 fonts in a packet the remaining fonts in the packet are ignored or truncated Because the DJDE packet in this case is truncated the outcome of the DJDE is unpredictable Thus the DJD task sends the error message 086700 SYNTAX ERROR IN DUDE XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 41 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES FORMAT
369. ize in dots OUTPUT XMP DEFAULT REPORT DEFAULT OUTPUT XSHIFT NO value NO ac PCC ac PCC ADVTAPE YES NO YES ac PCC ASSIGN byte ccin byte ccin ccin ac PCC DEFAULT ccln pcctype DEFAULT ac PCC INITIAL BOF TOF TOF ac PCC MASK value ac PDE ac PDE BEGIN vpos hpos 18 IN 66 IN ac PDE FONTS f fal 1 5 s Lfa 52 L 1 L0112B fy s lpi xdots dots D fa sa Ipi xdots dots ac PDE PMODE LANDSCAPE PORTRAIT LANDSCAPE RAUX RAUX TEST test exp RDELETE RDELETE TEST test exp XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE B 5 PDL COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE Table B 2 PDL command quick reference continued Command Syntax Default RECORD RECORD ADJUST value 0 RECORD CONSTANT sc RECORD FORMAT type BIN RECORD LENGTH value offline 133 online 150 RECORD LMULT value 1 RECORD LTHFLD size 0 RECORD OFFSET value 0 RECORD POSTAMBLE length 0 RECORD PREAMBLE length 0 RECORD STRUCTURE structure type FB RFEED RFEED TEST test exp clu def no default for clu def ROFFSET ROFFSET PASSES FIRST ALL ALL ROFFSET TEST test exp ac ROUTE ac ROUTE RFORM form id NONE NONE ac ROUTE RTEXT sc sc passnum ALLI ine col NONE fontindex rtext id NONE RPAGE RPAGE SIDE side opt offset opt NUFRONT NOFFSET RPAGE TEST test exp RPAGE W
370. k currently loaded in the printer is red Syntax ABNORMAL IMISMATCH option s Options Table 6 4 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 4 IMISMATCH parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s STOP Prompts the operator to load the requested primary or abort the report or job If SUBSTITUTE ANY is specified for the report the operator may also enter a SUBSTITUTE INK command followed by the CONTINUE command to resume printing The appropriate action for an operator to take for an ink mismatch condition when IMISMATCH STOP is specified depends on a number of factors e Ifthe report has not been sent for Output processing yet the operator can enter ABORT to abort report Input processing However if the operator then enters the CONTINUE command the report prints with black ink in place of the missing ink If this is not the desired result the operator should enter ABORT and ABORT followed by the CONTINUE command e ifthe report is already being processed for printing the system responds to the mismatch condition by displaying the following messages 056213 X HOUSING IS NEEDED FOR THIS REPORT 052682 CHANGE HOUSING FOR PRINTING IN REQUESTED INK OR 052000 ABORT THE REPORT OR PRINT JOB 052000 ENTER CONTINUE O TO RESUME PRINTING When this series of messages appears the operator has three choices Change the
371. l of the following types of files only IMG FRM FNT JDL PDE TST and XCS File replacement and deletion Files may be used by input or output as soon as they are written to the system disk However they become effective only when they are referenced or invoked by a DJDE For example a font or form file becomes effective at the next page boundary when a DJDE changes the FORMAT or FORMS parameter to invoke the new font or form file If a file on the disk is being replaced the new file is notto be used until it is reinvoked by an appropriate DJDE Files that may be used by input or output processing during the course of a print job can be replaced or deleted only when they are no longer required If a file can be used by output processing for example FNT FRM IMG and LGO the file replacement transaction entails the temporary retention of the replaced file until the current report is printed A file that is used only by input processing such as CME and PDE is replaced immediately Thus the files marked for deletion after the current report is printed include those that the user had specified for deletion and the superseded files that may have been required by output Files which are transferred with a delete option are available for deletion as soon as the report is printed and therefore must not be referenced in a subsequent report Note Unlike the hostcopy procedure the DJDE FILE parameter does not allow the
372. l cause the error message Barcode reader not found continue or Abort I will be displayed at the beginning of the job This parameter allows processing of barcode data streams with the ability to cross check the three components of the system namely the PC UI the ESS and the IOT By cross checking the DocuPrint 180 ensures that any barcode sheets printed has been accounted for by each component of the software BSEQ option s Table 8 12 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 12 BSEQ parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s RESET Indicates that the sequence number should be reset to a value of one at the beginning of each report The default is RESET NORESET Indicates that the sequence number will be continued across report boundaries NOSEQ Indicates that for pages matching the odd even both specification the presence bit will be set and a sequence number of zero will be specified This indicates that the IOT should simply report the value of any barcodes encountered on these pages No error is generated when no barcode is read on a page where one is expected XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 21 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES BSKIP Note DocuPrint 180 LPS does not support the barcode option J This syntax will cause the error message Barcode reader not found continue or Abort I will b
373. late to the production of the report shown chronologically Examples would be a job abort ESS boot etc BOTH Specifies both WMGT and OPLOG Note These options are specified as compound keywords for example SUM WMGT They are never specified alone SUM is illegal RRA nnn Report reconciliation amount the total monetary value of the report expected Maximum of 11 digits plus a decimal point may be specified Commas are not allowed This option is required in order to print an audit report reconciliation on amount NSE sss Number of sheets expected for the report Up to five digits fora maximum value of 99999 may be specified This option is required in order to print an audit report reconciliation on number of sheets consumed The maximum value of 99999 takes into account non barcode pages in the report XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 47 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Table 6 36 BTEXT parameter option s and definition s Option s PRD yy mm dd Definition s Process date If specified it prints in the audit report header SEQ sss Sequence number It may be up to five digits for a maximum value of 65534 This is required in order to identify non delivered out of sequence or duplicate pages The value of this parameter must match the bar code text to be printed on the page Note This parameter is required if the PRA or TXT parameters are present PRA nnn
374. le offline offset offset printing online operating system operation operator area operator command orientation origin output overprinting Printer that forms characters without any strikes of a key or element against the paper Source file converted into machine language binary code Devices not under the active control of a central processing unit For example a computer makes output to a magnetic tape The tape is then used by an offline printing system to produce printed data Offline operations are much slower than online operations See also online To place pages currently being printed in slightly different positions from previous pages Widely used method of commercial and corporate printing where ink is picked up by a metal or paper plate passed to an offset drum and then passed to the paper Devices under the direct control of a central processing unit for example a printing system in interactive communication with a mainframe See also offline Basic host or LPS resident controlling program that governs the operations of a computer such as job entry input output and data management The operating system is always running when the computer is active Unlike other types of programs it does not run to an end point and stop The operating system of a Xerox LPS is referred to as the operating system software OSS Well defined action that when applied to any permissible combination
375. line dump JDL specifies a RECORD LENGTH of 150 bytes If you are planning to use a longer record length modify the JDL to dump the data accurately The LENGTH parameter in the RECORD command cannot be changed using a DJDE since this would require dynamic rebuffering Therefore you should consider modifications to the default online JDL to simplify operations in the online environment The OPTIMIZE parameter of the VOLUME command can be changed through the DJDE JDE subject to the restrictions listed in OPTIMIZE 4 60 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Online recovery In the event of a system failure data that is formatted for print and stored on disk can be imaged upon system restart if job recovery is requested Data which was being received and processed at the time of the rollover is lost and requires retransmission The amount of data which requires retransmission depends on two factors The options specified in the VOLUME command OPTIMIZE parameter and DJDEs that indicate the use of interleaved graphics If NPRECOVER is specified up to nine data pages are buffered in memory before being written to the disk When end of report is detected all pages in memory are written to the disk Therefore if NPRECOVER is specified up to nine data pages would require retransmission but not typically from more than one report If NPRECOVER is not specified up to two pages would require retr
376. line of subsequent pages is determined by the line spacing of the font called out by the last font index of the previous page into the current PDL font list If a PDE DJDE has occurred prior to the page transition the font used for the line spacing comes from this list FONTINDEX OVERPRINT MERGE FONTINDEX used in conjunction with overprinting is handled as follows for OVERPRINT PRINT the LPS overprints records analogously to an impact printer if the fonts are the same size If the fonts differ records are overprinted without regard to character spacing For OVERPRINT MERGE the LPS replaces characters in the previous record which are blank Character spacing values are adjusted thus proportionally spaced or different size fonts may be used and the LPS performs the character placement If FONTINDEX and OVERPRINT MERGE are specified and proportional fonts are being used data lines are not properly aligned if printing in landscape mode and the data switches to a larger font in the middle of the line XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 69 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES Examples SNUMBER If the system encounters a valid SNUMBER dynamic job descriptor entry after an incorrect EXPORT command SNUMBER parameter had been specified unpredictable results may occur SNUMBER as a DJDE may only be used to change current line or column numbers and fontindex values that are specified in the SNUMBER para
377. ll system generated pages such as accounting sheet error summary OPRINFO recovery marker and report separator are printed in the same xerographic mode as the previous page to prevent unnecessary xerographic mode switching XMS The exception to the rule is when the default ink is a primary color and the previous page s xerographic mode is BLACK Accounting sheets always print using the system default BLACK ink The ink used to print all other system generated pages depends on the xerographic mode of the previous page and the default ink Syntax Options This parameter specifies an sc identifier which is the search criterion for recognizing DJDE records It is a byte string of up to 255 characters represented as a hexadecimal octal BCD ASCII or EBCDIC character constant as described in the Right part constants section of the Overview chapter PREFIX option s Table 8 6 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 6 PREFIX parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s SC Any records within the data stream which contain an identification field equal to the specified prefix string Sc are recognized and processed as DJDE records There is no default 8 8 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES SKIP Syntax Options Points to note This parameter offsets to the starting column of the DJDE parameters
378. logo log off log on magnetic media magnetic storage magnetic tape mainframe margins mask Alphanumeric beginning with a letter optionally including an asterisk period colon or slash and not enclosed in single quotes To enter data into storage or working registers Place in which data can be stored Collection of messages or message segments placed on an auxiliary storage device for accounting or data collection purposes In the Xerox printing systems environment a formatted page that is smaller than the physical page A logical page is defined by an origin thus allowing more than one logical page to be placed on a physical page Small illustration or design usually simple typically used to identify a company Procedure by which a user ends a session Procedure by which a user begins a session between an application program and a logical unit Term for all storage devices such as disks diskettes and tape on which data is stored in the form of magnetized spots on surface of the media Use of magnetic media to store data programs and so on Flexible plastic tape with one side offering a magnetic surface suitable for storing computer data in the form of magnetized spots Magnetic tape is often used for long term storage since it can accommodate large volumes of information Central processing unit CPU and memory of a large computer More often used to denote any large computer of the type
379. lowing components e vpos Specifies a decimal number with up to three digits to the right of the decimal point such as 0 563 IN and 2 35 are all legal specifications The default is 18 IN e hpos Specifies the horizontal position of the first character of the first print line on the logical page in IN or CM as for vpos All specifications are rounded to the nearest dot 1 300 of an inch for positioning of the logical page The default is 66 In specifying the location of the beginning of a print line on the logical page measurement is performed by viewing the page in the mode landscape or portrait in which itis to be printed There may be more than one logical page per physical page these are defined by the use of multiple BEGIN parameters If no BEGIN parameter is specified then the default is FMT1 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 101 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS FONTS This parameter specifies the fonts to be used in printing variable input data and CME data Syntax ac PDE FONTS option s Options Table 6 76 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 77 FONTS parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s fL fol I This option has the following components f7 57 L faSa L f f7 84 LPI XDOTS Specifies a one to six alphanumeric character DOTSpL fa sa LPl identifier consisting of at least one letter XDOTS DO
380. ltiple DJDE sequences in a job Each set modifies only the specific parameters mentioned within the DJDE The following should be considered when preparing DJDE records as part of the input data stream Examples of DJDE records are illustrated in figures 8 1 and 8 2 e The DJDE record may contain more than one parameter Each parameter within a record must be separated from the next parameter by a comma Lowercase alphabetic characters are not accepted in the DJDE parameter line If they are used a DJDE syntax error message is displayed e The end of a DJDE record parameter that is split and continued on the next DJDE record should be terminated with a comma semicolon e The prefix in the DJDE record may appear after the DJDE parameter s as long as it is consistently located in all DJDE records e DJDE records need not be consecutive since none of the parameters are applied until END is encountered However it is recommended that DJDE records be consecutive especially when used with delimiter records To optimize input processing speed DJDE parameters should be grouped into as few records as possible A group of DJDE records terminated by an END parameter is called a packet Only one page oriented packet can be deferred to the next page If a page oriented DJDE packet is received after the start of page A so that it is deferred to page A 1 any separate DJDE packets following it on page A may cause unpredictable resu
381. lts and may possibly be printed as data e Apage oriented DJDE positioned prior to any print parameters on a page takes effect on the current page A page oriented DJDE positioned after the first print parameter on a page takes effect on the next page unless end of report is encountered e For delimiter mode stacked report processing DJDE parameters may be placed in the report body They may also be placed within or after but not before the delimiter record packet e For change mode stacked reports the DJDE parameters may be placed within the body of the stacked report where the DJDE records contain the same change field contents as the report to which the DJDE applies 8 10 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES After a set of DJDEs is terminated by an END parameter there must be one or more data records before the next DJDE packet DJDE records directly following a previously terminated DJDE parameter set are ignored If the file containing the DJDE is variable blocked the program that blocks the file may strip off trailing blanks Thus if the comment record contains no actual comments the blank following the C may be eliminated If the C is the last character of the record the parameter record is accepted However any character other than a blank following the C causes the record to be processed as a legitimate DJDE record and not as a comment Refer to the C tex
382. lusters needed by the report that is the report stockset Particular cluster to be used to print each particular page e Recommended trays for loading the stock Then you store the defined clusters in the CLUSTR LIB file through the cluster CLP or CLU commands described in your DocuPrint 180 LPS Operations Reference CLUSTR LIB the printer s cluster database stores up to 159 clusters The clusters can be called by all jobs run on the system Since jobs often require various stocks you also define cluster groups as stocksets The stocksets can also be called by all jobs run on the system The operator uses clusters to decrease how often you load stocks The operator verifies job and cluster status and overrides tray specifications for clusters through the cluster CLU commands described in your DocuPrint 180 LPS Operations Reference The cluster definitions inform you which stocks to load in which trays for queued jobs When an operator loads trays without entering CLU commands the system assumes that the trays have been refilled and no cluster changes have occurred The CLUSTR LIB file is the cluster database for the LPS Each cluster definition is a record in the file This file is created when a print job is run and no CLUSTR LIB exists CLUSTR LIB is a user file which you can copy from one system to another even if the first LPS has trays which the second LPS does not have The trays not in the second system are deleted
383. m mode 9 2 Move mode 9 2 Block mode 9 3 Batch mode 9 3 Tape formats 9 3 Noninterleaved 9 3 Document interleaved 9 4 Page interleaved 9 4 Batch mode 9 5 Online formats 9 6 Noninterleaved 9 6 Document and page interleaved 9 6 Batch mode 9 6 Document interleaved graphic file transfers 9 7 Management of image files 9 7 PDL command and DJDE options for graphics 9 8 Performance 9 9 Random mode 9 9 Online 9 9 Document interleaved file creation 9 9 Restrictions 9 10 Graphic feature restrictions 9 10 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE xix TABLE OF CONTENTS A PDL command and DJDE summary A 1 Conventions A 1 B PDL command quick reference B 1 Conventions B 1 C Character code assignment C41 IBM BCD code set C 1 Honeywell 200 2000 BCD code set C 2 Honeywell 6000 BCD code set C 3 Fieldata translation C 4 UNIVAC ASCII character set C 5 Standard ASCII character set C 6 Standard EBCDIC character set C 7 Xerox EBCDIC to extended ASCII hexadecimal translation values C 8 D Offline specifications D 1 Input unpacking examples D 1 Valid host computer and label specifications D 2 Host system JDLs on system software tape D 3 E Editor quick reference E 1 Creating a new file on system disk E 1 Obtaining files already stored on system disk E 2 Displaying the text of a file E 2 Modifying the text in a file E 3 Modifying a portio
384. mand in the chapter Specifying input parameters 6 78 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS SIZING Syntax Options This parameter specifies how the system matches the paper sizes in bins when the LPS is unattended OUTPUT SIZING option s Table 6 63 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 64 SIZING parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s SEMIAUTO The standard mode of operation The default is SEMIAUTO BEST Intended for use when the LPS is unattended Called a nonstop mode because the LPS does not cycle down The system selects the largest available paper size to print the report if the exact paper size is not available EXACT Intended for use when the LPS is unattended because the LPS does not cycle down If the exact paper size is not available the system aborts the report A paper size is equal in size to another paper size if neither dimension differs by more than 15 600 of an inch Can be used to print on paper larger than the specified paper size Data may be lost if the paper size is smaller than the image size Note that A4 paper is treated as smaller than 8 5 by 11 inch paper because it is narrower Regardless of the parameter selected if an exact match in paper size is found the matching tray is used The parameters differ only when no match is found If there is not an exact paper size match in the
385. mands for further information The parameters are the same as those in the OUTPUT command defined in the chapter Print format commands Syntax MODIFY option s Options Table 8 38 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 42 MODIFY parameter option s and definition s Option s cme id init copies NONE Definition s This option has the following components e cme id The command identifier of a CME The CME may be coded within a JSL or coded and cataloged separately for use by several JSLs Any CME invoked by a DJDE must be cataloged separately refer to the Cataloged CMESs section in this chapter for further information If the CME is within the JSL it must precede a reference to its identifier by the MODIFY parameter Details on CME usage and syntax are discussed in the CME section of the Print format commands chapter init Specifies the initial ply pass to which the associated CME is to be applied copies Specifies the number of plies passes on which to apply the CME If copies is not specified then the CME applies to all copies beginning with the copy number specified by init e Specifies that data are processed without modification The default is NONE XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 51 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES NUMBER This parameter specifies page numbering control It takes effect on the ne
386. meter of the EXPORT command used in the JDL The DJDE SNUMBER may only enable segment sequence numbering if it is invoked with the SEPARATORS DJDE Ending a segment A segment may be ended by a DJDE under any of these conditions SEPARATORS is specified in a DJDE The system encounters a SPLIT NOW dynamic job descriptor entry The system encounters a SPLIT OFF dynamic job descriptor entry Using a new separator page You may use a new separator page by specifying it as a DJDE Resetting the segment number You may set a new segment number after the current one is terminated This is accomplished when the system encounters a series of two DJDEs SPLIT OFF followed by SPLIT min max Example 1 Following are examples of how to use the SEFMAP command Before the DJDE short edge feed parameter the contents of the memory font mapping table where font fonto fonta font4 DJDE SEFMAP parameter SEFMAPS font font7 fonts fontg UPD After this DJDE SEFMAP parameter is processed the contents of the memory font mapping table are font font7 fonts font fonts fontg 8 70 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES Example 2 Before the DJDE short edge feed parameter the contents of the memory font mapping table where font fonts fonts font4 DJDE SEFMAP parameter SEFMAP S font font7 fonts fontg REP A
387. meter option s and definition s Option s Definition s YES Specifies that transparencies are used in the print job NO Specifies that transparencies are not used in the print job XSHIFT This parameter specifies whether the image of the form and data on a page is to be shifted and if so by what values This parameter is used to shift the image of the data for two hole paper binding finishing and edgemarking XSHIFT allows shifting in the x direction for short edge binding Syntax XSHIFT option s Options Table 8 60 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 64 XSHIFT parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s NO Specifies that no shift occurs value An integer that specifies a shift amount on the front and back side The shift is in the x direction and each dot is 1 300 of an inch The allowable range is 75 to 75 8 68 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES Points to note Note the following when using DJDE parameters TOF The DJDE top of form TOF command affects the first data record following the DJDE record Depending on the time of a page transition this may not take effect on the desired page In other words even though a DJDE TOF is processed during the processing of the next record a page transition may have occurred before the DJDE TOF value could take effect For example if the initi
388. minating character as the first record of the graphic the user has the option of aborting or continuing the report If the report is continued the graphic is unprintable and the results may be unpredictable Document interleaved graphic file transfers Management of image files The document interleaved format copies graphics down the channel from the host to LPS IMG files This is done by running a document interleaved report containing a trivial amount of text using a JDE whose OUTPUT command specifies graphics with PURGE NO This function is available for offline use also To produce print files consisting of interleaved textual and image data the LPS file id must be saved in ASCII in the LPS 128 byte file label XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 9 7 USING GRAPHICS PDL command and DJDE options for graphics Several PDL commands are available for graphic handling These include four job descriptor entry JDE OUTPUT commands and six dynamic job descriptor entries DJDEs Tables 9 1 and 9 2 summarize these commands The DJDEs are record oriented because they take effect immediately For example the ALTER CANCEL and IMAGE commands may appear anywhere on the page and are applied to the page on which they occur The GRAPHIC BATCH and SAVE DJDE commands also take effect immediately Page oriented DJDEs applied to the next page must not precede page interleaved graphics to be applied to the current p
389. mple and OTEXT applications 5 3 simplex printing RAUX 7 20 SIZING parameter 6 68 SKIP parameter 8 8 SNUMBER parameter DJDE command 8 55 EXPORT command 6 26 software operating system 1 3 to 1 4 Source code files saving E 6 spacing characters 3 25 to 3 26 fixed 3 25 proportional 3 25 special conditions 6 42 special processing see logical processing specifications IDEN command parameter 1 6 specifying ACCT command parameters 3 11 CRITERIA commands 7 6 to 7 7 DJDE usage 3 12 formats 3 12 input parameters 4 1 LINE command parameters 3 11 logical functions 7 1 processing 3 12 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE INDEX 7 INDEX output requirements 3 14 VFUS 3 10 SPLIT parameter DJDE command 8 56 EXPORT command 6 27 SRECOVER parameter DJDE command 8 57 EXPORT command 6 28 standard character set ASCII C 6 EBCDIC C 7 Start command 1 8 status display 7 36 STIMING parameter DJDE command 8 58 EXPORT command 6 28 STOCKS parameter DJDE command 8 58 OUTPUT command 6 28 STOCKSET applications 5 4 changes 5 9 command 6 96 to 6 98 string comparisons 7 10 constants ASCII 2 7 character 2 7 EBCDIC 2 7 to 2 8 H2 and H6 2 8 hexadecimal 2 7 keyword 2 6 octal 2 8 variable name 2 6 subfield 7 14 subsystem operator communication 1 5 suppressing print function 7 42 symbols command syntax DJDE A 1 to A 6 PDL quick reference B 1 to B 7 syntax PDL 3 8 SYSPAGE param
390. n Ja INKS inkref inkref OUTPUT INVERT FRONT BACK BOTH NONE OUTPUT IRESULT BLACK COLOR OUTPUT MODIFY cme id cme id init copies NONE Default NONE YES 1 NONE NONE DEFAULT NO NO OPR FMT1 NONE init defaults to first or next copy FOR defaults to FORMAT if FORM S is not fully keyed in NO First ink in ILIST parameter DFIDR IDR Inches top left corner scaled at 1 1 Sysgened default NONE B 4 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PDL COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE Table B 2 PDL command quick reference continued Command Syntax Default OUTPUT OUTPUT NTO1 YES NO n NO OUTPUT NUMBER pnum num cnum findex inkrefl NO NO OUTPUT OFFSET ALL FIRST NONE ALL OUTPUT OSTK clu def moad pos RES NORES TABS size DOTS IN CM LL OUTPUT PAPERSIZE A3 A4 B4 B5 USLEGAL Sysgened default USLETTER OUTPUT PURGE YES NO YES OUTPUT RESOLUTION 300 600 Sysgened default OUTPUT SF1FUNCTION YES NO NO OUTPUT SF2FUNCTION YES NO NO OUTPUT SHIFT v v2 YES NO NO OUTPUT SIZING SEMIAUTO BEST EXACT SEMIAUTO OUTPUT STOCKS stockset name OUTPUT SYSPPR USLEGAL A4 B4 B5 Paper size of the last USLETTER xy sheet that is before the system page OUTPUT TMODE width width width unit OUTPUT TRANS YES NO NO OUTPUT UNITS s
391. n be made active This provides an automatic method of changing stocks in the LPS as required by the data stream Refer to the STOCKSET command section in the chapter Defining clusters for additional information on defining stocks OUTPUT STOCKS option s Table 6 64 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 65 STOCKS parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s stockset Specifies the stockset to be used HS There is no default 6 80 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS SYSPPR Syntax Options Considerations This parameter specifies the system page paper size for a job OUTPUT SYSPPR option s Table 6 65 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 66 SYSPPR parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s USLEGAL 8 5 by 14 inches 216 by 279 mm A3 16 54 by 11 69 inches 420 by 297 mm A4 8 27 by 11 69 inches 210 by 297 mm B4 10 12 by 14 33 inches 257 by 364 mm USLETTER 8 5 by 11 inches 216 by 279 mm X y x defines the slow scan direction in inches y defines the fast scan direction in inches There is no default When centimeters CM are used to specify paper size the maximum allowable value is 32 767 cm SYSPPR is not available as a DJDE Whether you use the keyword or the x y method for specifying papersize in your JSL you must use th
392. n of the work file line E 4 Modifying entire lines E 5 Saving your source code file E 6 Terminating the editing session E 6 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE INTRODUCTION About the reference set Introduction This document is part of a reference set designed to help you receive maximum benefit from your DocuPrint 180 Laser Printing System LPS To help you select the appropriate document for your needs the following section identifies the documents in the set and describes the information contained in each DocuPrint 180 Laser Printing System document set DocuPrint 180 LPS Operator Guide DocuPrint 180 LPS PDL Reference The DocuPrint 180 LPS document set includes the following This reference contains the following information e System overview e Paper facts and procedures e Operating procedures Maintenance e Problem solving e Supplies Meter reading and reporting This reference contains the following information Print Description Language components and processes e Input processing functions e Output processing functions e PDL command summary formatting guidelines Character code assignment tables e PDL programming information with step by step instructions XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE INTRODUCTION DocuPrint 180 LPS System Generation This reference contains the following information Guide Configuration options Commands
393. n of this delimiter page BIN TRAY or BOTH The parameter BOTH delivers the page to the sample print tray and the output tray The delimiter page when printed is output as part of the subsequent report All of the printing parameters selected in the JDL remain in effect during report delimiter printing except carriage control which is ignored the carriage control is replaced by a print and space 1 line control If DJDE records exist within the delimiter packet or immediately following they are included on the delimiter page In non delimiter mode DELIMITER NO a single record separates one report from the next After satisfying the TEST criteria this record is considered part of the subsequent report In this mode the delimiter record cannot be printed to the tray that is PRINT parameter not available when DELIMITER NO It also does not appear on the operator s display XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 7 35 USING LOGICAL PROCESSING Delimiter display Delimiter on accounting page Display of the delimiter performed only when DELIMITER YES is dependent on the mode Single Multi in which the job is run Single or multiple report mode is a selectable parameter on the offline START command If the print job is run in single report mode the first delimiter of the next report is displayed This occurs after an end of report is encountered To begin the next single report job the operator must key in another STA
394. n planning your applications in terms of the type of input data to specify the type of application to design and how much you will need to customize the application to meet its intended purpose rather than using system defaults Type of application to create When planning the specifications you will indicate in your JSL you must first decide the type of application you want by answering the following questions Will you modify an existing application or create a new one Will you use a form If so you need to either call out an existing form in your JSL or create a new form first and then call it out in the JSL Will the application be landscape horizontal or portrait vertical orientation Orientation is discussed later in this chapter Will you use more than one color or type of stock in the print job 3 4 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL Special features You also want to determine the following Will you include operator information such as routing sheets or messages displayed on the system controller Will you select paper trays Will you allow operators to override specifications in the JSL What structure will appear on the printed page For example a letter or a large form may require an entire page but if smaller forms are usable you may want to print two or even four on a page Will you use Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs to change the
395. n s Options Table 7 24 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 24 ACCTINFO parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s offset length This option has the following components e offset Specified in bytes relative to zero from the start of the user s portion of the record to the subfield within the record length The number of bytes in the subfield 1 to 64 There is no default XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 7 37 USING LOGICAL PROCESSING DELIMITER This parameter specifies whether or not records that are separated from other records are part of the subsequent report Syntax RSTACK DELIMITER option s Options Table 7 25 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 25 DELIMITER parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s YES Specifies that all consecutive records satisfying the TEST criteria separate one report from another but are not part of either report NO Specifies that this single record separates one report from another and is actually part of the subsequent report The default is NO HRPTNA This parameter specifies that a subfield of the first record is being displayed as REPORT NAME on the LPS console in response to the JOBS command or STATUS function key If DELIMITER YES is also coded the subfield is from the first delimiter record of the report For DELIMITER NO the s
396. nal information XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 25 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS SPLIT Syntax Options Example This parameter specifies the use of segment management and is required in order for the other EXPORT parameters to work EXPORT SPLIT option s Table 6 21 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 21 SPLIT parameter option s and definition s Option s min max Definition s Specifies the minimum and maximum numbers of sheets including any separator sheets allowed ina segment The minimum available number is 1 and the maximum number is 65 535 If a segment end has not occurred by the time max sheets are generated then the printer declares end of segment If end of segment occurs before min sheets are generated then the printer generates padding of either blank or multiple LAST sheets if LAST separators have been specified There is no default SPLIT 2 7 r Refer to the Points to note section in this chapter for additional information 6 26 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS SRECOVER This parameter specifies the mode of jam or error recovery Syntax EXPORT SRECOVER option s Options Table 6 22 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 22 SRECOVER parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s PAGE Specifies standard recovery The printer r
397. nctioning as a switch case operator A hyphen specifies the range of contiguous characters as in the examples below where the contiguity is based upon actual codes If input codes are associated with ASCII characters the letter A can be represented as hexadecimal 41 the letter B as 42 the letter Z as 5A If input codes are associated with EBCDIC characters the contiguity of the input codes is interrupted between the letters and J between the letters R and S and thus must be specified as three separate ranges e Coding of a TCODE command is dependent on Operational requirements such as using a defined character set for example ASCII or EBCDIC in which type 1 and type 2 character sets are defined by default and using TASSIGN parameters to define additional character sets for example type 3 type 4 Capability of the operator s console to process and display lowercase characters literally rather than symbolically The examples in table 4 41 illustrate how the TCODE command may be coded to specify the following types of character sets Table 4 41 Specifying various types of character sets Type Interpretation 1 Defines numeric characters 0 9 by default 2 Defines alphabetic characters A Z and a z by default 3 Defines uppercase alphabetic characters A Z by TCODE command 4 Defines lowercase alphabetic characters a z by TCODE command None Characters which are neither nume
398. needs can be met because PDL enables you to e Change and mix font types on a page to page line to line or character to character basis Output can be customized for specific needs for example highlighting important headings by changing font styles and sizes Change page orientation and positioning on a page to page basis Characters may be printed horizontally or vertically with equal ease The printing system switches instantly between horizontal and vertical page formats combining the two styles within a single report e Print a number of previously separate logical pages on the same physical page of a document Modify documents on a copy to copy basis by printing selected portions of data on a page to page basis You can replace certain portions of text with other data delete paragraphs from some copies or label other copies confidential Merge variable print data with forms stored on the system disk This eliminates the need for forms overlays and most preprinted forms as well as assuring perfect registration Add data position it on the page and print it on a variety of forms in one job Multiple forms stored in digital format are changeable on a page to page or copy to copy basis Print two different forms back to back duplex on one sheet of paper therefore reducing paper costs Additionally this option offers potential savings in inventory filing storage and mailing costs for computer generated mater
399. ner pages These banner pages are printed without forms In duplex mode the banner pages are printed with blank backs The default is BANNER 7 16 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE USING LOGICAL PROCESSING Points to note Table 7 13 shows the effect of the TCOUNT and HCOUNT parameters of the BANNER command under the conditions listed and the results of each Table 7 13 Summary of BANNER command parameter conditions and results LPS positions to TOF after end of report processing Condition Parameter Result If TCOUNT 0 The page after the first header is positioned at TOF If TCOUNT not 0 The page after the last trailer is positioned at TOF only as the offset criteria Running online with header pages TCOUNT 0 Job parameters such as DJDEs and page numbering for a given report are applied to the first header page of the following report page The system encounters a non banner TCOUNT 0 The next banner page is treated as the first header of a new report even if HCOUNT is not satisfied The system encounters a non banner HCOUNT not 0 LPS assumes that the report has fewer header pages page before HCOUNT is satisfied and TCOUNT not 0 than were specified and begins looking for trailer pages Examples Example 1 This section shows examples of using the BANNER command Example 2 The following commands define the BANNER criteria for a job stream
400. ng made because it is an ignore type mask character If the TABLE command in example 2 were changed to T2 TABLE MASK 2 5 Q CONSTANT 7 Then when the first two character positions of the CONSTANT parameter are checked for a mask character as specified in the MASK parameter none is found For those two positions exact character matches between the input data string characters and the CONSTANT parameter characters in this case A7 are required XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 7 47 USING LOGICAL PROCESSING Therefore in this example only data strings that begin with A7 can possibly pass the entire test Example 4 T2 TABLE MASK J CONSTANT DATE sues s The TABLE command above sets up the character to type associations shown in table 7 34 Table 7 34 Character to type associations Mask Mask Character position character type Meaning 0 E None Make no comparison 1 1 Any numeric 0 9 2 2 Any alphabetic A Z a z A logical test using this TABLE command examines a field of an input data record to determine if the word DATE is present if the is where it is supposed to be if the date itself is numeric type 1 if the string ID is present and if the first three characters after ID are alphabetics type 2 The basic element used to describe a test for a logical function is the CRITERIA Each CRI
401. ng to the operator This option has the followihg components Asterisk Operator is not notified of re runs but the report is renamed with a unique version as if the operator had been notified and accepted the re run Reports re run with this indicator stay in the Audit Log directory until deleted by the operator using a PC UI window provided U Unique Specifies that report is to be run only once ever Operator intervention at PC UI is required to re run the report or delete the Audit Log e W Weekly Specifies that report is to be run weekly BW Bi Weekly Specifies that report is to be run bi weekly e SM Semi Monthly Specifies that report is to be run semi monthly e M Monthly Specifies that report is to be run monthly e Q Quarterly Specifies that report is to be run quarterly e 0 365 Specifies the number of days where zero days specified means the report can be run as frequently as desired and will not be checked for accidental re runs e yy mm dd yy year mm month dd day RSQ Y N Report sequence checking enablement Y es indicates the audit report will flag out of sequence sheets delivered This option must be set to N o if out of sequence sheets of a report are delivered For out of order deliveries the job must be run in NOSEQ or BAR ALI mode so that the IOT will not catch and purge the mis sequenced pages 6 46 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT
402. nged through a selected JDE are listed in table 8 8 Table 8 8 Parameters which cannot be changed through a JDE Command Parameter s VOLUME HOST LABEL UNPACK OUTPUT OFFSET IDEN All parameters 8 14 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES Table 8 8 Parameters which cannot be changed through JDE continued Command Parameter s BLOCK All parameters RECORD All parameters BANNER All parameters Changing the online BANNER offset criteria or VOLUME command OPTIMIZE parameter in a selected JDE causes unpredictable results and should not be attempted The selected JDE should specify all JDE parameters which stay the same as the original JDE as well as the changes The parameters which can be changed through a selected JDE are listed in table 8 9 Table 8 9 Parameters which can be changed through a JDE Command Parameter s LINE DATA FONTINDEX MARGIN OVERPRINT PCCTYPE VFU LINE All parameters except OFFSET VOLUME TCODE CODE ACCT All parameters EXPORT All parameters MESSAGE All parameters PDE All parameters ROUTE All parameters ROFFSET All parameters RAUX All parameters RPAGE All parameters RSTACK TEST online only If a front cover is invoked in a selected JDE which takes effect after the first page of the report a cover is pulled from the AUX tray at the point where the
403. nges may not overlap If different CMEs are associated with different copies of a report or if a CME is applied to some but not all copies of a report then the CMEs are termed copy sensitive Copy sensitive CMEs may not be used if COLLATEZNO or online processing is specified Refer to the MODIFY DJDE in the chapter Specifying dynamic job descriptor entries DJDEs for a discussion of how CMEs may be changed on a page by page basis within a report ply 6 70 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS NTO1 This parameter specifies on a report basis whether all copies of a particular report are printed last page to first n to 1 NTO1 is the command parameter keyword Syntax OUTPUT NTO1 option s Options Table 6 53 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 54 NTO1 parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s YES Specifies last page to first printing To print n to 1 output processing must print the report starting with the last page Therefore output processing cannot begin until input processing has finished with the entire report It is possible that input processing does not recognize the end of a report until the start of the next report header banner page is detected When YES is specified the system assumes a 50 sheet threshold or maximum report size NO Specifies first page to last 1 TON printing The default is NO n The N
404. ning on the host system The boundary between the two portions of the record is traditionally between the record length and printer carriage control PCC field If there is no record length field there is no operating system portion of the record The PDL commands that define the components of a record are described in the Input record characteristics CRECORD command section of this chapter 4 66 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Multivolume processing All multivolume reports that force input to make multiple passes over the data are handled in the following manner For each copy requested a complete pass is made over the group of volumes that make up the current report The input processor is forced to make multiple passes over the input data for multicopy reports that specify copy sensitive CMEs and optionally for multicopy reports that exceed the size of the print file CMEs are discussed in the Copy modification entries section in the chapter Specifying output parameters The choices available for handling print file saturation are discussed under the VOLUME command RSAT parameter in this chapter If a multivolume report requires multiple passes messages appear on the system controller display with instructions on which action must be performed next Users with multiple volume jobs and multiple laser printing systems may wish to print each volume on a separate system This req
405. nisher not to begin a particular operation on the current sheet 8 60 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES SHIFT Syntax Options This parameter specifies a shift of the image on the page for purposes of binding It takes effect on a physical page boundary SHIFT option s Table 8 50 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 54 SHIFT parameter option s and definition s Option s Vy Definition s An integer value in dots for the amount of shift on the simplex page or the odd front side of the duplex page Each dot is 1 300 of an inch Range for v1 is 75 to 75 V2 A value in dots for the amount of shift on the even back side of a duplex page Range for v2 is 75 to 75 A standard size shift occurs if YES is specified v1 75 and v2 75 YES Specifies that a shift occurs A standard size shift occurs if YES is specified v1275 and v2 75 NO Specifies that no shift occurs v120 and v2 0 The default is NO XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 61 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES SIDE Syntax Options Considerations This parameter specifies repositioning of the new logical page to the first logical page of the given side of a physical sheet It takes effect at a logical page boundary The parameters are the same as for the RPAGE command Th
406. nly the RNA parameter from the job stream is used for auditing f job stream data precedes the job stream BTEXT job stream BTEXT may be ignored for auditing because Input has not yet seen the job stream BTEXT When this job stream BTEXT is encountered it is sent to the PC UI but ignored unless the JSL BTEXT did NOT contain an RNA parameter and the job stream BTEXT DOES contain an RNA parameter 6 54 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS f both JSL and job stream BTEXT are to take effect JSL BTEXT must not have an RNA parameter and job stream BTEXT must follow the first data record and contain the RNA parameter Note that the RNA parameter must precede any page detail parameters There is only one way to code specific dates in BTEXT which is yy mm dd where yy is the last two digits of the year mm is the month example January is 01 and dd are the two digits of the day of the month example the first is 01 Two numeric digits are required for each field and each field must be separated by one dash Support for years in the next century are not currently implemented Dates format on the Audit Log Reports and Windows according to the currently selected PC Ul language Not currently implemented for reports Audit Log and Audit Log Administration window unique stale dates display as Audit Log Display and Audit Log Print window unique stale dates display as S
407. nly when processing tape input Only reports specified are printed For r1 r2 the user specifies numeric values or ranges of values representing the print order of reports A range is specified as n m where n and m are the first and last reports in the range to process respectively For example entering REPORTS 6 1 3 5 4 causes the sixth report to print first followed by the first through third followed by the fifth and then the fourth If the job contains more than six reports they are not be processed The REPORTS option is also useful for printing one report of a multiple report tape This saves the step of spacing over reports not needed A maximum of 14 values is allowed A range of values uses 2 of the 14 maximum values allowed TDn Specifies the tape device being used DISC Indicates you want to print a file stored on the system disk FORM Allows you to specify a form used for the job This option overrides any form specification in the job descriptor entry FORMS command of OUTPUT statement and the RFORM command of the ROUTE statement The specified form must be on disk in the FRM directory XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE PDL Example 1 START J12 H2SYS This command starts a print job using the H2SYS job descriptor library and the job descriptor entry J12 It runs in multiple report mode by default and prints the number of copies as specified in the J12 job des
408. not detected until the first header page of the following report is received and processed A slight optimization in the processing of the FORMS FORMAT MODIFY ALTER CANCEL GRAPHIC and IMAGE DJDEs may be realized if the following conditions are met The FORMS FORMAT and MODIFY DJDE parameters are contained within a single record with no other parameters The ALTER CANCEL GRAPHIC and IMAGE DJDE parameters each are contained within a single record with no other parameters The first DJDE starts at the SKIP position and there are no blanks until the END parameter Each DJDE parameter is followed by a comma and the last comma is followed by the END parameter The FORMS FORMAT and MODIFY DJDE parameters are limited to the following syntax FORMS form id FORMAT pde id MODIFY cme id 8 18 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES DJDE parameter definitions ALTER The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options Syntax Options Examples This parameter specifies new imaging parameters for graphics previously referenced using the hold automatic reimaging parameter ALTER option s Table 8 10 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 10 ALTER parameter option s and definition s Option s name Definition s Identifies a previously called out
409. ns Table 4 49 MAXLAB parameter option s and definition s Option s value Definition s Specifies in bytes the maximum length of the longest physical block The value can range from 2 to 4096 bytes The specified value must be greater than the MINLAB value and must not exceed the BLOCK LENGTH The default is 81 Any data block whose length is between MINLAB and MAXLAB inclusive is treated as a label XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 45 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS MINLAB Syntax Options This parameter specifies the smallest physical block to treat as a label for undefined labels LABEL UNDEF VOLUME MINLAB option s Table 4 50 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 50 MINLAB parameter option s and definition s Option s value Definition s Specifies in bytes the maximum length of the smallest physical block The value can range from 1 to 4095 bytes The specified value must be less than the MAXLAB value and must not exceed the BLOCK LENGTH The default is 80 4 46 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS OPTIMIZE Syntax Options This parameter enhances the performance of the data stream VOLUME OPTIMIZE option s Table 4 51 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 51 OPTIMIZE parameter option s and definition s Option s keyword Defini
410. ns software ascender asynchronous audit log Glossary Paper size measuring 297 by 420 mm Paper size measuring 210 by 297 mm To terminate the printing of a job or execution of a program before it completes Computational procedure that can be repeated any number of times Positioning of an image on a page for printing Set of characters including the letters A through Z numerals 0 through 9 and all printable special symbols Ancillary IOT message processor System task that initializes the client layer between the printer and the system controller It also displays the Fault Hint and information messages American Standard Code for Information Interchange Standard 7 bit code that represents alphanumeric information Each alphanumeric character and several nonprinting characters are assigned a binary number covering 128 possible characters It is used for information interchange among data processing systems data communication Systems and associated equipment Use to which a computer program or system is put for example sorting employee records Host or LPS resident software that directs the computer to perform specific tasks or functions as opposed to the software used to operate the computer Common business applications include payroll accounting and inventory Portion of alphabetic character that rises above the body of the character its x height portion See also descender x height Transmission in
411. nserted or S k x y or C k x y kis the occurrence of string x in each line specified in the MODIFY command that is affected by the S or C command k defaults to 1 when not specified while 0 indicates that all occurrences of the first set of characters or string x in the specified lines are affected Add a space between S or C and k in the command Overlay one set of characters over another by entering O x y x is the text to be replaced y is the new text or k x y kis the occurrence of string x in each line specified in the MODIFY command that is affected by the OVERLAY command k defaults to 1 when not specified while 0 indicates that all occurrences of the first set of characters or string x in the specified lines are affected Add a space between O and k in the command When O is used to replace characters that are not at the end of the line be sure that the characters and spaces inserted equal those being replaced Insert a set of characters before other characters by entering P x y x is the word following the text to be added y is the text to be added or P k x y kis the occurrence of string x in each line specified in the MODIFY command that will be affected by the P command k defaults to 1 when not specified while 0 indicates that all occurrences of the first set of characters or string x in the specified lines are affected Add a space between P and k in the command E 4
412. nstead of splitting BTEXT between JSL and the job stream Select a report size that will facilitate auditing for example 5000 pages Thus a job of 100 000 checks will be audited as twenty reports and each audit report is available shortly after the last page of the report is printed When displaying the list of audit logs use the error filters in the Audit Log window to only list reports with reconciliation sequence or duplicate errors These can be specified singly or in combination with check boxes in the Audit Log window Even faster is to list audited jobs with these filters Then use the filters in the Audit Log Display or Print window to select which reports will print or display For summary or detail only the reports with the selected errors will be processed Use the summary option and detail records with the selected errors will print or display The current limit for log lists is about 1200 If this error occurs try again with either a Jobs list or filters The current speed of log list display is about 18 seconds per 100 entries Hitting the List target before the list is displayed causes the list to immediately clear and another list to generate Use operator options to stop the printer on reconciliation or sequence errors The Audit Log Administration window has a target labeled Defaults Click on this to open the Audit Log Defaults window Check boxes stay in effect from session to session When the job stops
413. nted 4 12 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS ASSIGN This parameter specifies printer carriage control exceptions to a default table refer to DEFAULT parameter Syntax ac PCC ASSIGN option s Options Table 4 18 lists the parameter option s and definition s XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 13 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Table 4 18 ASSIGN parameter option s and definition s Option s 1 Definition s This option has the following components byte The printer carriage control byte being defined Its value is in the range 0 to 255 X00 to XFF e ccin Specifies the action that should be taken when the printer carriage control byte defined in byte is encountered A ccln may be any of the following definitions TOF When byte causes the bottom of form BOF to occur instructs the printing system to go to the top of form TOF on the next page and to stop spacing IGN When byte causes the bottom of form BOF to occur instructs the printing system to ignore it to continue spacing through the end of the physical page The page then transitions to top of form and spacing continues OVR When byte causes the bottom of form BOF to occur instructs the printing system to go to the top of form TOF on the next pate and to continue spacing The default is OVR e Space print paramete
414. nterleaved the remaining parameters may be used exactly as on an IMAGE DJDE except for the T parameter If these parameters are specified in the GRAPHIC DJDE and also on one or more IMAGE DJDEs which reference the same graphic the graphic is imaged on the page once for each reference vpos Specifies the vertical position in units UN centimeters CM inches IN DOTS or XDOTS An XDOT is 1 600 unit of measurement which is used for 600 spots per inch spi processing Jobs with XDOTS can be created edited and compiled on any LPS with version 3 software but will not print on your 4050 4090 4635 DocuPrint 96 DocuPrint 180 or 4850 which is 300 spi hpos Specifies the horizontal position in units UN centimeters CM inches IN DOTS or XDOTS H Specifies that the same graphic is to be held and imaged without further callouts at the same position and with the same scale factor at all subsequent pages until changed by a DJDE CANCEL or ALTER parameter nid Specifies the reference scale factor Each parameter n and d must be an integer in the range of 1 to 8 thereby allowing a reference scale factor in the range of 1 8 to 8 The reference scale factor is multiplied XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 45 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES IMAGE In batch mode this OVERPRINT parameter defines new imaging parameters for subsequent graphics In all other modes it defines
415. ntois the SEF mapping for font e font font Font pair where font is the SEF mapping for font e Disables font mapping and short edge feeding SEF stops previous SEFFNT There is no default MAP This parameter references a previously defined font mapping file file name from a abel SEFFNT command Syntax abel SEFFNT MAP option s Options Table 4 36 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 36 Parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s file name References a previously created font mapping file from a abel SEFFNT command assumes the label already exists There is no default XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 29 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Points to note Note the following when using the SEFFNT command When the system recognizes a SEF job it scans the PDE font list and substitutes them with font mappings defined in the JSL If you specify that font mappings are contained in a file the input task checks to see if this file exists If the mapping file or the font file does not exist job processing continues using the font specified in the PDE command If no font mapping exists you receive a CON or ABO message on the screen and have the option to continue processing using the font specified in the PDE or abort the job The system does not assume any mappings for fonts You must always provide the mapping Once the
416. number of sheets allowed is 2 and the maximum is 65 535 If a segment end has not occurred by the time max sheets are generated then the printer declares end of segment If end of segment occurs before min sheets are generated then the printer generates padding of either blank or multiple LAST sheets if the LAST option of the SEPARATORS parameter has been specified If specified with segment management already in effect then the current segmentis tested against the new max and if greater an end of segment is immediately declared OFF Specifies that printer segment management not be provided and if currently in effect be immediately terminated Considerations When SPLIT OFF is specified the segment number nnn of part nnn on separator sheets is reset from its current value and begins at 001 again when segment management is turned on again 8 64 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES SRECOVER Syntax Options This parameter specifies the recovery mode When used as a DJDE SRECOVER must be specified prior to the first data record in the report or it is ignored SRECOVER option s Table 8 54 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 58 SRECOVER parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s PAGE Specifies standard jam recovery The printer will resume with the first sheet not delivered
417. o 8 thereby allowing a reference scale factor in the range of 1 8 to 8 The reference scale factor is multiplied with that specified at the time the graphic was digitized and the product is rounded to the nearest integer in the range 1 to 8 That integer becomes the effective scale factor with which the graphic is imaged The default is top left corner scaled at 1 1 If the UN option is used to define positioning the UNITS parameter described subsequently must precede this command in the parameter line The IMAGE parameter must follow GRAPHICS BATCH parameter as these two parameters are order dependent If two IMAGE parameters are listed consecutively the system will process only the second one OUTPUT GRAPHIC BATCH IMAGE 1 IN 2 CM 6 68 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS INVERT Syntax Options This parameter allows you to invert the current position of the page A page can effectively be rotated 180 head to head and head to toe Inversion is also used for page orientation for finishing functions OUTPUT INVERT option s Table 6 51 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 52 INVERT parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s FRONT Specifies page inversion on front sides BACK Specifies page inversion on back sides BOTH Specifies page inversion on front and back sides NONE Specifies turning page inver
418. o produce a finished job or application a JSL must be created and then compiled into a JDL file To accomplish this you must use PDL commands and be knowledgeable about PDL command structure which includes the following topics e Command line length Command components e Right part constants Command components Table 2 1 illustrates a set of typical PDL commands PDL commands consist of command lines also called records whose length can be up to 133 characters for JSLs on tape of which only characters 1 72 may be used for parameter information Command lengths less than 72 characters are acceptable Each PDL command consists of a command keyword and one or more parameters separated by commas or spaces Spaces are also permitted around the equal sign Commands be continued on successive records if parameters are separated by commas Crossover is performed from one record to the next when column 73 is reached or when the end of record is reached for records of fewer than 72 characters Multiple commands may appear on one record if separated by semicolons The components of a PDL command are e Command identifier if required e Command keyword Oneor more command parameters Parameter options e Comments if appropriate These are shown in figure 2 2 2 2 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE PDL In addition there are syntax rules you must use in order for the
419. ob refers to everything printed as the result of a single start command See also JDE In HIP a mode in which multiple print jobs are processed as reports in one print job See also concatenate Program called into storage to prepare each job or job step to be run Collective functions of job scheduling and command processing job source library Collection of uncompiled job descriptions See also job JDE and JDL Group of alphabetic numeric and or function keys used to enter information into a system Required part of a command See also operator command XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY 11 GLOSSARY label landscape page orientation language laser printing latent image leading LED LEF legal size letter size library line line feed line tables listing 1 In data storage a reference to a file saved on tape or disk a record indicating the file name or date created or other control information 2 In programming a name assigned to a particular instruction or portion of a program as a locational reference the computer translates the label into an address Orientation of print lines or top of an illustration parallel to the long edge of the paper if the sheet is within the standard size range Sheets larger than standard have the reverse print orientation Defined set of characters and symbols combined together by specific rules See also high level language
420. ob descriptor entries DJDEs defines their format and the PDL statements necessary to let the system know they are part of the input data Print and skip carriage control commands which are associated with online DJDE records are treated as skip immediate carriage control commands If the LPS is not at the channel specified a skip occurs but if it is already there no skip occurs unless the last command received with a data record was a print without spacing command Print and space carriage control commands associated with DJDE records are ignored Nonprint files for example font files can be downloaded from the host using the FILE DJDE The OPTIMIZE parameter of the VOLUME command allows the user to select options for enhancing online throughput Copy sensitive copy modification entries CME Copy modification entries CMEs which are copy sensitive that is a copy range has been specified on the MODIFY parameter of the OUTPUT command are ignored online since the data is not automatically available multiple times To produce copy sensitive output the user transmits data the number of times the data needs to be modified Thus if six copies of a report are desired and one CME applies to copies 1 through 4 and another CME applies to copies 5 and 6 the report should be transmitted from the host system twice The first transmission contains a copy count of 4 with CME1 specified and the second transmission contains a copy co
421. ob descriptor entry 2 JOB the recording code of the input data is EBCDIC as specified in the CATPOW catalog command In 4 JOB the recording code of the input data is EBCDIC because the JOB command s INCLUDE parameter specifies the CATGRP 2 16 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE PDL catalog which in turn specifies EBCDIC in the VOLUME command CODE parameter Figure 2 6 Hierarchy of replacement Highest order DJDE RECORDS i TAPE LABEL START COMMAND JOB JDE COMMAND LEVEL A Options introduced at CATALOG COMMAND LEVEL higher level override those at lower level Y SYSTEM JDL COMMAND LEVEL Lowest order OSS DEFAUTS One exception to this hierarchy is that the COPIES parameter in the START command overrides COPIES DJDE from the input data stream Non JDL hierarchy START command The next level of command replacement above the JOB or JDE command as illustrated in figure 2 6 is the START command Values specified in the START parameter override those in the job command level When the COPIES parameter is specified in the START command it overrides a DJDE value for COPIES from the input data stream START command The START command is used to initiate printing of the application you have created The options shown below vary depending on the input source and the output destination The offline and online START command formats are as follows Offline STA
422. ocessing commands When specifying either the RSUSPEND or RRESUME command the user can also specify whether suspension or resumption of printing occurs on the current or next record This is controlled by the BEGIN parameter This additional control provides the necessary flexibility to cope with the variability of requirements for print suppression The BEGIN parameter is independently specifiable in both RSUSPEND and RRESUME commands Upon encountering a record which satisfies the test criteria specified on the RSUSPEND command printing is suspended If BEGIN CURRENT is coded on the RSUSPEND command this record is not printed If BEGINZNEXT is coded the record satisfying the test criteria is printed and records are discarded beginning with the following record Printing is resumed when a record satisfying the TEST in the RRESUME command is encountered If BEGINZCURRENT is coded in the RRESUME command the record satisfying the TEST is printed If BEGINZNEXT is coded printing resumes with the next record The following section describes the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 7 41 USING LOGICAL PROCESSING BEGIN This parameter specifies the BEGIN options Syntax RSUSPEND BEGIN option s Options Table 7 29 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 29 BEGIN parameter option s and definition s Option s
423. ock change Avoid using stocksets with the cover and RAUX options Cover pages and pages which meet the RAUX criteria are fed from the AUX cluster overriding the FEED option or any other option specified for these pages 5 6 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE DEFINING CLUSTERS Steps for creating clusters Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 The steps you should take to create a cluster are listed below Figure 5 1 provides a visual representation of these steps Figure 5 1 Steps for creating clusters Determine naming stock name convention stock reference Add commands to DJDE FEED statements job data stream Write STOCKSET JSL statement Options STOCKS NTO1 FACEUP SIZING Write OUTPUT JSL statement Define preferred clusters with CLP Define current clusters with CLU Follow these steps Determine the stocks the application will use Create a JSL file and compile it to produce an STK file Define a logical mnemonic name a cluster reference for each stock for instance COVER in the example below Associate each cluster reference with a cluster name easily recognized by the operator as a particular stock for instance CV102 in the example below BILLS STOCKSET ASSIGN CV102 COVER ASSIGN BL231 BILPAG ASSIGN SM233 SUMMRY Use the cluster reference rather than the cluster name in JSL files and DJDEs This way you can make cluster
424. ocked file may cause a processing error unless it is first deleted e When defining TABLE CONSTANTS or CHANGE parameters offsets to subfields of a block specify in bytes relative to zero from the start of block to the beginning of subfield 7 18 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE USING LOGICAL PROCESSING Examples This section shows examples of using the BSELECT and BDELETE commands Example 1 The following commands illustrate the use of BSELECT to process interspersed reports refer to the following figure on a block basis Tl TABLE CONSTANT P Cl CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 1 EQ T1 BSELECT TEST C1 The contents of the first byte of each tape block offset 0 length 1 is examined for the character constant P When a P is detected the entire block is selected BSELECT for printing When the first byte of any block does not contain a P that block is bypassed and not printed In this example only block 1 is printed Figure 7 2 shows a sample of how BSELECT and BDELETE commands are used Figure 7 2 Sample BSELET and BDELETE command usage Record 1 Record 2 Block 1 Record 3 Byte 0 contains a P Record 4 Record 1 Block 2 ecord Byte 0 contains a D Record 3 Record 4 Block 2 IBG Interblock Gap Example 2 The BDELETE command to delete the blocks on the tape that have 11 is shown below 1 TABLE CONSTANT 11 C1
425. ocuPrint 180 LPS supports two pitch modes 7 pitch when paper 9 inches 229 mm long or less is used to print a job and 3 pitch when paper 9 to 17 inches 229 to 432 mm long is used to print a job Acronym for picture element Smallest addressable point of a bit mapped screen that can be independently assigned color and GLOSSARY 16 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY point point size portrait page orientation printer print file printout process program programmer prompt proportional font proportional spacing proportional type protocol intensity Pixels are definable locations on a display used to form images For graphic displays more pixels generally provide higher resolution Spots dots and pixels are used interchangeably Unit of measurement equal to 0 0139 inch Points are always used to express type size and leading There are 12 points to a pica and about 72 points to every inch See also pica Height of character set from the top of its ascenders to the bottom of its descenders in units points Point size does not always include leading Orientation of print lines or the top of an illustration parallel to the short edge of the paper if the sheet is within the standard size range Sheets larger than standard have the reverse print orientation Output device that produces hardcopy printouts Also referred to as the IOT Position of the system disk memory up to 4 MB
426. ocument interleaved graphics apply refer to the Document interleaved section Note Block or record delimiters are not permitted Except for the graphics themselves the input stream may contain only optional DJDE IMAGE records When a DJDE IMAGE record is encountered it defines the scaling and positioning parameters for subsequent graphics XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 9 5 USING GRAPHICS Online formats Noninterleaved This section covers the following topics Noninterleaved Document and page interleaved Batch mode Document interleaved graphic file transfers Management of image files Document and page interleaved HOSTCOPY is the mechanism for transferring noninterleaved graphics through the online channel to disk The HOSTCOPY utility supports IMG files in Xerox system tape format Batch mode Online report processing which includes document and page interleaved graphics functions as tape input processing functions The rules for online interleaved graphics are Each graphic must be preceded immediately by a DJDE GRAPHIC record There is no change in the maximum record length when processing interleaved graphic records However every record of an online interleaved graphic must have an appended terminating character which is the same for all records of the graphic If an interleaved graphic record is encountered which does not have the same terminating character as the first rec
427. oes keep track of the last tab position in tray 2 at the end of Job 1 Upon starting Job 2 the DocuPrint 180 purges Tab 3 and Tab 4 because Job 2 starts with POS 5 and Job1 used Tab 1 and Tab 2 You can improve performance by ordering application dependent tab stock By using ordered tab stock which supports only those number of tabs required for a specific job eliminates the need for purging unused tabs Atthe time the system makes validity checks for BEGIN values and graphic positioning input processing cannot determine if the current physical page is tab stock However if the OSTK command is specified the input task will allow a tolerance of n inches where n is the width of the tab specified in the OSTK command when performing validity checks on BEGIN values and graphic positioning In addition the FEED tab stock DJDE must precede any printable text data which will be printed on the tab When running tab stock jobs Do not include the width of the tab when specifying paper size in the job setup Include the width of the tab when reporting it to the printer on the printer control console Tray size Screen or the system UI Set Tray Size command Dedicate one tray for tab stock When Using DJDEs specify FEED tab stock SIMPLEX YES or DUPLEX YES XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 89 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS When feeding from tab stock
428. of LINE command parameters Parameter Specifies Offline Online DJDE DATA Input record printable data portion Y Y Y FCB Host transmitted FCB handling N Y N FONTINDEX Position of font switch index Y Y Y MARGIN Left margin on a physical page Y Y Y OVERPRINT Manner in which overprint lines are handled Y Y Y PCC Location of the printer carriage control field Y N N PCCTYPE Printer carriage control table N Y N UCSB Host transmitted UCSB handling N Y N VFU Vertical format table to be used Y Y N The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options 6 30 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS DATA This parameter specifies the location and length of the print line data within an input data record Syntax LINE DATA option s Options 6 24 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 24 DATA parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s pdo length This option has the following components e pdo Print data offset is the number of bytes between the start of the user portion of the logical record and the first character of the record to be printed length Specifies the maximum length of printable data within each logical record For offline systems the default is 1 132 For online systems the default is 0 150 For HOST RSX11 FLX the DATA paramete
429. of known entities produces a new entity The 24 inch exclusive clearance that must be available directly in front of each component of an LPS for operator activities Statement to control a program issued through a console device PC UI or terminal causing a control program to provide requested information alter normal operations initiate new operations or terminate existing operations 1 In reference to image area orientation describes whether the printed lines are parallel to the long edge of the paper or the short edge of the paper 2 Choice of printing portrait vertically or landscape horizontally In reference to image area this is the upper left corner of a sheet 1 Material produced by a peripheral device of a computer such as a printout or a magnetic tape 2 Result of completed operations Printing more than one character at the same position XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY 15 GLOSSARY overprint lines overprint ratio override overstrike page page orientation parameter pass through job password patch PC UI PDL physical page pitch pixel Print lines whose carriage control specifies printing with no line spacing after the last printed line Maximum number of variable data and form characters that may be intersected by a single scan line To take precedence or priority over to overrule To print characters over each other 1 In computer
430. of the START command the DELIMITER parameter cannot be changed in a selected JDE or JDL If DELIMITER YES is specified a record that satisfies the TEST criteria of a selected JDE or JDL results in an end of report normally However it prints at the start of the 7 36 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE USING LOGICAL PROCESSING subsequent report unless it also satisfies the TEST or DJDE criteria of the starting JDE or JDL If RSTACK is specified in the JDE or JDL of the START command but not in the selected JDE or JDL RSTACK processing is suspended until end of report is triggered by BANNER page detection If ACCTINFO is specified in the JDE or JDL of the START command the ACCTINFO parameter cannot be changed or deleted in a selected JDE or JDL even if RSTACK is suspended If ACCTINFO is not specified in the JDE or JDL of the START command it can be invoked in a selected JDE or JDL The first record after the selected JDE takes effect is then printed as the ACCTINFO field The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options ACCTINFO This parameter specifies that a subfield of the first record is being printed on the accounting page at the end of the report If DELIMITER YES is also coded the subfield is from the first delimiter record of the report For DELIMITER NO the subfield is from the first data record Syntax RSTACK ACCTINFO optio
431. ommand parameters 3 11 Specifying ACCT command parameters 3 11 Specifying use of DJDEs 3 12 Adding logical processing specifications 3 12 Specifying formats 3 12 Using copy modification entries 3 13 Defining paper requirements 3 13 Specifying output requirements 3 14 Ending a JSL 3 14 Finished JSL 3 15 Compiling the JSL 3 16 Printing the job 3 18 Page considerations 3 18 Paper sizes 3 18 System page 3 18 Physical page 3 18 Edgemarking 3 19 Non imaged elements 3 19 Page orientation 3 20 Landscape orientation 3 21 Portrait orientation 3 22 Registration shift and skew 3 23 Fonts 3 25 Font and graphic memory 3 26 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE vii TABLE OF CONTENTS DocuPrint 180 compatibility with the 4850 4135 4635 and 4050 4090 4650 LPS 3 27 Xerox 4850 and 4890 HighLight Color LPS 3 28 Running 4850 4890 applications on your DocuPrint 180 LPS 3 28 Downloading 4850 4890 LPS applications to your DocuPrint 180 LPS 3 29 4850 4890 HighLight Color LPS forms 3 29 Points to note 3 30 Xerox 4050 4090 4650 9700F LPS 3 30 Creating DocuPrint 180 LPS applications on a 4050 4090 4650 or 9700F LPS 3 30 Running 4050 4090 4650 and 9700F jobs on your DocuPrint 180 LPS 3 30 4 Specifying input parameters 4 1 BLOCK command 4 2 ADJUST 4 2 CONSTANT 4 3 FORMAT 4 3 LENGTH 4 4 LMULT 4 4
432. on the size of the fonts and the number of different fonts on a single page If your applications call for a complex mix of fonts and graphics the increased font and graphic memory option can greatly improve the processing time required to print these documents Custom fonts logos and signature font data also consume font graphic memory during processing 3 26 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL DocuPrint 180 compatibility with the 4850 4135 4635 and 4050 4090 4650 LPS Your Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS allows you to process Xerox 4850 HighLight Color LPS print jobs which contain ink references The Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS is also fully compatible with the 4135 and 4635 LPS with respect to JSL commands The Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS prints all 4050 4090 4650 and 4635 LPS applications successfully The functions of the various laser printing systems are listed in table 3 3 and explained in the sections that follow Table 3 3 Software version compatibility JDL SOURCE Downloaded toa gt V3 5 V3 8 4050 V3 6 4050 Compiled on a 4090 Rel 1 5 V3 7 4090 V3 9 V4 0 V5 0 V3A l 4650 4135 4850 4650 9790 4850 4890 4635 DP 180 Compiled ona As As As As As As As As V3 5 Expected Expected Expected Expected Expected Expected Expected Expected Compiled on a 1 As 1 2 4 1 2 4 As As V3 6 Rel 1 5 Expected Expected Expected Compiled ona 1 3 As 3 1 As 3 3 V3 7 Expec
433. onsiderations involved in creating a JSL the following sections give you information on these page related topics e Paper sizes Page orientations e Registration shift and skew System page With the laser printing system paper sizes are considered in terms of page frames which are boundaries associated with a page as a unit of printing or imaging Three page frames are defined in the system e Physical page e System page e Virtual page In addition to page size edgemarking and non imaged elements must be considered when you design the pages of your applications Physical page This refers to the maximum image area of the printer The system page size varies depending on the size of the paper you are running for your job The physical page is the size of the paper itself You may select any page dimensions within a 8 by 10 inch minimum and a 14 33 by 17 inch maximum If you have the 7 by 10 option kit installed then the minimum size is 7 by 10 3 18 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL Edgemarking Edgemarking is the placement of marks along the edge of the page These marks consist of graphic elements that bleed off the paper tabs for section reference or marks that denote changes made in redline drafts Refer to your Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS Operations Reference for detailed information on edgemarking Non imaged elements Elements of a page tha
434. ontain a block length field of the same format as the record length field Blocks may be truncated but only at the end of a record Record Undefined Length Record Format One byte optional vertical format control character Undefined Block Block Block Length r TN Records Unblocked Records nm g ee B i Blocken Recas meni m Secor Optional Biock Preamble The block may optionally contain postamble RD Record Delimiter The record delimiter is a string of from 1 to 4 characters optional for unblocked format Gap Interblock Tape Gap 4 26 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS SEFFNT command Paper is fed from the short edge to allow for printing on large size paper This is called short edge feed SEF In order to maintain the current definition of landscape and portrait in these jobs a mapping must be defined in which every landscape font used in a SEF job has a portrait equivalent and vice versa Table 4 33 summarizes the use of the SEFFNT command parameters Table 4 33 Summary of SEFFNT command parameters Parameter MAP Specifies A previously created font mapping Y Y Y Offline Online DJDE SEFMAP Font mapping where the second specified font is the Y Y Y SEF mapping for the first font XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 27 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS
435. opies portions of the font graphic and logo files from disk to the Advanced Image Subsystem AIS The AIS is instructed to create the page image from these specifications and store it in its private page buffer The output task instructs the AIS to send the page image to the printer As the AIS sends the image the output task uses the page tracking buffer to monitor and record delivery of the printed page to the bin The output task identifies each page successfully printed and delivered The input task can then reuse that page space in the page buffer to process an incoming page The output task also identifies each page unsuccessfully printed or delivered The output task uses the page buffer and log information stored in the PRFIL1 SYS file to repeat the steps which recreate the page image send it to the printer and monitor its delivery to the bin Then the output task releases the space for that page in the PRFIL1 SYS file When the outputtask has verified the successful printing and delivery of all pages prepared for it by the input task the output task signals the input task that output processing is waiting for more formatted page and page log buffers When the input task reaches the end of file marker on the input data the input task messages the OCS task that input processing of the print job is complete The OCS task displays the JOB XXXX HAS COMPLETED INPUT PHASE message to the operator When the output task finishes
436. or DJDE parameters The OFFSET and SKIP parameters define the starting positions of the prefix string and DJDE parameters within the record Example IDEN PREFIX E DJDE SKIP 7 OFFSET 2 OPRINFO YES Syntax Options This parameter specifies the number of bytes beginning at 0 from the beginning of the user portion of the record to the beginning of the prefix string constant of the DJDE record It may be a negative number OFFSET option s Table 8 4 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 4 OFFSET parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s value A value specifies the number of bytes beginning at 0 from the beginning of the user portion of the record to the beginning of the prefix string constant of the DJDE record It may be a negative number The default is O XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 7 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES OPRINFO PREFIX Syntax Options This parameter specifies whether the DJDE record is to be printed to the tray or not OPRINFO option s Table 8 5 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 5 OPRINFO parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s YES Specifies that the DJDE record is to be printed and delivered to the tray NO Specifies that the DJDE record will not be printed The default is NO A
437. or more parameters which give precise specifications for the print job or application Each parameter has one or more options from which to select For example the OFFSET parameter of the OUTPUT command has three options ALL FIRST or NONE Each parameter consists of a left and a right part separated by an equal sign Commas or blank spaces separate parameters Parentheses are used to enclose multiple right parts of a parameter for example LINE VFU VFU1 MARGIN 1 POS DATA 1 132 PCC 0 NOTRAN Comments Comments may appear anywhere before or after a command within a JSL and are useful for providing information for future use or to others who may be using the JSL They must be preceded by a slash and an asterisk and terminated by an asterisk and a slash A comment can be nested within another comment Here are some examples of comments within JSLs Example 1 CATALOG FOR ONLINE ONLY JOBS SMPL1 CATALOG Example 2 CHECK PAPER STOCK FOR EACH JOB LETTER JDE INCLUDE SMPL1 OUTPUT DUPLEX YES COPIES 10 FORMS BKUP BFORM NONE LABELS JDE INCLUDE SMPL1 OUTPUT DUPLEX NO GRAPHICS YES XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 3 7 CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL PDL syntax Keep the following rules in mind when entering your PDL commands and DJDEs You may abbreviate the first three letters of commands and
438. ord of the graphic the user has the option of aborting or continuing the report If the report is continued the graphic is unprintable and the results may be unpredictable Document interleaved graphics must begin immediately following the banner pages Online processing of batch mode reports except for media imposed differences is the same as for magnetic tape The input data stream format must comply with the following rules Even though a JDE specifying batch mode is in effect the first graphic must be preceded by a DJDE specifying BATCH START The last graphic must be followed immediately by a DJDE specifying BATCH END These batch stream delimiters are necessary to distinguish banner page data header and trailer from graphic data Except for the graphics themselves the input stream may contain only optional DJDE IMAGE records When a DJDE IMAGE record is encountered it defines scaling and positioning 9 6 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE USING GRAPHICS parameters for subsequent graphics The actual batch mode data stream is defined by the BATCH START and BATCH END DJDEs e There is no change in the maximum record length when processing batch mode graphic records However every record within the graphic must be terminated by a byte containing an appended terminating character which is the same for all records of the graphic If a batch mode graphic record is encountered which does not have the same ter
439. ord unless the DJDE record contains another FILE parameter The FILE parameter is checked for valid parameters and the LPS label record at the beginning of the file is read If the destination file type is acceptable the file size field is obtained from the label record and the extent of the file is calculated e Ifthe very first label record does not meet the requirements of a label record the preceding DJDE packet is printed on an OPRINFO page together with the message FILE PROCESSING ERROR NO LABEL RECORD Input then proceeds to process the data as variable text data e fthe destination file type is OSD SAF SYS Y or TSK or if the file type specification in the DJDE parameter is not one of the file types included in the LPS file directory the preceding DJDE packet is printed on an OPRINFO page together with the message FILE PROCESSING ERROR ILLEGAL DESTINATION FILE TYPE Input then proceeds to read and discard the extent of the file e ifthe file cannot be created due to insufficient space on the disk one of two courses of action is taken If file space is freed up after a previous report is completely printed by output input displays the message DISK FULL INPUT WAITING FOR OUTPUT TO COMPLETE and waits for such a report to be completed before trying again to create the file If there is no possibility of disk file space
440. ositions for each of these orientations is shown in figure 3 1 Figure 3 1 Vertical and horizontal positions in landscape and portrait modes Ru hpos a 8 c o TOP MARGIN vpos PORTRAIT ORIENTATION LEFT MARGIN hpos d TOP MARGIN vpos CHARACTER CELL LANDSCAPE ORIENTATION 3 20 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL Landscape orientation Figure 3 2 shows landscape orientation dimensions Figure 3 2 FMT1 equivalent impact printer format 6 lines per inch 66 san 9 68 22 DOTS x 132 CHAR 11 9 68 APPROX 13 6 CHAR INCH 1073 22 DOTS APPROX CHAR CELL 18 MARGIN 8 5 8 14 2 423 POS 37 DOTS NO 1 8 14 37 DOTS x 66 LINES APPROX 8 1 LINES INCH XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 3 21 CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL Portrait orientation Figure 3 3 shows portrait orientation dimensions Figure 3 3 FMT6 equivalent impact printer format 6 lines per inch 7 33 22 DOTS x 100 CHAR MARGIN APPROX 13 6 CHAR INCH APPROX 073 22 DOTS 9 PT CHAR CHAR CHAR CELL POS 87 MARGIN 17988 gt 123 37 DOTS POS gt 9 86 37 DOTS x 80 LINES APPROX 8 1 LINES INCH LINE POS NO 80 b 3 22 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL Registration shift and skew The registration of a
441. ou code must include the appropriate Xerox 4850 or 4890 HighLight Color LPS ink specifications On your Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS a color JSL is compiled without errors but the color ink is ignored and the application prints in black the system default Refer to your Xerox 4850 4890 HighLight Color Laser Printing System PDL DJDE Reference for details on using inks in your color applications Then you invoke the PDL compiler to compile your JSL file into a JDL file to tell the printer such information as the following Use of black or color ink for text and images e What variable and fixed data to use e Placement font and point size for the variable and fixed data e Which fonts forms images signatures and logos to use Paper stocks to use for the job How to feed stock for the print job in other words which paper trays to use e layout How to build the print image for each page e many copies to print 3 2 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL Decisions to make before creating your JSL Input data Before starting to develop the JSL for your application there are some key decisions you must make based on your site specific needs and the design of the application In general you should know this information about the input data before creating the JSL e Theinput source such as the following Host supporting the 3211 or 4245 host interf
442. parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s YES Specifies the following system level parameters as described in the DocuPrint 180 LPS Operations Reference e SAMPLE sample print e MOVE BLOCKS block spacing of tape input e SPACE PAGES skipping over output pages NO Specifies that none of the above restrictions are in effect The default is NO If SECURITY is invoked in a selected JDE such as a DJDE JDE the SAMPLE and SPACE PAGES restrictions do not take effect until after the first page of the report has been imaged or spaced past Recovery The automatic recovery procedures of the LPS are based on the availability of valid checkpoint data independently saved by both the output processor and the input processor As a result most recoveries are performed with no operator assistance In certain cases the system may detect that the checkpoint data is invalid and XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 7 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Marker page operator assistance is requested that is the operator or user is requested to mount a preceding tape volume offline or return to point of origin or last valid checkpoint online The system produces a marker page referto figure 6 1 as a function of the input processor and inserts it into the print job at the point of crash It is printed after the output processor has printed data that was already processed by input before the crash occurred Note Ac
443. parameters for example POSITION or POS and CATALOG or CAT The only exceptions are the OUTPUT command parameters FORMS and FORMAT Spell these out completely e Use a semicolon at the end of a command A comma or blank space may also be used at the end of a line e Use the END command plus a semicolon END to signal the end of a JSL e Use all UPPERCASE letters PDL Comments however need not be in uppercase 3 8 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL Hints and tips The following tips may help you as you create your JSL The only required elements in a JSL are the following AJDL name which is the name of the file created by compiling the JSL Job names END command at the end of the JSL System defaults could be used for all other specifications although typically each application has its own specific characteristics Use tab spacing to create columns for each element of the JSL command identifiers commands and parameters While not required by the system this organization makes it much easier to identify command sets their commands and each command s parameters quickly Here is a short example V1 T el 1 JOB1 JOB2 JOB3 SMPLST JDL ASSIGN 1 5 ASSIGN 2 10 VFU ASSIGN 3 15 TOF 5 BOF 66 VOLUME HOST XEROX LABEL NONE
444. pecified in the JDE the last FCB sent from the host is retrieved from the disk and becomes active If no BOF is specified in the JDE the length of the last FCB sent from the host is retrieved from the disk and becomes BOF Note that TOF is not affected by the FCB If FCB PROCESS and an FCB is sent from the host it overrides the previous FCB or VFU Its length replaces the previous BOF Furthermore its contents and length are saved on the disk When a DJDE is used to change a channel assignment any previous assignments to the channel being changed are suspended until the end of report At the end of report DJDE changes are discarded and the last active FCB or VFU comes back into effect When sysgen is executed the FCB saved on disk is reinitialized to the length of 66 lines with the following channel assignments Channe11 2 3 4 5 6 7 8101112 9 Line 4 1016 22 28 34 40 46 52 58 64 66 The default corresponds to the STD2 default supplied by IBM If a print and skip to channel command is sent for an undefined channel the LPS executes a print and space one command If FCB PROCESS an FCB load causes positioning to TOF If the system is already at TOF page eject is suppressed If the line number prior to the FCB load is greater than TOF a page eject occurs The print position indexing PPI byte of the FCB is not suppressed by FCB IGNORE If an FCB with a PPI byte is received indexing is invoked if an FCB without a PPI byte is
445. port which are not to be purged when the report s output processing is completed 8 6 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES IDEN command OFFSET To invoke DJDE processing an IDEN command must be coded in the JDL This command notifies the system that DJDE records may be part of the input data stream It also describes the search criteria for locating and identifying DJDE records The DJDE record or records are interspersed among the data records in the input data stream Each DJDE record contains an identification field which matches the search criteria specified in the active JDE and a series of parameters that describe the actual JDE changes to be applied to the report The IDEN command coded in a user s JDE notifies the system that a DJDE record or records may be part of the input data stream The command also describes the characteristics of a DJDE record so the System can identify and locate any DJDE records The IDEN command syntax and interpretation are described in table 8 3 An example of a coded IDEN command is IDEN PREFIX RTEST SKIP 9 OFFSET 3 OPRINFO YES The PREFIX parameter defines the character string which must appear in the identification part of each DJDE record in the input data stream When the system recognizes this character string in the example the EBCDIC string RTEST it examines the rest of the record f
446. printed image can appear shifted or skewed on a page if the sheet of paper is misaligned as it enters the printer Because of the design of the LPS feeder the image registration on each page can vary slightly both horizontally and vertically by up to 05 inches 1 mm The image can also be slanted or skewed slightly by up to 05 inches 1 mm in opposite directions for a maximum skew of 0 1 inches 2 mm Refer to figures 3 4 and 3 5 Note The following figures are the same specifications merely rotated to show portrait and landscape orientations The shift and skew variances described here are within allowable specifications but as this can affect the registration of variable data in preprinted forms and the placement of images close to the edge of the page it is important to make allowance for this condition Figure 3 4 Landscape orientation shift and skew Lead edge A 8 Registration 1 05 1 0 mm 1 1 H Skew 05 1 0 mm Direction J of H i paper feed yi 1 i I Skew Registration 1 05 1 0 mm variance I 05 1 0 mm 1 1 1 1 1 1 Trail edge XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 3 23 CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL Figure 3 5 Portrait orientation shift and skew Direction of paper feed Inboardside Skew gt lt 05 1 0 Registration variance 4 05 1 0 mm Registration variance 05 1 0 mm Skew 05 1 0mm
447. problem if the COPIES DUDE is in the delimiter at the start of report and the value of the COPIES DJDE is at least 2 The problem is caused when output processing releases space as soon as it believes that it no longer needs it The following procedures are suggested to avoid the problem e Set the number of copies of the first page to 2 or higher Include a copy sensitive CME e The COPIES parameter the START command can be used COPIES parameter in the START command overrides the DJDE parameter COPIES in this case the DJDE COPIES parameter is not applied Therefore it is possible to run the same job with the COPIES parameter in the START command and one without the COPIES parameter in the START command and get two different outputs COPIES option s Table 8 20 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 24 COPIES parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s number Specifies the number of copies of a report to produce at the next page boundary XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 35 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES DATA This parameter specifies the location and length of printable data within an input record It takes effect at the next record following a DJDE END parameter Syntax DATA option s Options 8 21 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 25 DATA paramet
448. pter for further details NONE Specifies that no form is to be printed The default is NONE XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 55 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES RTEXT This parameter specifies text to be printed on a separate page preceding a parameters report It takes effect on the next page boundary The are the same as for the ROUTE command defined in the chapter Print format commands RTEXT parameters must be in ascending passnum sequence Syntax RTEXT option s Options Table 8 441 ists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 48 RTEXT parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s sc passnum This option has the following components ALL ine col 25 fonti 7 Specifies the message to be printed 1 to 132 characters It is printed with the first font specified in the FONTS parameter of the PDE command refer to fontindex e passnum May be either an integer number or the keyword ALL An integer number specifies the pass copy ply to which the text applies ALL Specifies that the text applies to all copies If there is more than one RTEXT parameter in a DJDE packet passnum must be in increasing numeric order The default is passnum 1 line Specifies the line number on which the first line of a block of RTEXT message is printed The default is line 1 for the first text string of the pass O
449. ption s Definition s value Specifies the number of lines from the top of the output page to the last print line on the page bottom of form If bottom of form BOF is altered by DJDE to a line number smaller than the current line from which the DJDE was processed input effects an immediate page transition If carriage control action to perform at BOF is specified as OVR the default input spaces from TOF a number of lines equal to the difference between its location at DJDE and the new BOF Refer to the PCC ASSIGN command in chapter 5 regarding alternate BOF parameters i Syntax Options This parameter is implemented primarily to support the PC UI report audit logging feature which creates an audit log on the UI hard disk The audit log is initiated and terminated by including enabling data in the job stream BTEXT options syntax checks are performed by SYS UI BTEXT report definition parameters are however useful without the installation of a bar code reader which is not supported in the DocuPrint 180 LPS Page definition parameters on the other hand are meaningless without barcode text or a bar code reader Note The DocuPrint 180 LPS does not support the bar code reader option The BTEXT parameter contains the following options for both report definition and page detail BTEXT option s Table 8 19 lists the parameter option s and definition s 8 26 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE
450. ptions Table 4 3 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 3 ADJUST parameter option s and definition s Option s value Definition s Specifies the block adjustment length This length is a constant integer added to or subtracted from the value in the block length field of every tape block The resulting value is the true block length The range for a value is 127 to 127 and must be less than the block length parameter LENGTH The character plus or minus may be used to specify a positive or negative adjustment The default is 0 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS CONSTANT This parameter specifies that the block delimiter constant sc and all data following it are ignored until the end of the block is reached Syntax BLOCK CONSTANT option s Options Table 4 4 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 4 CONSTANT parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s SC A string hexadecimal octal or character constant as described in the chapter Creating a job source library JSL The length of the constant may be from one to four bytes There is no default FORMAT This parameter specifies the recording mode of the block length field Syntax BLOCK FORMAT option s Options Table 4 5 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 5 FORMAT parameter option s and definition s
451. r the next command after the END command should be another SYSTEM command The end of all JDLs to be processed is indicated by two consecutive END commands END END Figures 2 4 and 2 5 provide examples of offline and online JDLs In figure 2 4 note that HOST POWERVS indicates the source and structure of input data The HOST command indicates whether the JSL is for an offline or online job Some HOST parameters can apply to both online and offline hosts Refer to appendix A for a quick reference XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 2 13 PRINT DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE PDL Figure 2 4 Sample offline job descriptor library IBMPDL SYSTEM JDL coding THIS JOB DESCRIPTOR LIBRARY CONTAINS JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES FOR PROCESSING GRASP POWER AND POWER VS JOB TAPES I Gl HE SYSTEM STATEMENT SET DEFINES CONSTANTS AND PROCESSING PROCEDURES THAT WILL APPLY TO ALL JOBS PROCESSED USING THIS LIBRARY UNLESS OVERRIDDEN BY THE CATALOG OR JOB COMMAND SETS VFU001 VFU ASSIGN 1 5 ASSIGN 2 10 ASSIGN 3 15 ASSIGN 4 20 ASSIGN 5 25 ASSIGN 6 30 ASSIGN 7 35 ASSIGN 8 40 ASSIGN 9 45 ID level ASSIGN 10 50 ASSIGN 11 55 ASSIGN 12 60 TOF 5 BOF 66 VOLUME HOST POWERVS PLABEL YES CODE ASCII BLOCK LENGTH
452. r is cut off before all data has been transmitted Application that prints two logical pages on one side of a physical page 1 All type of a single design 2 Set of characters with design features that make them similar to one another Height of a typeface measured from the bottom of its descenders to the top of its ascenders expressed in points GLOSSARY 22 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY type style UCS upload utility program validation variable variable data variable text virtual page warning message weight wildcard wildcarding window write write protection Italic condensed bold and other variations of typeface that form a type family Universal Character Set Printer feature that permits the use of a variety of character To copy files from a remote peripheral device to a host LPS files are not copied to the host because one of the LPS functions is to store files for the host General purpose program that performs activities such as initializing a disk or sorting which are not specific to any application Process of testing a system s ability to meet performance objectives by measuring and monitoring its performance in a live environment Information of a changeable nature which is merged with a standard or a repetitive document to create specialized or personalized versions of that document Variable data is not a part of a form design It varies
453. r must be included in the user s JSL since the default pdo value causes the first data byte to be skipped The default is 1 132 offline The default is 0 150 online FCB This parameter specifies whether to suppress or accept the processing of the host transmitted forms control buffer FCB Syntax LINE FCB option s Options Table 6 25 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 25 FCB parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s IGNORE Suppresses the processing of the host transmitted forms control buffer FCB PROCESS Accepts FCB processing The VFU parameter defines the vertical upspacing if the FCB is ignored For online systems only The default is PROCESS XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 31 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS FONTINDEX This parameter specifies that a field within a user data record defines the index to a specific font to be used for that line If FONTINDEX is not specified none is used Syntax LINE FONTINDEX option s Options Table 6 26 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 26 FONTINDEX parameter option s and definition s Option s NONE offset offset init vall bit opt Definition s This option has the following components Refer to Points to note later in this section for discussion of FONTINDEX usage with overprint lines and maximum number of fonts and the examples
454. r option s and definition s Table 8 30 FONTINDEX parameter option s and definition s Option s offset init val bit opt Definition s This option has the following components e offset e init val bit opt NONE Syntax This parameter specifies the fonts to be used in printing variable input data or CME data The FONTS parameter within a DJDE takes effect on the next page boundary FONTS option s 8 40 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES Options 8 27 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 31 FONTS parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s fy s LPI XDOTS This option has the following components DOTS fase LPI m XDOTS DOTS 1 Each font index f1 specifies a 1 to 6 alphanumeric character identifier consisting of at least one letter corresponding to a font cataloged on the system disk up to 128 fonts can be used with the font indexing capability and up to 94 fonts on a single page If the number of fonts to be invoked exceeds the size of one DJDE record multiple FONTS parameters must be used 57 Each spacing index s1 value specifies an optional override line spacing value specifying either lines per inch or dots per line to be associated with the font maximum value for s1 is 30 LPI minimum value is 10 XDOTS or dots If a un
455. rameter requires a parameter that specifies either one or two CRITERIA commands If only one test is to be performed to determine the value of a particular logical processing function the form of the TEST parameter is as follows TEST cri id The cri id is the identifier for the particular CRITERIA command Parentheses in this format are optional Specifying two CRITERIA commands If two CRITERIA commands are needed to determine the true or false value for a logical processing function they may be linked by 7 6 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE USING LOGICAL PROCESSING Constant mode either an AND or an OR The formats of these TEST parameters may be as follows TEST cri AND cri id 2 or TEST cri OR cri id 2 The cri id and cri id are the identifiers for two CRITERIA commands The parentheses in this format are required For example the following three commands specify that a record should be selected RSELECT parameter if a particular field is equal to a given string constant sc T1 TABLE CONSTANT sc Cl CRITERIA CONSTANT offset length EQ T1 RSELECT TEST C1 There are two formats for the CRITERIA commands constant mode and change mode Each CRITERIA command may be either constant mode or change mode but not both Change mode In the constant mode the user must specify the location length and contents of a fixed field within a user s r
456. re exactly alike The reason is because the input task contains an internal mod pos table that keeps track of the current mod pos values for the job This table is initialized at report set up time through values found in the START JDE or JDL command When a DJDE JDE or JDL is specified with an ordered stock command the input task will then reinitialize its internal mod pos table with values in the DJDE JDE or JDL if it finds that the ordered stock command found in the START JDE or JDL is different from those defined in the DJDE JDE or JDL However if both commands are alike the input task will not reinitialize the internal mod pos table In order to check if the internal mod pos table is being initialized you will experience tab stocks that start purging before every tab is imaged because MOD POS is always initialized for every tab page 6 90 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS e Paper sizes The PAPERSIZE parameter is not supported as a DJDE Therefore a JDE page oriented DJDE that calls out the desired paper size is needed When specifying paper sizes if the JSL specifies the paper size using the keyword method such as USLEGAL A4 or B4 then the FSL must also use the same method If the JSL specifies 8 5 14 and FSL specifies USLEGAL the INPUT will display an error message 086670 FORM PAPER SIZE TOO SMALL FORM WILL NOT BE PRINTEDOrOS6680 FORM PAPER SIZE TOO LARGE FORM WILL NOT BE
457. replacement 2 16 to 2 20 HJOBNO parameter 7 14 Honeywell 200 2000 BCD code set C 2 6000 BCD code set C 3 HOSTCOPY 9 6 HRPTNA parameter BANNER command 7 15 RSTACK 7 38 IBM BCD code set C 1 ID level catalog level 2 12 to 2 13 commands JDE 2 13 job 2 13 END command 2 13 to 2 15 JDL 2 12 system 2 12 IDEN command parameter 8 6 identifier commands 2 3 IMAGE see also system page data 6 67 parameters DJDE command 8 38 to 8 39 OUTPUT command 6 57 shift 6 67 IMISMATCH parameter 6 3 information tracking 1 6 INIFEED parameter 6 97 input data characteristics 3 11 parameters setting up 3 11 processing commands BLOCK 4 2 to 4 8 CODE 4 9 to 4 11 PCC 4 12 to 4 18 RECORD 4 19 to 4 26 SEFFNT 4 27 to 4 31 TCODE 4 32 to 4 37 VOLUME 4 38 to 4 55 processing tasks 1 5 records 6 31 sources 4 56 streams 1 6 types formatted 1 10 to 1 11 unformatted 1 10 to 1 11 input unpacking examples D 1 INVERT parameter DJDE 8 39 OUTPUT commands 6 58 ISUBSTITUTE parameter 6 5 ITEXT parameter 8 40 J JDE creating 4 57 to 4 58 parameters 8 40 JDL creating specific commands online 4 57 to 4 58 parameters 8 40 system software tapes D 3 to D 4 JOB command 2 13 job control block 1 5 Job Descriptor Entry see JDE Job Descriptor Library see JDL job flow process 1 8 to 1 9 job parameter restrictions 8 14 to 8 15 Job Queue Entry see JQE Job Source Library see JSL JQE parameter 1 8
458. ric nor alphabetic 4 36 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Examples Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Example 4 Following are a few examples of how to use the command Basic character set used for default types is ASCII Operator s keyboard display has uppercase and lowercase character capability 1 TCODE DEFAULT ASCII TASSIGN 3 A Z TASSIGN 4 a A z Basic character set used for default types is EBCDIC Operator s keyboard display has uppercase and lowercase character capability 2 TCODE DEFAULT EBCDIC TASSIGN 3 CAT Ee g QURI S E r AYY TASSIGN 4 at s DET 735 pA s v Basic character set used for default types is ASCII Operator s keyboard display is limited to uppercase only 3 TCODE DEFAULT ASCII TASSIGN 3 A A Z2 TASSIGN 4 A A A 12Z The symbol functions as a case switching operator Basic character set used for default types is EBCDIC Operator s keyboard display is limited to uppercase only 4 TCODE DEFAULT EBCDIC TASSIGN 3 A 9 Ce PERT S Pe 2 TASSIGN 4 4I H4J R ES T2 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 37 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS VOLUME command Table
459. rmat it the positioning of the data on the physical page is not guaranteed For example when printing on a larger paper size the data does not fall off the physical page but it may not appear in the correct location When printing on a smaller paper size the data may fall off the physical page and appear incomplete Following is an example of how to use the ROUTE command The STOCKSET command is similar to PDEs and CMEs because it can be compiled separately For each STOCKSET encountered before an initial JDL or SYSTEM command PDL creates a file type STK which contains information The STK file can then be referenced in multiple JSL source files BILLS STOCKSET ASSIGN F1302 COVER ASSIGN Fl415 BODY SUMMARY ASSIGN F6204 LATE F9999 DISCON INIFEED COVER INIFEED F1302 WORKS AS WELL SYSPAGE COVER In the example above a stockset called BILLS is created consists of four stocks F1302 F1415 F6204 and F9999 Stock references are created for these four stocks COVER for F1302 BODY and SUMMARY for F1415 LATE for F6204 and DISCON for F9999 In the absence of a specific parameter of the FEED parameter at the start of the report INIFEED directs output to feed from the stock referred to by COVER A billing application makes use of this stockset by coding an OUTPUT STOCKS BILLS command in its JDE and through successive DJDE FEED records directs fe
460. rocessing the Source data or raw data entered for processing as opposed to the results obtained by processing Information to meet specific processing and retrieval needs Generally applies to integrated file of data arranged for access by many subsystems Transmission and reception of encoded information over telecommunication lines Collection of related data records organized in a specific manner so that each record is similarly structured for example a payroll file set up with one record for each employee last name first indicating the rate of pay and all deductions Operations carried out on data by means of algorithms and programs to produce information or a specific result The rearrangement of data into a suitable form for further use In data communications the rate at which a channel carries data measured in bits per second bps Preservation of data on various media for example tape disks magnetic bubble memory and so on Transmission of coded data over telephone or other telecommunication lines To detect and correct errors in a program To break down into component parts such as when Interpress breaks down a Font Interchange Standard FIS master to compile font information Value assigned to a field by the system Default fields may be used for such items as document formats menu selections input fields font selection and paper or image size The default value of a field may be changed G
461. rox Documentation Catalog Publication number 610P17417 or call the Xerox Documentation and Software Services XDSS at 1 800 327 9753 Table 1 Related Publications Publication Xerox DocuPrint 180 Laser Printing System Operator Guide Number 721P85490 Xerox DocuPrint 180 Laser Printing System 721P85500 Operations Reference Xerox DocuPrint 180 Laser Printing System 721P85550 Message Guide Xerox DocuPrint 180 Laser Printing System PDL 721P85530 Reference Xerox DocuPrint 180 Laser Printing System Forms 721P85520 Creation Guide Xerox DocuPrint 180 Laser Printing System 721P85510 System Generation Guide Xerox DocuPrint 180 Laser Printing System 721P85480 Installation Planning Guide Xerox DocuPrint 180 Laser Printing System Operator 721P85560 Command Summary Card Xerox DocuPrint 180 Laser Printing System PC Ul 721P85540 Reference Xerox DocuPrint 180 Laser Printing System Product 721P85570 Reference Xerox Laser Printing Systems Tape Formats Manual 600P86175 Xerox Laser Printing Systems Standard Font Library Font User Guide 600P86174 Helpful Facts About Paper 721P82492 This publication may contain descriptions of concepts and features not currently available for your Xerox Laser Printing System Consult your Xerox sales representative or your operating system software program description for additional information XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PD
462. rs This has the following components Each of the three fields is optional however you must specify at least one field The range for the variables m and n is 0 to 15 field Specifies the carriage action to take before printing An example is the ANSI carriage control SPm Space m lines before printing SKn Skip to channel n before printing field Specifies whether printing occurs for this record P Print the output data at the line number computed after field1 is processed N No printing occurs for this record default fields Specifies the carriage action to take after printing An example is the IBM1403 carriage control SPm Space m lines before printing SKn Skip to channel n before printing 4 14 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Considerations You do not have to specify consecutive byte values For example you can code the following command as a single command ASSIGN X 60 SP1 ASSIGN X 61 SP2 ASSIGN X 62 SP3 The single command is ASSIGN X 60 SP1 SP2 SP3 If when the LINE command byte translation is specified the PCC control byte is translated into LPS standard EBCDIC before being applied You must therefore specify the byte option of the ASSIGN parameter as an EBCDIC translation of the PCC byte An example is X F1 or 1 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 15 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAM
463. rs with one or more specified typecodes This parameter may also be used to disassociate one or more characters from all typecode assignments The TASSIGN parameter may be specified more than once in a TCODE command Syntax Options TCODE TASSIGN option s Table 4 39 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 39 TASSIGN parameter option s and definition s Option s typespec inputspec inputspec inputspec2 Definition s This option has the following components e lypespec A typespec may be coded as a single integer n When coded as a single integer the value may be in the range of 0 to 7 When coded as a series of integers the values may be within the range of 1 through 7 inputspec An inputspec may be coded as a single character char as a series of characters char or as a range of characters char1 char4 The syntax char1 char2 means the set of input codes corresponding to characters bounded by and including char1 and char2 refer to appendix D for relative order of characters When a typespec is coded as a 0 all characters specified by an inputspec are disassociated from all typecode assignments Thus the TASSIGN parameter may untype a specified set of characters When a typespec is coded with a single value ranging from 1 through 7 all specified characters are associated with that typecode When a typespec is coded as a series of values
464. ry graphic on a page The more graphics on a page and the larger the graphics the more likely it is that paper path holes are created Document interleaved file creation It should be noted that sending interleaved graphics across the online interface impacts system performance The time to process graphic information across the channel block it and write it to disk is significant As the average density of graphic information decreases throughput should increase The time required to create or replace and subsequently purge document interleaved graphics is significant XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 9 9 USING GRAPHICS Restrictions Graphic feature restrictions This section summarizes graphic restrictions some of which have been mentioned elsewhere in this document These restrictions are grouped according to whether they affect graphic features Note the following graphic feature restrictions Tape formats supported by interleaved graphic processing are restricted to LPS compatible fixed or variable record structures that is RECORD STRUCTURE F FB V or VB only Undefined length record structures such as types U and UB are not supported Packed data formats are not supported The maximum number of graphics that may be imaged on one physical page is 16 This includes graphics associated with forms Graphic images may be overlapped on a page with each other and with text There is no
465. s Table 4 43 BMULT parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s value Specifies a multiplication factor that you extract from the tape label and apply to the block length to determine the true block length The value is an integer and can range from 1 default to 15 The default is 1 Syntax Options This parameter specifies which code translation table the system uses to interpret the input data VOLUME CODE option s Table 4 44 lists the parameter option s and definition s XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 39 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Considerations Table 4 44 CODE parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s keyword Specifies a specific standard system defined code translation table The available options are e ASCII e BCD e EBCDIC e H2BCD e H6BCD BMBCD e PEBCDIC e USER USER refers to the single unlabeled CODE command defined within the JDE or JDL If you specify more than one CODE parameter use identifiers so that they can be referenced in your JSL You must then specify the variable identifier id to correspond to the identifier label assigned to the defining CODE command The default is EBCDIC id Specifies a variable identifier you use in the CODE command to refer to a specific user defined code translation table The identifier id is required when multiple CODE commands are containe
466. s and definition s Option s Definition s WAIT Displays a WAIT message NOWAIT Displays a WAIT message but printing does not stop The default is NOWAIT ABNORMAL OTEXT WAIT ERROR ABORT Syntax Options This parameter specifies the maximum number of successive simplex pages on which recovery to the page boundary is to be attempted ABNORMAL PAGES option s Table 6 7 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 7 PAGES parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s n For duplex printing n is the number of sheets or front side back side pairs of pages to be attempted The default is O 6 6 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS REP This parameter specifies that the first data page delivered to the bin following a printer jam recovery or a system crash may be offset from the rest of the report Syntax ABNORMAL REP option s Options Table 6 8 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 8 parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s NO Specifies that the page will not be offset YES Specifies that the page will be offset SECURITY This parameter specifies that certain operator functions are restricted Syntax ABNORMAL SECURITY option s Options Table 6 9 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 9 SECURITY
467. s and definition s Table 6 85 SYSPAGE parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s stock name stock reference MAIN AUX There is no default XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 111 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Points to note Example Note the following when using the STOCKSET command System generated pages such as with the VOLUME command PLABEL parameter or the IDEN command OPRINFO parameter are formatted using 8 5 by 11 inch paper unless the system has been sysgened for A4 paper These system generated pages are printed using the STOCKSET command SYSPAGE parameter that is in effect If no STOCKSET parameters are in effect cluster MAIN is used unless overridden by an operator key in For example assume that you try to print this page on 8 5 by 11 inch paper subject to the cluster representing the SYSPAGE stock or the operator key in If the paper size is not available the system attempts to print the page on a different paper size chosen from the same set of trays as would normally be used This occurs without any warning caution or cycle down If a larger paper size is available it is used If larger paper size is not available a smaller paper size is used This is the only time a page may be printed on a paper size smaller than what was specified to format the page When a system generated page is not printed on the same paper size used to fo
468. s even though individual segments may be less than the threshold the entire report is printed 1 to N NTO1zNO FACEUPZNO DUPLEXzNO n this sequence the NTO1 and FACEUP parameters specify the NO option so other potentially affected parameters such as DUPLEX cannot be overridden The DUPLEX parameter therefore maintains either the YES or NO option f hierarchical overrides occur the system issues warning messages in the JDL and then forces parameters lower in the hierarchical structure to their workable values XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 87 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS DUPLEX NO ACCT USER TRAY BFORM ignored RPAGE SIDE NUBACK forced to NUFRONT If transparency TRANS is specified the input task forces these parameters Any operator key ins however override the JSL specifications CYCLEFORMS FORMS Both may be used within a report however only the last parameter specified is in effect at any given time If a multicopy report specifies CYCLEFORMS a FORMS DJDE encountered midreport overrides the CYCLEFORMS parameter from that point in every copy RAUX command FEED parameter of OUTPUT command If they specify two different cluster names RAUX has higher priority SYSPAGE parameter of STOCKSET command System pages are checked for ordered stocks through the SYSPAGE parameter If there is no cluster name active for the current page the input task checks to see if there was an operator
469. s the DJDE FILE parameter may be specified as follows FILE In this case the file name and file type are obtained from the label record that precedes the file data The input task handles the creation and deletion of files which are transmitted from a host The output task marks files for deletion at the end of the report which created them The input task checks for files to be deleted at the start of the job at report setup and before exiting Note that when the output task marks the files for deletion the input task has long since finished with the report that created the files and is either waiting for data or actively processing another report If the input task is processing a report the files are deleted after end of report processing for the current report Afterthe files for the previous report have been deleted the input task then completes report setup for the report that follows Refer to the DJDE FILE command later in this chapter XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 39 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES FONTINDEX Syntax Options FONTS This parameter allows the user to specify a certain location in the input record where an index to the font to be used is stored It takes effect on the next logical page boundary The FONTINDEX parameters are the same as in the LINE command in the chapter Print format commands FONTINDEX option s Table 8 26 lists the paramete
470. s Indicate variable names or numbers underlining Indicates the default parameter or parameter option braces Indicate required options brackets Indicate optional choices parenthesis Used when more than one parameter option is listed after a parameter Ellipsis Indicates repetition of a parameter option or a series of parameter options XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE B 1 PDL COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE Table B 2 PDL command quick reference Command Syntax Default ABNORMAL ABNORMAL ERROR CONTINUE ABORT STOP STOP ABNORMAL IMISMATCH CONTINUE ABORT STOP STOP ABNORMAL ISUBSTITUTE ANY NONE ANY ABNORMAL OTEXT WAIT NOWAIT NOWAIT ABNORMAL SECURITY YES NO NO ACCT ACCT DEPT sc jdl name ACCT USER BIN TRAY BOTH NONE BIN BANNER BANNER HCOUNT value test exp BANNER HJOBNO offset length NONE NONE BANNER HRPTNA offset length NONE NONE BANNER TCOUNT value 0 BANNER TEST test exp BANNER TYPE DATE BANNER BANNER BDELETE BDELETE TEST test exp BLOCK BLOCK ADJUST value 0 BLOCK CONSTANT sc BLOCK FORMAT type BIN BLOCK LENGTH value 1330 BLOCK LMULT value 1 BLOCK LTHFLD value 0 BLOCK OFFSET value 0 BLOCK POSTAMBLE value 0 BLOCK PREAMBLE value 0 BLOCK ZERO YES NO BSELECT BSELECT TEST test exp ac CATALOG catalog name CATALOG ac CME ac CME CONSTA
471. s soon as the EOV label is processed EOF End of file Specifies that the end of volume label is treated as an end of file label When this occurs the first part of the page spanning the volumes is output as the last page of the job The second part of the spanned page is printed as the first page when the next volume is started with possible page format irregularities To use the EOF parameter effectively special user formatting of the multireel tapes is required to avoid these page format problems NOEOF Specifies normal end of volume processing The default is NOPAUSE NOEOF HOST This parameter specifies the computer or host operating system generated the input data file Syntax VOLUME HOST option s Options Table 4 46 lists the parameter option s and definition s XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 41 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Table 4 46 HOST parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s host type Specifies one of the following options IBMOS e ANSI e B2500 e B2700 e B3500 e B3700 B4700 e B6700 DEC e PDP11 e DUMP e GRASP e H2000 e H6000 IBMDOS BMONL e CL2900 e NCR e OCTDUMP e OLDUMP OSWTR e POWER e POWERVS e RSX11 e UNDEF e UNIVAC 1100 e 1570 XEROX The default is IBMOS Considerations For online systems you must specify IBMONL or OLDUMP For HOST ICL2900 the PCCTYPE is always specified as NONE For
472. selected for or deleted from printing by use of the BDELETE and BSELECT commands TEST BSELECT and BDELETE commands These commands can also be used selectively to delete specialized blocks for example control blocks and unsupported labels that are on the data tape but are not to be printed Syntax for the TEST parameter of BSELECT and BDELETE commands is as follows TEST For online jobs this parameter defines test expression for selecting blocks for printing Syntax TEST option s Options Table 7 14 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 14 TEST parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s test exp The format and syntax of a test exp are defined in the Test expression definition section The block is selected BSELECT for printing or deleted BDELETE if a test exp is satisfied There is no default Points to note Note the following when using the BSELECT and BDELETE commands e Itis important to note that block selection or block deletion is performed before the extraction of the records from the block If a block is deleted from or not selected for printing none of the records contained within that block are processed or are available for any other logical processing functions e Ifa block does not match the same format as the normal blocks it can be deleted and thus not cause a processing error For example a control block in a fixed bl
473. set in the stacker tray under control of the input data that is data and DJDE records These special user controlled offsets can be used to simplify job distribution by creating separate stacks for each distribution entity No other special processing occurs as a result of the ROFFSET test being satisfied for instance the report is not terminated nor are multiple copies produced at the offset juncture In duplex mode ROFFSET forces the logical page on which the criteria are satisfied to be the first logical page of a new sheet The page on which the offset occurs can be determined by the following criteria e Ifthe record which satisfies the ROFFSET test is printed on a page of the output that page is the offset sheet e ifthe record which satisfies the ROFFSET test is not printed on a page of the output that is it is deleted by RDELETE but not BDELETE the ROFFSET function is performed for the next printable record If the next printable record causes a transition to the next page the next page is offset ROFFSET also provides the control to force an offset on either all copies of the report or only the first copy In conjunction with job offset control OFFSET parameter of the OUTPUT command the user can exert extensive control over the offsetting function so as to build tailored job controlled stacks of output in the stacker tray of the LPS The following section describes the syntax of the command parameters and explanations
474. short record lengths in the data stream the information to be communicated in a BTEXT command can be placed into two or more consecutive DJDE records within a DJDE packet Example DJDE BTEXT RNA CK0409 CJN HR0525 S DJDE RRA 153249 37 NSE 2490 END XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 31 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES maximum lingth of all BTEXT strings within a DJDE packet or in the JSL MESSAGE sommand is determined by the following 509 N where N is the number of BTEXT commands in the JSL MESSAGE command or DJDE packet Due to string length limitations it is imperative that BTEXT strings not be padded with unnecessary blank characters Example 1 SDJDEBTEXT RNA CK0409 CJN HR0525 SDJDEBTEXT RRA 1533249 37 NSE 2490 END In Example 1 the maximum length allowed for the BTEXT string is 508 2 506 Nis 2 as there are two BTEXT commands Example 2 MESSAGE BTEXT RNA CK0409 CJN HR0525 BTEXT RRA 153249 37 NSE 2490 BTEXT LDT 03 07 94 RSQ Y In Example 2 the maximum length allowed for the BTEXT strings is 508 3 505 N is 3 as there are three BTEXT commands maximum length of each DJDE BTEXT string is 255 e Values for required BTEXT parameters not supplied in a DJDE or JSL will be supplied defaults by the PC UI if defaults exist for the parameter
475. sing 4 69 N NTO1 parameter 6 60 NUMBER parameter DJDE command 8 44 OUTPUT command 6 61 5 processing 1 8 task 1 5 octal constants 2 8 OFFSET parameters BLOCK command 4 5 OUTPUT command 6 62 DJDEs 8 6 Online Interface unit OLI 4 56 online 3211 4245 mode 4 56 dump 4 64 to 4 65 graphic formats batch mode 9 6 to 9 7 document and page interleaves 9 6 document interleaved file transfers 9 7 management 9 7 noninterleaved 9 6 printing systems 4 56 to 4 66 record length 4 62 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE INDEX 5 INDEX recovery 4 63 report separation 4 59 restrictions DJDE 8 18 specific commands CMEs 4 59 DJDE processing 4 59 JDE creating 4 57 to 4 58 JDL creating 4 57 to 4 58 optimization 4 59 Operator Communication Subsystem see OCS operator functions restricting 6 2 information DJDE 8 13 operating system executive 1 5 software 1 3 to 1 4 OPRINFO parameter 8 7 options cover parameter 6 49 ordered stocks 5 9 OSTK parameter 6 63 OTEXT parameter ABNORMAL command 6 6 DJDE command 8 45 MESSAGE command 6 44 OUTPUT command 6 45 to 6 84 output processing task 1 6 OVERPRINT parameters DJDE command 8 46 LINE command 6 35 P packed data formats 4 68 page buffer 1 6 log 1 6 marker 6 6 numbering 6 61 orientation landscape 3 20 to 3 21 portrait 3 20 to 3 22 sizes edgemarking 3 18 to 3 19 physical 3 18 system 3 18 Page
476. sing usually 8 operated upon as a unit A byte may represent a character a machine instruction or some other logical unit of information Control character that causes the printing system to start printing at the left margin of the current line unless set to be interpreted as a line end 1 In data communications a path or line that enables two or more devices to communicate sometimes called a circuit facility or link 2 In computers a path for communication between the central processing unit CPU and input output units or between the CPU and peripheral devices XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY 3 GLOSSARY character character cell character code character code identifier character set client layer clocking cluster CME code code conversion collate column command command language comment Single printable letter A Z numeral 0 9 symbol amp 96 or punctuation mark used to represent data Characters can also be nonprinting such as space tab or carriage return Digitized space containing a single character within a font set Code representing alphanumeric information for example ASCII Code associated with the universal identifier Xerox to indicate the version of the Xerox character code standard used to code Interpress strings Number of different characters used by a particular device including alphabetic numeric and special ch
477. sion off XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 69 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS MODIFY This parameter specifies CMEs to be associated with report copies Syntax Options OUTPUT MODIFY option s Table 6 52 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 53 MODIFY parameter option s and definition s Option s cme id NONE cme id init copies Definition s This option has the following components cme id The command identifier of a CME The CME may be coded within a JSL or coded and cataloged separately for use by several JSLs Any CME invoked by a DJDE must be cataloged separately refer to the Cataloged CMEs section in this chapter for further information If the CME is within the JSL it must precede a reference to its identifier by the MODIFY parameter Details on CME usage and syntax are discussed in the section of this chapter init Specifies the initial ply pass to which the associated CME is to be applied copies Specifies the number of plies passes on which to apply the CME If copies is not specified then the CME applies to all copies beginning with the copy number specified by init NONE Specifies that data are processed without modification The default is NONE Different CMEs may be associated with different copies of a report by the use of multiple MODIFY parameters on the same OUTPUT command CME copy ra
478. sition to the correct line This causes a blank page to be printed if the new channel 1 is less than the old but will be totally transparent if the new channel 1 assignment is greater further down the page than the old In the online environment only the carriage control on the DJDE record itself is honored if itis a SKIP parameter If the DJDE uses the ASSIGN parameter to specify a new channel 1 a skip to channel 1 carriage control on the DJDE record causes a skip to the new channel 1 But if the DJDE uses JDE to specify a new channel 1 the skip to channel 1 carriage control on the DJDE record causes a skip to the old channel 1 until a physical page break occurs XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 13 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES DJDE operator information pages The changes to the JDE specified in the DJDE are incorporated when END parameter is encountered The changes begin on the next record or page following the last DJDE record The specification OPRINFOZYES in the JDE ensures that the DJDE records are printed and sent to the tray at the next page transition after an END parameter The DJDE records are printed on a separate page from the report data However no page formatting occurs and DJDEs on one long record are truncated at the end of the physical page boundary They are printed and delivered to the tray regardless of the OPRINFO parameter if the DJDE contains an error Comments in th
479. st line number in the list occurs if no line number is larger than the current line XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 115 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Example Following is an example of how to use the ROUTE command In the following example top of form is assigned to line number 5 and bottom of form is assigned to line number 55 Channels 1 2 and 12 have been assigned line numbers V1 VFU ASSIGN 1 5 ASSIGN 2 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 ASSIGN 12 55 TOF 5 BOF 55 Assume the printing system is printing a report and the current line number is 11 If a skip to channel 1 and print parameter were issued a page transition occurs Printing begins on line 5 assigned to channel 1 which is the top of form on the new page If a skip to channel 2 and print parameter is issued when the current line number is 11 the next line to be printed would be line 15 of the current page Lines 10 15 20 and so forth are also assigned to channel 2 but since the current line number is 11 the next consecutive line number assigned to channel 2 greater than 11 is line 15 If a skip to channel 12 and print parameter is issued the next line to be printed is line 55 of the current page 6 116 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE T Using logical processing The logical processing sometimes referred to as special processing commands enable the user to specify logical functions performed on either a record a se
480. starting at line 2 while the second LINE parameter specifies line 1 which contradicts the ascending order XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 19 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS POSITION Points to note Syntax Options This parameter specifies the initial character position of the CME in the print line ac CME POSITION option s Table 6 17 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 17 POSITION parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s n An integer value between 1 the first position of the print line and the value specified by the length right part of the DATA parameter in the LINE command The default is 1 Note the following when using the CME command e The CME LINE and POSITION parameters are order dependent in that LINE must always precede POSITION e Data lines Data lines are not properly aligned if proportional fonts are being used in landscape mode and a switch is made to a larger font in the middle of the line This restriction is a result of the functioning of the printer imaging hardware Multiple copies If a multicopy is aborted before all the pages are set up in the page log one copy gets printed if the CMEs are copy sensitive Otherwise all copies of the setup pages are printed e OVERPRINT FONTINDEX and CMEs CMEs are not applied if OVERPRINT MERGE and FONTINDEX are both specified CME parameters are applied to
481. statistics are accumulated on the basis of physical pages e logical page overflows the physical page before encountering BOF the next line is positioned to the first logical page of the next side and all subsequent logical pages are repositioned on BEGIN With the exception of DEPT and SHIFT all page oriented DJDEs are applied at a logical page boundary Thefollowing DJDEs when applied cause the current page position to go to the first logical page of the front side of a new physical sheet DUPLEX COPIES JDL JDE BFORM OTEXT RTEXT Thefollowing DJDEs when applied cause the current page position to go to the first logical page of the next physical side FORMS FORMAT 6 100 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS BEGIN The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options Syntax Options Considerations This parameter specifies the location of the starting print line of a logical page for graphics The vpos parameter specifies the vertical position of the first character of the first print line on the logical page It may be specified in inches IN or centimeters CM The default is inches ac PDE BEGIN option s Table 6 75 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 76 BEGIN parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s vpos hpos This option has the fol
482. ster checks following stockset changes Stockset change Cluster checks required Missing Is the cluster defined in the CLUSTER LIB No trays Does the cluster have current trays Tray overlap Do any of the clusters have the same current trays Sizing error Are all trays the same size If not is autosize set Refer to your Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS Operator Guide for more information A cluster without these errors has an in use status that is it has trays and is in the stockset last called by the job Any one of these errors in any clusters in the stockset gives in error status to the Stockset As jobs print the output task uses the application s specified cluster to choose a tray for each page Occasionally it provides a cluster status display If an operator enters FEED commands that override the data for example the FEED DJDE then the printer cycles down and displays 052289 Warning Current FEED command overrides data FEED value When a site runs simple and OTEXT applications with stockset applications the LPS executes two additional stockset checks to help ensure the correct paper is loaded They are as follows e has no stockset information then a stockset change is assumed e Astockset change is assumed at each job boundary regardless of the stocksets used To run a simple or OTEXT application correctly after a stockset application while
483. stics It prints out accounting data for each name entered into the accounting file by the ACCOUNT parameter Use of the REPORT USER parameter is discussed in the chapter on tracking system activity in the Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS Operations Reference sample of the output is shown in figure 6 2 DEPARTMENT JDL entries as shown in figure 6 3 are generated by the OSS NODEPT and TASKS JDL and entered by you with the ACCOUNT parameter NODEPT is the name under which accounting statistics are accumulated for print jobs without name entries in the accounting file TASKS JDL is a name under which accounting is accumulated for printing done by system tasks such as FDL PDL and the Editor OPERATIONS is a user supplied DEPARTMENT JDL entry in figure 6 3 Other entries on this report such as PAGES and LINES are defined the same as those on the end of report accounting page XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 11 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Figure 6 2 Sample accounting page printed with job XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX LPS EROX XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX LPS EROX XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX LPS XEROX LPS EROX DATE 14 OCT 97 AT 18 47 12 DEPARMENT M0036 JDL JOB ID 248 REPORT NO 1 FILE ID
484. sts of the file name and file type represented as file name file type for example XAMPLE JSL A message appears on the system controller display if a file already exists with the file id you have selected To protect the original file clear the work file rename your file and repeat the GET file id command Number the lines Automatically by entering INSERT n y n refers to the starting line also called record number y refers to increments at which the line numbers should appear For example the command INSERT 10 10 means to insert lines starting with 10 and increase in increments of 10 The first record then would be 00010 with subsequent records numbered 00020 00030 00040 and so on Manually by entering the number you wish to assign the line you are specifying This must be done for every line you enter whether itis XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE E 1 EDITOR QUICK REFERENCE Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 full command line a continuation of a previous command line or a comment line For example if you wish to add line 00011 following 000010 you would simply enter 11 Input the text your JSL coding by entering the text after the line number which appears on the system controller display For example the display would show EDIT gt INSERT 10 10 00010 You would then enter your text following 00010 00010 XAMPLE JDL The display would then provide the next record 00020
485. t Note This parameter is dependent upon the SEQ parameter NONE Specifies no BTEXT The default is NONE Parameter rules Note the following rules All parameters have the form keyword value e values must be specified as shown in the BTEXT command syntax A value may be a keyword as shown in the BTEXT command syntax or text described as listed in table 8 20 Table 8 20 Value s and definition s value s Definition s XXX Alphanumeric text including spaces Case sensitivity is retained nnn Numeric text including one optional decimal point Maximum of two digits after the decimal point sss Numeric text no decimal points yy mm dd Numeric text describing year month an d day Each pair of characters is separated by a dash Eight characters in all are required Parameters are separated by a comma values cannot have commas embedded White space within a parameter is ignored if it immediately precedes or follows the sign White space following a value is ignored White space preceding or following a comma is ignored e following the last parameter is ignored Parameter keyword text is case insensitive XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 29 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES Points to note Note these points when using the BTEXT command e f RNA report name is not specified no audit logging
486. t The data record when processed as part of the input data stream causes the page it is a part of to be printed on a sheet of paper fed from the auxiliary tray The Xs are depicted in the above example only to illustrate the specified offset of 20 character positions The following section describes the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 7 21 USING LOGICAL PROCESSING RFEED command The logical processing RFEED command allows you to change cluster names on a page by page basis without using DJDEs The RFEED command allows you to specify paper fed from different clusters if certain criteria are met on a record basis RFEED is essentially an extension of the RAUX command in that it allows you to specify virtually any cluster name or cluster reference without being limited to the AUX cluster The following section describes the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options TEST This parameter allows you to specify paper fed from different clusters if certain criteria are met on a record basis Syntax RFEED TEST option s Options Table 7 16 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 16 TEST parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s test exp This option has the following components clu def iest exp References a criteria table to be used e clu
487. t abbreviate to FOR XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 65 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS FORMS Syntax Options This parameter specifies forms to be associated with the report copies Different forms may be associated with different copies of a report by the use of multiple FORMS left parts on the same OUTPUT command OUTPUT FORMS option s Table 6 48 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 49 FORMS parameter option s and definition s Option s form id NONE form id init copies Definition s This option consists of form id Specifies a 1 to 6 character file name may be numeric alpha or alphanumeric which exists on disk This file is created by compiling a forms description language source file called an FSL file with the FDL system task refer to the Xerox LPS Forms Creation Guide for further details on FDL init Specifies the beginning ply pass number to which a specified form applies This defaults to the first or next copy If the copies parameter is not specified the last or only specified form applies to all copies beginning with copy number init If the form is not the last one specified copies defaults to 1 If neither init nor copies is specified the form applies to all copies of the report copies The number of copies of the report to be printed Means that no form is added to the associated report page of variable dat
488. t develops an image transfers it to paper and fuses it for output as hardcopy Height of lowercase letters without their ascenders or descenders height of letter x See also ascender descender Vertical axis on a forms grid Advanced Customer Training Advanced Function Printing American National Standards Institute American Standard Code for Information Interchange binary coded decimal bottom of form beginning of tape bits per inch bits per second binary synchronous communications character dispatcher control data communications character dispatcher image generator control module copy modification entry characters per inch GLOSSARY 24 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE GLOSSARY CPU CR DCE DDCMP DEC DFA DJDE DMR DOS dpi DSDD DSU DSR DSSD DTE EBCDIC ENET EOT EP ESS FCB FCG FCP central processing unit carriage return data communications equipment Digital Data Communication Message Protocol Digital Equipment Corporation Document Feeding and Finishing Architecture dynamic job descriptor entry data mode ready DEC interface for LPS disk operating system dots per inch double sided double density digital signal unit disk save and restore double sided single density data terminal equipment Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code Ethernet network end of tape electronic pu
489. t have DUPLEX YES It takes effect as soon as the data is read into the system BFORM parameters are the same as for the OUTPUT command BFORM option s Table 8 14 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 17 BFORM parameter option s and definition s Option s form id init copies Definition s This option has the following components form id Specifies a file name which exists on disk This file is created by compiling an FSL source file with the FDL system task form id may be the keyword NONE which means that no form is to be added to the associated report page of variable data init Specifies the beginning ply number to which a specified form applies This defaults to the first or next copy copies Specifies the number of plies passes to which a specified form applies NONE Specifies that no form is to be added to the associated report page of variable data XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 25 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES BOF Syntax Options Considerations BTEXT This parameter specifies the bottom of form line number It takes effect at the next record following a DJDE END parameter A value is defined the dame as for VFU BOF in the chapter Print format commands BOF option s Table 8 15 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 18 BOF parameter option s and definition s O
490. t is text and graphics may begin at the edge of the physical page and may even extend off the page However if any part of a printed element begins off the system page then no part of the element is imaged e Ifa line of variable data begins off the system page no part of the line is printed e ifa ruled line begins off the system page no part of the ruled line is printed e Aruled line near the edge of the system page must be positioned at least one half the line s thickness inside the System page to be printed If positioned less than one half of the line s thickness you will get an error message but the system will print the job Refer to your Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS Operations Reference for additional information One common cause of print elements accidentally beginning off the System page is the improper use of the OUTPUT command SHIFT parameter This command is used to shift the entire page s contents relative to the boundaries of the system page When a negative shift value is entered as is often the case for the back side of duplex pages and that value exceeds the left margin no text elements print When using a negative value for the SHIFT parameter be sure that it is less than the value of the left margin XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 3 19 CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL Page orientation There are two types of page orientation Landscape Portrait The vertical and horizontal p
491. t of input character to type assignments to be used for the masked string comparisons in a report It must be used whenever it is not possible to use one of the standard sets of default type assignments without modification Table 4 37 summarizes the use of the TCODE command parameters Table 4 37 Summary of TCODE command parameters Parameter Specifies Offline Online DJDE DEFAULT Initial set of character type assignments for use with Y Y N masked comparisons TASSIGN Association of one or more specified characters with Y Y N one or more specified typecodes TRESET Disassociation of one or more characters or all Y Y N characters in a set from one or more typecodes The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and explanations of the parameter options The TCODE command should be coded as follows Specify with one parameter using the DEFAULT parameter an initial set of type assignments for the entire set of input character codes Modify the specified initial set of type assignments by associating specific character types with specific characters in the input character set as many occurrences as necessary of the TASSIGN parameter If necessary further modify the initial set by disassociating specific character types from specific characters in the input character set as many occurrences as necessary of the TRESET parameter 4 32 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REF
492. t of records or on a block basis The following table summarizes the functions that may be performed and the corresponding PDL commands Table 7 1 summarizes the commands associated with logical processing Table 7 1 Summary of commands associated with logical processing Command Function Offline Online DJDE BANNER Banner page detection test online only N Y N BDELETE Block deletion test Y N N BSELECT Block selection test Y N N CRITERIA Logical processing test specifications Y Y N RAUX Select page from auxiliary tray test Y Y N RDELETE Record deletion test Y N N RFEED Changes cluster names on page by page basis Y Y N without using DJDEs ROFFSET Page offset test Y Y N RPAGE Logical page reposition test Y Y Y RRESUME Resume printing test Y N N RSELECT Record selection test Y N N RSTACK End of report test Y Y N RSUSPEND Suspend printing test Y N N TABLE Table of constants for logical processing Y Y N Logical processing commands This section explains the logical processing command format and lists the commands with TEST parameters XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 7 1 USING LOGICAL PROCESSING Logical processing command format To define a logical processing command fully you must specify one or two fields in the record or block to be tested In general a logical processing command has the following format command TEST test exp The log
493. t parameter in table 8 2 Print and skip carriage control parameters associated with online DJDE records are treated as skip immediate carriage control parameters If the LPS is not at the channel specified a skip occurs but if it is already there no skip occurs unless the last carriage control parameter received was a print without spacing parameter Print and space carriage control parameters as well as the print without spacing carriage control parameter associated with DJDE records are ignored The printer carriage control PCC byte associated with offline DJDE records is ignored If a DJDE is always created because of coding procedures but there is no need to set any of the DJDE parameters for a particular report a null DJDE may be created with only an END parameter and no other parameters specified which will not modify any of the existing job setup parameters FORMS FORMAT and BFORM DJDE parameters can appear only once in the DJDE packet XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 11 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES Application of DJDEs The following occurrences should be noted when using DJDE records The specific parameters included in a DJDE packet are the only ones modified when the DJDE is applied The only exceptions are the JDE DJDE and JDL DJDE which cause all processing parameters contained in the JDE to be updated except for those listed in the Job parameter modification restr
494. tabs by keying off the current cluster name reference at the time that the page is formatted for OUTPUT For example if the page satisfies the RAUX criteria and AUX is specified as the cluster name in the ordered stock statement INPUT recognizes this as a tab 6 88 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS stock Having recognized it INPUT then adds n dots width of the tab to the paper size in the slow scan direction The IOT disables any dynamic width checking whenever it encounters a tab The portrait landscape parameter of the OSTK statement allows either to be specified The only one supported by the DocuPrint 180 is portrait P and this is the default condition If landscape L is selected and the actual tab Stock is loaded such that the tab is located on the registration edge outboard this combination will not run due to skew induced jams within the IOT In ordered stock tab jobs care must be exercised when selecting the PFEED tray Ordered stock jam recovery does not work properly if the tray selected for PFEED contains ordered stock Example Job 1 starts with Tab 1 located in the upper right corner of a portrait page and Job 2 must start with Tab 5 located in the lowest right corner of the portrait page The number of tabs Job 1 will use is 2 In order to run the job in succession you must code the JSL with MOD 5 and POS 1 for Job 1 and MOD 5 and POS 5 for Job 2 The DocuPrint 180 d
495. te this information under a specified name such as department code account or accumulate it under a system default name The DEPT parameter of the ACCT command allows an installation to define a name under which the accounting data is accumulated The system ACCOUNT command refer to the Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS Operations Reference must also be used with the DEPT parameter to create a name in the accounting file which corresponds to the name specified in the DEPT specification It is necessary to enter this 6 10 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Installation accounting report name only once with the ACCOUNT parameter but it must be done before a print job is run using the DEPT name If the name is not entered with the ACCOUNT parameter the accounting data for this report is accumulated in the NODEPT entry in the accounting log However the DEPARTMENT entry on the accounting page for this report lists the requested department name followed by an asterisk to denote that no specific accounting by this name was performed If the DEPT parameter is not specified data is accumulated under a name made up of the identifier on the JDL SYSTEM or JDL parameter with the characters JDL appended to it assuming that this same name exists in the accounting file Thus if a JDL identifier is H2SYS and no DEPT was specified the default accounting name on the accounting page is H2SYS JDL Data is accumulat
496. ted Expected Compiled on a 1 3 5 As 1 As 3 3 V3 8 Expected Expected Compiled on a 1 As 1 1 As 1 As As V3 9 Expected Expected Expected Expected Compiled ona 1 36 7 5 6 7 3 6 7 1 As 7 7 V4 0 V5 0 Expected Compiled ona 1 1 1 1 1 1 As As V3A Expected Expected 1 Commands unique to this software release are not supported Unpredictable results will occur 2 Commands unique to this software release are not supported However an error message is displayed unique commands are ignored and the job will print NO a 0 RFEED command is not supported LOGO command in JSL is not supported Extended CRITERIA and VCODE are not supported Job prints in black only Two color graphics are not supported Paper size not supported by the printer Will cause job to abort XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 3 27 CREATING A JOB SOURCE LIBRARY JSL Xerox 4850 and 4890 HighLight Color LPS This section explains how the DocuPrint 180 LPS runs applications created for the 4850 and 4890 HighLight Color Laser Printing Systems Running 4850 4890 applications on your DocuPrint 180 LPS PDL commands and parameters If you have a Xerox 4850 or 4890 version 4 0 HighLight Color LPS your applications probably include the use of blue red or green highlight color The JDL used to print these applications contain commands and parameters which specify the location and the color ink to be used Your
497. ted code table by a command identifier The USER option of the CODE and LCODE parameters of the VOLUME command are used to reference a user defined code translation table in which no command identifier is coded 4 10 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Examples Example 1 Example 2 Following are two examples of how to use the command A user s input tape is recorded in EBCDIC On output however codes 5A 5B and 5C characters respectively are assigned to the character blank X 40 The command to modify the EBCDIC base table is as follows CODE DEFAULT EBCDIC ASSIGN X 5A X 40 ASSIGN X 5B X 40 ASSIGN X 5C X 40 CODE DEFAULT EBCDIC ASSIGN X 5A X 40 X 40 X 40 In example 2 consecutive input codes such as X 5B and X 5C need not be specified to accomplish code modification XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 11 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS PCC command The PCC command enables the user to create a table or modify an existing standard table of one byte printer carriage control codes and define their action Line spacing skip to channel and printing actions are all defined through this parameter The user specifies an identifier of the type ac when defining the PCC table and references it in the PCCTYPE parameter of the LINE command Table 4 16 summarizes the use of the PCC
498. the abbreviation FOR to represent FORMAT only or avoid the abbreviation entirely to prevent errors e Usea semicolon to indicate the end of an element of data for the system It must be at the end of every PDL command e Enter command parameters such as FONT FORM and GRAPHIC in their singular form as shown or with an optional plural s such as FONTS FORMS and GRAPHICS Enter the END command to signal the end of a JSL You may then enter another JSL into the system if you wish Use two END commands to signal the end of all JSLs to be processed END END Example LINE VFU VFU1 DATA 1 10 OVERPRINT PRINT DISP This LINE command example contains three left part command parameters VFU DATA and OVERPRINT a right part reference to an identifier VFU1 and parameter options 1 10 and PRINT DISP XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 2 5 PRINT DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE PDL Right part constants Value constants Constants within the right part of a left right part parameter may be either value or string constants The syntax of these constants is defined below String constants Value constants are constants that have arithmetic values They should be expressed as decimal numbers They may be expressed as hexadecimal values octal values or even character values but these expressions are not recommended Decimal constants may be signed and in some cases may have fractional digi
499. the input data stream immediately following the textual data to be imaged on the same page refer to the Page interleaved section of this chapter The graphic is copied directly to the print file adjacent to the page s formatted textual information Separate graphic disk files are not created In block mode the output software reads graphics from the print file into graphics memory Block mode graphics exist on disk only in the print file and only while the report is being processed No disk file is created A given page of a report which includes block mode graphics may also include either random mode graphics or move mode graphics Tape formats In batch mode the input stream contains graphics which are to be imaged one per page with either default or optional imaging specifications Batch mode graphics are copied to the print file and processed the same as block mode graphics In batch mode only one graphic is imaged on each page for example forms may notbe invoked in batch mode This feature may be invoked by the GRAPHICS parameter of the OUTPUT command Noninterleaved This section covers the following topics e Noninterleaved e Document interleaved e Page interleaved Batch mode To transfer IMG files from tape to an LPS system disk independent of printing the COPY TAPE LABEL file name command may be used XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 9 3 USING GRAPHICS Document interleaved
500. therwise the default is the next line of the page Only one RTEXT parameter may be specified per line for a passnum col Specifies the column number at which the first character of a block of RTEXT messages is to be printed The default is column 1 fontindex Identifies the index starting with 1 of the PDE font with which the text is printed rtext id This option is used to reference a cataloged file of RTEXT parameters previously compiled by PDL NONE Specifies that no text is to be printed on a separate page The default is NONE Example RTEXT T END EST ALL 15 5 2 8 56 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES SAVE This parameter must occur prior to or at the end of the report and specifies IMG files updated during the current report which are not to be purged when the report s output processing is completed This DJDE parameter is used to override for specific files automatic file deletions specified by PURGEZYES in the JDE s OUTPUT command Syntax SAVE option s Options Table 8 45 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 49 SAVE parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s file name The file name is either the name of an IMG file or a file name mask whose form and interpretation are as described for the operator SAMPLE parameter refer to SAMPLE parameter ALL Spe
501. this section Syntax OUTPUT CYCLEFORMS option s Options Table 6 41 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 42 CYCLEFORMS parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s form id form id form id4 This option has the following components NONE e form id Specifies a 1 to 6 character file name may be numeric alpha or alphanumeric which exists on disk This file is created by compiling a forms description language source file called an FSL file with the FDL system task refer to the LPS Forms Creation Guide for further details on FDL e Means that no form is to be added to the associated report page of variable data The default is NONE If multiple CYCLEFORMS left parts on the same OUTPUT command are specified a single list consisting of all forms specified in the OUTPUT command is created The order of the list is the order in which the names are encountered The number of form ids is limited only by the number of forms retained on the disk Example OUTPUT CYCLEFORMS form form XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 61 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS DENSITY This parameter is listed for compatibility purposes only it is not supported on the DocuPrint 180 LPS Syntax OUTPUT DENSITY option s Options Table 6 42 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 43 DENSITY parameter option s
502. ting a job source library JSL Steps and decision points in creating a JSL syntax quick reference list hints and tips compiling JSLs and starting print jobs Chapter 4 Specifying input parameters Explanations syntax usage parameters and examples of the basic input processing commands BLOCK CODE PCC RECORD SEFFNT TCODE and VOLUME online and offline mode considerations examples of input command usage and points to note Chapter 5 Defining clusters What clusters are and how to define them in your JSLs Chapter 6 Specifying print format commands Explanations syntax usage parameters and examples of the various input and output processing commands online and offline specific commands and points to note Chapter 7 Using logical processing commands Explanations syntax usage parameters restrictions and examples of the various logical processing commands test expressions string comparisons and online and offline usage Chapter 8 Specifying dynamic job descriptor entries DJDEs The purpose and benefits of using dynamic job descriptor entries page and record oriented DJDEs parameters application of DJDEs DJDE operator information pages job parameter modification restrictions duplex printing with DJDEs online restrictions and optimizing DJDE processing Chapter 9 Using graphics PDL parameters for graphics restrictions and points to note regarding calling out graphics in your JSLs Appendix A
503. tion s Option s Definition s ANY Any operator initiated substitution is allowed This is the default The default is ANY NONE No operator initiated substitution is allowed The report is either printed without operator initiated substitution or aborted by the operator ABNORMAL ISUBSTITUTE NONE Refer to the Efficient coding for queue management section in the Highlight color printing chapter for information on the relationship between queue management and the ISUBSTITUTE parameter If the ISUBSTITUTE parameter specifies NONE the printer cycles down and displays messages on the system controller screen These messages indicate that a print quality adjustment may be performed before continuing to print the job or report with the requested primary or that the job or report is being aborted XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 5 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS OTEXT PAGES Syntax Options Example This parameter specifies that the system is to stop and display a WAIT message when the recovery marker page is printed This delay allows the operator to verify the output report in the near vicinity of the marker page The default is NOWAIT which means that the message is still displayed upon printing of the marker page but printing does not stop ABNORMAL OTEXT option s Table 6 6 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 6 parameter option
504. tion s Specifies one of the following options e NCCHECK Disables channel 9 and channel 12 detection The host is not notified by the LPS each time channel 9 or 12 is recognized when this option is selected Any skips to channel 9 or 12 are allowed as for any other channel e NDCHECK Disables reporting the detection of an unprintable character as defined by the UCSB The host computer system is not notified by the LPS of this condition even if the host sent an ALLOW DATA CHECK parameter The unprintable character is printed as a blank by the LPS whether or not this parameter is specified e NPRECOVER Enhances online data stream performance by minimizing the number of disk accesses on the LPS If you specify this option to recover from a system abort the user may have to retransmit the last several pages preceding the system abort The maximum performance occurs when all the parameters are selected but there is still significant improvement when you specify only NCCHECK and NDCHECK keyword keyword keyword allows you to specify more than one of the following options NCCHECK NDCHECK and NPRECOVER The maximum performance occurs when all the parameters are selected but there is still significant improvement when you specify only NCCHECK and NDCHECK When you specify both NCCHECK and NDCHECK data stream performance is significantly enhanced because input processing of a record and the subsequent data transfer
505. tions prices costs and so forth The variable data can be input from the magnetic tape system in the offline mode from a host through a channel interface or from a remote host over phone lines Form data Form data can include headings boxes lines and graphic image files such as signatures or logos Form data is entered in the form of compiled files comprised of JDL and FDL statements entered through the LPS editor in the offline mode or in the online mode through one of several host resident forms design packages Processing data Processing data is optional and it allows the operator to control the output of selected reports or selected copies of a multiple copy report for cover to cover print processing on any job For example you may wish to specify that an inventory report has a blue card stock cover 49 pages of the report and a blue card stock back cover You may also decide that four copies without cost information are needed for distribution to clients The three command sets described below provide output control JDE Gives the operator control over the mechanics of a particular print job JDE commands specify the feed and output trays simplex or duplex printing stapling collating and so forth 1 10 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE OVERVIEW Formatted data DJDE Enables you to modify the printing environment dynamically These commands are inserted into the input data stream to
506. to occur on both sides of a page duplex mode or a single side simplex mode It takes effect on the next page boundary DUPLEX option s Table 8 23 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 27 DUPLEX parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s YES Selects duplex printing NO Selects simplex printing Syntax This parameter specifies the end of DJDE information When an END parameter is encountered the system applies all DJDE information specified to the current printing environment at the next page or record boundary Note that after an END parameter a DJDE is compiled and record oriented DJDEs take effect immediately END XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 8 37 SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES FEED This parameter controls the stock on which the page is printed FEED stock reference references the stock assigned to a stock name by the STOCKSET command in effect at the time the page is printed Syntax FEED option s Options Table 8 24 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 28 FEED parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s stock reference Allows users to change stocks associated with a job without altering the stock references in the data application itself stock name Bypasses the reference feature but still requires that the stock name is specified as present
507. trans type Definition s This option has the following components The default is 0 NOTRAN offset Specifies the byte offset of the user portion of the record within each logical record to the printer carriage control PCC field 0 is the default trans type Options NOTRAN TRAN specify whether or not the printer carriage control byte is to undergo code translation TRAN indicates that the byte is to be translated into LPS standard EBCDIC before being applied using the translation defined in the CODE parameter of the VOLUME command NOTRAN the default prohibits translation XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 35 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS PCCTYPE This parameter specifies a carriage control set used in printing a job Syntax LINE PCCTYPE option s Options Table 6 30 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 6 30 PCCTYPE parameter option s and definition s Option s pcc name Definition s Options are e ANSI e B2500 e B2700 e B3500 e B3700 B4700 e B6700 e H6000 e H2000 BM4245 Creation of a user defined PCC table referenced by either an identifier id or the keyword USER is defined using the PCC command Refer to the PCC command section in this chapter For offline systems the default is ANSI For online systems the default is IBMS21 1 Note that there is no functional difference between IBM3211 and IBM4245 for PCC types For HOST
508. ts for example DE BEGIN 1 1 37 LENGTH 1320 ECORD LENGTH 132 AGE 1 30 CM 0 85 IN Keyword Variable name String constants are normally used to specify strings of characters or to reference identifier parameters The length of string constants is important String constants may be expressed as any of the following e Keyword Variable name e Hexadecimal Character e ASCII e EBCDIC Octal e H20r H6 Keywords are terms that direct the system to perform specific predetermined activities Keywords always consist of the same characters and do not vary For example BLOCK ZERO YES ABNORMAL ERROR CONTINUE OTEXT WAIT ACCT USER BOTH String constants may be used to specify names of forms files fonts departments and so on In creating your JSLs you assign names to the forms and files you want to specify Each name you assign identifies the unique object you wish the system to act upon for your applications For example OUTPUT FORM SMPLE BFORM SMPBK FEED BLUCVR MODIFY CME12 2 6 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE PDL Hexadecimal Character ASCII EBCDIC Normally used as string constants but they may also be used as value constants Each pair of hexadecimal characters results in one byte A hexadecimal constant must immediately be preceded by the ch
509. tual size is 8 5 by 11 inches and the squares at the top and bottom of the page are black 6 8 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS Sample marker page Figure 6 1 ICI I ICI ICI IACI I HidNVW AH3AOO38 39Vd AJAAYW AHJAOO3H 1jJ gt e xA A xA xJ A O 9 9 99 92 8 LAdNI MSaEWNN L180d3 N38WnN gor 86 NWF Se 3lvd ida 3009 HSVvao ASYL NIHSVHO 3 x EE Ax Dx WUdWNVW AHJAOO3H 39Vd AAMYVW AHJAOO3H AER ooo IOI GG ok ok oko ok oko oko oko oko AHCI I I I I EEEE 6 9 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS ACCT command The system maintains report processing information in two files which are accessible to the user Both files can be saved on tape or transmitted to the host through the host file transfer facility for further processing One method accumulates overall usage statistics on a department or JDL basis Refer to your Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS Operations Reference for further information on the accounting file printout initialization and structure In the second method the status file accumulates report information in the order that it is processed on an individual report basis Refer to the system level parameters JOBS and SFS and the Report status information section in your Xerox Do
510. tzl input Defines the input code output Defines the output code such as hexadecimal or decimal that corresponds to the input code XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 9 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS DEFAULT Point to note Syntax Options This parameter specifies a base code from which code assignment exceptions can be made The base code is specified by a code type the exceptions are specified using the ASSIGN parameter CODE DEFAULT option s Table 4 15 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 4 15 DEFAULT parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s code type This option can be one the following e EBCDIC e ASCII e BCD e e H2BCD e H6BCD e IBMBCD e value A value is a one byte hexadecimal octal or alpha constant If a value is specified all inputs are coded to the specified value The DEFAULT parameter must be coded prior to any ASSIGN parameter for the assignment exceptions to come into effect A DEFAULT parameter following any defined corresponding ASSIGN input or output parameter options causes this correspondence to be replaced by the DEFAULT parameter The default is EBCDIC Multiple user defined code translation tables are allowed but only one may be without a command identifier The corresponding CODE and LCODE parameters of the VOLUME command are used to reference each user crea
511. ubfield is from the first data record Syntax RSTACK HRPTNA option s Options 7 26 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 26 HRPTNA parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s offset length This option has the following components e offset Specified in bytes relative to zero from the start of the user s portion of the record to the subfield within the record length The number of bytes in the subfield 1 to 16 NONE Specifies no report name is selected The default is NONE 7 38 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE USING LOGICAL PROCESSING PRINT If DELIMITERZYES is coded the user may specify if the report delimiters are to be printed and if so the output destination of the printed delimiters Syntax RSTACK PRINT option s Options Table 7 27 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 27 PRINT parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s BIN Specifies that report delimiters are to be printed and the output delivered to the output stacker tray BOTH Specifies that report delimiters are to be printed and the output delivered to both the sample print tray and output stacker tray TRAY Specifies that report delimiters are to be printed and the output delivered to the sample print tray NONE Specifies that report delimiters are not to be printed For DELIMITER NO no page is
512. uires that each volume be processed independently Refer to the EOV parameter for a discussion of this processing In the event of a system rollover while processing a multivolume report input as a portion of the recovery process displays the following message before performing a forward tape space to the recovery point ENTER CON I WHEN VOLUME n IS MOUNTED As before volume 1 is the start of job and the volume specified by n is the volume containing data for the last page written to the print file before the system rollover XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 67 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS 4 68 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE Cluster features Defining clusters The DocuPrint 180 LPS provides several methods for feeding paper There are internal trays trays 1 3 and a bulk input enablement tray 7 Each of the input source trays can be addressed and used individually They can also be addressed in groups such as pairs or groups of three and used in groups as clusters Cluster processing overview Clusters are a systematic method provided for feeding specific paper stock to print jobs The following are major cluster features Oneor more feeder trays are identified as a single logical group called a cluster e Each cluster feeds one stock type to the LPS which automatically selects between the cluster trays as they become empty or as page size requir
513. umber of pages that can be imaged on the printer photoreceptor belt A pitch mode is a phrase that describes how many pitches can occur during one complete photoreceptor revolution For example while processing in 7 pitch mode seven images can be placed on the photoreceptor belt during one revolution of the belt As page size increases fewer images can be placed on the photoreceptor belt during one revolution Since the belt runs at a constant speed a decrease in the number of images that can be placed on the belt causes a corresponding drop in the pages per minute ppm throughput of the LPS Table 6 76 shows the various pitch modes their corresponding ppms and the default paper sizes for each pitch mode The paper size used in a job determines the highest pitch mode in which the system will run that job If you change paper sizes within a job and this change crosses a pitch boundary the system performs a xerographic quality adjustment which may significantly impact performance Specifying the pitch also called the throughput mode with the TMODE parameter of the OUTPUT command allows you to control the default pitch mode with the following benefits Matching system throughput with finishing device restrictions If the finishing device attached to the printer cannot accept output at rated speed the printer inserts gaps in the paper path to ensure that pages do not arrive at the device too rapidly For example if this is done
514. unt of 2 with CME2 specified As an alternative the application may be successfully printed with only one transmission by using copy sensitive forms Refer to the FORMS parameter of the OUTPUT command in the Specifying output parameters chapter Report separation is defined in terms of banner page detection or other user defined processing criteria Logically separated reports are physically offset from one another in the output bins The two logical processing commands which can be used to control online report separation are BANNER and RSTACK Refer to the chapter Using logical processing commands XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 4 57 SPECIFYING INPUT PARAMETERS Universal character set buffers UCSBs UCSB processing The IBM 3211 4245 universal character set buffer UCSB feature is supported by the LPS The UCSB is used by the LPS software as a basis for generation of folded and unfolded translate tables In a folded translate table uppercase characters are substituted for only those lowercase characters which are defined as unprintable in the UCSB Note that any lowercase characters defined as printable in the UCSB are still printed as lowercase if available in the font In an unfolded translate table blanks are substituted for characters defined as unprintable in the UCSB The translate table is rebuilt at the start of each report when a selected JDE JDL is processed when a new UCSB is transmitted from t
515. usly encountered the graphic is page interleaved block mode and the last previous text record should have caused a page transition If not the occurrence of this DJDE parameter forces an immediate page termination and the next text record encountered is processed relative to TOF on the next physical page For online processing an interleaved graphic which immediately follows a header banner page is treated as document interleaved The header banner page must be defined by a BANNER command Skip carriage control on a graphics sentinel DJDE is ignored for online processing GRAPHICS option s 8 44 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES Options Table 8 30 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 34 GRAPHICS parameter option s and definition s Option s name vpos UN CM IN DOTS XDOTS LHILnt d Definition s This option has the following components hpos UN CM IN DOTS XDOTS name Identifies the graphic If document interleaved it becomes the file name with which the IMG file is written If page interleaved it is used to associate the graphic with other DJDE references If no other parameters are specified the parentheses may be omitted None of the remaining parameters may be used if the graphic is document interleaved nor should it normally be used if the graphic is referenced by an IMAGE DJDE If page i
516. uting page for copy one is printed Following is an example of how to use the ROUTE command ROUTE RTEXT USER 1 1 33 64 RTEXT USER DF pA roS 04 The text USER 1 and USER 2 is to be printed in the center of a page preceding the respective copies of a two copy report The page is 132 columns by 66 lines XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 109 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS STOCKSET command ASSIGN The STOCKSET command defines a set of stocks used in a report This allows output to verify the exclusivity of all stocks in terms of trays currently assigned to them For your LPS a stock name is represented by a cluster For more information refer to the feeder tray chapter in your Xerox DocuPrint 180 LPS Operator Guide Stocksets are also the means of associating stock references with stock names An identifier of the type ac is specified to name the STOCKSET command for future reference by the STOCKS parameter of an OUTPUT command Table 6 81 summarizes the STOCKSET command parameters Table 6 82 Summary of STOCKSET command parameters Parameter ASSIGN Specifies Offline Online DJDE Lists stock names and association of stock Y Y N references with stock names INIFEED Specifies which stock to use in the absence of any Y Y N parameters of the FEED parameter SYSPAGE Specifies which stock to use for system generated Y Y N messages
517. valid host label pair is specified Each X indicates a valid label specification parameter for each type of host Host system JDLs on system software tape Job description library JDL source files supplied on operating system software OSS tape are summarized in table D 1 Table D 1 JDL source files on OSS tape JDL BUR JDEs provided for Burroughs medium system B2500 B2700 B3500 B3700 and B4700 Burroughs large systems labeled printer backup and standard ANSI labeled tapes B6700 and B7700 DUMP or DUMPA4 Tape dumps of various tape formats where JDE Characteristics l or H6BCD H6000 BCD 2 or EBCDIC EBCDIC 3 or ASCII ASCII 4 or H2BCD H2000 BCD 5 or IBMBCD IBM BCD 6 or UNIVAC UNIVAC Fieldata 7 or ICL ICL 2900 VME B H2000 Honeywell 2000 SPR labeled tapes Honeywell 2000 standard COBOL and SPR BCD formatted tapes H6000 Honeywell 6000 SSF BCD and ASCII formatted tapes IBMRCA IBM OS and DOS standard labeled tapes IBM ANSI labeled and OS Writer tapes US70 RCA labeled tapes ICL ICL 2900 labeled tapes NCR NCR labeled tapes OLDUMP Online dumps of host transmissions ONLINE Online with or without banner or trailer pages POWGRP IBM POWER VS POWER 4 0 POWER 4 1 or 4 2 DOS GRASP RSX RSX 11 FLX ASCII tapes UNIVAC Univac DF formated tapes XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE D 3 OFFLINE
518. vall bit opt NONE LINE MARGIN value value value type 1 POS LINE OVERPRINT over opt disp PRINT NODISP LINE PCC offset trans type 0 NOTRAN LINE PCCTYPE pcc name offline ANSI onlinezIBM321 1 LINE UCSB IGNORE PROCESS PROCESS LINE VFU vfu id NONE NONE MESSAGE MESSAGE ITEXT sc sc passnum NONE NONE MESSAGE OTEXT sc sc passnum WAIT NONE sc END WAIT NONE XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE B 3 PDL COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE Table B 2 PDL command quick reference continued Command OUTPUT Syntax OUTPUT BFORM form id form idf ini fl copies INK S inkref inkref OUTPUT COLLATE YES NO OUTPUT COPIES number OUTPUT COVER cover opt OUTPUT CYCLEFORMS form id form id form id INK S inkreff inkref L form iq INK S inkreff inkref NONE OUTPUT DENSITY FIX NOFIX DEFAULT OUTPUT DESTINATION BIN TRAY EXPORT OUTPUT DUPLEX YES NO OUTPUT FACEUP YES NO OUTPUT FEED stock reference stock name MAIN AUX OPR OUTPUT FORMAT pde id OUTPUT FORMS form id inkref inkref NONE form id init copies L INK S OUTPUT GRAPHICS NO YES MOVE BATCH YES NOSUB MOVE NOSUB OUTPUT IDFAULT inkref OUTPUT IDR idr name OUTPUT IMAGE vpos un cm in dots xdots hpos un cm in dots xdots
519. vered to both the bin and the sample tray When ACCT USER BOTH is specified the two accounting pages show different values for Output Processing Time The sheet sent to the stacker will show a time about one second longer than the sheet sent to the sample tray All other values should match Hexadecimal strings in a DEPT parameter are interpreted as standard EBCDIC and translated to Extended ASCII A completion code of 0 indicates that the report may have completed successfully except when a report integrity problem occurs within the last eight duplex pages ACCT DEPT BUDGET USER BIN TRAY After each report is printed an accounting page is delivered to the output bin and sample print tray Accounting information for each job run under this ACCT command is accumulated in the system accounting log under the department name BUDGET This assumes the name BUDGET has been entered into the list of accounting names through the system level ACCOUNT parameter XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 15 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS ac CME command The copy modification feature also referred to as spot carbon allows certain parts of report output to be replaced on selected copies with predefined static data or to specify font changes within the variable data CMEs define a rectangular space on the printed page within which printed data is replaced with a substitution string or in which a font change o
520. ween the operator and software tasks OCS receives input from the operator and displays messages to the operator OCS also interfaces between system tasks Font editor task The editor task creates and modifies disk files It uses a temporary work file and stores the contents of the work file permanently on disk when you save the file It sends files to print and directs CMD files to execute Input processing task The font editor task creates and modifies font files and allows you to tailor fonts within a font file to meet the needs of each print job The input processing task reads in job parameters JDL file creates a job control block reads data and handles job messages to the operator Then the input processing task does the following Unpacks and converts the data e Selects and deletes blocks or records Records any special processing instructions for page offsets DJDE records CMEs XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE OVERVIEW Report task RPT Dynamic job descriptor DJD task The report task works in connection with the input task It records the disk addresses of the font form and image files to be used for the job The result is a page buffer and a page log for each page to be printed The page buffer consists of the variable data and print instructions for the page The page log consists of tracking information used in processing the page Output processing task The dynamic
521. x CRITERIA LINENUM option s Options Table 7 5 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 7 5 LINENUM parameter option s and definition s Option s Definition s init An integer specifying the number on each page of the beginning line for which the CRITERIA command is evaluated count An integer specifying the consecutive number of lines starting with init for which the CRITERIA command is evaluated The default is all lines XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 7 5 USING LOGICAL PROCESSING Test expressions The activation of testing is done by coding the TEST parameter of any logical processing command described in this chapter Either one or two CRITERIA commands can be specified The following is a definition of the test expression for a logical processing command The test definition is referred to in the syntax of each of the logical processing commands that follow TEST cri id TEST cri id AND cri id2 TEST cri id j OR cri id The cri id and cri id are identifiers for either the change mode or constant mode CRITERIA commands discussed in this section If only cri id is present the test is satisfied if the criteria in cri id is satisfied If two CRITERIA commands are specified for a test the testing of two is linked by either an AND or an OR logical operator If AND is coded both CRITERIA commands must be true for the same data record in order for the
522. xample 2 The default order is 1TON and OUTPUT NTO1 YES is specified The system allows NTO1 printing if NTO1 threshold values n are within permitted limits Note that NTO1 DJDEs are never allowed with the 1TON system default Example 3 The default order is NTO1 and OUTPUT NTO1 NO is specified The job prints 1TON unless a JDE or JDL DJDE specifying NTO 1 is invoked in the first data record after banner pages Example 4 The default order is NTO1 OUTPUT NTO1 YES is specified and a JDE or JDL DJDE specifying NTO1zNO is invoked The DJDE is processed and the job prints 1TON if the System encounters it in the first data record after banner pages NTO1 OSTK When printing ordered stock in NTO1 sequence note the following The ordered stock must be reverse collated in the feeder so that the first sheet of the set is on the bottom the second sheet next and so on with the last sheet of the set on top to be fed first If the report is larger than the N to 1 threshold it will print in 1 to N order and the reverse collated stock is then inappropriate The system displays the following message and cycles down when this condition occurs OS6908 Page ordering has been reversed Check ordered stock NTO1 and segments When finishing segments are defined in an NTO1 report the entire report prints N to 1 The system does not process the segments separately If the entire report contains more pages than the N to 1 threshold allow
523. xt logical page boundary The parameters are the same as those for OUTPUT command Syntax NUMBER option s Options Table 8 39 lists the parameter option s and definition s Table 8 43 NUMBER parameter option s and definition s Option s pnum Inum findex NO Definition s This option has the following components pnum Page number specifies the starting number an integer for page numbering The beginning page number may be non positive The number is incremented at page transitions but not printed until it goes positive The maximum page number that will be printed is 2 147 483 647 Line number specifies an integer line number on which the page number is to be placed Column number specifies an integer ending column number for the page number sequence findex Font index the list of fonts specified in the FONTS parameter of the PDE command If not specified the first font in the list is used e NO Specifies that no page numbering is to be performed The default is NO Example NUMBER 1 1 40 1 END 8 52 XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE SPECIFYING DYNAMIC JOB DESCRIPTOR ENTRIES DJDES OTEXT Syntax Options This parameter specifies a text message to be output to the operator during job printing It takes effect on the next page boundary The parameters are the same as for the MESSAGE command defined in the
524. y copy of a particular page has the same form whether COLLATE YES or NO The pages in the following example are not logical pages but are one side of a logical sheet of paper Figure 6 7 Cycleforms with multiple copies OUTPUT COPIES 2 OUTPUT COPIES 2 COLLATE NO DUPLEX NO COLLATE YES CYCLEFORMS FORM 1 NONE DUPLEX YES CYCLEFORMS FORM 1 NONE XEROX DOCUPRINT 180 LPS PDL REFERENCE 6 97 PRINT FORMAT COMMANDS PDE command The PDE command specifies a page descriptor entry PDE which defines formatting information for each page of a report This formatting information includes page orientation landscape or portrait location of the beginning print line for each logical page and the fonts to be used Table 6 73 summarizes the PDE command parameters Table 6 74 Summary of PDE command parameters Parameter Specifies Offline Online DJDE BEGIN Location of starting print line on page Y Y Y FONTS Fonts for printing variable and CME data Y Y Y PMODE Landscape or portrait printing mode Y Y Y You must specify an identifier of type ac when defining the PDE and reference it with the FORMAT parameter of the OUTPUT command The PDE command must precede the OUTPUT command PDEs may be coded as part of the JDL or created as separate files so that they may be referenced by one or more JDLs or by DJDEs PDEs are called out on the FORMAT parameter of the OUTPUT command or a DJ

Xerox 721P85530 Printer User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents